Secret History of Dianetics 1950 - L. Ron Hubbard and Thorvald Solberg

Secret History of Dianetics 1950: L.
Ron Hubbard
and Thorvald Solberg
This article both marks a World First reveal of the man whom L. Ron Hubbard stated tried to
force him to work at what was essentially the Navy’s Project CHATTER and BLUEBIRD, and
discussion of the surrounds of this event plus the true sources of and reasons for the
retaliation/revenge campaign against Hubbard in 1950, one in particular of which has never
been revealed before. This is a very extensive article with deep and ground-breaking
research into Fredric Wertham and his history, the power of the JAMA editor position and
how that relates, some early pulp and fan’s of pulps events that have been overlooked,
Hubbard’s conspiracy theories, and much, much, more. There’s a little something for
everyone. Enjoy.
~ Published December 2, 2019 ~
Dedicated to my honey, for our 35th Wedding Anniversary.
.
Thorvald A. Solberg
Rear Admiral and Chief of Office of Naval Research (Projects BLUEBIRD/CHATTER)
he tried to force L. Ron Hubbard to work for him

.
Article “jump” points

● About Thorvald.
● Lead-up to the “event”.
● What did L. Ron Hubbard say happened?..
● Another World First reveal..
● It was only after Hubbard said “No”..
● Behind the scenes they sneaked..
● Special section on Oliver Field
■ Special mini-section World First reveal – Leo Bartemeier
○ The Two Minds/Dual Spirit
○ More AMA documents
○ Hubbard’s challenge to Psychiatry
○ Hubbard and those “enemies”
○ The “commies”
○ Special stand-alone timeline of Hubbard’s propaganda about who the
“enemy” is
○ Oliver Field’s Pet Peeve – Orgone Therapy
○ Suppressing Cancer cures
● Getting the media attack engine going now..
● First, let’s take up Renfield Dr. Wertham.
● That BIG FAT HOLE in Wertham’s history – World War II
● Those Evil Comics
● Both Firsts were Overholser mentees?
● Side trip into the world of Pulps and Fanzines
● Pulps and Fanzines Timeline
● Back to the major media attacks now
● Main MEDIA Timeline
● Master Timeline – (all inclusive)
● Chosen Black Propaganda and Black Public Relations Campaign
Preface
Footsteps in history
The body partner –
It is ONLY THAT BEING who could

change the physical body states
Hubbard had initial success with in
Dianetics.
Did L. Ron Hubbard ever recognise or even acknowledge the importance of that?
No.
He didn’t want to because this was an equal being. Not a demon. Not an “entity”. Not some
lesser thing.
And that is the exact point where pretty much all of Dianetics and Scientology went wrong.
(see The True Nature of Man)
This article is meant to be a historical repository of sorts, a walking through history in regards
Dianetics and L. Ron Hubbard. Perhaps more importantly, this article serves as a marker of
a beginning.
A beginning of what?
You will find out when it is time, but until then please enjoy this offering in the spirit it is given
– the spirit of Truth.
Introduction
One thing first.
L. Ron Hubbard had actually incorporated an organization in New Jersey in 1949. It was
called The Institute of Advanced Therapy. There is repeated erroneous information out there
about this, mostly generated by British intelligence shill Russell Miller. The correct
information was gathered in 2012, and the corporate record shows that it was incorporated
on August 1, 1949 with an address given of 42 Aberdeen Rd., Elizabeth, New Jersey.
Hubbard specifically mentions having formed this with Sara Northrup in a letter to the
Attorney General May 14, 1951 (FBI File, p. 96).
This shows his intention to form an organization around his engram research that far back.
That said –
How I discovered this man Solberg and his connection to L. Ron Hubbard is simple, and
yet? No one has ever identified this man before. It happened when I was going through
lectures by Hubbard preparing to assemble them into a video to go with various posts and
articles here at the blog – ones where we talk about what Hubbard says happened to him in
1950.
Hubbard had stated in a number of lectures that the Navy tried to force him to work for them
in 1950. Since we have used these particular lectures in a number of places, I was going
through those first. In that process, I suddenly knew who Hubbard was talking about, or
rather what position the person was. It’s not something Hubbard makes clear – at all. He
splits pieces of the story in like 4 or 5 lectures (probably intentional) and only ONE of them
had its own piece that wasn’t anywhere else.
Let me show you what I mean as to the pieces related to the identity only of who Hubbard
says approached him, one Monday in the spring of 1950.
These are pieces from 3 different lectures spanning a 4-year period – re-assembled.
● The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology 31 December 1960

● How We Have Addressed the Problem of the Mind 4 July 1957
● A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age 6 December 1956
a very high-ranking officer, a very very very high-ranking officer. You know brass,
BRASS, brass…scrambled eggs, you know, gilt on the cape edge, you know. … I
won’t announce this man’s rank or name, not in public. …Secretary of the Navy
says “OK” And that was an end to the beautiful friendship with the American
government….this officer from the Office of Naval Research…This admiral that
had come to see me… “You’re still in the service,” this admiral said. “I can put you
back on active duty at any time, so you’d better volunteer.”
Ok. So it’s an ADMIRAL from the Office of Naval Research.
When I heard that bolded part the day I was working on that, CLICK. I knew. This admiral
wasn’t just from there, he was the head of the Office of Naval Research – aka the ONR. So
off I went to find him.
The ONR was established in August of 1946 to “maintain the successful partnership of
government, academia, and industry that had produced a series of technological innovations
during the war.” The Chief of Naval Research is the senior military officer in charge of
scientific research in the United States Navy. The Chief of Naval Research has a rank of
Rear Admiral, and is in charge of the Office of Naval Research.
And there we have it.
As Hubbard put it:
this officer from the Office of Naval Research…This admiral that had come to see
me
Now all that was needed is to find out who that was during 1950.
That’s Rear Admiral Thorvald Arthur Solberg – the 3rd chief of the ONR since its
formation. He was the chief from 1949–1951.
From there?
Off we go into who and what this man was about and why would he want Hubbard in the
Office of Naval Research.
About Thorvald –
He’s the short guy 3rd

from left.
Strangely enough, this guy was from my neck of the woods, Sandpoint, Idaho, just a little
north of the Post Falls-Coeur D’Alene Idaho corridor.
Even weirder, it was a young (and new) Senator Borah that originally appointed him to the
United States Naval Academy in Annapolis, Maryland in 1912. I can tell you for a fact that if
Borah knew what this man eventually got up to? He’d be literally rolling over in his grave,
metaphorically speaking.
Why?
Well, we’ll get to that.
The other interesting thing that I found is that Thorvald also appears to have been a member
of the Explorer’s Club of New York City. I say appears because the birth and death dates are
a bit off. If that’s true that’s him listed as one of their deceased members? Then that would
be another way Hubbard and Thorvald Solberg would have known of each other.
As to DURING World War II, that’s another way Solberg and Hubbard could have met/butted
heads.
In around April of 1941, just after William Donovan came back from his ‘tour’ of British
intelligence with William Stephenson in the Mediterranean, Solberg was then sent to London
as a “naval observer”, a position that he held through February 1944. If you understand what
a “naval observer” was back then – it’s a Naval intelligence position. Just like Hubbard was.
We need to keep in mind here that all sections of the Office of the Naval Attache performed
intelligence functions in relation to special activities.
In the lead up to when Solberg goes to London, Captain Charles A. Lockwood, Jr., U.S.
Navy, assumed the duties or Naval Attache and Naval Attache for Air on 6 March 1941,
relieving Captain Kirk.
No, not that Captain Kirk, all you Trekkies out there. But yes, that really was this guy’s name.
Something called The Technical Section of the London Naval Attache office was organized
on 1 January 1941. Solberg had reported for duty on 25 June 1941 and was made the Head
of the Material Section of that section of the SPECNAVO (Special Naval Observer). His
section actually remained located at the Embassy, probably for security reasons.
Reference: [NAVY REVIEWED 13-Mar-2007: DECLASSIFIED IN FULL] OFFICE OF THE

UNITED STATES NAVAL ATTACHE AMERICAN EMBASSY LONDON ENGLAND
1939-1946)
Barely six months later? On 21 December 1941 he headed the entire Technical section
there.
Captain T.A. Solberg became head of Technical Section, Naval Attache Office, and
Maintenance officer for SPECNAVO. (NAVY REVIEWED 13-Mar-2007: DECLASSIFIED IN
FULL – Administrative History United States Naval Forces in Europe 1940-46
Solberg was relieved 27 February 1944 and returned to the United States in March 1944.
Whatever he was up to in 1942 got him promoted to the rank of Rear Admiral in 1945, with
his seniority backdated to December 1942. Now, I know for a fact he was not just working
for the “Bureau of Ships” when he returned to the U.S. in February 1944. In a way, although
real, his position there served as an intelligence cover.
His biggest priority?
He was working on the Manhattan

project with Leslie Groves.
.
You know, the creation of the nuclear bomb project.
Let’s look at some sources about that. Oh, and by the way, before I forget, there’s an
interesting article featuring him in the Scientific American back in 1949.
Let’s also keep in mind here that World War II didn’t officially end until September 2, 1945,
more than a year and a half away from when Solberg bounced back across the “pond” (as
the Atlantic ocean was called).
Solberg jumped right in to the Manhattan Project, joining the Tolman Committee in
November 1944. Tolman – as in Richard C. Tolman.
Early in the war he had distinguished himself as a liaison officer with British scientists and
engineers in London. After he returned to the Bureau of Ships in Washington as chief of the
research and standards branch in the shipbuilding division in February 1944, he learned
something of Abelson’s work on thermal diffusion at Philadelphia. Of all the officers in the
bureau at that time, Solberg probably was the only one who had been exposed to any
details about the Manhattan project. Mills and Solberg joined the Tolman committee
early in November 1944 for a series of interviews with scientists and engineers from all
parts of the Manhattan project. (Nuclear Navy 1946-1962 Richard G. Hewlett and Francis
Duncan; archived here.)
Front Row, left to right: Frank B. Jewett, Rear Adm. Julius A. Furer, James B. Conant, Richard C. Tolman. Back
Row, left to right: Karl T. Compton, Roger Adams, Conway P. Coe, Irvin Stewart.
Source: “Scientists Against Time,” by James Phinney Baxter, 3rd. Boston: Little, Brown & Co. 1946.
Solberg was appointed as a deputy member by Major General Leslie R. Groves himself.
Admiral Solberg had been a deputy member of the “Tolman Committee”, appointed by Major
General Leslie R. Groves in the fall of 1944, almost a year before the “Trinity Test” of the
atomic bomb at Alamogordo, New Mexico, to investigate further technical developments in
atomic energy for both civilian and military purposes. This committee, under the
chairmanship of Mr. R. C. Tolman, had studied many suggestions from personnel connected
with the atomic energy projects concerning “the use of nuclear energy for power and the use
of radioactive by-products for scientific, medical, and industrial purposes.” (An Administrative
History of the Bureau of Ships during World War II, Volume IV.)
LESLIE R. GROVES
The lead-up to the Tolman committee –
Scientists involved with the [Manhattan] project, nonetheless, advocated for more openness
and freedom of research, and project contractors pushed for the Army to declassify reports
relating to their wartime work. As a result, Groves in early November 1945 asked Richard C.
Tolman, a Caltech chemist and scientific adviser to Groves, to draft a declassification policy.
Tolman assembled a committee composed of Robert Bacher, Ernest O. Lawrence, J. Robert
Oppenheimer, Frank Spedding, Harold Urey, and John Ruhoff. (Smyth and Tolman
Committee Reports)
What was one of the major results? Something us researchers still have to deal with even
now. CLASSIFIED redacted documents.
In its report, the Tolman Committee concluded that “in the interest of national welfare it might
seem that nearly all information should be released at once.” But national welfare had to be
considered in light of national security. Still, “it is not the conviction of the [Tolman]
Committee that the concealment of scientific information can in any long term contribute to
the national security of the United States.” […] Thus, the Tolman Committee concluded that
secrecy could be justified for reasons of national security and then only if “there is a
likelihood of war within the next five or ten years.” Applying this general philosophy to the
question of secrecy in medical research, it recommended that “all reports on medical
research and all health studies” be immediately declassified except for those reports that
contained information independently classified in the interest of short-term national
security. While the Tolman Committee report generally advocated openness, it also set the
precedent for keeping declassification guides secret. (Smyth and Tolman Committee
Reports)
OK, so let me get this straight.
Documents from CHATTER, BLUEBIRD etc. etc are still redacted and it’s what…70 years
later? So, by these rules, apparently every decade for the last 70 years someone used the
excuse to not declassify them fully because WAR was expected within “the next five or ten
years”.
Ergo, apparently WAR is still expected (more like planned) even now?
I wonder what war that would be…
That’s all just fricking peachy, but let’s skip forward now to when World War II ends, because
then came the disaster of the Bikini Atoll bomb test.
Overall background –
…The division of special weapons was tied to General Groves and the Manhattan
District through Rear Admiral Solberg, who had served as the Bureau of Ships liaison
officer with the district during the war, and through Commodore William S. Parsons, who had
worked at Los Alamos. In the new division Solberg was in charge of the atomic power
section, and Parsons led the sections on guided missiles and atomic weapons. Both officers
had seen enough of the Manhattan project to sense some of the difficulties the Navy would
encounter in trying to transplant nuclear science and technology from the war-time
laboratories to the Navy. In late 1945 it was still common to regard atomic energy as
something which only physicists and chemists of Nobel prize stature could master. It did not
seem likely that a mere transfer of technical reports could give the Navy an effective atomic
energy laboratory without at least some of the people who had worked in the wartime
project. Solberg and Parsons could see a role for nuclear propulsion in the Navy eventually,
but they were convinced it would take time for the Navy to build proficiency in the new
technology. (Nuclear Navy 1946-1962 Richard G. Hewlett and Francis Duncan; archived
here.)
17, 22 and 24 January 1946 – Operation Crossroads.
The mission of Joint Task Force One was publicly announced by its Commander on 24
January, when Vice Admiral Blandy told the Senate Committee on Atomic Energy: “The
mission of Joint Task Force One is primarily to determine the effects of the atomic bomb
upon naval vessels in order to gain information of value to the national defense. The
ultimate results of the tests, so far as the Navy is concerned, will be their translations into
terms of United States sea power. Secondary purposes are to afford training for Army Air
Forces personnel in attack with the atomic bomb against ships and to determine the effect of
the atomic bomb upon military installations and equipment.” He also announced that the
atomic bomb tests had been assigned the code name Operation Crossroads.
Around the middle of January, the Commander, Joint Task Force One, requested that
Admiral Cochrane designate an officer with whom he could deal directly and personally on
all matters affecting the proposed tests, which by now were called Operation Crossroads.
As the Bureau of Ships had a paramount interest in Operation Crossroads, Admiral
Cochrane recognized the great responsibility which would devolve upon the officer selected
to represent the Bureau and to carry out its extensive and complex tasks. Accordingly, he
decided to appoint Rear Admiral T. A. Solberg, head of the Research Branch of the
Bureau of Ships, as the senior member of a large bureau group for Operation Crossroads.
On 17 January, Admiral Cochrane appointed Admiral Solberg to this position because it

was desirable to have someone of his rank and experience to coordinate all the varied and
extensive efforts of the Bureau of Ships and to insure the success of the bureau’s work in the
project.
He then instructed Admiral Solberg to prepare an administrative order setting up a special

section in the bureau to handle Crossroads work. This order, dated 22 January, set up
Code 180, the Crossroads Section; and on the same day Admiral Solberg was
designated as head of the section and Captain Kniskern as his senior assistant. A number
of officers took up duties in the section immediately, and others were added as rapidly as
they could be freed from current duties. (An Administrative History of the Bureau of Ships
during World War II, Volume IV.)
An interesting Atlas Obscura article from 2016 explains the events that came out of
Operation Crossroads –
The most destructive part of the blast was the cloud of radioactive water. U.S. Army
Photographic Signal Corps
On July 26, 1946, the U.S. military tried a new type of nuclear test. A joint Army/Navy task
force had suspended a nuclear device, oddly named Helen of Bikini, 90 feet below the
surface of the water, in the middle of Bikini Atoll, one of the isolated rings of coral and land
that make up the Marshall Islands. Arrayed around the 21-kiloton bomb were dozens of
target ships.
When Helen of Bikini exploded, it created a giant, underwater bubble of hot gas. In seconds,
the bubble hit the seafloor, where it blasted a crater 30 feet deep and at least 1,800 feet
wide. At the same time, the surface of lagoon erupted into a giant column of water, two
million tons of it, which shot more than 5,000 feet into the air, over an area a half-mile
wide. In the seconds after the blast hit the surface, a cloud of radioactive condensation
unfurled across the lagoon, hiding the column of water shooting upwards. At the top, a
mushroom cloud of gas bloomed against the sky.
That first underwater test, the Baker event, instilled new awe for the power of the bomb. The
Navy had believed that many of the target ships could survive the blast, be decontaminated,
and sail out of the lagoon. But within two weeks, Navy leaders had to admit that the ships
were so soaked in radiation that they couldn’t be saved, and the Marshall Islands became a
graveyard for irradiated vessels. After that, even in the years that the United States and the
Soviet Union regularly tested nuclear bombs, only a few were ever underwater.
The “Navy” actually being Thorvald Solberg.
This was NOT a feather in his cap. What the hell was that man thinking? People died from
radiation exposure. Some even years later, including him!
Look at what his son John Buren said:
John Buren grew up in Montgomery County, the son of a career Navy man. But any golden
childhood he might have had didn’t last long. His father, Rear Adm. Thorvald Arthur Solberg,
took part in the infamous Bikini Atoll nuclear bomb tests and was hospitalized with
radiation poisoning when John was 6.
And geez Louise. Thorvald and his “scientists” couldn’t even do a simple damn volume
displacement calculation to predict that this would happen? I do NOT believe that. I think he
wanted the ships/crew irradiated for whatever sick reason that was.
Is it any surprise this man was then made the head of the Office of Naval Research where all
sorts of human experimentation was going on under the guise of “innocent” research?
Yep. That’s what happened.
A little background first, using one of my research timelines.
1947 – the OSS became the CIA, and the newly named intelligence agency was authorized
for propaganda including psychological operations for which it immediately began recruiting
psychologists to spread the belief, promoted by the CIA within America’s borders, that
–…the Communist regimes in the Soviet Union and China had invented secret, sophisticated
mind control techniques, although the agency knew the contention was unfounded
(McCoy, 2006, p.34).
They used this false idea both to gain funding from Congress but also to generate approval
within the DOD for human experimentation projects along these very lines.
As discussed earlier, the Office of Naval Research (ONR) had been established in 1946 “to
plan, foster and encourage scientific research.” The Chief of Naval Research is the senior
military officer in charge of scientific research in the United States Navy. ONE of its divisions
was Psychological research.
All of ONR’s scientific work is performed under its Research Group made up of seven
operating units- the Earth, Material, Physical, Mathematical, Biological, Psychological and
Naval Sciences Divisions. (November 1956 Navy magazine p.16 of PDF)
Note: The above is followed by rather overly innocent descriptions of each one. Under
Biological and Psychological we’ve got just a world of secret projects going on there.
The one we’re mainly tracking though, it’s actual name is the “Psychological Sciences”
division.
1947 – The office of Naval Research had founded its “Psychological Sciences” research
program becoming the first extramural research program of the DOD – the Department of
Defense. “Within two years of its initiation of the ONR research program, the Navy doled out
117 contracts at 58 universities under its newly founded Psychological Sciences research
program (Page, 1954). In the first five years of the post-war period, the ONR provided
$2million per year, or $16 million in estimated equivalent [21 million in 2019 dollars],
establishing this office as the greatest single source of funding for psychological
research until the founding of the National Science Foundation (NSF) in 1950 (Darley,
1957).” (2008 paper by psychologist Frank Summers. (short title) Making Sense of the APA
– some of the text can be found here)
“During its tenth year, the Psychological Sciences Division of ONR was supporting 143
separate contracts for research in various fields of psychology.” Summary tables are
presented of financial support of contract research projects by the Psychological
Sciences Division, ONR from 1946 through 1956, areas of contract support by
Psychological Sciences Division 1946-1956 and the geographic distribution of 143 ONR
contracts active in the year 1956. Psychology’s place within ONR, the substantive work of
the branches of the Psychological Sciences Division (Physiological Psychology Branch,
Personnel and Training Branch, Group Psychology Branch, Engineering Psychology Branch,
and the Manpower Branch), ONR’s impact on psychology (in terms of publications,
conferences and symposia, and the training of graduate students), the evolution of
psychology in a government agency, and perspectives of the present and the future are
presented. (John G. Darley, “Psychology and the Office of Naval Research: A Decade of
Development,” American Psychologist 12 (June 1957):305.
That also included SECRET projects.
End notes (17 and 18) from this publication were very helpful in establishing WHEN and
HOW SECRET it was that the Office of Naval Research was funding such projects, and that
people were not permitted to say what they were really doing.
John G. Darley, “Psychology and the Office of Naval Research: A Decade of Development,”
American Psychologist 12 (June 1957):305.
Psychologists, such as McGill University’s Donald Hebb, whose work on sensory deprivation
for the Canadian Defense Research Board emerged directly out of war-inspired concerns
with “brainwashing” were not permitted to say as much in their published studies. See
Gilgen, American Psychology Since World War II, 122.
What kind of secret projects?
This kind –
1947 – Project CHATTER was instituted by the U.S. Navy in 1947. Dr. Charles Savage was
put in charge of that, experimenting on mental patients (and animals) through the auspices
of the Naval Medical Research Institute in Bethesda, Maryland. The experiments were
aimed at trying to obtain information from people against their will but without physical
duress – as in they didn’t want to ‘leave a mark’ or any evidence that they had done the
procedure. —John Marks details (archived here) – “a highly classified Navy program called
Project CHATTER… goal of weakening, if not eliminating, free will in others. The Navy
program,which had started in 1947, was aimed at developing a truth drug that would force
people to reveal their innermost secrets.”
That was all I had about CHATTER when I first made this timeline, but now I have found
some additional documentation. I’ll show you but first I’m going to jump ahead and pull out
something from the Oliver Field section which contains another World First reveal about a
Catholic jesuit-trained man and foot-soldier of Pope Pius XII – Leo Bartemeier. Leo would
become the head of the AMA’s created Council on Mental Health in June of 1951 and all files
concerning Hubbard and Scientology were kept and monitored from there. BUT – during
WWII Leo and 4 other men had been sent on a mission to Europe by Dr. Overholser. Two of
those men happened to be ON the committee to find the “truth drug” with Dr. Overholser, the
third and fourth being also connected in various ways, as well as Leo Bartemeier himself. All
five men would go on to help found the British-backed “Group for the Advancement of
Psychiatry” in 1946 – which featured a committee on “therapy” with the very same Captain
George Raines who Charles Savage was working on Chatter with.
I thought it was important that you have in mind now just what the hell Thorvald was trying to
recruit L. Ron Hubbard into. You’ll have an even better idea once you read the Special Oliver
Field section.
Ok, so on to other documentation about CHATTER that I found –
Project CHATTER – Biological and Psychological Weapons.
In the above, Black Vault’s founder had received an answer to an FOIA request about
Project CHATTER from J. L. Roper of the Judge Advocate General’s Corps by direction of
the Chief, Bureau of Medicine and Surgery.
The letter provides a link (which was malformed, too many “html” on it, which I corrected) to
a now defunct website. I corrected the link and resurrected it. This is what it was –
94TH CONGRESS, 2d Session SENATE REPORT No. 94-755; FOREIGN AND MILITARY
INTELLIGENCE BOOK I, FINAL REPORT OF THE SELECT COMMITTEE TO STUDY
GOVERNMENTAL OPERATIONS WITH RESPECT TO INTELLIGENCE ACTIVITIES, XVII.
TESTING AND USE OF CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL AGENTS BY THE INTELLIGENCE
COMMUNITY
This is what it said –
Project CHATTER was a Navy program that began in the fall of 1947. Responding to
reports of “amazing results” achieved by the Soviets in using “truth drugs,” the
program focused on the identification and testing of such drugs for use in interrogations and
in the recruitment of agents. The research included laboratory experiments on animals and
human subjects involving Anabasis aphylla [anabasine], scopolamine, and mescaline in
order to determine their speech-inducing qualities. Overseas experiments were
conducted as part of the project. The project expanded substantially during the Korean War,
and ended shortly after the war, in 1953.
So, it’s a continuation of the OSS truth drug committee which was also mixed up with the
Manhattan project.
The letter also specifically referenced the book Acid dreams: the CIA, LSD, and the sixties
rebellion. On p. 15 of the book PDF it says:
After the war, the CIA and the military picked up where the OSS had left off in the secret
search for a truth serum. The navy took the lead when it initiated Project CHATTER in 1947,
the same year the CIA was formed. Described as an “offensive” program, CHATTER was
supposed to devise means of obtaining information from people independent of their
volition but without physical duress. Toward this end Dr. Charles Savage conducted
experiments with mescaline (a semi-synthetic extract of the peyote cactus that produces
hallucinations similar to those caused by LSD) at the Naval Medical Research Institute in
Bethesda, Maryland. But these studies, which involved animal as well as human subjects,
did not yield an effective truth serum, and CHATTER was terminated in 1953.
The navy became interested in mescaline as an interrogation agent when American

investigators learned of mind control experiments carried out by Nazi doctors at the Dachau
concentration camp during World War II. After administering the hallucinogen to thirty
prisoners, the Nazis concluded that it was “impossible to impose one’s will on another
person as in hypnosis even when the strongest dose of mescaline had been given.” But the
drug still afforded certain advantages to SS interrogators, who were consistently able to
draw “even the most intimate secrets from the (subject] when questions were cleverly
put.” Not surprisingly, “sentiments of hatred and revenge were exposed in every case.”
Charles Savage papers show that he was a “Research Psychiatrist” at the Naval Medical
Research Institute and the National Naval Medical Center, both Bethesda, Maryland.
The letter to Black Vault’s founder also included a report titled: Lysergic Acid Diethyl Amide
(LSD-25): A Clinical-Psychological Study by LT Charles Savage, Medical Corps, Us, Navy
dated September 9, 1951. It starts on p. 5 of the PDF.
The abstract notes that LSD had “no specific therapeutic advantage in depression” but that
the “hallucinations may prove of value in psychotherapy.” and on p. 14 that “LSD affords
therapeutically valuable insights into unconscious processes by the medium of the
hallucinations it produces.” on p. 10 he notes that “Hallucinations may be induced by
suggestion.”
Now, you might think that because the Naval Medical Research Institute is separate from the
Office of Naval Research, that that means this didn’t involve them. It did, because
remember, this is PSYCHOLOGICAL science and it’s also BIOLOGICAL because of the
drug experimentation.
Two of their seven research divisions.
And may I remind you again, that The Chief of Naval Research is the senior military officer
in charge of scientific research in the United States Navy.
I’d like to point out here, something that L. Ron Hubbard said in one of his lectures that also
talks about his adventures with founding the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation aka the
HDRF. This is from my Research and Discovery Series Volume 9 (re-released later and
made part of #10) Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics and
Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952.
This engram was just a moment of unconsciousness. Its existence was learned from
soldiers who had been treated by psychiatrists. And these soldiers would often go into a
base hospital, would be given drugs, and under drugs would be returned back to the
moment of battle when they were injured. And the psychiatrist would go through it like this:
he would say, “Go to the moment when you’re just charging the enemy. Now what are you
thinking about? All right. Now — yeah, the bullet hit you there. Well, we’ll just skip this next
passage now, and we’ll pick it up when you wake up. Now, where are you waking up from
this wound?”
What happened when he did that? That, by the way, is just fabulous that they could keep
doing this with narcosynthesis and never see this point. Here he is going into battle, there
he goes unconscious and here he wakes up in the base hospital. And what the psychiatrist
had him run was that assuming that all of this is just a blank period and it has nothing in
it.
Now, the facts of the matter are that the mind never stops recording. And I was led into this
by finding out that a good percentage of the soldiers treated for battle neurosis by
narcosynthesis — a good percentage of those treated — went mad in a very short space
of time. They were made much worse; awful things happened to them after they had been
treated by narcosynthesis. Why? Was it the drug? I tested people. I shot them full of
sodium pentothal and I ran them through locks and nothing happened, which left this
only variable: the area of unconsciousness. So I began to explore areas of
unconsciousness. The reason they had never been recovered before is because late areas
of unconsciousness are tied down by earlier areas.
There’s also this showing that Hubbard was doing this between 1948-1950.
A Doctor’s Report On Dianetics by Joseph A. Winter, M.D. –
In July, 1949 I received a long letter from Mr. Campbell, in which he told me of some
investigations in which he thought I might be interested. He told me that
“Here’s the sort of thing that happens: An amputee veteran, with loss of one foot… is in a
hopeless despondency condition – just can’t adjust. The psychiatrist takes him back to
the war experience with sodium pentothal, back to the time the mortar shell got him. They
take him through, to the period when he passed out, and pick up again when he recovered
consciousness in the aid station. Doesn’t seem to clear him up. He still insists he’d be better
off dead. Hubbard took him through, through the shell burst, and through the period of
unconsciousness. That’s when it happened.”
Note: Dr. Winter is John Campbell’s brother-in-law. (H-65 Thru H-110 Part 2 p. 27; FDA inspector Howard Niss
notes re: interview with Isaac Asimov)
THIS was the kind of research Hubbard had done that interested the Office of Naval
Research enough to try and “kidnap” him, as Hubbard puts it.
Charles Savages 1951 report shows that this was of interest to Navy secret projects like
CHATTER, where he noted an interest in: valuable insights into unconscious processes.
This interest in the very area Hubbard was intensively researching also shows up in a later
CIA document of 20 April 1950, when the CIA was added to the “BLUEBIRD” network. In the
proposal on page 3 – “heightened activity and interest in subconscious isolation
techniques”.
I’d say Hubbard was rather perfectly on point with that.
Fast forward to 1948 –
1948 June 18 – the National Security Council directive NSC 10/1 went into effect. Besides
establishing a purely advisory panel called the “10/2 Panel,” this is when some of the dirtier
activities were specifically mandated to the CIA. Three other categories of covert activity
were added to the psychological warfare mission: political warfare, economic warfare and
preventive “direct action”.
It is very important that you understand that the last one, direct action, is when support for
FRONT organizations was mandated as well as support for guerillas and sabotage and even
ASSASSINATIONS.
So, things are getting aggressive as to PSYCHOLOGICAL warfare.
Lo and behold, exactly that same month –
June 1948 –
[…] in June, when the Navy appointed Solberg director of the Office of Naval Research.
The new assignment required Solberg to resign from the Military Liaison Committee and to
sever all his ties with the nuclear project. (Nuclear Navy 1946-1962 Richard G. Hewlett and
Francis Duncan; archived here.)
This Idaho newspaper article (p. 4 “Views of Others”) confirms that, but here’s a Navy mag
called All Hands (p. 42, August 1948) also confirming that Thorvald had became Chief of the
Office of Naval Research.
Rear Admiral Thorvald A. Solberg, USN, was detached as a member of Military Liaison
Committee to Atomic Energy Commission, to report as Chief of Naval Research, Navy
Department.
Ah…but there was something else of interest in that magazine.
This –
It says that:
“[…] a regular feature of the Naval Reserve program when the first scientific seminar for
Reserve officers was held by the Office of Naval Reserch in Washington, D.C. The initial
group of 100 specially qualified and selected officers was placed on active duty for a
two-week period.
Put another way, they were FORCED to attend.
But also check this out –
Many of the officers attending the conferences are working as civilians on Navy research
projects in university and college laboratories.”
These are both exactly what L. Ron Hubbard said he was pressed to do.
Some examples from his lectures (don’t worry, I will show you the full clips and titles in the
next section).
They told me that I would be returned to active service to do this research if I did not
return to do so as – in a civilian capacity at high pay…this officer from the Office of
Naval Research, came to see me right here in Washington and he wanted me to go on as
a civilian employee in order to use what I knew of the mind to make men more
suggestible….And I said, “No.”…he said to me, “Well, all you have to do is say ‘No’ and I will
call you back to active duty because you still are an officer of the United States
Navy.”…he said, “you’ve decided to come into the service as a civilian?“
Just exactly as is described in that Navy magazine. A sort of drafting of people by Thorvald
Solberg.
And what do we see Thorvald doing within the first six months that he is now CHIEF of the
ONR?
Solberg doubles the navy research budget – “in support of basic research in civilian
laboratories.”
Pittsburgh Press – 5 December 1948.

Yea well. We know what some of that “basic research” really also included now, don’t we.
Not a pretty subject.
Which brings me to my next point.
Also under Thorvald was the original Project BLUEBIRD which was actually an army/navy
concern before it became the CIA version.
Just after that December article that announced his doubling the budget, was when the
Office of Scientific Intelligence (OSI) formed in January of 1949 to coordinate scientific
research projects led in this field – meaning interrogation, drugs, hypnosis, etc.
Harris Marshall Chadwell’s super-secret Division 19, as part of the National Defense
Research Committee’s Office of Scientific Research and Development, was the precurser to
the creation of the OSI – which was still actually under the secretive Division 19 that Harris
Marshall Chadwell headed. Division 19 was part of the National Defense Research
Committee’s Office of Scientific Research and Development.
The original BLUEBIRD type efforts were under the OSI. That would include the ONR efforts
that began under Solberg in 1949 at Bethesda Naval hospital (where CHATTER also
happened to be).
Reads one April 1951 Bluebird Project report: ‘The Navy’s research efforts in regards to
Bluebird objectives had actually begun at Bethesda Naval Hospital. ….Hardenburg,
extensive experiments had been conducted using both drugs and medical aids
(polygraph machines, surgical means, hypnotism). (A Secret Order, H.p. Albarelli, Jr.,
pgs. 168-169)
Initially code-named Pelican, and then Operation Boomer (before being named Project
Bluebird), this particular program specifically aimed at ‘identifying and testing the
effectiveness of suspected Soviet Russians, or satellite countries, [sic] activity in the areas of
physical, psychological, mechanical and medical interrogation techniques.’ (A Terrible
Mistake, H.P. Albarelli, Jr., pg. 202)
These efforts were referred to euphemistically as a “method of unconventional warfare.”
For Thorvald to personally approach L.Ron Hubbard to basically draft him into doing
research under his “Psychological Sciences” division? Would mean that he felt the following
requirements were being met:
Psychological Sciences Division programs are carried out under contracts awarded in
response to unsolicited proposals.They are evaluated on the scientific merit of the
proposed research, the facilities available for its conduct, the competence of the
principal investigator,and relevance to Navy needs.[…]The programs seek to involve
innovative civilian scientists in areas of research relevant to Navy and Marine Corps
interests
p. 7 of this PDF: Psychological Sciences Division 1985 Programs
Hubbard’s research at that point was Dianetics. The discovery of the unconscious part of
traumatic events, the engram, and that how to recover that missing knowledge was to
“unburden” the engram in various ways that Hubbard had been experimenting with.
So, first of all, get what recover that missing knowledge from the unconscious would
mean, interest-wise to Thorvald both offensively and defensively.
PDF CIA document 148374 1 Countermeasures against use of Interrogation aids and
techniques 12 May 1949
what defensive measures can be taken to combat them. […] initiate a project to study the
current information and intelligence concerning these techniques and the possible defense
against them.
Hubbard was researching exactly that too, although he didn’t develop “creative processing”
until 1952, I believe.
…you can use Creative Processing. The process of using mock-ups will flip out a PDH
without ever touching it or addressing it. You can knock a PDH [pain-drug-hypnosis] to
pieces within 15 minutes of processing. And it takes longer than that to put one in. A PDH
could be so – a pain-drug-hypnosis – they knock the fellow out, they drug him – could be laid
in with great rapidity… And you could get ahold of him and flip the PDH out. (Formative
State of Scientology, Philadelphia Doctorate Course (PDC #20) lecture of 6 December 1952)
Second of all, as per the research requirements above, get that Hubbard’s research was
clearly considered to have merit, that Hubbard was innovative and a competent investigator,
and that his work had relevance to Navy needs – for Thorvald to have wanted him the way
he did.
It was only after Hubbard said “No”

that the wheels of discrediting and attacks against him and his research began to turn.
Slavemasters are a jealous, vindictive lot even amongst themselves, you know.
Note: For those new here, we use the term slavemasters to reflect the action of viewing
humanity as slaves who need a master, from the heinous actions of Pope Nicholas V, and
Queen Elizabeth I – aka the Vatican and the British nobility.
So, you see, when Hubbard wrote this in 1951:
Science of Survival by L. Ron Hubbard –
This form of hypnotism has been a carefully guarded secret of certain military and
intelligence organizations. It is a vicious war weapon and may be of more use in conquering
a society than the atom bomb. Pain-drug-hypnosis is a wicked extension of narco-synthesis,
the drug hypnosis used in America only during and since the last war. But
pain-drug-hypnosis, due mainly to the intent of the operator, is a much more vicious
procedure. The Foundation undertook some tests with regard to the effectiveness of
pain-drug-hypnosis and found it so appallingly destructive to the personality…
Pain-drug-hypnosis is so effectively destructive that the Foundation has ceased
experimentation along this line, having already learned enough and refusing to
endanger the sanity of individuals.
That was him hitting back at the Thorvald secret attack-pack for hitting at him for saying “No”
to them, even though he still did the research anyway
Childish, really. But not non-understandable.
The thing is, Hubbard actually DID do the research that everybody was interested in anyway.
You can actually see that teasing out of the above.
In fact, the goals of the HDRF from a bulletin are discussed, naming the big three areas of
research, Circuitry, Chemistry, Affinity – and the use of chemical aids for reducing
engrams and aiding normal erasure of pain. The Ultimate Goal being a “one-shot clear”.
(FDA declassified documents; CD #1, Folder 3 PDF p. 300)
The bulletin mentioned, was by Donald H Rogers, and can be found on p. 317 of that same
PDF.
.
Note: Rogers is listed later as an “electronics engineer” – BUT – he is also an FBI agent, as
was Charles Parker Morgan at one time.
MORGAN also advised that DONALD H. ROGERS, Director of Research and
Assistant Treasurer of the Foundation, is also a former Special Agent of this
Bureau.
– FBI files – L. Ron Hubbard
Really look at the description under 3-Chemical aids.
Means for gaining access to psychotics and exceptional cases, for restimulating and
reducing engrams, for aiding the normal erasure of pain, “unconsciousness” and grief, for
assisting the analytical functions of analyzing and refiling data. (Ultimate goal is a one-shot
clear.)
Do you see how Hubbard’s research using drugs was exactly along the lines of the secret
projects Thorvald and the ONR, the Army and now the CIA were all doing?
Not to mention he was looking for a way to “clear” man by just giving him a drug. That’s
really right up their alley.
L. Ron Hubbard had always been a Lone Wolf type agent, plus he hated the military. I’m
sure he really enjoyed saying “No” and sticking it to Thorvald the way that he did, lots of
pent-up anger over what he felt were idiot “brass” he had to deal with during WWII.
But –
He didn’t hate the research ideas themselves and he didn’t hate the CIA. Not at all. In fact,
he went ahead and worked just fine with them because they allowed him to be an
off-the-books asset with no visible controls on him.
Lead-up to the “event”
1950 February – the secret Division 19 head Harris Chadwell, fired Machle as Assistant
Director of the CIA’s OSI (Office of Scientific Intelligence). Chadwell replaced him with
Sheffield Edwards (Army Colonel) and put himself in the “Assistant Director OSI” position
where he became involved in the whole UFO debacle – among other things. It was Chadwell
who would then oversee the start up Project BLUEBIRD in the CIA now, together with
Colonel James H. Drum, deputy chief of the Technical Services Staff, and Dr. Sidney
Gottlieb of later MKULTRA infamy. (A report on the OSI, 1972).
Meanwhile – the CIA instituted a more voluntary version of what Thorvald did.
Much more up Hubbard’s ally, I might add.
A special unit was formed wherein Naval Reserve personnel worked for the CIA in a
civilian capacity. On 27 February 1950 CIA Director Hillenkoetter attended the formal
activation of the CIA Naval Reserve Unit.( Hillenkoetter Diary/Log p. 95)
You can tell that there was a power struggle going on between the Office of Scientific
Intelligence (OSI) – really the military factions under it – and the CIA’s Office of Security.
Basically over who gets the financing, the glory, who’s top dog kind of thing.
THAT SAME DAY…
Page 11 of Project Bluebird interrogation teams shows they were having trouble finding what
Chadwell wanted.
It’s noted that they are having trouble finding a psychiatrist on active duty, and the reasons
why. Note Reason 3: “His ethics might be such that he might not care to cooperate in certain
more revolutionary phases of our project.” Quite the euphemistic language there. Notes that
they found a Navy (crossed out) employee noted as “third agency” which is probably Charles
Savage at the Naval Medical Research Institute. (see CHATTER, Savage was there through
1953) This is the document that ends with an odd characterization about “heightened
activity and interest in subconscious isolation techniques” which sounds right up L.
Ron Hubbard’s ally of research into engrams.
Please note: it is on p. 21 where we see them call what they are doing in BLUEBIRD a
“method of unconventional warfare.”
You can now see proof of Chadwell and his new choice Sheffield Edwards to head the OSI
working with the CIA on their particular form of BLUEBIRD in an April 5 1950 document (p. 1
Project Bluebird interrogation teams). You can you see Edwards name visible in full on p. 8.
This newer “BLUEBIRD” established a behavioral control program within the CIA in close
collaboration with the Office of Scientific Intelligence. Edwards immediately proposed to form
interrogation teams under the command of the Office of Security.
The proposal is on p. 2:
The purpose of this project is to provide for the immediate establishment of interrogation
teams…will utilize the polygraph, drugs, and hypnotism to attain the greatest results in
interrogation techniques. […] A team is to be composed of three persons consisting of a
doctor — psychiatrist, a polygraph — hypnotist, and a technician. […]It is further
proposed that the doctors- psychiatrists be set up in an office in Washington in which
serve as a cover for training, experimentation, and indoctrination purposes in the use of
drugs and hypnotism.
The document on p.1 shows that this was approved by Hillenkoetter on 20 April 1950.
But note this on p. 20:
On 9 May a meeting was held in the office of Dr. Chadwell, OSI…”
9 May.
The very day that Hubbard published Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health.
What was the point of that meeting?
They wanted to supplement BLUEBIRD with getting information about drugs and police
interrogation methods, Nuremburg Trials papers request for info on drugs, narcoanalysis,
and special interrogation techniques, and information from other agencies about various
things, including narcoanalysis and hypnotism.
Right up Hubbard’s ally, and with no strings attached!
BLUEBIRD was approved, the interrogation team was put together and voila!
1950 July –Three months after the Director approved BLUEBIRD, the first team traveled to
Japan to try out behavioral techniques on human subjects –probably suspected double
agents. The three men arrived in Tokyo in July 1950, about a month after the start of the
Korean War. No one needed to impress upon them the importance of their mission. The
Security Office ordered them to conceal their true purpose from even the U.S. military
authorities with whom they worked in Japan, using the cover that they would be performing
‘intensive polygraph’ work. In stifling, debilitating heat and humidity, they tried out
combinations of the depressant sodium amytal with the stimulant benzedrine on each of four
subjects, the last two of whom also received a second stimulant, picrotoxin. They also tried
to induce amnesia. The team considered the tests successful, but the CIA documents
available on the trip give only the sketchiest outline of what happened. Then around October
1950, the BLUEBIRD team used ‘advanced’ techniques on 25 subjects, apparently North
Korean prisoners of war. (Manchurian Candidate, Marks, pg. 25) Note: Possibly this may
have been one Samuel Thompson was sent on.
And just as Thorvald was losing his primacy over these types of secret experiments to the
CIA because much more senior man in the Department of Defense Chadwell had said let it
be so?
THAT is when this personal “kidnap” of L. Ron Hubbard in an attempt to bring him into his
organization happened.
What did L. Ron Hubbard say

happened?
Now I realize that there are people who don’t believe a word Hubbard said, but that kind of
black-and-white thinking is a mistake. The man did lie and dissemble a lot. A really, really lot.
But that doesn’t mean he NEVER told the truth about anything.
In this case, it’s kind of a mix.
He’s telling the truth about what happened but he is leaving out what else happened plus
funging up dates. He’s also giving a false impression that he would never engage in such
manipulative methods regarding the minds of men. He did do that within the
Dianetics/Scientology millieu he created, he also allowed/encouraged others to as well.
That said, before we look at these lectures where he talks about what happened with the
Navy in 1950, just a few other facts to keep in mind here first –
Prior to April 1950 – Hubbard had published an article about Dianetics called Terra
Incognita:The Mind in The Explorers Journal – their first issue of 1950.
Then on 27 April 1950 – The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation was incorporated.
THE HUBBARD DIANETIC RESEARCH FOUNDATION, INC. nonprofit
Company Number 0900027169
Incorporation Date 27 April 1950
Company Type Domestic Non-Profit Corporation
Jurisdiction New Jersey (US)
And….Hubbard’s Navy documents show that Hubbard submitted his resignation on 27 May
1950.
It took the Navy 5 months to officially file the documents of acceptance of that resignation,
document dated 30 October 1950.
And …
One source out there alleges that it was June 1950 that Hubbard Dianetic Research
Foundation opened. Doesn’t sound right to me, but this is hard fact, former OSS Charles
Parker Morgan was Secretary.
Last but not least – The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation, and of course Hubbard
himself, actually conducted CIA mind control research into Pain-Drug-Hypnosis. (See
Scientology Roots Chapter 9-1)
Although I could just give you the conclusion of how I determined when this all happened, I
thought it might be helpful for others to show you how I did it.
First I dug up a calendar from 1950 –
Using that, so far I had a mini-timeline of:
27 April 1950 Thursday – The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation was incorporated
9 May Tuesday — Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health Published
27 May 1950 Saturday — Hubbard’s Navy documents resignation date. That being a rather
unlikely day of the week for all this business to occur on regular channels, so clearly
something else is causing this date to be assigned. Maybe a followup of the events between
the 22nd and the 25th.
June 1950 – Supposedly this is when the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation opened.
Charles Parker Morgan OSS (predecessor of the CIA) is secretary and legal counsel.
30 October 1950 Monday — Hubbard’s Navy documents acceptance of resignation date.
Now we go to the lectures themselves.
Here are the lectures where L. Ron Hubbard talks about what happened with the Navy in
1950 plus the one talking about the remedy. This is a video with all of the main clips in it
(excepting some parts I added to the transcripts below but didn’t add to the clips).
The remedy one is the earliest one of my “set” – which, by the way, is the same lecture that I
was the first to find and document on 13 October 2000 (Friday the 13th) that it had been
edited to remove several key sections by David Miscavige and Dan Koon. The section
literally right after where his clip ends, in fact.
Formative State of Scientology Philadelphia Doctorate Course (PDC #20) lecture of 6

December 1952
…you can use Creative Processing. The process of using mock-ups will flip out a PDH
without ever touching it or addressing it. Isn’t that fascinaing. You can knock a PDH to pieces
within 15 minutes of processing. And it takes longer than that to put one in.
Another condition could exist, a PDH could be so – a pain-drug- hypnosis – they knock the
fellow out, they drug him – could be laid in with great rapidity. But it could be laid in so
strongly that the individual is rendered dead. Or non compos mentis from there on and thus
out of communication. That individual is no menace to anybody. He’s either complete
ravingly gone, out of communication, and look… or he’s dead, and a bullet does the same
thing. So it’s not a good weapon, really. Because if he’s able… if he suddenly starts acting
peculiarly or doing things which completely alter any pattern he has had in the past, or if he
is doing things which look like they are vaguely bad, then how easy it is. You can get ahold
of him. You’ll find almost any preclear can be given creative processing. And you could get
ahold at him and flip the PDH out. That’s interesting, isn’t it? In other words, you can take
‘em out as fast as they lay ‘em down. Therefore we really do have the remedy…
Here is our first one talking about the Navy drafting attempt but also notice what else I found.
Someone tried to draft Hubbard into the NUCLEAR program earlier. which is interesting for a
number of reasons but not included in the below is his humorous discussion of who they
were calling “nuclear physicists” at this time. I believe this is where he got the idea to refer to
himself that way, not because he had a degree in it or anything but because of this
recruitment attempt. But, knowing as he did what THEY called him, it becomes not exactly a
lie as most critics saw it, and not exactly a truth, as most scientologists saw it.
Very interesting.
Anyway, Hubbard starts out talking about that particular adventure and then that led right
into the later Navy one.
A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956
All of a sudden they see an electronics engineer and they say, “You know, you’re supposed
to be over there in that uh… behind that barbed wire over there.” Well, the electronic
engineers of the country have not yet noticed that they’re inside barbed wire — they are —
that they go backwards and forwards past armed guards to get to and from work.
I wouldn’t work under these conditions. A fellow offered me a job one time. He said, “All you
have to do is walk in here, leave your gun at the gate, walk in here and you’re supposed to
walk around for eight hours a day, and do so-and-so and so-and-so.”
And I said, “In where?” He said, “In that enclosure there.” And I said, “What’s the difference
between that and a prison camp?” “Oh,” he says, “you’re nonsense. You get paid in there.”
That was the first and only time the government offered me a post as a nuclear
physicist. That was the end of that. The government offered me that post. They tried to
kidnap me on another one, by the way.
They said, “You know you’re still in the reserves and we can call you back to active duty
on research in the field of the mind.” “You’re still in the service,” this admiral said. “Ha-ha.
You change your mind any time, you know, about coming in. You can volunteer. Of course, I
can put you back on active duty at any time, so you’d better volunteer. You’d probably
feel better in there making seventy-five hundred dollars a year” — rather than whatever
officers get these days — twenty-five cents an hour or something.
And I said, “Well,” I said, “if you put it that way,” I said, “I’m overwhelmed.” I said, “There’s
nothing much I can do.”
Here is actually a proposition of a person being seized because of his own knowledge, just
the way you might seize a fellow who carved ivory well, back in the Dark Ages. He carved
ivory well so he was seized. He was taken away and put into a position that he couldn’t
object to and he was made to work at a trade that he was good at but didn’t particularly
like. What’s the difference? What’s the difference? Not very much. Except maybe I walk with
faster feet sometimes.
Of course, it was impossible at that time to resign from the service. A reserve officer had to
continue as a reserve officer from there on out. But I was down to the Potomac River Naval
Command, and I was through Bureau of Naval Personnel. It was Monday when he came
to see me, and he was going to come back and see me Thursday. And when he came
back and saw me Thursday he said, “Well,” he said, “you’ve decided to come into the
service as a civilian?” And I said, “No, I haven’t. I decided not to.” And he said, “Well,” he
said, “I’ll have to call you back to active duty.” And I says, “Try and do it,” and handed him my
resignation, accepted. He was crushed.
But do you know that immediately predated, by one week, the opening of the Hubbard
Dianetic Research Foundation of Elizabeth, New Jersey. There would have been no
Dianetics, there would have been no Scientology, and there would have been no
publications on the subject anywhere had this succeeded. Interesting, isn’t it?
They didn’t want to prevent Dianetics. They didn’t want to prevent Scientology, the
publications of books. All they wanted to do was get a piece of research done which
they in their tyrannical fashion had decided was far more important than any other research
that could be done. They wanted ME to work on a project to make men more
suggestible. Can you imagine me working on such a project? You can imagine me working
on admirals to make them more suggestible, but not on people.
OK, let’s factor that Monday and Thursday business into our timeline – with two possible
Monday and Thursday event dates added.
The first set of added dates factored that plus I used the ideas of “There would have been
no Dianetics, there would have been no Scientology, and there would have been no
publications on the subject anywhere” tending to indicate this was before Dianetics was
published; and “predated, by one week, the opening of” with the opening being defined as
the incorporation date.
The second set of added dates factoring that uses just the “predated, by one week, the
opening of” with the opening being defined as the announce to the public, hold an open
house date.
This is what we get now –
*17 April 1950 Monday — Thorvald meeting, rushing around to get resignation approved.
*20 April 1950 Thursday — 1 week back from incorporation of the HDRF. Thorvald meeting,
Hubbard tells him “No” and that he can’t draft him either.
*22 May 1950 Monday — Thorvald meeting, rushing around to get resignation approved.
*25 May 1950 Thursday — Thorvald meeting, Hubbard tells him “No” and that he can’t draft
him either.
the 22nd and the 25th. Using the “predated, by one week, the opening of” part – that gives
us two possible “opening” dates in June.
June 1 or 3 1950 Thursday or Saturday – Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation supposed

opening date. Charles Parker Morgan OSS (predecessor of the CIA) is secretary and legal
counsel.
Interesting.
Next lecture – NOW he gets more specific on when. He starts out talking about the military,
secrets, and thought police towers which I have included in the transcript but not in the clip
itself. Interesting that he knows about electronic mind control experiments this early.
Note: there’s also some additional transcript at the end that I included that isn’t in the clip
itself.
How We Have Addressed the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957 –
No, truly enough, in a world where science and scientific secrets are the stock in trade of the
militarist, one has to be alert to the fact that developed scientific information such as that in
Scientology continue to be free, continue to be available. It’s too large a temptation for
somebody to say, “Oh. hey! we can button this up. We’ve got it made here. We’ve got it
absolutely made. All we’ve got to do is take all this technology, brainwash everybody and put
up thought police towers in all the towns and it’s all set, we’ve got a government.”
No, they haven’t got a government as long as there are textbooks out there showing how
fast you can undo this same thing called brainwashing and thought police. It’s discouraging,
you know, to brainwash somebody and then have his friend walk into the nearest bookstore
and buy a manual of how to unbrainwash. It would seem sort of pointless, wouldn’t it?
So, as security measures increase and as security tightens across the world on scientific
matters, it is of great interest to us that the information we have and which has been
developed with your help, your finance, your. interest, across a period of seven years, is
today free. That hasn’t been just a little bit of doing.
[…] You’re probably not aware of the fact that BEFORE the incorporation papers of the
HDRF were filed in 1950, the Office of Naval Intelligence right here in Washington, DC,
threatened to call me to active duty to use what I knew about the mind. And after that I
made sure that the channels were so wide that they were very uninviting.
Nobody wants something that isn’t a secret. There is nothing quite as unwanted by a
government as yesterday’s secret known today. A very amusing story connected with that
attempt to seize Dianetics, a very amusing story from my standpoint anyway. Months and
months and months before I had decided that the Navy and I had come to a crossroads and
I had requested permission from the secretary of the Navy to resign my commission – my
commission had been hanging fire since the end of World War II – and he had granted
permission. Now, that’s the lengthiest amount of time consumed, trying to get a letter into a
government office and get an answer to it. See, that’s pretty long.
OK. We have to do an interjection here. What is Hubbard talking about there?
This sequence of events in 1947-48.
14 November 1947 — Hubbard submitted a letter of resignation from the Naval Reserve
18 December 1947 — Secretary of Navy directs Chief of Naval Personnel to respond and
hold Hubbard’s request in abeyance until he has time to think about it. Hubbard uses this to
get his resignation pushed through fast in April 1950: “So I dived into my briefcase and
pulled forth the secretary’s permission.” (How We Have Addressed the Problem of the Mind
an LRH lecture 4 July 1957)
19 February 1948 — Hubbard withdraws his resignation but I have found no indication in
his file that it was ever received or acknowledged either by Secretary of the Navy or the
via of the Chief of Naval Personnel. If there was a letter granting him permission per se, as
Hubbard says in this lecture, it is not in his file.
But…
Pay particular attention to the Secretary Navy/Chief of Naval Personnel response point 1:
showing how Hubbard was really viewed by the Secretary of the Navy: “Your resignation
from the Naval Reserve, in which you have served so honorably, has been received with
regret.”
Critics of Hubbard ought to take note of that one, because that’s the truth about
Hubbard’s war history. Veering away from that truth just to suit other valid criticisms is
disingenuous and should not be tolerated or supported.
Now pay particular attention to these: point 3: “In the planned peacetime Naval Reserve you
will not be called to active duty except at your own request or except in time of national
emergency or war…” and 4: “…will not be obligated for training, either in weekly
classes…” and 5 reminds Hubbard that if he does this it would “deprive you from any further
benefits under the jurisdiction of the Navy Department.” Point 6: “The Navy does not wish
to keep you in the Naval Reserve if you sincerely desire to resign.” and the final point
says Hubbard’s request will be held in abeyance until an answer back from Hubbard is
received.
Alright, now let’s continue with this lecture –

And I already had that. So this fellow, this officer from the Office of Naval Research,
came to see me right here in Washington and he wanted me to go on as a civilian
employee in order to use what I knew of the mind to make men more suggestible.
You see Thorvald’s policy to use Naval Reserve officers as “civil” employees showing clearly
there.
And I smiled a feline smile. And I said, “No.”
And he smiled like something out of Faust [meaning like The Devil] and he said to me,
“Well, all you have to do is say ‘No’ and I will call you back to active duty because you still
are an officer of the United States Navy.” And with that purr he exited.
That’s a direct violation of the peacetime Naval Reserve policy pointed out to Hubbard by the
Navy in 1947.
But that description…two men of the dark standing off against each other –
Is absolutely perfect and you can totally see that happening between these two.
So I dived into my briefcase and pulled forth the secretary’s permission. I dashed down here
and found out there was actually a naval command in this area – it’s called the Potomac
River Naval Command, I don’t know what they run. Once I think they tried to run the
battleship Missouri. But there it sat down there, and it had an admiral in charge of it and
everything, and I found out that my papers were resident in two places. People thought I
belonged in Washington, in Washington, and people in New York thought I belonged in New
York, and I had two sets of papers. This admiral that had come to see me thought I was
totally out of New York.
So I went down here to the Washington Navy Yard, the Potomac River Naval Command, and
I got my resignation accepted. And Thursday the admiral came back to see me, and he
says, “Well?” And I said, “Well?” Fastest resignation on record. There wasn’t anything he
could do about it then. And I went back up to Elizabeth, New Jersey and the HDRF, the
first research foundation, was formed, and we went happily on our way just throwing it all
over the place.
The Bureau of Naval Personnel still has a form letter. If you want to know what it says, write
them sometime and say, “Why don’t you use Dianetics or Scientology? What do you know
about these subjects?” They send you back a form letter, and it’s very polite, and it’s
personally written. It’s always the same letter: “We are keeping full records on this and are
learning more and more about it. We do not know whether or not it’s applicable to our work
at this time. Sincerely yours, So-and-So, Chief of Naval Personnel.” But they’ve got it on file!
And meanwhile we go on and use it.
Let’s see what this does to our timeline now because of these two statements “I went back
up to Elizabeth, New Jersey and the HDRF, the first research foundation, was formed”
and “BEFORE the incorporation papers of the HDRF were filed in 1950″ really pin this
down in time.
That means the first two dates are clearly what Hubbard meant happened, so we’ll make
them solid now. Problem is why the actual resignation ends up dated May 27, but that could
just be some sort of administrative snafu? Maybe the whole thing was handled by “telex” or
some such in April and not followed up by paper until May? We’ll leave the other dates in
and see where we are after the next lecture.
17 April 1950 Monday — Thorvald meeting, rushing around to get resignation approved.
20 April 1950 Thursday — 1 week back from incorporation of the HDRF. Thorvald meeting,
Hubbard tells him “No” and that he can’t draft him either because he was officially resigned.
him either.
the 22nd and the 25th. Using the “predated, by one week, the opening of” part – that gives
us two possible “opening” dates in June.

counsel.
Let’s fill in some other items from Hubbard’s Navy record as evidence to help narrow this
even more.
27 February 1950 — A Physical Evaluation Board met and ruled Hubbard fit for active duty –
“(1) That Lieutenant LaFayette R. Hubbard, U.S. Naval Reserve, be found fit to perform the
duties of his rank as of 16 February 1946, the date of his release from active duty.” 1950 was
a big year for all this because of the Career Compensation Act of 1949. (see Surgeon
General Report) so what this is mostly really about is MONEY. But still, this is odd timing.
Then the whole thing sits until a very key time in our timeline here.
26 April 1950 — After sitting for two months, the “Members of the Physical Review Council”
send a notification to the Secretary of the Navy that it approved what the Physical Evaluation
Board said but it added something very important. It added that upon the Secretary’s
approval Hubbard will be “returned to duty”. Note very carefully the next document
because of what the Judge Advocate General E.E. Woods says he is approving and ONLY
what he is approving.
2 and 8 May 1950 — Judge Advocate General document. Note the date in the upper left
corner 5/2/50 – May 2 1950, and the day he stamped his response May 8 1950. “The
recommended finding of the board in this case is as follows: “(1) That Lieutenant LaFayette
R. Hubbard, U.S. Naval Reserve, be found fit to perform the duties of his rank as of 16
February 1946, the date of his release from active duty.”. He approved ONLY that Hubbard
was fit since 1946. He DID NOT approve the 26 April recommendation that Hubbard be also
returned to duty.
12 May 1950 – The Secretary of Navy approved ONLY that Hubbard was fit since 1946. He
DID NOT approve the 26 April recommendation that Hubbard be also returned to duty.
Again, that is interesting because it seems to show that there is knowledge that Hubbard had
already resigned, and that there was simply a lag in the paperwork.
.
Let’s see what those do to our timeline plus we’re going to add the FBI files etc. on the
incorporation date for the The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation or HDRF.
17 April 1950 Monday — Thorvald meeting, rushing around to get resignation approved.
17 to 20 April – Somewhere in here might be when the “Members of the Physical Review
Council” actually met?
20 April 1950 Thursday — 1 week back from incorporation of the HDRF. Thorvald meeting,
Hubbard tells him “No” and that he can’t draft him either because he was officially resigned.
Next entry might be retaliation because Hubbard’s official paperwork isn’t in yet?
26 April 1950 — This document has a stamped date, but that may not necessarily when the
“Members of the Physical Review Council” met before this notification was sent. It was sent
to the Secretary of the Navy that it approved what the Physical Evaluation Board said but it
added something very important. It added that upon the Secretary’s approval Hubbard will
be “returned to duty”.
27 April 1950 Thursday – The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation was incorporated.
Also validated by this FBI document as well as this one – there’s also the letter to the NY
BBB in July 1950 directly from the HDRF.
returned to duty.This seems to indicate that Hubbard’s resignatio is already known about.
him either.
the 22nd and the 25th or the alternate April events. Using the “predated, by one week, the
opening of” part – that gives us two possible “opening” dates in June.
counsel.
June 1 – The FBI files (p. 19) letter noting the date of incorporation for the Hubbard Dianetic
Research Foundation line up with this sequence of events. Meaning the Thorvald adventure
was in May. However, it’s false. THIS FBI document gets it right. (and again here) Then
there’s also the letter to the NY BBB in July 1950 directly from the HDRF. You’ll see here in a
minute. I think that first FBI letter is where people got this wrong date of June 1.
Well…hmm.
It’s looking more and more from the evidence that the Thorvald adventure was in April, not
May. Let’s see what the next lecture adds to the mix. Or not.
The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960 from the
Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress –
WWII they called it. Well, this silly mess came along and a lot of us went over and did
various things, and after that, I had done quite a bit of study in the last year of that war of the
endocrine systems and a bunch of things, and I did an enormous amount of work in ’46 and
’47 which finally culminated in the writing of the book, Dianetics the Modern Science of
Mental Health, published in very early 1950. May, actually.
Well just about the time it hit the stands, I was in Washington DC, this very same city. And a
very high-ranking officer, a very very very high-ranking officer. You know, brass, you
know, brass, brass…scrambled eggs, you know, gilt on the cape edge, you know.
Wow. You know. Just look at him, blinding. I was teaching some of the psychiatrists here
in Washington how to run engrams, or trying to – the last effort we made, I think. We did
make a sincere effort, by the way, to give Dianetics to psychiatry, to the medical profession,
to teach them how to use it, and so forth and we found out they didn’t know what they were
doing and we skipped it. That happened clear back THEN. So don’t think its anything new
when we claw up psychiatrists or something of the sort. They started it. They kept asking me
too many stupid questions in lectures I was giving and I never forgave them. Anyway, this
bunch of scrambled eggs comes walking up the steps, and it was on a Monday, and he
said to me, “Well, well, Hubbard, how are you? who who who…How are you Hubbard?”
What’s THIS guy want. “How would you like to work for the office of Naval Research?” I
said, “Doing what?” “Oh, using what you know about the mind, you know, Ha ha ha
ha, ha ha ha ha, to make people more suggestible.” I won’t announce this man’s rank
or name, not in public.
But I said, “Well, sir,” there was an underscore and sir was in italics, “Sir,” I said: “I’m not
interested.” After all, the book had just been published, the first foundation was just
forming, we were just kicking off, and this guy wants to drag me into the Navy. He
said, “Well. You’d better watch out, ha ha ha ha, you’d better watch out, ha ha ha ha,
because I can pull you back into service at your old rank.” Oh, I said, here we go. So he
left feeling very complacent and I immediately got on telephones. I had to find someplace in
the United States, a naval district that was stupid enough to let me resign, and I found them,
god bless ’em, right down here at the end of Pennsylvania Avenue, the Potomac River Naval
Command, which was set up during the Civil War to patrol the Confederate states and was
still a full Naval district. That marvelous! It had admirals and everything. I went in [coughing] I
had a service record and I had my health record and I had my resignation all written out and
factually, up until 1947, I was unable to walk without a cane, I couldn’t see, I was blind, I got
processing about that time however and ruined my naval record. I showed the old Admiral
down there how I could never be of any use again to the Navy, showing him all the
casualties, you know, and sheets of paper. “Oh”, he says, “You poor fellow.” and I said:
[coughing] Yes, that’s right, that’s right.” and he says: “You poor fellow. Yes. I’ll
accept your resignation.” They rushed it up, got a special assistant to the Secretary of
the Navy to OK it.
On Thursday when the high brass came back to see me again, he says, “Well, have you
decided?” “Yes,” I said, ” I’ve decided not to go in.” He said, “Well,” he said, “I guess I have
no other choice but to draft you in at your old rank.” I said, “I’m very sorry,” – omitting
the sir, italicized – “I’m very sorry, but I am no longer a member of the armed services.” Said
“What’s this?” I said “Yes. As a matter of fact here it is. Secretary of the Navy says OK”
And that was an end to the beautiful friendship with the American government.
[…]It goes right back to that engram. Office of Naval Research. Hubbard said no, to hell
with him. Remember, they didn’t make up their minds that we were no good and we
were gips and clips and stiffs and magees, UNTIL we had said No. That’s an important
point. That’s a very important point.
You can clearly see that reference to Thorvald Solberg there in the first paragraph but we
have some other interesting things as well. We now have an explanation for why the
obviously later than the event May 27 date for his resignation on the OFFICIAL paperwork.
“They rushed it up, got a special assistant to the Secretary of the Navy to OK it.”
We know from the actual official paperwork acceptance by the Secretary of the Navy, that
wasn’t until way later – October 1950. Ergo, clearly there was some other special rush
paperwork that gave Hubbard needed for that next meeting with “the high brass” – which he
again confirms as the Thursday after the Monday meeting.
Also, Hubbard had something in-hand to show Thorvald, something sufficient to back him off
trying to draft him. “… here it is. Secretary of the Navy says OK.” That couldn’t possibly be
the later official paperwork because again, that wasn’t until October of 1950.
We also know that Hubbard has now, in 3 different lectures, repeatedly said all this
happened before the HDRF was incorporated.
SO…
That’s pretty definitive. April it is, then, and now when it happened is fully pinned down. (See
Master Timeline) And now we will eliminate the confusion on the resignation official filing
being way off in October 1950 and what the significance is of what Hubbard said there:
“They rushed it up, got a special assistant to the Secretary of the Navy to OK it.”
Another World First

reveal
As I was writing this article, I decided to take a moment to see if I could figure out who THIS
was that Hubbard was talking about when he said: “They rushed it up, got a special
assistant to the Secretary of the Navy to OK it.”
That’s a very real position, and in 1950 there was only one of them. (Sometimes there’s
more than one).
The Official Congressional Directory for the 81st Congress, 2D Session beginning
January 3, 1950 (p. 381 at Hathitrust) listed:
Special Assistant to the Secretary of the Navy – Captain Richard P. Glass.

We also see there that Francis Patrick Mathews was the Secretary of the Navy, and that’s
whose name is on the official paperwork approval in October 1950.
Who’s Captain Richard P. Glass?

I know he ended up being a Rear Admiral and in charge of the Ninth District of the Navy in
1954, but more importantly, I can pretty much guarantee you that he had some kismet with
Hubbard, either knew him or knew of him during WWII.
Why?
Because he was the chief of staff for Fleet Commander William Halsey in the South Pacific.
(Obituary; Rappahannock Record) Exactly the area of the world where Hubbard had done
some pretty heroic things prior to Halsey’s arrival and I’m sure they were still talking about
him there.
Alright, now that we know who did this for Hubbard in April, the delayed actual filing of his
resignation becomes an understandable non-issue.
Oh! One other thing to keep in mind. The Chief of the Navy Bureau of Medicine (BUMED)
was over all physical evaluations. Thorvald was thick as thieves with the Bureau of Medicine
because they also “ran” the hospitals, like Bethesda, where all that secret human
experimentation to “make people more suggestible” was going on.
You do the math on why the BUMED Physical Review Council added that part about having
Hubbard “returned to active duty” when they did.
All entries now in sync – see Master Timeline.

that the wheels of discrediting and BOGUS attacks against him and his research began to
turn.
That SAME research that Thorvald was so hot to have Hubbard be doing for him.
It was ego-drivenThorvald that set the

wheels in motion – NOT the CIA.
THORVALD – FAUSTIAN
It began with shutting down Hubbard’s work with psychiatrists in the D.C. area – Dr.
Winifred Overholser was used as point man for that. Reminder – that’s what Hubbard was
doing in D.C. when Thorvald approached him.
April 1950 – Hubbard at Bethesda/Overholser/Chestnut Lodge/William Alanson White school

– “I was teaching some of the psychiatrists here in Washington how to run engrams, or
trying to – the last effort we made, I think. We did make a sincere effort, by the way, to give
Dianetics to psychiatry, to the medical profession, to teach them how to use it,and so forth
and we found out they didn’t know what they were doing and we skipped it. That happened
clear back THEN. So don’t think its anything new when we claw up psychiatrists or
something of the sort. They started it. They kept asking me too many stupid questions in
lectures I was giving and I never forgave them.” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an
LRH lecture 31 December 1960 from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress)
Then –
In creeps Overholser to the scene, like Dracula arriving in the night.

DR. WINFRED OVERHOLSER
On a slightly more serious note, Overholser’s Bio from Harvard (that I recovered out of the
internet archive) shows the different organizations he was involved with.
Dr. Overholser served as the president of the American Psychiatric Association

(1947-1948). The organizations with which he was affiliated included the New
England Society of Psychiatry, the Pan American Medical Society of Washington,
and the Academy of Medicine in Washington.
Quite the connections.
See that APA President part? He was put in that position as an outcropping of forming the
WFMH. The WFMH (The World Federation for Mental Health) was born in London in
1948.(See this PDF) Before that Congress forming it, a group of people met to discuss how
to influence the 2,000 attendees in the direction of supporting the political objective of
forming a World government. Dr. Overholser was one of them, at that meeting.
In fact, he was the head of the American delegation attending the congress!
From the listing of Overholser papers held by the LOC (Library of Congress) –
● 1937-1962 – Superintendent, St. Elizabeth’s Hospital, Department of Health,

Education and Welfare, Washington, D.C.
● 1948 – Chairman, United States delegation, International Congress on
Mental Health, London, England
● 1948-1954 – Member, National Board of Medical Examiners
● 1950 – Vice-president, First World Congress of Psychiatry, Paris, France
Hubbard, as a protege’ of Lord Salisbury, was also supportive of World Government. So you
see, it isn’t that he and Overholser are opposed per se, this is more of a power trip
scrabbling that’s about to go on here. One that Thorvald found a willing participant in
Overholser to do for him. Overholser was already cranky — read jealous — about Hubbard,
having clashed previously on more than one occasion.
Hubbard asked people like him rather pointed and extremely relevant questions that they
couldn’t answer about schizophrenia with anything resembling a intelligent answer. Most of
them still can’t, for that matter. You can hear Hubbard talk about this and his experience with
Chestnut Lodge, St. Elizabeth’s hospital (where Overholser was) in this video.
From 1948 to 1950 – Ron Hubbard had been allowed to practice abreactive therapy at
mainly two mental institutions – Chestnut Lodge Sanitarium and Saint Elizabeths Hospital.
Harry Stack Sullivan was the leading psychiatrist at Chestnut Lodge Sanitarium, he died in
1949, right in the middle of this period. Hubbard’s antipathy against various psychiatric
methods was already developing at this point, and he had found willing agreement with
Harry, who in 1940 had delivered a scathing portrayal of ECT and lobotomies.
These sundry procedures produce “beneficial” results by reducing the patient’s

capacity for being human. The philosophy is something to the effect that it is
better to be a contented imbecile than a schizophrenic.
– HARRY STACK SULLIVAN (U.S. psychiatrist), referring to lobotomy and shock treatment (in his phrase,
psychiatry’s “decortication treatments”), “Conceptions of Modern Psychiatry,” Psychiatry, February 1940 – as
quoted in the The Electroshock Quotationary, Leonard Roy Frank, Editor, Publication date: April 2006 – – – For
more about Leonard Roy Frank please see this post – section starting with “NAPA”. Leonard founded NAPA
(Network Against Psychiatric Assault in 1972 in San Francisco. He tells a just horrifying story of being
institutionalized, as an adult mind you, by his parents, because he changed how and what he was doing with
his life, basically.
I think this was more of a kind of sales war with biological psychiatry versus psycho-analysis
than any real disagreement with the torture aspect – because six years later in 1946 Harry,
as later quoted in the Psychiatry of Enduring Peace and Social Progress was perfectly
happy to bomb those he deemed enemies into oblivion with nuclear weapons and hey, that’s
all good for humanity but ECT wasn’t. You can see why I say I don’t think he’s entirely
sincere with this attack, it was probably more of an attack of bitchiness on his part because
right away, ECT began being used as part of targeting homosexuals (which he was) in
order to ‘cure’ them. I imagine that idea didn’t exactly go over well with him.
Both Hubbard and Harry Stack Sullivan were in a kind of ‘war’ with the Biological Psychiatry
covert eugenics boys even this far back. Even though Hubbard tried to initially position
himself with them by his use of the term engrams which went way back to the 1800’s to a
Darwinism proponent named Semon. As a side note, it’s amazing how much of that guys
material Hubbard used.
With Harry dead though, Hubbard was left without a somewhat ally, setting the stage for
much more trouble with Overholser.
Winfred Overholser was the Superintendent at Saint Elizabeths Hospital. He had worked for
the OSS, doing research into drugs that could be used in interrogation. A
committee on that was formed on October 31, 1942 – he was chairman of the committee. A
little later, the committee was transferred under the Office of Strategic Services. You see the
connection to the Navy’s later BLUEBIRD and CHATTER projects here. (see timeline)
.
Overholser was also connected to the British slavemasters and British

intelligence through Willmott Lewis – the Washington correspondent of the London Times.
He also wrote in Foreign Affairs, the publication of the Council on Foreign Relations. Lewis
also worked under William Stephenson and the British Security Coordination – a British
intelligence organization.
Overholser was Biological Psychiatry all the way – ECT and all. He was even involved with
something called the Alaskan Bill (see this post) where Hubbard basically attacked him
calling it the “Siberia Bill” as if it’s a Russian plot. As I said, now that we are straightening out
this part of history, we can see now that this is really about Hubbard saying “No” to Thorvald
and then Thorvald sics ravening dogs like Overholser (and others) on Hubbard, and
Hubbard is still trying to even the score by attacking the Alaskan Bill.
Yep, Hubbard did not get along with Overholser at all, still complaining about him almost 30
years later.
Brian Roubinek, at least in 1972, was the Deputy, Deputy Guardian Intelligence for the U.S.
(D/DGI Int US). With that particular post title, Brian must have been Terry Milner’s direct
junior. (Terry of the gun-running and drug-smuggling with the Elusive Jerry McDonald, as
well as Stanford University CIA remote viewing contracts and telepathy machines infamy.
L. Ron Hubbard had personally responded to Roubinek’s supposed intelligence “find”

concerning Dr. Overholser of St. Elizabeth’s federal mental hospital in Washington D.C., a
big long rant dated February 28th, 1972.
Note: The original 1974 Guardian’s Office Intelligence Hat/Checksheet was part of the
documents seized in the FBI Raid. PDF – Intelligence Course Full Hat-Checksheet On Page
10 – Section 4: Covert Data Collection; Part B: Covert Operations; item 19: Desp. 28
Feb 72, Re: Oberholser (marked document 121 by the court) of the checksheet verifies that
this document was part of the hat pack.
I’m just going to excerpt this part about Overholser – misspelled by typist as Oberholser –
Thank you for the excellent packaging of Oberholser (the late and very
unlamented).
The interest in this bad hat stems from the fact that he blew the whistle on
Dianetics when St. Elizabeth psychiatrists were just beginning to use it and were
for the first time getting results on patients at the National Asylum. He forbade
them to use it but they disagreed heavily and privately used it for many years
under cover. This broke up introducing Dianetics on regular channels – May 1950.
Thereafter a violent and gory attack was mounted. It was begun by Oberholser,
went over to George Wash U. Psychology Dept at once and there a student of the
first Dianetics class (Dolly Jones) also a psychology student was hypnotized,
beaten, told to go crazy, did so and we had to hospitalize her. We handled it so
fast and so well no “Dianetics drove her crazy” could be campaigned and wasn’t.
This was the first hard flat out PR-Intelligence operation in Dianetics. Her state
was not assisted by her husband, Col Jones of US Army Intelligence, also a
member of the first Dianetics Class.
From then on the NY Times Literary Section began an attack […]

So you see why I am interested in this bad hat Oberholser. He struck the first
blow.
Actually, it was Thorvald who set the ravening Overholser loose upon him. Hubbard knows
that, but still won’t name Thorvald, probably due to intelligence NDA’s and all that.
Regarding what Hubbard said about psychiatrists secretly using Dianetics before Overholser
went into attack mode, there’s a a somewhat amusing anecdote, Hubbard describes
hypnotising the psychiatrists at St. Elizabeth’s.
“Now, actually, in handling groups and so forth, I, of course, myself, am a little shy. I like to
be amongst friends. I do. I like to be amongst friends. I do not like to talk to hostile groups. I
really do not.
And I’m mean, too, when I do. You never saw such a change in a man in your life as when I
have to talk to a hostile group. I immediately go off onto an entirely different line of
stagecraft. It’s tough! It’s tough! They’re there challengingly. They are willing to listen, but
they already have been told how bad it is. They’re sure you’re not going to say anything
interesting. But they’re going to suffer through it somehow so that they can get on with the
dessert or something. I get mean about that time, and I do bad things. I seldom give bad
reports on myself, but that is actually an instance when I do.
I hypnotized, one time, the staff of St. Elizabeth’s. Told them they’d heard a good speech
and left the stage. They all came around afterwards saying, ‘What a good speech that was
you gave!’ That was a mean thing to do. That was certainly backing out of it, wasn’t it? But it
was in the early career of Dianetics and I felt very much like backing out of it. I was
preceded by someone who told all of them how bad it was over ‘Ron-ward.’ They might
afterwards have suspected my knowledge of the mind, but certainly not my knowledge of
hypnotism. It’s very easy to hypnotize groups.” (L. Ron Hubbard, “How to Handle Audiences”
lecture of November 1, 1956)
“Someone” was probably Overholser. This is another example though of Hubbard not
naming who he knows it was. You can listen to him saying this live –
Despite their best efforts, Dianetics rocketed to the top of the New York Times best-seller list
(and stayed there for 28 weeks straight) which didn’t exactly make Thorvald any happier with
Hubbard.
And so…
Behind the scenes they sneaked
at first
Every once in a while, books that get many things wrong do get some things very right. This
is one of those times.
HOWEVER, it’s the details of sneaking around soliciting attacks the author gets right. The
author does not catch the true “who” behind any of it (Thorvald Solberg, Winfred
Overholser, Leo Bartemeier) and thinks it’s just the American Medical Association doing all
this all on their own initiative.
Wrong.
Many of these Guardian Office intelligence-types don’t actually truly investigate to see what
is, they get hamstrung by either/both what they want to see or what Hubbard tells them to
see and he rarely tells them the whole truth even if he does use an truth. It’s always skewed
to keep people off the real targets. Being him and his superiors like Lord Salisbury etc.
Hubbard always protected his handlers. You can see a truly horrific example of him doing
this kind of skewing and bald-faced lying as to who the true “enslavers” of world were, in this
video –
Hubbard falsely and oh so Britishly

blamed “The Communists” for what
was going on in Africa.
.
See Oliver Stone’s history documentary recently added to Netflix to see just how false that
was.
That said, let’s look at the good details Garrison gave.
Omar Garrison, Hidden Story of Scientology, pg. 71 – 74

“In order to launch an effective attack on Dianetics, its
AMA adversaries needed some authoritative statements by prominent medical men,
explaining to the layman why Dianetics was not only quackery, but very dangerous quackery.
Accordingly, Dr. Austin Smith, then editor of the Journal of the American Medical
Association, on June 1, 1950 sent letters to a number of doctors and medical societies,
asking their help. Laymen not privy to the inside workings of the AMA apparatus, will find
them enlightening, if somewhat wanting in factual accuracy. For example, in a letter to Dr.
Smith, dated June 5, 1950, Theodore Wiprud, executive secretary of the Medical Society
of the District of Columbia wrote:
“Upon receipt of your letter of June 1, I got in touch with several physicians who I thought
would have some information about L. Ron Hubbard and his book, Dianetics. One of them
was Captain George N. Raines, Chief of Psychiatry, Naval Medical Center, Bethesda.
He does not want to be quoted but told me that Hubbard and Dr. Joseph A. Winter, who, I
understand, is a physician licensed in New Jersey, are ‘phonies’.
“One of the bases for ‘Dianetics’ is the premise that the individual, if prompted by
semi-hypnosis, can recall intrauterine experiences and conversations between father and
mother within three months after conception. That would be enough to stop anyone but an
ignoramus in his tracks, but I am told that some psychiatrists have been intrigued by the
idea. At any rate, among the best psychiatrists this is nothing but the bunk.”
In another letter replying to Dr. Smith’s initiative, Dr. H. Houston Merritt, director of
neurological service at New York’s Columbia Presbyterian Medical Center, adopted the
condescending, slightly derisive tone to be expected of an AMA-member in dealing with
anything so “bizarre and unscientific” (his terms) as Dianetics.
“In reply to your letter of June 1,” he wrote, “first I beg to advise that I have had no personal
experience with Dianetics. Information I have obtained, however, would indicate that this
term was coined to describe a ‘new’ development in the field of psychiatry which uses a
philosophical approach combining some of the principles of psychoanalysis, philosophy of
Will Durant and the mathematics of the cybernetics school.”
“It is the impression,” he continued, “that Hubbard is the ghost writer for Winter. My
information in regard to Winter, which may or may not be authentic, indicates that he lives in
New Jersey and that he does not have a licence to practice in the State, nor is he a member
of the American Medical Association.”
Dr. Smith did not go at his undertaking half-heartedly, In addition to writing to various
eminent doctors of his acquaintance, he sent a memorandum to Oliver Field, director of
AMA’s Bureau of Investigation. The note, dated June 5, 1950, suggested that the medical
CIA ought to “look into” Dianetics and concluded with the statement that Hubbard “is
alleged to be a ‘bad actor, a kind of faker or even worse’, but this is not for quoting until
more facts are obtained”.
Dr. Smith also wrote to another AMA member, Dr. Erwin E. Nelson, then director of the
federal Food and Drug Administration.
At the time of Dr. Smith’s letter to FDA’s medical director, Hubbard’s book had been in print
only a month and the federal agency had not yet heard of it. Replying to Dr. Smith, the FDA
official wrote that “We don’t seem to have any information on L. Ron Hubbard or
Joseph A. Winter or ‘Dianetics’. Further we do not find such names in the local
directory.”
That last one is actually very important, it shows that this is a very limited little group here
now. It shouldn’t be viewed as “the AMA” did it. It’s particular PEOPLE. In order of seniority
of slavemaster pecking order, it would be Thorvald, Overholser, Smith.
THREE people.
That’s it.
Three people going about the business of preparing to make it look like it was some kind of a
“activist” “responsible” “independent” movement that just happened and was not coordinated
by these three hidden people when it most definitely was.
I’m sorry, but that is just sickening. And it’s not because Hubbard was such a “good” guy,
that I say that. He wasn’t. But he did have something in what he discovered about these
supposedly “unconscious” periods that weren’t really. He pretty much went off all over the
place trying to do his job for his secret handlers and in his quest to recover his “importance”
after the Thorvald incident, and he actually left the one good thing he discovered to literally
die on the vine. Even in today’s Church of Scientology, Dianetic processing is ranked down
at the BOTTOM of the later created “bridge”.
How’s that for irony.
Not to mention the fact of how these letters and documents from the AMA were, ahem,
obtained. The Guardian Office intelligence bureau had P. Joseph Lisa infiltrate the AMA and
using a cover of being opposed to Dianetics/Scientology and Hubbard, they bought his cover
and they gave him access to their files.
Yep. That happened.
See that name Theodore Wiprud? Years later, the new head of the Church of Scientology,
David Miscavige, tried to lay off “attacks” on Hubbard and his subjects as being Wiprud and
some secretary.
Short guy on the right is Wiprud
Taking from my post: Scientology Tax Exemption – What Really Happened: The Kennedy
List
In this post first I’m going to finish up going over the main lies and
misrepresentations by David Miscavige in the October 1993, The War Is Over IAS*
event. The entire video is available now on the internet. Although poor quality, it is
still quite viewable. Don’t miss the huge opening number but the meat of the video
begins here: 01:32:10.
*IAS = the International Association of Scientologists, it was created by David

Miscavige to replace the allowed-to-go-defunct corporation of the HASI = the
Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc.
[…] There are specific statements by David Miscavige that we’re going to examine
and I have made individual video clips so that you can see them easier.
[…]I’m starting with the part where the initial criticisms of Dianetics are discussed
– one of which Miscavige lays off on Theodore Wiprud, the Medical Association of
Washington D.C.
Here’s the video clip itself –
[…] David Miscavige just can’t seem to name or focus on the real sources of all
this….he picks out a pencil-pushing administrative type (Wiprud), and a nebulous
“DC Medical Association”…
That’s the letter Omar Garrison talks about, and the screen flashes the letter with George
Raines’ name showing right there and Miscavige doesn’t even mention it?
Major Kermit moment –

There’s one of the major “whos” right there flashing in front of the faces of thousands of
Scientologists and Miscavige doesn’t even mention it.
Not only that, Miscavige never once questions WHO TOLD Austin Smith/AMA to send these
letters in the first place.
Speaking of which –
That same name, the one that Omar Garrison pointed out doesn’t want to be quoted? –
Captain George N. Raines, Chief of Psychiatry, Naval Medical Center, Bethesda.
image from here
Guess who he has done more than one published paper together with? (one 1948 example
here)
Project CHATTER man Charles Savage.

Yep, the very same people and the very same research line of secret projects Thorvald had
his eye on Hubbbard for.
.
Can you say Thorvald told Capt.
Raines what Hubbard did?
Hello? Captain Raines? Hubbard not only said fuck you No, he managed to get an approved
resignation in 4 days and now we can’t draft him!
In case any doubting-Thomas’s want to misunderstand the connection there that paper I
linked to shows, let me clarify it a little more for you.
Robert Cohn, one of the names on that paper, said in an interview when George Raines
hired him with a million dollar budget in 1952 —
“We were interested in LSD, thinking it could create an experimental psychosis, and at
that time we believed it was safe to take. Evarts and Charlie Savage organized a series of
studies on LSD, not only clinically, with volunteers and patients, but with animals as well.”
See? Still at ye ole secret drug testing ala CHATTER and BLUEBIRD.
I think we need to find out a little more about this Chatty-Kathy of our story here though,
Austin Smith. Who’s he? Clearly he doesn’t start letter writing campaigns back-channel on
his own. “Somebody” – read Thorvald-Overholser-Gaines – told him to. They needed to see
what they had to work with in order to plan and launch a revenge/discreditation attack on
Hubbard for saying No.
They pulled his string, in other words, and he started “chatting” on cue.
“I would like to know what you know about Hubbard and Dianetics.”
Let’s start with Austin’s NY Times 1993 obituary – Oh hey, look at that! He died the same
year and only 5 days apart from when Scientology finally obtained tax exemption. How
ironic.
Dr. Austin E. Smith, the first president of the Pharmaceutical Manufacturers Association,
vice chairman of the Warner-Lambert Company and editor of the Journal of the American
Medical Association, died on Oct. 9 at his home in Fort Myers, Fla. He was 81. A graduate of
the Queens University Faculty of Medicine in Kingston, Ontario, Dr. Smith joined the A.M.A.
staff after completing his residency, becoming the organization’s director of therapy and
research. After writing “The Drugs You Use,” (Revere, 1948,) a practical guide to the proper
use of drugs, he was made editor of the organization’s journal in 1949.
Oh, no.
I’ve landed into a Church of
Scientology/Mark Rathbun “Big
Pharma” conspiracy?
I hate it when that happens.
Crap. Well, unfortunately, or not, depending on how you look at it, there does happen to be
quite a bit of truth to the idea of a conspiracy here.
The very real conspiracy was not to ruin Dianetics, per se, Hubbard even says that
himself in one of the lectures we covered earlier. This is about ruining Hubbard and
something he wanted.
It’s a revenge conspiracy.

In the beginning here, it was actually only about one particular aspect of Dianetics, not every
damn thing Hubbard ever did or said. His success in recovering data from unconscious
periods. They were interested in that and its possible reverse, installing suggestions in the
unconscious period. And of course the revenge is about that he thumbed his nose at them
and refused to put his mind to work for these particular people.
The rest was all personal ego trips,

ALL of them.
Including Hubbard.
It still doesn’t make it right what they did to Hubbard though, but it does show you what really
happens to any truly independent and halfway decent research into Man, around here. It
gets sucked up into the pack of slavering wolves, by hook or by crook.
On the one hand, one could applaud Hubbard for escaping their hoovering process, but on
the other it wasn’t exactly the best idea to piss off that particular pack of wolves, nor was
Hubbard innocent of quite a few of the same goals for humanity that these men had. He just
didn’t want to be controlled by those people. Lord Salisbury? No problem. Robert Vansittart,
spymaster? No Problem. The CIA? Again, also no problem.
You see where I’m going here. ALL of those exercised (or needed to) little or no control over
Hubbard and trusted him to do what they wanted, which he did.
OK. So WHEN was Austin this kingpin of the pharmaceutical industry?
Officially it was when he resigned in 1958 as JAMA editor. In 1959, 4 months after resigning,
it was made public that he had become the first full-time, salaried president of the
Pharmaceutical Manufacturers Association, Washington, DC. The Pharmaceutical
Manufacturers Association was the result of a recent merging of the American Drug
Manufacturers Association and the American Pharmaceutical Manufacturers’ Association.
Austin served in that position from 1959 until 1965, heading the association through the
period when Sen Estes Kefauver investigated the drug industry. That, was a big mess,
let me tell you.
It was later that he became chairman of the board of directors of Parke, Davis & Company
(now Parke-Davis, a division of Warner-Lambert Company), and then the board vice
chairmen of Warner-Lambert Company, both in Morris Plains, NJ. He also chaired the board
of Sonic Electric Energy Corporation, Randolph, NJ – whatever that is.
So these are all after the time period when he was playing chatty-kathy for Thorvald,
Overholser and Raines. Great! No “Big Pharma” conspiracy, right?.
Wrong.
Not that easy.
You see, how he even got that cushy job as JAMA editor was this. (Note: he was assistant
editor Feb. 1949 appointed full editor December 1949; replacing Dr. Morris Fishbein) Prior
to being JAMA editor he was the Secretary for the Council on Pharmacy and Chemistry
American Medical Association. (Science 20 Aug 1943) But he was more than that.
In the first round of Senate Hearings, Austin appears (this one was about having a National
Health Plan in 1949) and testified about “medical research”. He makes it quite clear in his
testimony that he has other functions in the AMA.
He was also the Director of the Division of Therapy and Research besides being the
Secretary, for the Council on Pharmacy and Chemistry – both for the AMA, appointed
apparently in February 1940 just as World War II was getting going.
Convenient, right? Especially considering things like the Truth Drug Committee were going
to start up “researching” in a little over two years later.
Therapy and Research Division or Therapeutical Research as it was called back in the
1920’s, had to do with MONEY for:
“…the Trustees’ make an appropriation each year. This appropriation is used for
investigations and laboratory research in the actions of drugs and pharmaceutical
products. The results are published is various medical journals…”
You do realize that under “therapy and research” comes all manner of horrific things.
Anyhere from electro-shock and insulin shock therapies to lobotomies and “thought reform”
experiments to electromagnetic field manipulation and genetic engineering which when
combined with drugs it then qualifies as “research”. So that’s bad enough all by itself – this
Therapy and Research division.
So what is this Council on Pharmacy and Chemistry? It was formed in 1905 to evaluate
DRUGS and “various medicinal preparations”. On February 23, 1957 they decided to be
more blunt about it and renamed the thing: The Council on Drugs. The original founding
rules noted that articles and research about new drugs etc. would be submitted to the
JAMA as the determination point. Powerful position. You can just imagine how that selection
process of who gets highlighted and who doesn’t, went.
Want public promotion of your drug?

Gimme some scratch.
Oh and DO WE LIKE YOU?

cuz if we don’t…
Real scientific, is my point.
It looks scientific, but that’s not what goes on behind-the-scenes. Items 1 and 2 above must
be A-ok or it ain’t appearing in JAMA.
You see, that Council had to accept the “new article” – as they also called the drug or
chemical. So this means, when all those nasty drugs like Metrazol, Thorazine, etc. etc. came
out? These guys had chosen to accept it, then they promoted it, and then they get PAID for
doing so. One way or another. Here’s an example of new drugs “accepted” in 1955.
There was a LOT of money involved in what the JAMA editor did.
I mean literally mountains of it.

But what’s the deal with these people at the AMA? What’s driving this train anyway.
Well, it’s like this.
In the early half of the 20th century, a coup was organized on the medical research facilities,
hospitals and universities. The Rockefeller family, ye ole step-n-fetch-its of the actual
slavemasters, sponsored research and donated sums to universities and medical schools
which had drug based research.
Establishments and research which were were not drug based were refused funding and
soon dissolved in favor of the lucrative pharmaceutical industry. In 1939 a “Drug Trust”
alliance was formed by the Rockefeller empire and the German chemical company I.G.
Farben (Bayer). After World War II, I.G. Farben was dismantled but later emerged as
separate corporations within the alliance. Since WWII, the pharmaceutical industry has
steadily netted increasing profits to become the world’s second largest manufacturing
industry; after the arms industry.
The Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research was founded in 1901. Simon Flexner headed
the Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research. Simon Flexner appointed his brother,
Abraham Flexner, to survey medical schools throughout America.
Abraham Flexner was empowered to investigate the quality of medical education in all 161
medical schools that existed in 1910. He helped destroy the credibility and funding sources
for nearly all schools using non-drug based medicine. 161 medical schools dwindled down
to 81 by 1919 and medical graduates declined from 5,747 to 2,658. “Overcrowding” of the
profession became the public AMA theme for the “opportunities of those already in the
profession to acquire a livelihood.” said one AMA President at the time.
The AMA also practiced severe discrimination against black medical schools and black
doctors. They did not apologize for this for over 150 years, until July 2008. (Exploring the
AMA’s History of Discrimination, 2008)
[…] you find that in 1910, the American Medical Association commissioned a
report of all medical schools. They were very interested in lowering the number of
physicians. They wanted to raise the professional stature of physicians, and they
wanted to do that by exclusion. They commissioned Abraham Flexner to go to
every medical school in the U.S. and Canada and make an assessment —
basically which medical schools should and should not be encouraged to
continue. When Flexner did this, he deemed every black medical school
substandard and recommended they all be closed, except for two, Howard and
Meharry.
And he also went beyond that to stipulate that black physicians should only treat
black patients, that black physicians should have their roles curtailed. And he
warned that an essentially untrained Negro bearing an MD label is dangerous. So
he looked on all black physicians with a jaundiced eye.
His recommendations were prophetic. All the black schools except for Howard
and Meharry closed — they could not attract funding any longer because of the
damning indictment of them. And black physicians were indeed kept from
specialties like surgery. They were kept from research.
In general, schools and doctors were asked if they would (or did) practice “modern scientific
medicine” – translation- Did they use DRUGS.
So where does this special Bureau of Investigation come in?
It had been formed before the Flexner rape-and-pillage of American medicine, by…a Brit.
Why am I not surprised. Well, anyway, it was formed in 1906, under the name “Propaganda
Department”, headed by Arthur J. Cramp, MD. “The department prepared abstracts of
government reports on the chemical composition of nostrums seized in interstate
commerce.” (JAMA article)
What the heck are nostrums?
1) a medicine, especially one that is not considered effective, prepared by an unqualified

person OR
2) a pet scheme or favorite remedy, especially one for bringing about some social or
political reform or improvement.
Clearly they started out meaning the first one, but later years brought increased activity to
the department, whose name was changed to the Bureau of Investigation in 1925. Then the
bureau added other forms of “quackery” to its investigations.
Example of an actual quack claim. This is from a magazine called ONE, Volume 2 issue 4
April 1 1954.
Right from the beginning that’s one of the main things that the JAMA was used for – sort of a
WHO IS IN and WHO IS OUT game.
As soon as Cramp was hired on as an editor of the Journal of the American Medical
Association, he began contributing regular pieces about quackery to it….Cramp believed in
what he once called “public education through publicity” (Cramp 1920, 788), and he believed
that “the best that the medical profession can do in protecting the public is to turn the light on
the methods of the faddist and the quack, so that his ignorance or fraud becomes apparent”
(Cramp 1927b, 727–728). This was the mission of the Propaganda for Reform Department,
which became the Bureau of Investigation in 1925 and the Department of Investigation in
1958 (Hafner et al. 1992, viii). (Skeptic Enquirer article)
The AMA closed the Department of Investigation in 1975. The files that Cramp and his
successors had gathered over the decades became known as the American Medical
Association Health Fraud and Alternative Medicine Collection, which is the only AMA archive
that is open to non-members, created in 1988.
Morris Fishbein took over for Cramp as JAMA editor in 1935. (Cramp had a heart attack and
couldn’t keep up with the work anymore)
Drugs, “quackery” and nostrums.
So.
L. Ron Hubbard off independently doing mind research that might a: be a nostrum for
bringing about some social or political reform or improvement and b: keep people
away from psychiatrists and doctors and the ever-present DRUGS? That’s like a
double-whammy in the corrupt AMA playbook.
Had to be an easy sell to recruit Austin E. Smith into having his very own Secret Mission To
Destroy Hubbard and Save MANKIND!!!!! – the exclamation and red is representing what I
am positive was the drama queen version in Austin’s mind.
It’s funny how nostrum and cult are the words the AMA slings at movements that don’t fit into
the DRUG model, considering what they were doing all along.
The corruption that Austin and the AMA were part of became so bad, so impossible to
sweep under the rug-that-had-no-more-room, that Senator Kefauver had to chair a
Committee into the Drug Industry Antitrust Act in 1961.
In the 1961 Kefauver hearings into the Drug Industry Anti-Trust Act, Austin stuck his foot in
his mouth and got caught. He had published a statement in JAMA a few years earlier that
said there are 140,000 different medicaments available for physicians to choose from.
When Time magazine reprinted it, Austin CHALLENGED the statement as libel on the drug
industry.
Um…if it was false, why did you publish it then, Austin?
Jeesh.
That should give you enough of an understanding of this guy to see WHY he would be so
hot to step-n-fetch it for the “big boys” and go after Hubbard.
But hey, I just now finally found a picture of the guy from 1944 in the “Queen’s Medical
Journal” He’s British-Canadian, by the way. You’re not gonna believe the uncanny similarity
to the puppet one I picked to represent him earlier.
Austin Edward Smith
OK, next is Austin’s “investigation” department guy – Oliver Field.
Dr. Smith did not go at his undertaking half-heartedly, In addition to

writing to various eminent doctors of his acquaintance, he sent a memorandum to Oliver
Field, director of AMA’s Bureau of Investigation. The note, dated June 5, 1950,
suggested that the medical CIA ought to “look into” Dianetics and concluded with the
statement that Hubbard “is alleged to be a ‘bad actor, a kind of faker or even worse’, but this
is not for quoting until more facts are obtained”. (Omar Garrison, hidden Story of
Scientology, pg. 71 – 74)
Oh brother.
Who’s this guy.
In the archives of the University of Notre Dame (Vol. 34 No. 2 March-April 1956; p. 57) Oliver
is a featured Alumnus. It says he’s been working at the AMA Bureau of Investigation
(AMABI) for 8 years, so that means he started in 1948, just a year before Austin was made
JAMA editor. It’s probably worth noting that this publication shows that Notre Dame is run by
Catholic priests, yet again indicating the Catholic involvement (even in this peripheral way) in
supporting the aggressive monopoly of “scientific” medicine.
Oliver Field is referred to as the “J. Edgar Hoover of the American Medical Association”
where he: “protects standard and lawful medical practices through the exposure of quacks,
nostrums, cultists, faddists and other forms of pseudo-medicine in the profession.”
Cultists?
What the hell does that have to do with “scientific” medicine.
Interesting.
What’s nostrums? It can be two things – a medicine, especially one that is not considered
effective, prepared by an unqualified person OR a pet scheme or favorite remedy,
especially one for bringing about some social or political reform or improvement.
Now, don’t think that I believe that EVERY example that the AMA exposes are therefore
“good” because they were attacked.
NO.
I think they go out of their way, people like Oliver here, to find people that actually are
quacks, nostrums, cultists, faddists so that 1: They can legitimize their supposed use and
service to “society” and 2: They have created a pool of real hucksters that they can now use
to TAR THE LEGITIMATE with, the ones that don’t subserve themselves to the AMA.
Call the person or their research quackery, phony, dangerous, cult, etc. etc. which
immediately positions them public-relations wise with ACTUAL quacks etc. This is why
Oliver also “maintains an up-to-date liaison with all societies, clubs and
goups–medical, civic and clerical—keeping the public well-informed on both the standard
and false methods and practices in medicine.”
For PR purposes to spread the “quackery” label – whether it’s false or not, he doesn’t care.
He does what he is told.

But Oliver doesn’t just run media campaigns together with Austin Smith, Fishbein,etc. The
AMABI brings: “violations of law to the attention of enforcement agencies and furnishes
reports to the same.”
It is true, however, that the main stock-in-trade of people like these is rumor-mongering
“exposes” that are often full of blatant lies, or as Jacques Ellul put it in Propaganda: the
Formation of Men’s Attitudes —
First of all, the propagandist must insist on the purity of his own intentions and, at the same
time, hurl accusations at his enemy. But the accusation is never made haphazardly or
groundlessly. The propagandist will not accuse the enemy of just any misdeed; he will
accuse him of the very intention that he himself has and of trying to commit the very
crime that he himself is about to commit.
In other words, quite a bit (if not most) of what the AMA “approves of” is itself quackery.
At this point, we need to dig into Oliver quite a bit more before I give you a real world
example of the hypocrisy of the AMA and the Oliver Fields of the world. This is new
research that I am just now adding to this article, today, 10 December 2019.
Ya ready?
Ok, here we go…
Special section on Oliver Field

In a report dated 7 February 1963, FDA Inspector R.D. Sherman detailed the extent of Oliver
Field’s files on Hubbard and Scientology. It took them more than SIX DAYS to copy it all for
him.
On 1/30/63 Oliver Field, Director of the Bureau of Investigation of the American

Medical: Association, was visited at their main headquarters at 534 N. Dearborn st.
He was told we desired to review his files for any information concerning Ron
Hubbard and Scientology and associated organizations. As was expected, Mr.
Field was most cooperative, and although he could not relinquish the files he
instructed his secretary to photocopy any and all material which I desired. He
refused payment for this service, although it was very extensive. The amount of
material was so massive that even as I start to dictate this report they have not
finished copying all of it completely and it was not until February 6th that I was
able to obtain any of the photocopies.
(Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents pp. 229-242, FDA Inspector R.D. Sherman detailing AMA files on Hubbard,
Scientology)
These AMA files comprise the BULK of the

2015 FDA documents release.
p. 242
SUMMARY – This voluminous mass of material was selected from the files of the
American Medical Association and probably includes about 3/4 of their entire files.
…Highlights of the information and suggested leads were presented in this
summary for such further follow-up indicated by DRM.
Exhibit 5 is where we get the false idea that Hubbard was in a mental hospital, but we also
find out that Inspector Sherman seems to be a man right up Oliver Fields ally of sleaze-balls.
Sherman seems more excited about the embarrassment value of Hubbard being a bigamist,
than he is about Sara Northrup’s allegation that Hubbard was “confined in an incoherent
state in a Cuban Military Hospital” and that Hubbard was a “schizophrenic”. Perhaps
because he knows it’s total bullshit.
The declassified FDA documents release of 2015 has this tendency to split records all over
the place, so it can be a real challenge to FIND these AMA files exhibits Sherman is going
over. But at least I found this one so far. It was over in Folder #4 on p. 5.
Dianetics Chief, Ill in Cuba, Defies Wife
“L. Ron Hubbard, 40-year-old leader of the Dianetics cult, is paralyzed in a Cuban military
hospital, a wild and incoherent letter from indicated today…….dated April 15, Havana
Cuba…to support charges that her brilliant husband “is hopelessly insane”. It was part of an
affidavit….”Signed “Ron,” the letter boasted that Hubbard, confined to a “Cuban military
hospital” is being “transferred to the United States next week as a classified scientist
immune from interference of all kinds.” “My right side is paralyzed and getting more so,” the
letter, addressed to Mrs. Hubbard continued…” “Competent psychiatrists have diagnosed
her husband as suffering from “a mental ailment known as paranoid schizophrenia,” Mrs.
Hubbard declared in her divorce suit.”
Wikipedia details the full letter being referenced was this, with the source given as a LA Daily
News article from May 1, 1951 titled: “Letter indicates Dianetics founder, baby fled to Cuba”.
(available at newsbank.com)
Dear Sara,
I have been in the Cuban military hospital and I am being transferred to the United States
next week as a classified scientist immune from interference of all kinds.
Though I will be hospitalized probably a long time, Alexis is getting excellent care. I see her
every day. She is all I have to live for.
My wits never gave way under all you did and let them do but my body didn’t stand up. My
right side is paralyzed and getting more so. I hope my heart lasts. I may live a long time and
again I may not. But Dianetics will last 10,000 years – for the Army and Navy have it now.
My Will is all changed. Alexis will get a fortune unless she goes to you as she would then get
nothing. Hope to see you once more. Goodbye – I love you.
Ron
The Church of Scientology claims it is a forgery written by Northrup’s attorney, Caryl Werner
but still… those details are really something.
SOMEONE who knew about Hubbard’s adventures with Thorvald had to have influenced the
creation of that letter, and I wouldn’t put it past Oliver Field to do something, or “help out” in
exactly that way. Sara would have known about it, I would imagine, so I suppose she could
have fed it to her attorney but that’s a dangerous game she was playing. In any case, since
that was all very SERIOUSLY top secret, I do not think Hubbard wrote that letter. He would
know better than that as to what would happen to him if he broke security like that, but also
he would never write about “giving” Dianetics to the army/navy.
We should also factor in the role Sara may have played (and probably did) in Hubbard’s
black intelligence operation to ruin Jack Parsons by literally driving him crazy – all in order to
knock him out of the “rocket science” arena. It seems a fitting kind of kismet that Hubbard
found himself in exactly the same situation as Jack, after he refused Thorvald’s attempt to
force him to do his research for the Navy behind closed doors.
That’s even more of a lead towards that for exactly the reason of revealed top secret details
in that supposed letter from Hubbard, however vague, I think that is what got Hubbard’s
attention and got him to contact Sara and get her the hell out of his life because of her
‘loose lips’, so to speak. (saying from WWII “loose lips sink ships”) Hubbard had
successfully pressured Sara into retracting her statements barely a month later.
Inspector Sherman doesn’t seem to note that Sara Northrup retracted her rather alarming
statements about her husband, but it’s also somewhat

obvious that Hubbard composed this document, found in folder #4 (p. 63) dated 11 June
1951, that he had Sara sign. It was witnessed by John Maloney and Chas (Charles)
Leonard.
The thing about this document, the premise of it, that Sara’s statements about Hubbard were
FALSE? That includes this probably bogus letter about “giving Dianetics” to the Army and
Navy etc.
Why would Hubbard write a letter like that providing such perfect cannon fodder for Sara to
use against him in a divorce proceeding? He wouldn’t.
I, Sara Northrup Hubbard, do hereby state that the things I have said about L. Ron
Hubbard in courts and the public prints have been grossly exaggerated or entirely
false.
I have not at any time believed otherwise than that L. Ron Hubbard was a fine and brilliant
man.
I make this statement of my own free will for I have begun to realize that what I have done
may have injured the science of dianetics, which in my studied opinion may be the only hope
of sanity in future generations.
I was under enormous stress and my advisers insisted it was necessary for me to carry
through an action as I have done.
There is no other reason for this statement than my own wish to make atonement for the
damage it may have done. In the future I wish to lead a quiet and orderly existence with my
little girl far away from the enturbulating influences which have ruined my marriage.
Signed Sara Northrup Hubbard
Witnessed John W. Maloney and Chas [Charles] Leonard.
Advisers?
I didn’t see anything about “communists” in there, so I wonder…could Hubbard maybe be

actually meaning who he KNOWS is attacking him?
Just a thought.
But, it’s a thought which I now just found a kind of proof as to just who one of those
“advisers” likely was. Oliver Field.
On page 96 of Volume 4 of 18 we see proof that Oliver Field and Sara Northrup Hubbard’s
attorney, Caryl Warner were working together to “get” Hubbard. There’s even a handwritten
note saying “interesting!” routed directly to Oliver Field, with a nice big official stamp of the
AMA Investigation bureau at the bottom dated May 9, 1951. Nice timing, given the Dianetics
book publishing date of May 9, 1950, don’t you think?
Many years later, Oliver Field was still using this whole divorce thing to badmouth Hubbard.
In 1963, after a long conversation with a man named Kermit Miller, Oliver sent him a letter
with various attachments. The attachments were from the AMA files that FDA inspector
Sherman had copied, so it’s part of the declassified FDA documents. The link takes you to
the Vol 4 of 18 PDF from that release. One of the attachments was this Washington
Times-Herald article from 24 April 1951.
There’s some kind of handwritten note at the bottom, right under where it says that Hubbard
abducted Alexis on February 23 (1951) that Oliver chopped off for some reason. The article
is on page 410 of the same PDF. The entire letter is actually quite interesting even just for
the reason that it shows which items of “bad press” are Oliver’s favorites 12 years later in
1963.
Look what else he says in that letter.
He says:
You may recall that around 1950 L. Ron Hubbard wrote a book which he called “Dianetics.”
He seems to be in the forefront of this quasireligious group known as “Scientologists”, who
apparently seek to practice what Hubbard wrote about in his book. The file on this subject
was kept for several years in the office of our Council on Mental Health. In answering
inquiries on the subject, that office advised that the Council itself had informally considered
and discussed information coming to it with relation to the Scientologists organizations; that
the Council had not officially expressed an opinion about such organizations, but that the
Council members seemed to be convinced that none of these organizations or the treatment
methods they employ are based on a scientific medical background.
Err…what the ever living…is Oliver talking about? Dianetics isn’t medicine. Scientology isn’t
medicine. And what the hell is this Council on Mental Health?
Ah. I see.
As per Dr. Plunkett’s testimony in Senate Hearings on Illicit Narcotics of July 1955, in June
of 1951 the AMA established the committee on nervous and mental diseases. It was
renamed the Council on Mental Health in 1955.
A man named Leo Henry Bartemeier, a Roman Catholic educated at a Jesuit center in
Kansas – HE was its first chairman.
The other members were: Lauren H. Smith vice chairman, Richard J. Plunkette secretary,
Walter H. Baer, Hugh T. Carmichael, Francis M. Forster, George E. Gardner, Francis J. Gerty
(another Catholic) and M. Ralph Kaufman.
Notes: Leo also listed himself as a member of the board of directors of the WFMH and
that the AMA Narcotics committee is a SUB committee of Leo’s committee.
But, man.
A Catholic with Jesuit training on the board of the WFMH? And this wasn’t just any old
Catholic.
No, this was one who took direction from and obtained permission for just about everything
he did of importance professionally, from one of the most vicious and duplicitous popes
ever – Pope Pius XII.
That’s who was presiding over the files on Hubbard, Dianetics and Scientology and the
ATTACKS as well, obviously, and yet for 60 years now? There has not been one word about
this from ANY supposed “researcher” out there.
Not even from black-opper into the AMA’s files for the Guardian Office, Peter Joseph Lisa.
Well, you know, apparently they’re all too busy lying to their followers/recruits and chasing
down Fairy Tale “leads” about Watergate, the Illuminati, Jewish Bankers, Two Ron’s and lord
knows what else. Very important stuff, you know.
I tease, but I’m actually quite serious about the importance of this discovery of mine – that
this Pope Pius XII foot soldier was leading mental health “authority” positions in this country
and was secretly in league with trying to destroy L. Ron Hubbard and his nascent Dianetics.
It wasn’t to protect humanity, and you can take that to the bank. Not with the monstrous Pius
XII involved.
That is another World First reveal I just found.
So, now we’re going to need a special mini-section just for this guy, because in a very real
way he was a “boss” – if not THE boss – of both Austin Smith and Oliver Field when it came
to targets of mental health.
And boy, does this guy have a history. Not to mention connections.
.
Special Mini-Section on Leo Henry

Bartemeier.
another World First reveal re: the early history of Dianetics
found 8 December 2019

No, I am not against Catholics, per se, let’s get that out of the way right now.
I am against corrupt motherfrackers who have secretly operated for centuries to enforce a
vicious, neurotic and sometimes downright psychotic, hidden agenda that was and is the real
reason for the “christian” religion.
That I am 100 percent against and I always will be.
Pope Pius XII, Bartemeiers top mentor, is one of the ne plus ultra epitomes of that agenda.
Even as a young man, I can see it in him already. Can you?
High-school Pacelli – later Pius XII
I’m not going to go into all the details here about who and what this man was and what he
did to humanity in his reign as Pope (and before). That is already well-covered especially in
the following book chapters:
● The Reckoning, Chapter 9: Catholic Pope slavemasters

● The Reckoning, Chapter 10: Down the Mental
Health Rabbit Hole
But, I will take some highlights from those and line up Leo Bartemeier’s career accordingly –
Both Pius XI and XII (but especially XII – Pacelli) were not only involved in fomenting
WWII, they were involved in profiting from it.
Pius XI, is who had Pacelli negotiate the infamous Concordat with Hitler and Nazi Germany.
Hitler was so on-board with that idea that it was literally the first thing he did when he took
power.
It was that same man, Pacelli’s mentor, who said that there is a Spiritual Battle for the
minds of men (Pius XI)
By the time we’re in the 20th century and Eugenio Pacelli was head of the Vatican
intelligence network under Pope Pius XI (and this is just prior to Pacelli becoming Pope in
1939) this division, or at least the “Kingdom of Satan” is now a spiritual order – of spiritual
power – being ascribed onto Communism and not freemasonry now.
for the evil we must combat is at its origin primarily an evil of the spiritual order. From
this polluted source the monstrous emanations of the communistic system flow with satanic
logic.
– Pope Pius XI DIVINI REDEMPTORIS (On Atheistic Communism) 19 March 1937
Another way of saying “spiritual” is mental – in the sense of you are talking about the unseen
realm of Man. His thoughts, his heart, his mind, so to speak.
What this Pope is saying is that is what he wants the focus on. The MINDS of man. His
DECISIONS. Which also happens to be the realm of (and the reason for) propaganda in the
first place.
Jesuits (and the top Catholic leaders) are ALL about messing with people’s minds. That’s
their real goal actually.
…[The Jesuit Society] it seeks to rival the Divinity in its knowledge of the human heart.
From the contemplation of this pious work, we will turn to the famous Constitutions of the
Society. The Institute of the Jesuits is contained in fifteen distinct works; the book of the
Constitutions being the groundwork of the system: strongly, deeply built; with a knowledge
of mental architecture unsurpassed, except in the Spiritual Exercises of the same cunning
Builder. Subsequent Rules, Decrees, Canons, &c., are stated to have ‘resulted from the spirit
of the Institute, which they are intended to uphold and enforce.
The Novitiate written in 1846 by former ‘novice’ Jesuit Andrew Steinmetz
What was Bartemeier’s masters dissertation at the Catholic University of America? It was
titled: Doctrine of Pleasure-Pain and Learning. (Catholic University Bulletin Volumes 21-22;
1916) Note: In Freudian psychoanalysis, the pleasure principle (German: Lustprinzip) is the
instinctive seeking of pleasure and avoiding of pain.
Right on cue with ye ole Jesuits goals.
It was Pius XI, with Pacelli right by his side, that gave the world ECT as a “cure” for and a
solidarity with using it on people labeled “schizophrenic”.
Short story – Ugo Cerletti was the Roman Catholic inventor of Electro Convulsive Therapy.
Ugo used electroshock to provoke epileptic fits in animals. Many of the animals died.
Schizophrenic epileptics seemed less schizophrenic after an epileptic fit. Cerletti thought
producing convulsions in humans by electro shock, might be useful as a treatment for
schizophrenia. (Later in time that idea was proven wrong.)
In 1935, Ugo was “called” – meaning by Pope Pius XI – and was appointed to Chair of the
Department of Mental and Neurological Diseases at the University of Rome and director of
its mental patient clinic. The University of Rome has always been under the direct control of
the Popes. Lucio Bini was Ugo’s assistant.
In April 1938, Ugo Cerletti first used ECT on a human patient, diagnosed as schizophrenic.
Ugo used a patient he had previously experimented on at Mombello Asylum – his name was
Enrico. Ferdinando Accornero was one of the students observing and he provides an
eyewitness account.
That same year (with Pius XII’s approval) our man Leo Bartemeier here, became the first
Catholic training analyst (in that period analysis was not in favor in many Catholic clerical
circles, and Catholicism was not in particularly good order with the analysts).
Leo Bartemeier became the president of the American Psychoanalytic Association 1944
-1945 (Leo’s papers)
Leo helped advance Pius’s psychiatric agenda in other ways.
During WWII, John Rawlings Rees and his Tavistock Clinic boys were busily taking over
psychiatry in the British Army in World War II. (The Reckoning M. McClaughry) and on 18
June 1940 is when John Rees gives an Address to the Annual Meeting of the National
Council for Mental Hygiene where he asks for everyone to be “fifth columnists”.
On 21 April 1945, a commission of American “experts” arrived to Europe to study the

reasons for the large number of psychiatric casualties turning up in the various area
commands. Bartemeier was elected head of the commission, which included Karl
Menninger, Lawrence Kubie, John Romano and John Whitehorn. (Leo’s papers)
The commission had intended to proceed in pairs or individually to different active fronts but
the collapse of German resistance mitigated against such a plan. Instead, they basically
hung out with the British neuropsychiatrists at the 130th General Hospital.
They would have worked very closely with John Rawlings Rees, Eric Trist, and others of the
British Tavistock group.
For some reason, in their after report they made a big deal of what, to me, was their
successful misleading of patients that they saw. Misleading them as to that because they
were civilians, they were no danger to them. That’s about the biggest lie you could possibly
imagine when it comes to these guys, and what they gloated about is the infiltration aspect
they got away with – my assessment of what they’re saying. See for yourself –
Being civilians facilitated the obtaining of information from some patients. It also enabled us
to identify ourselves very readily with either privates or officers . . . because we were not, in
fact, in any one of these positions ourselves . . . We were not under any compulsion or
obligation to find ways of getting men back to duty. It was our function only to study the
conditions without the necessity of serving any utilitarian purpose by which Army doctors are
always bound and constrained.
(Office of Medical History; CHAPTER IV: European Theater of Operations)
The four men –
Karl Menninger, being the brother of William Menninger and the lovely man (extreme
sarcasm) who instructed in 1942 about Child Sexual Abuse basically being “good” for their
mental health. (See Man and International Relations: Contributions of the Social Sciences to
the Study of Conflict and Integration by J. K. Zawodny, Volume II : Integration, section A:
Personality Integration, chapter 1 Love, pps. 10, 11.)
Click to enlarge –
. .
Notes – Lauretta Bender is about one of the worst possible people to espouse as any kind of
authority regarding children, given her brutal and vicious treatment of them in the name of
‘curing’ their so-called unacceptable behaviors. She is known for giving multiple electric
shock treatments to children under the age of 5, which should give you some idea of her
vindictive nuttiness. She was also an MKUltra doctor – which means she happily participated
in some seriously nasty human experimentation.
John Romano – also Jesuit trained (at Marquette) was one of the founding members of the
Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, later part of its Committee on Medical Education
together with Karl Menninger and others. (GAP Report #8 April 1949) If you can believe the
hypocrisy, this guy actually wrote an article on medical ethics not long before he died. In
1945, Romano was offered and accepted the Chair of Psychiatry at the University of
Rochester Medical School (established 1920) until 1971; he was a founding member of the
National Institute of Mental Health
John Whitehorn, having just gotten done helping out Dr. Overholser with the Truth Drug
Committee 1942-44 (later moving on to being part of the board of the CIA front group for
MKULTRA experiments, the Society for the Investigation of Human Ecology in 1957; Marks,
Manchurian Candidate)
Lawrence Kubie, also having just gotten done helping out Dr. Overholser with the Truth
Drug Committee 1942-44 (he also shows up mixed up with Cybernetics in 1953).
“On October 31, 1942, at the request or the Psychological Warfare Branch of N.I.S., the
National Research Council activated a committee to investigate the feasibility of using drugs
in the interrogation of Prisoners of War. Responsibility for the facilitation of the Committee’s
efforts was transferred from N.I.S. to the Office of Research and Development of the OSS,
the precursor to the CIA, on 1 January 1943.
The original committee consisted of Dr. Winfred Overholser (chairman), Prof. of

Psychiatry at George Wash. U. and Director of St. Elizabeth’s Hospital, Wash., D.C.;
○ Dr. John Clare Whitehorn, Prof. of Psychiatry at Johns Hopkins;

○ Dr. Edward A. Strecker, [name misspelled as Stricker] Prof. of
Psychiat. at U. Pa.;
○ Dr. Lawrence S. Kubie, Assoc. in Neurol. at the Nurological Institute
N.Y.C.
(McClaughry, V., British Security Coordination Compendium II: The Party Boys; Aug. 2014)
Bartemeier’s Commission
Look who else was later added to the committee – Karl Menninger’s brother William.
Those Menningers, they sure get around.
Almost as much as Overholser.
● Col. R.D. Halloran of the Surgeon General’s Office, Director of and

implemented the new Neuropsychiatry Division in August 1942. Dr.
Winfred Overholser presented a bronze

plaque in memory of him at the Walter Reed Army Medical Center, in
1954, crediting Colonel Halloran with establishing the groundwork for
the Army’s present-day psychiatric program. He died at his desk
November 10 1943, William C. Menninger replaced him. Mentioned in
connection with “shell shock” and Fear studies in Popular Science,
August 1943.(click to enlarge)
Important Note – it just so happens that the Tavistock boys, right at the time of the Truth
Drug committee shifting under the OSS, were there in the U.S. doing “tours” of American
Hospitals. Note that particularly John Rees, and Dr. Hargreaves were the poster-boys for
these happy (I’m being sarcastic) little gatherings.
Dr. Menninger, (Halloran’s replacement on the truth-drug committee) is also pictured with
some seriously scary looking people – including Edward Strecker (another truth-drug
committee member) and others including Alan Gregg of the Rockefeller Institute.
.
OK.
What were these “psychiatric casualties” Bartemeier is the pied piper leading them all to
examine?
“They’re ALL schizophrenic.”

You can actually see it starting to be advertised in that Popular Mechanic magazine above,
but it was just exactly as as what happened in WWI – People that didn’t want to kill for
them any more.
Can’t have that, right? (these people are cowards, they never fight their own wars directly
and are very vindictive against people won’t fight for them).
Only this time, instead of calling it shell shock, or battle neurosis – know what Bartemeier
and friends would call it now?
Combat Exhaustion.
Right.
That’s what it is.
Not that they are SANE to not want to kill anymore. Nope. Couldn’t be that.
Just exactly how did they end up on this mission?
Well, they kind of elected themselves, in a manner of speaking. Two of those four men
(besides Bartemeier) were on the Committee on Neuropsychiatry of the National Research
Council – formed in October 1940. Guess who headed it?
Dr. Overholser.
Yep. That’s right, That gives us our Overholser tie-in to the AMA through Bartemeier.
The other members were Drs. Franklin G. Ebaugh, Foster Kennedy, Adolf Meyer, Tracy
Putnam and Harry Steckel (who was also on the Truth Drug committee) John Whitehorn and
I believe Romano as well.
However, by the time this little mission was formed in 1945, Overholser’s committee was
actually under the new OSRD.
1941 June 28 – less than six months before Pearl Harbor, Roosevelt signed the Executive
Order creating the Office of Scientific Research and Development (OSRD), with
Vannevar Bush as Director, personally responsible to the traitorous President Roosevelt. As
Director of OSRD, Bush was given “final responsibility for the entire program of civilian
scientific research and development, not only in the fields of instrumentalities of warfare, but
also in all fields of military medicine.” The NDRC, itself transferred intact from the
Council of National Defense to the new OSRD…and a new Committee on Medical
Research (CMR) was established. —- Both Overholser and Harry Stack Sullivan were
known for their secretive human experiments they did in the name of “mental healing.
Overholser as Superintendent at Saint Elizabeths Hospital and Harry Stack Sullivan as the
leading psychiatrist at Chestnut Lodge (an extremely creepy place). They were hiding what
they were doing to people under this military “medical research” and “personnel
selection”.
When the five men came back from Europe, they submitted a paper in October 1946:
Combat Exhaustion to the Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease. (pps.104, 358–389;
489–525. https://doi.org/10.1097/00005053-194610000-00002)
It was Pius XII who initiated the covert intelligence operation against America’s youth
under the guise of “anti-communism”. By April 13, 1946, it was announced – the Vatican had
officially entered the American Student political fray. This change in church policy was
heralded by Father John Courtney Murray, a leading Jesuit and the religion editor of the
prominent Catholic journal America.
“To wrest the initiative from those who have for their goal the destruction of Christian
civilization.”
Pius XII and John Courtney Murray, “Operation University,” America, issue 75 April 13, 1946,
34-35;
You can read Operation University here.
It was Pius XII that heralded the infiltration of America’s universities for mind control
purposes – 1946.
“What the Holy See wants in confronting the Soviet threat is an ‘Operation University…the
intellectual penetration of the university milieu—the winning of the universities, professors
and students, for the ideas that underlie peace and Christian world order.”
“Pius XII wants the Catholic international student movement to be a strong ally in the mission
upon which he has focused the eyes of the universal church.”
That same year, what did Bartemeier do?
Helped establish THE group for the “Advancement of Psychiatry” (the Society for Biological
Psychiatry was also formed this year in January). If you try to look up what that Group is, you
get vague statements like this: “GAP was founded in May 1946 by a group of young
psychiatrists who had served in World War II.” But really, all 5 of these men who Overholser
had approved going to Europe, were right there in the beginning together with William C.
Menninger. Keep that under your hat for now, it’s going to come up a little later on here.
Then, Bartemeier became the President of the International Psychoanalytic Association

1949-50 (Leo’s papers)
It was Pius XII who had his minions then oversee, from within, the CIA running of his
covert intelligence operation.
The CIA was working through NSA (National Student Association) to carry out covert
actions from 1950 on especially –
Over the next few years, the involvement of the NSA in CIA covert actions would grow in
many directions, far beyond what its progenitors might have imagined. NSA covert
operations would span five continents and reflect numerous government-defined objectives.
The CIA would recruit and induct dozens of American students into the secret
relationship, administer security oaths under the Espionage Act to ensure their
silence, and assign them CIA case officers to enforce their fidelity to a covert agenda.
(Paget, Patriotic Betrayal p. 94)
Leo Bartemeier became the 80th president of the American Psychiatric Association
(1951-1952). This third presidential election is billed as: “the only psychiatrist to win the
Triple Crown.“ (Leo’s papers)
It was Pius XII that gave approval (1952) for experimenting on people with
mind-affecting drugs.
And meanwhile, there’s the Vatican following suit with the other “implant” happy slavemaster
factions – Pope Pius XII is going to basically give his approval of experimenting on those
deemed feeble-minded or lunatics as labelled by state approved psychiatrists and exactly
when both the British, the Vatican (universities and mental hospitals) and Drug Company
reps and psychiatrists like William Long are going to start testing drugs that affect the
person’s mind. (McClaughry, George Hunter White: Mkultra and UFO years 2018)
That same year, the American Medical Association established a committee on mental
health with Leo Bartemeier as the chairman, a position he held for a decade.
From that position, he would help shepherd exactly what drugs etc. would be “allowed” – and
profited from – to fulfill the Vatican agenda as well as that of the British faction of these
slavemasters.
While doing all that, in 1954 LEO returned to Maryland, this time to head the Seton
Psychiatric Institute, one of the oldest of the nation’s private mental hospitals.(Leo’s papers).
And what was that place about?
Oh, you know. Seton Psychiatric Institute was established in 1844 and was the leading
mental health facility in the United States for the treatment of Catholic priests – the kind
that sexually abused children. It was one place where the Vatican HID people from
prosecution for their crimes of sexual abuse. Given that Bartemeier hung with people like
Karl Menninger who told the world that child sexual abuse was actually good for their mental
health, and given the unbelievably high prevalence of homosexual proclivities among both
the German psychiatric immigrants and the Catholic priests.
“A native of Minnesota and a former monk and priest, Sipe had pursued a career in
counseling at the old Seton Psychiatric Institute, where priests with problems were sent for
treatment…Sipe described the priesthood as a secretive world of emotionally and
sexually immature men “locked” in an adolescent stage of development and poorly
prepared in seminary for the celibate life. […] In a letter to a bishop several years later, Sipe
added this warning: “When men in authority — cardinals, bishops, rectors, abbots,
confessors, professors — are having or have had an unacknowledged-secret-active-sex
life under the guise of celibacy, an atmosphere of tolerance of behaviors within the system
is made operative.” Sipe was widely criticized by church officials, who insisted, even as the
sexual abuse scandal grew and legal settlements mounted, that celibacy was not the
problem. […]The danger is, it will upset the power structure. The resistance would come
from the established male hierarchy; they don’t want to give up power and
entitlement.“
(Baltimore Sun, 18 August 2018)
A secretive world of emotionally and sexually immature men who are obsessed with power
and entitlement, who run and have always run the Catholic church.
Still exactly the same as when they were kicked out of “heaven”, I see.
Well. Just a lovely place Seton was. And I’m absolutely positive that it was Pius XII, virulently
and secretly misogynistic and homosexual his own self, who ordered asked Bartemeier to go
there. Note: Richard Sipe has a whole report on what he found when working for Leo
Bartemeier at Seton.
From all the above, you can see the level of infiltration of the “mental health” aspect that
Bartemeier was clearly being used for by the Vatican. (and the British slavemasters, for that
matter)
Despite attacking Hubbard on the basis of “hypnosis” and along the lines of the secret
interest in “making people more suggestible” these people simultaneously felt that it had use
and that there was a need for more hypnotists. Because, like many things, it’s an art, and in
order to have a pool to choose from they needed to legitimize it.
And there was Catholic Bartemeier right in the thick of it. Again. It’s one of the few areas
where you can see the two factions of the slavemasters align, is the area of MENTAL and
SPIRITUAL control issues.
The British led the way, starting with using their club-over-medicine, the British Medical
Association. In 1955 they endorsed hypnosis for “certain purposes”. In their April 23 1955
British Medical Journal it was recommended that ALL physicians and medical students
receive training in hypnosis. In 1958, Canada followed with urging “acceptance” of the British
Medical Association report, then Bartemeier, as head of the AMA Council on Mental Health,
endorsed hypnosis. (Report on Medical Use of Hypnosis, Council on Mental Health,
American Medical Association , JAMA 168:186-189 ( (Sept. 13) ) 1958)
The initial approval by the Council on Mental Health of the American Medical Association
stated:
The surgeon, obstetrician, anesthesiologist, internist and general practitioner may

legitimately utilize these technics within the framework of their own particular field of
competence.1
Whereas the report stresses that all who use hypnosis should be cognizant of its complex
nature, it points out that controversy exists as to the hazards of hypnosis. The A.M.A. was
queried about their stand. The question “Has the A.M.A. Committee on Hypnosis ever
published officially any statement defining or implying the dangers in the use of hypnosis by
physicians?” elicited the answer that it had not done so, nor had it authorized one, and that a
member of the committee who states this is “expressing his own personal opinions.”
President of The American Board of Medical Hypnosis, Jerome Schneck explained that the
Board is sponsored by the Society for Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, the
representative scientific organization in this field since 1949. The board is affiliated with the
Institute for Research in Hypnosis, also incorporated in the state of New York. Leading
members of the Society for Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis served individually as
special consultants to the Council on Mental Health in connection with the 1958 Report
on Hypnosis.
Bartemeier’s allowing and approving of all the AMA-driven attacks on Hubbard for “using
hypnosis” was both spurious and hypocritical, to say the least, and he (and they) knew it but
did it anyway.
So.
We were looking at a 1963 letter with various attachments that Oliver Field had sent to
Kermit Miller.
Look at this part again now:
You may recall that around 1950 L. Ron Hubbard wrote a book which he called “Dianetics.”
He seems to be in the forefront of this quasireligious group known as “Scientologists”, who
apparently seek to practice what Hubbard wrote about in his book. The file on this subject
was kept for several years in the office of our Council on Mental Health. In answering
inquiries on the subject, that office advised that the Council itself had informally considered
and discussed information coming to it with relation to the Scientologists organizations; that
the Council had not officially expressed an opinion about such organizations, but that the
methods they employ are based on a scientific medical background.
Now you know who “the council” is that kept the files on Hubbard, Dianetics and Scientology.
Leo Bartemeier.
The man tightly connected to the Menningers, Overholser, the Tavistock psychiatrists in
England – that’s who was shepherding the files AND presumably Oliver Field and Austin
Smith as well. They didn’t have his “rank”, so to speak.
It’s interesting how Oliver hid Leo’s identity though, don’t you think? It also makes what I’m
about to tell you take on a whole new depth.
Oliver, in his letter to Kermit, then trots out his main items that he wants Kermit to look at.
First on the list? Austin Smiths July 29, 1950 little show. Followed by the two Time magazine
articles, then spreads that very happy with himself as to the WRECKED MARRIAGE of
Hubbard, tabloid propaganda, the Times-Herald for April 24, 1951 reporting the divorce suit
against Mr. Hubbard. A particularly salacious and vicious article.
Particularly one of those Time magazine articles is one of Oliver’s favorites – the “Of Two
Minds” one.
Two Minds/Dual Spirit
In my research extensively detailing Hubbard and the degree a sham university named
Sequoia gave him, I documented just what that article said, but perhaps a lesser known,
more esoteric and deeper understanding of that chosen title might surprise you. About that
the two “minds” are actually two BEINGS. Two people.
In fact, it is there that Hubbard made

his biggest mistake with Dianetics.
.
He had literally tripped over that being, and had success because however he did so, he
somehow managed to treat it like a being with respect and understanding and that being
decided to cooperate with this novel approach.
Whether Hubbard knew it or not, that’s what happened.
Hubbard didn’t want to realize that the “reactive mind” that he talked to in his sessions (and
called File Clerk) wasn’t just some thing, it was what I call one’s body partner, what the
ancients called the soul in the soul/spirit doctrine.
Instead, he went off chasing the spirit and pretty much always, if he even bothered to
mention them, referred to the soul in highly derogatory ways – beneath his notice.
And yet that is who he was addressing in Dianetics.
That is who can literally change the entire structure of the body, should they choose to.
Any success he ever had in Dianetics

was because of that being.
.
It’s funny how long this has been known, this Dual spirits doctrine, and equally funny just
how much it is SUPPRESSED from any real exploration or use.
Hubbard was right on top of it, yet he missed it.
Oh, he knew there was another being there, alright, but within 2 years of Dianetics he had
turned to older propaganda which wants to have it be MULTIPLE beings, and Hubbard was
calling them, what was it…entities and completely misunderstanding the true state of things.
It is ONLY THAT BEING who could

change the physical body states
Hubbard had initial success with in
Dianetics.
Veer away from that?
You got trouble.
Hubbard veered.
From there, things went from bad to worse, culminating in his OAHSPE-based “advanced
levels” OT 3 and later versions of OT 5-7 called NED for OT’s.
This was picked up and expanded later, in the 1980’s, by Captain Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org
– Erica and Max Hauri) and Alan Walter (Knowledgeism) – with Bill Robertson eventually
seeing entities in every speck of water and food and yet dying of a brain tumor, and Walter
“harnessing” entities as his personal spiritual teammates and yet dying from gross obesity
and complications of that.
BOTH of them completely ignored, degraded, and marginalized the body partner, Both were
initially in awe of the “world” going on beneath the surface yet just like Hubbard could not
conceive of the idea that one being could be so utterly impressive.
It challenged THEIR egos, and rather than face that and find out what was really going on
around here, they flinched, ran away, and decided that it couldn’t possibly be just one being.
They both decided that its FUNCTIONS were all different beings – if you can imagine the
arrogant absurdity of such an idea.
They were all duly infected with Catholic/British slavemaster disease and pet peeve – That
being doesn’t like them (for good reason) doesn’t listen to them (also for good reason) so
therefore they must be “degraded” and should be gotten rid of.
Big mistake.
But –
Revenge is their watchword.
“revenge all disobedience.”
– IMMORTALE DEI, Pope Leo XIII, November 1, 1885
And they wonder why they just can’t seem to ever quite get there, when it comes to
mastering even their own bodies.
Disobedient to them and doing their own Reckoning on these people all this time, body
partners remain unrepentant. Good thing, I say. There would literally be no human race left if
they weren’t.
Here and there though, there have been men and women who did start going in the right
direction and they were always viciously attacked or at the very least marginalized and/or
forced OFF that particular course. I’ll probably write more in-depth on this one day, but here’s
an example.
Dr. George Calvin Pitzer.
He was born 1835 and died 1909 in Los Angeles. He helped found the American Medical
College. That was one of the schools that was destroyed in Flexner’s rampage of hate
against such things.
Flexner graded American along with several other Missouri medical schools as “utterly
wretched” following his visit in 1909.
– American Medical College, Barnes Medical College, and National University of Arts and Sciences Collection
You can read the Flexner report here – Missouri starts on page 269. Judging from its review
of American Medical College (Eclectic) as “utterly wretched” on p. 276, you’ll see that
“eclectic” clearly wasn’t part of the future planned program. And, you see, Pitzer was a
Professor at that exact school – Professor of the Principles and Practice of Medicine.
What do I think was the real reason for targeting Pitzer though?
Pitzer had written a book way back in 1898, called Suggestion – A school was formed
around Pitzer’s experiences with what he called the ‘subjective’ mind, called The St. Louis
School of Suggestive Therapeutics and Medical Electricity.
Flexners report didn’t exactly rate it, which, from what I understand, was his way of having it
be beneath rating. You can at least see it mentioned in the list of Missouri schools evaluated
though, in this Report of the Missouri Medical Association July 1911 to June 1912, just after
the Flexner report came out in 1910. It mentions Pitzers school on p. 34.
Some of what Pitzer wrote is downright amazing in its prescience. He walks right along the
line of what I have just been telling you and that would not do in the hands of the
“commoners”, at all – from the slavemasters perspective. If you like, you can check out this
course from 1899. Although not put together by Pitzer, if you look at page 13 of the PDF you
can get a pretty good idea, again, of why this kind of thing was completely smashed down
upon by the slavemasters.
Did you know…
That union-of-the-two was actually the original point of hypnosis back then?
Of course, as usual, coming from the arrogant

I’m-better-than-you-and-won’t-even-acknowledge-you-exist mentality, that didn’t always
come out quite like how some people planned.
But that union though, that was a very real desire.
…Is there for us also any possibility of a like resurrection into reality and day? Is there for us
any sleep so deep that waking from it after the likeness of perfect man we shall be satisfied;
and shall see face to face; and shall know even as also we are known?
– The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers Volume I – 1903
No, it is not SLEEP or some drugged up unaware state that is needed. That much I’ll say for
the moment.
Just like Hubbard, Robertson, Walter and I imagine a host of others throughout history,
watch British Society of Psychical Research man, Fredric Myers, do the exact same flinch,
the exact same running way to a more “comfortable” theory.
First, let me show you how he recognizes there is someone else there.
From Fredric Myers 700+ pages book set published in February 1903 – note: Beneath is a
reference to what Fredric Myers called the subliminal mind, what some call today the
subconscious mind.
That some guess of a more continuous consciousness, of an identity unmoved

and stable beneath the tossing of the psychic storm, must needs have been
suggested by all those strange interruptions?
– The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers Volume I
An identity, ie: a PERSON.
One who is UNMOVED and stable – despite everything you do to it.
I think that’s beautiful.
A truly magnificent being to stay so true to their “job”, their selves, all this time. Wouldn’t you
say? Enough to make some people feel they might not quite be living up to their end of the
bargain.
.
In this example, he knows WHO is actually the important one recording the “engrams”
Hubbard tripped over.
…there are occasional indications that some memory of the pain, say, of an
operation, has persisted in some stratum of the personality;—thus apparently
indicating that there was somewhere an actual consciousness of the pain when
the operation was performed.
The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers Volume I, Chapter 5
Here’s Myers talking about the ‘subliminal’ self, versus some other self, you understand.
The subliminal (or ultra-marginal) mental life is sufficiently complex and

continuous to justify us in speaking of a subliminal Self.
– The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers Volume I
.
Now watch him flinch and run away
from that truth –
and invent the same wrong-headed theory about MULTIPLE beings that L. Ron Hubbard did.
He starts pushing (fact-slipping) that this other ‘self’ is some kind ‘complex’ of lives – aka
demons.
…each man is essentially a spirit, controlling an organism which

is itself a complex of lower and smaller lives.
…the man of genius …effects a successful co-operation of an unusually large

number of elements of his personality — reaching a stage of integration slightly in
advance of our own.
The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers – Volume II
Oh it’s – the spirit – is the only one controlling that “organism” is it? Explain cancer then.
Pretty shitty control. But hey, what do they blame the cancer on, even though they think they
are in control? Oh yea, that evil organism.
Sheesh. You can’t have it both ways, you idjiots.

And now instead of there being another self? Or person? It’s an organism. And…it’s a
COMPLEX of LOWER – see the arrogant attitude – and SMALLER – more arrogance –
lives.
OK.
So, I personally think this is all part of the reason for titling the 1950 Time attack article re
Dianetics (which is unsourced, by the way) as Of Two Minds.
–––
More AMA documents
Coming back to Oliver’s list of items he thought were best, that he send to Kermit Miller, it’s
interesting how Oliver does NOT mention Wertham or Rollo May, the first two main attacks.
Why not? I believe my article proves why not, if investigated it would lead to places Field
doesn’t want people to look, connections that were STILL hidden 70 years later before I dug
them out.
Just as Leo Bartemeier was.
Ah! But there’s even more to this Oliver/Kermit story.
FDA Inspector Hailey interviewed Mr.Kermit V. Miller who lost his wife and three children
through a divorce. Kermit blames this on his wife’s infatuation with Scientology, yet it was
HIM that filed for divorce in the first place. While trying to get everybody and their brother to
investigate Scientology for what were, essentially, his failings, there was Oliver Field
spending TWO HOURS talking to the guy.
Know what one of the things they talked about was? Oliver telling the guy that a
Scientologist was taking LSD.
1. 47 SW 11th Street – Mr. Miller does not know who operates this establishment. However,
he says that he has heard a rumor that a redheaded individual called “Red” Thornton has
some sort of connection with this Chapter. He said he had heard that this individual was
taking some sort of drug to immunize himself against radiation and possibly had given
it to other members. Mr. Miller says he described this drug to Oliver Fields of AMA and was
told that it was probably “Lysergic Acid”. This is a very dangerous drug.
(Vol 6 of 18 p.151-153, FDA documents)

LSD?
Really Oliver?
Oh hey. Kermit…and Kermit.
Nope. Ain’t goin’ there.
Yeah. Ok. Anyways…
You’ll appreciate the irony, not to mention the STUPIDITY of Oliver Field acting like LSD is
only used by bad people and cults, given the Master Timeline entry showing what some of
the most powerful people in the background that he is subordinate to were doing –
1950 – June 1 to 5 – George Raines, the Chief of Psychiatry at the Naval Medical
(research) center Bethesda tells Theodore Wiprud that Hubbard is a PHONY. George
Raines has more then one published paper together with Robert Cohn and Project
CHATTER man Charles Savage. (one 1948 example here) —Robert Cohn said in an
interview when George Raines hired him with a million dollar budget in 1952: “We were
interested in LSD, thinking it could create an experimental psychosis, and at that time
we believed it was safe to take. Evarts and Charlie Savage organized a series of studies on
LSD, not only clinically, with volunteers and patients, but with animals as well.” See? All
three were still at ye ole secret drug testing ala CHATTER and BLUEBIRD in 1952. – These
are all the very same people and the very same research line of secret projects Thorvald
had his eye on Hubbbard for, yet NOW he’s a “phony”.
So yeah.
dunce cap for Oliver on that one.
Next topic –
The next document mentions from the AMA files show the hand of Thorvald Solberg,
Austin Smith and Oliver Field’s influence and interest in shutting down the Hubbard Dianetic
Research Foundation.
STATE OF NEW JERSEY AGAINST DIANETIC RESEARCH FOUNDATION

Source: Exhibits 6 and 7.
Exhibit 6: AMA reply 3/19/51 to Dr. E.S. Hallinger, Secretary of Board of
Medical Examiners, Trenton, New Jersey.
Exhibit 7: State of New Jersey letter, Department of Law and Public Safety,
3/14/51 requesting information of the AMA to prepare a case charging they were
conducting a school for teaching Dianetics at 275 Morris Ave., Elizabeth, New
Jersey which violated the healing arts practices of this state,
Exhibit 23: Denver, Colorado Better Business Bureau information letter 12/10/51
indicates that Hubbard became involved in a Federal Bankruptcy proceedings and
left the state before the New Jersey charges could be heard against
(Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents pp. 229-242, FDA Inspector R.D. Sherman detailing AMA files on Hubbard,
Scientology)
I have not yet found which documents those are as yet, but I did find a 31 January 1963
summation as given by FDA inspector W. Remle Grove in the H-2 PDF – p. 4.
The Board meeting of October 11, 1950 with Dr. David B. Allman presiding and Dr.
E. S. Hallinger, Secretary, made the following mention of Hubbard Dianetics
Foundation, Inc.,
“The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation of Elizabeth, N. J. is conducting a

medical school without a license and practicing medicine. This Foundation
charges $500,’ for a course of one month and we have been told upon completion
of same they issue a certificate or diploma with an ‘M.D.’ degree, meaning’ Master
of Dianetics. These people treat by mental means only.
See the AMA influence there? Heck, they can’t even keep their own lies straight.
“MENTAL MEANS only” is not even under the purview of MEDICINE by their own rules
so…wow.
So desperate.
The Board of Medical Examiners didn’t want to be responsible for doing anything other than
having a record that the HDRF was under investigation, apparently, because this is what
happened next –
After some discussion Dr. Schaaf moved, ‘That the Secretary be instructed to
write a letter to the Attorney General stating that this matter has been referred to
us and the Board is without jurisdiction
and request him to refer it to the proper authorities – in our opinion it is a vital
matter and we are deeply interested in the disposition made of this case.’
Seconded by Dr. Corrigan and unanimously
carried.”
Did you notice how a big point was made about charging $500 for a Dianetics course?
That was courtesy of Austin Smith and Oliver Field, who also made sure that (plus a lot
more) showed up in a “letter to the Editor” of JAMA in January 1951 by a Camarillo State
Hospital ghoul Dr. Ravitch, no less.
Note: The address Ravitch lists is the address for Camarillo State Hospital: Department of
Mental Hygiene. Which, if you don’t know, “mental hygiene” was kind of a code-name for
Eugenics. Camarillo was one of the main places in the U.S. for pharmaceutical drugs to be
tested on hapless mental patients, hence this obviously solicited attack letter from a
Camarillo psychiatrist. From one of my Camarillo series posts:
By 1957, Camarillo was jammed with more than 7,000 patients, shock treatments were
standard and lobotomies were also performed, as well as sterilizations. The 5X increase was
often justified as reasoning to sterilize more patients in order to increase “eugenic efficiency.
(Stern, “From Legislation to Lived Experience”, p. 104).
As if all of that wasn’t horrifying enough, during the 1950s and 1960s especially, the
hospital was at the forefront of so-called treatments of schizophrenia* and patients
were being used as “testing grounds” for unsavory drug and therapy “procedures”!
Dr. Ravitch’s MD was gained at University of Minnesota in 1927, I don’t know where he
worked, yet, after that but he was first licensed in California 6 June 1946. But man, that guys
medical record is a complete train wreck after that. Felonies, Misdemeanors, Probation and
finally – a cancelled medical license. The other interesting thing is there is only ONE
record in JAMA from this guy, no other papers.
Now for Ravitch’s letter –
To the Editor:— With considerable anxiety I have watched the cult “dianetics”
develop from the first appearance of its principles in Science Fiction Magazine. I
am concerned about its growth and popular acceptance, and I fear that the world
has had dumped on it a new therapy which will have the staying power of
chiropractic, with as little scientific background to support it. It is a phenomenon
of some sort, and full of meaning, that over 500,000 copies of the book are
supposed to have been sold. Countless persons, without proper background and
without understanding of basic human motives and drives, are “auditing” each
other, and as a result mental hospitals may receive as patients many whose first
psychotic breakdown occurred during such “auditing.” The “auditors” simply do
not know how to handle the material elicited. The dangers inherent in such
amateurish “auditing” are readily apparent. Since these persons cannot recognize
an incipient psychosis, adequate treatment my be delayed, and delay, as pointed
out in Bellak’s book, “Dementia Precox,” definitely reduces the chances for
recovery or improvement.
In a short time there has developed a demand on the part of thousands of persons
for training as professional “auditors.” To meet this demand, I am informed, there
have been established two training centers in the United States, in Elizabeth, N.J.,
and in Los Angeles. The course lasts one month, and tuition is said to be $500.
The initial Los Angeles enrollment was 1,000 persons, many having been turned
away. An income of $500,000 for the Dianetic Foundation in one month is certainly
not bad. This, however, is only the beginning. There is being projected a Dianetic
College or University with a two year course, which will no doubt give graduates
greater prestige.
Devotees of dianetics, like the devotees of cults, are not moved by unfavorable
statements made by men of recognized scientific background. These fanatics
support the new cult with a religious fervor. In vain have I shown them comments
by scientific critics. One gets the same answers that have so often been heard
from enthusiasts for other cults. For one thing, one hears that the medical
profession is really a medical trust that is trying to keep out all forms of treatment
but its own. The new cult is growing by the vigorous exploitation of testimonials. I
have already listened to a testimonial of a cure of agoraphobia. Another person
has reported that since he has been “audited” he is a better conversationalist.
One woman I know is about to start being “audited” after listening to a testimonial
by someone who had gotten rid of many “engrams” through dianetics. This
dianeticized person claimed that her thinking had improved and hence her
abilities as a stock market trader had become markedly sharper, the whole
process resulting in her taking profits of $13,000 within a few days. And so the
testimonials go.
In Los Angeles the dianetics enthusiasts meet every Sunday morning in a theater
to hear about the latest procedures and to listen to exegeses of the great book. As
one would expect, the spirit of these meetings has the coloring that goes with
religious zeal. At one of these meetings I saw one man get up and call attention to
some contradictory phases of the teachings of the book. He was booed and
hooted down, to the relief of the moderator. Professional “auditors” are setting up
offices throughout the country and advertising for patients in the good old
chiropractic way. Something should be done to expose irrefutably this
nonsensical tomfoolery. – Samuel J. Ravitch, M.D. Box A, Camarillo, Calif.
(JAMA; January 13, 1951, Vol 145, No. 2, “Dianetics” letter to editor Austin Smith by Camarillo State Hospital
ghoul Dr. Samuel J. Ravitch. Note: the article listing for this journal pulls this one letter out as a separate listing
just to highlight it!)
Here’s the letter image –

Notice how Ravitch says: “tuition is said to be $500″ – He got that from Austin Smith/Oliver
Field.
Notice this part: “An income of $500,000 for the Dianetic Foundation in one month…” Well,
now. Seems that Sara Northrup’s statements about the amount of money coming into the
HDRF weren’t too far off after all. In Cd #1, Folder #5 PDF p. 156 of the Declassified FDA
documents, Sara, as part of her divorce papers from Hubbard, said that the HDRF received
over one million dollars in 1950. To give you an idea, in today’s dollars that’s close to ten
million dollars. That’s another reason why the AMA is concerned – MONEY. Notice this
part: “There is being projected a Dianetic College or University with a two year course, which
will no doubt give graduates greater prestige.” That’s more than likely a reference to Joseph
Hough’s diploma mill Sequoia University and its Department of Scientology. My extensive
research about all that showed that giving Hubbard a “degree” from Sequoia seemed to be
part of a rather involved attempt to set him up.
Since Joseph Hough is known to have promoted chiropractic medicine, a long (really long)
term pet attack project of the AMA’s Morris Fishbein, Austin Smith and Oliver Field?
It wouldn’t be much of a stretch to have one or more of those three using Hough to pull
Hubbard into that Sequoia University mess.
Perhaps in exchange for mercy?
Because it sure doesn’t seem like they ever attacked him (after 1950) in nearly the same
vicious ways they were going after other people. Including Hubbard.
Deal made?
Maybe so.
Backing up a little, another interesting thing about that meeting of the Board of Examiners is
the timing. October 1950 happens to be when Hubbard kind of suddenly takes off for Palm
Springs.
I think one of his CIA buddies warned him of what was coming from the unhappy loser
department in the April 1950 who-gets-Hubbard contest between the Navy and the CIA.
The Navy was the –

– in that scenario.
And Thorvald (Navy) was still majorly steamed about it. Vindictive even. I don’t think he ever
let go of it, and certainly neither did his directed vicious little chihuahuas – Austin and Oliver.
Those two were so fricking clueless as to the BIG picture, it’s a wonder they even managed
to fit their hats on their hugely self-deluded heads.
Hubbard talks about the scene starting in one of his 1952 lectures, and this is where find
another reference to starting a college (which we saw mentioned in Dr. Ravitch’s letter). It
was Hubbard himself who said he was talking about that in the Fall of 1950.
And I found out something very horrible in October of 1950. We had taken in
hundreds of thousands of dollars, all told, and it was running on an accounting
system of dumping it all in a barrel outside the door and hauling the barrel down
to a bank every once in a while — just grim: The accounting was just horrible!
More important to me was the fact that by October of 1950 I had not written a
second book bringing anyone up-to-date, I had not done any broad writing of the
subject and my advance work in research was suffering. What I was doing was a
lot of business management.
It was obviously leading nowhere because nobody could keep track of it anyhow,
and everybody was trying like mad to keep everything on the straight and narrow
but everybody was riding off in all different directions. It was a scramble; it was
grim. And I simply pulled out of the Foundations, and I began to research and
work as best I could.
My first effort at this was in Palm Springs. I went down to Palm Springs, I got a
modest little house down on the edge of the desert and I sat down there and I
figured out and wrote down the chart notes on the Hubbard Chart of Human
Evaluation. I severed connections actually, actively with the Foundations, and
using some royalty money and so forth, worked out the chart you find in Science
of Survival.
Then a great many sorrowful things happened to me in a rapid-fire order — I had

neglected everything, everywhere practically — a lot of unfortunate incidents of
one sort or another.
Finally, to get some peace and quiet, I went down to Cuba. And I sat down in Cuba
with a recording Sound scriber and I dictated in a space of three weeks the book
Science of Survival, which brought up the techniques and gave the evaluation of
human behavior and so on, and then came back up here to Wichita. I was pretty
tired by that time. I hadn’t been getting much processing; a lot of things had been
happening to me. And when I got here to Wichita, on April 15, 1951, a man here
very kindly took it upon himself to arrange the affairs of Dianetics and square
them around in some fashion so that Dianetics could go on as a foundation.
The affairs of the old Foundations were not cleaned up, however, and this local
Foundation, while perfectly solvent and carrying on as best it could, was
nevertheless being consistently and continually hit by slopovers from the old
Foundations, where the bookkeeping was bad. To this day I don’t know if there is
a set of books for the old Foundations.
There are some bank accounts and canceled checks. Accountants will go round
and round for a week or two, and then they will suddenly come out and say, “I
can’t do anything about it.” People will look at those books and they just
practically faint. The U.S. government looks at it and says, “Hm, it would be very
interesting if . . .” but they can’t even make enough sense out of it to get a suit on
their hands. It is very grim.
These affairs were not wound up, and the windup of them kicked back this last
August [1951] into this local Foundation here. A $189 bill was leveled at the local
Foundation and a receivership for this local Foundation was demanded. It was not
prepared or contested in court by the officers of the current Foundation. And the
receivership was planted just like that, and then this Foundation had to give a
bond.
They appealed it. January 7, 1952, an appeal was supposed to be filed at the Court
of Appeals in Topeka. There was ample time to prepare it — clear from August to
January — but it was not prepared and it was not filed. I did not even know it was
the closing date until the eighth of January. It was too late. As a consequence, a
receivership on this Foundation was confirmed. A bond was posted again. And
several lawyers around town, evidently fed suits by Dun and Bradstreet (which
interested itself in collecting suits against the Foundation, according to a report I
get from one of Dun and Bradstreet’s lawyers), evidently did this very interesting
trick: they leveled at this Foundation all the eastern Foundation debts.
One man came through very nobly and he paid off all those debts; there was some
$11,000 outstanding, I think. When he had them all paid and they had a journal
entry ready to go into court dismissing the receivership — the Foundation was
going to be in the clear — this Dun and Bradstreet lawyer, without any turning
around on his agreement, reportedly said, “We have another suit here for $5,000,
and you have to pay up or shut up. Now, we’ve held up the journal entry.” Having
already pulled $11,000 out, he mysteriously thought that the Foundation could
produce another $5,000. And so it went by the boards, because it was obvious
that he would keep finding debts here and there where debts had never been
listed and just keep knocking this Foundation to pieces.
However, watching the operation of the local Foundation and seeing that it was
terribly enturbulated most of the time about its indebtednesses, and finding out
that I could not put an adequate school into existence there, on February 12 I
resigned from this Foundation. I sold them back my stock in this Foundation and
severed connections with it completely. And then just a few days ago — this was
quite surprising to me — the local Foundation filed voluntary bankruptcy in order
to shut off this line of suits that were continuing to come in. I don’t know whether
the local Foundation is going to continue to operate under its own name or not.
This I don’t know. I no longer have any interest in this local Foundation at all.
But when I resigned February the twelfth, it was to establish Hubbard College, a
graduate school for auditors. And the plan of Hubbard College is to teach
Dianetics the best that it can be taught and issue degrees in the subject, which we
have a perfect right to do. It is a plan to make a film school, so that a Bachelor of
Dianetics will be able to view some fifty hours of lectures and demonstrations on
sixteen-millimeter sound film. And as you can see, this would be quite a course of
instruction.
Now, this organization has several associates out across the country that it is
enfranchising, and its business is going along very happily and very cheerfully.
As a matter of fact, it is not even vaguely influenced or impinged upon by
Foundation affairs, for an excellent reason: Nobody ever challenged my right to
teach Dianetics.
The Foundation control was in my hands for, I think, three minutes once. That was
the estimated time that it took for me to sign six stock certificates as having
received them and sign them as having given them back to the local Foundation
on February 12 this year. They had not issued me any stock, and in order for me to
resign I had to accept my stock and turn it back. So I had never even owned any
stock in the Foundation until that moment.
Well, nobody has ever challenged my right to teach Dianetics; it exists in the
minute books of all the old Foundations. And I have often talked to groups about
someday putting together a university. Someday, somehow, on whatever
shoestring or whatever ten billion dollars — it didn’t matter — someday there was
going to be a university of Dianetics. Only it was going to be more than a
university of Dianetics: it was going to be a university of arts and science,
whereby we were going to try to coordinate and correlate science and get it out of
its specialized categories into a correlated category.
This goal goes back to 1950. In the fall of 1950 I was talking about this. I have had
projects on with the army, for instance, trying to get old campsites from them and
so forth, in order to form this university.
Well, it is formed; it is here in Wichita. It is just on its trembling, stumbling small

feet right now, but it undoubtedly can progress. One of the things it will do is
make widely available instruction in Dianetics as has not been made available
before — probably make available correspondence courses and so forth, in it.
Now, I only did this at a time when Dianetics became a complete package.
This school down here, for instance — the university, the college — is going to
teach an extended course, a nightly course. That is, a person can go five nights a
week, and they emerge at the other end of this with a certification and so on.
Hubbard Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics and Dianetics Business – February 25,
1952
See that part that says: “One man came through very nobly…”?
That’s Don Purcell.
And…well. Let’s just say that the 2 years later John Galusha version of all this is rather
different.
John Galusha writes to the BBB of Phoenix on 12 May 1954 (folder 4 p. 77-79):
“In November 1950 Hubbard became convinced that the corporation was not sound and that
it could not attain to its professed goal of helping people. He attempted to withdraw his name
from it and was variously inveighed against. He had only one vote in seven. forced to leave it
in possession and continued use of his name, he retired in December to Palm Springs
California where he set up a modest research laboratory.”
…Van Vogt, the principle mover in the Los Angeles Foundation and others were intensely
provoked at Hubbard’s withdrawl. Hubbards wife…threatened Hubbard with public scandal if
he did not support the Foundations. Hubbard, busy writing a new book, refused to lend any
credence to these threats or those of the Elizabeth board and went to Cuba where he
completed a 125,000 book…As their young child had always been under his, not her
mother’s care, the child accompanied him. […[Hubbard made no statements of any kind
during all this period and when he became aware that they had been made, ordered his
separated wife to him, had her sign a confession to perjury…[…]Meanwhile the Elizabeth
Foundation over which Hubbard had never had power beyond his personality, sold itself to
one Don G. Purcell, an oilman of Kansas.”
The letter also details what happened, theoretically, with Purcell that led to the falling out
resulting in Hubbard resigning in early 1952 whereupon he moved to Phoenix.
Also, if it was known that Hubbard had withdrawn, as Galusha seems to imply that it was,
why is Van Vogt still being supportive of Dianetics in 1951? Oh wait, I get it, because he’s
running one of the Foundations.
What am I referring to? This, that I found in the AMA files given to the FDA.
A.E. Van Vogt had responded to JAMA and Camarillo ghoul Dr. Ravitch’s letter 11 days later
on 24 January 1951, with letterhead showing a HDRF inc. of California. It’s interesting that
one of the first things that he wanted to address was this statement by Ravitch: “The initial
Los Angeles enrollment was 1,000 persons, many having been turned away. An income of
$500,000 for the Dianetic Foundation in one month is certainly not bad.” Van Vogt
responding with “However, there were not as Dr. Ravitch states a thousand people enrolled
for the first course in Dianetics offered in Los Angeles. The number was just over a
hundred.” It seems odd to me that was such a concern of Van Vogt’s but I’d like to point out
that he DOES NOT actually specifically counter that monthly income amount which is very
interesting to me.
**Reference: (folder 3 FDA documents p. 240-42, letter to Jama by A.E. Van Vogt; part of the AMA documents
from Oliver Field; Exhibit 22 (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents pp. 229-242)
Are we hiding how much money was really coming in?
Van Vogt then proceeds to answer some of the main chosen propaganda campaign ideas:
that Dianetics first appeared in a Science Fiction magazine, the cult label, pointing out that
term is normally applied to religions, mysticisms etc and that “A mere belief cannot be
investigated.A technique can be.” He then spends some time talking about what an engram
is in his understanding, and that a “lunatic fringe” has gathered around dianetics – which is
odd considering Ravitch didn’t actually use those words, but oh well. He finishes with
mentioning the validation pamphlet that will “come out in February” – which was also part of
Oliver Field’s JAMA files. You can read about that here.
Next item –
A 10 November 1968 report from Inspector Edward R. Atkins to the Director, Dallas district
about a woman named Velma Johanson who had been committed to Taub Hospital in
Houston Texas for psychiatric care.
Velma had been getting auditing with an E-meter and her family thought that “Scientology
had caused her mental breakdown” and that she had told her daughter that “she was a
god”. The long and short of it is that Velma was tricked into being taken to the psychiatric
ward and: “Dr. Walter J. DeFoy, a resident psychiatrist, was interviewed. Dr. DeFoy said that
he had been treating Mrs. Johanson since her arrival. He said that Mrs. Johanson is acutely
psychotic, that she is presently under a religious delusion that she is a god. His prognosis
is that she is a paranoid schizophrenic. He stated that she may have been schizophrenic
most of her life.” (B-1, h-68 p. 34-43 FDA declassified documents; letter from Atkins to Dallas
Director)
Interestingly enough, Dr. DeFoy was unwilling to say that Scientology was the cause. My
guess is because that would derail their whole schizophrenia is genetic kick they were
forever going on about, so he said; “Dr. DeFoy said that he did not believe that the E-Meter
or the Scientology Center had caused her problems.”
So, what is interesting to me here, is that the AMA apparently approves of that anyone who
thinks they are a “God”, or in other parlance, an immortal spiritual being, therefore thusly
they are schizophrenic.
Given the strong influence of displaced Jesuits in German society starting back in the
1800’s, one can see the strongly Catholic influence of challenges to the “One God”
paradigm clearly influencing the whole idea of “dementia praecox” – which was later
re-named as schizophrenia.
The other very interesting point that shouldn’t go un-noticed in this report, is this part: “Mr.
Johanson said that he has spent over $2,000 at the center and showed this inspector
several cancelled checks. It should be noted that two of the checks were deposited in a
Switzerland bank account.”
We’ll just file that under follow the money for future reference shall we?
This report also goes on for what I consider to be WAY to long about what the hell vitamins
Velma was taking. Vitamins. It’s as if the AMA/FDA are acting like they are live grenades or
some kind of weapons or something.
These people are just so…well, the word weird comes to mind.
The only reason to be scared or obsessive about vitamins are imbalances by improper
usage, is what they say, but I think it’s obvious that it’s the fact that these are not
CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES. AKA not CONTROLLED PROFIT. The fear that vitamins or
natural supplements might actually work and seriously cut into drug-profits can’t be
disallowed as a more hidden, but definitely there, motivation.
.
Hubbard’s Challenge to Psychiatry
Hubbard brings out HIS dark side
Exhibit 9 (starting p. 237 folder 3) is from the AMA files that Oliver Field gave to Mr.
Sherman of the FDA (see (Vol 4 of 18 p. 231). It is a 12 February 1951 announcement by
Charles Leonard of the HDRF that L. Ron Hubbard is “tired of turning the other cheek”
and has issued a challenge to psychiatry, especially to the Dr.s Menninger. The document is
stamped 2 days later by the AMA Bureau of Investigation. The full announcement can be
found uploaded separately here – here’s an image of the first page of it.
Let’s look at this a bit closer, yeah?
Long aware that organized opposition, unduly alarmed by the phenomenal spread of
dianetics, has been flailing at him “from behind the scenes and from behind the armor of
their professional immunity,” even inciting to legal action against the furthering of dianetic
knowledge, Hubbard has authorized the following letter to the Menninger Clinic at Topeka,
Kansas, the American Psychiatric Association, and the New York Psychiatric
Advancement Committee…
Look at that last item named.
First of all, the correct name is: The Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry (GAP) but I
understand the somewhat shorhanded and geographically located way Hubbard referred to
it.
But hey, we know what that is now, right?
That’s Leo Bartemeier and Dr. Overholser’s guys who went and hung out with the Tavistock
psychiatrists in 1945. They came back and helped establish the group for the “Advancement
of Psychiatry” in May of 1946. It was a direct outcropping of John Rawlings Rees “5th
columnist” suggestion to psychiatrists to infiltrate society, and that the two areas of society
most difficult to infiltrate were law and medicine. (Rees, 18 June 1940, Address)
William Menninger wrote: ” the founding group was seeking a way in which American
psychiatry could give more forceful leadership, both medically and socially.”
GAP’s later formulated way of doing this, or one way, was to deliberately target and discuss
“controversial” psycho-social issues, evident in the 1950 Committee on Social Issues’ Report
“The Social Responsibility of Psychiatry, A Statement of Orientation” published out of New
York.
Here’s an example of a report coming out of New York. The thing practically reads like a
manifesto of what John Rawlings Rees and the British wanted to see happen.
BUT if we look earlier, we see that GAP’s very first report was by the Committee on
Therapy on the subject of “promiscuous and indiscriminate use of electro-shock therapy.”
(Menninger, Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948)
Look whose name is on the Committee of Therapy – why, it’s George Raines!
He’s still listed on it in that January 1950 Report #8 –

By the way – part of Sherman’s summary document that we opened this Oliver Field section
with verifies Omar Garrison’s quoting of a letter from Theodore Wiprud to Austin E. Smith
evincing George N. Raines supposed attitude towards Hubbard and Dianetics.(Vol 4 of 18
p. 242 ) Notice that it says: “Captain George N. Raines Navl Medical Center, Bethesda,
Maryland knew both Winter and Hubbard as “phonies.”.”
GEORGE NEELY RAINES
And oh look! Who else is on that committee with George? Why, it’s Lawrence Kubie of Leo
Bartemeier’s special little WWII team, who also was on the original Truth Drug committee
with Overholser.
Such a small world.

All right there in 1950, the same year that they all wanted to kidnap Hubbard and his
research to be just as out of view as George Raines and Charles Savage Project CHATTER
work.
As you now know, Wikipedia’s description of the 1946 founders as “psychiatrists who had
served in WWII” is quite the blandly euphemistic way to describe who some of these people
were and who they hired and associated with.
As another example, take Gardner Murphy, the Director of Research at the Menninger
Foundation. He was chosen by Elmo Roper to be part of a secret “troika” – group of 3 –
psychologists to perform psychological warfare just before the COI became the OSS – the
precursor to the CIA. So that would have been in 1942 approximately during WWII.
Before WWII (also during and after) Gardner Murphy was very active in telepathy research
for the ASPR (American Society of Psychical Research). My research on William Dudley
Pelley, who was part of the “spiritual” propaganda campaign the British were running back
then, uncovered Murphy’s connections into all that. In addition, my research into the distinct
science-fiction parallels between Ron’s Org’s Captain Bill Robertson, the Unification Church
and the Church of Scientology revealed Murphy’s role in tandem with, or rather maybe
“picking up the torch” by Britisher Anthony Brooke. He was helping to proselytize Americans
into believing that Reverend Moon was connected with alien intelligences from Ashtar
command.
Yep, it’s really that kooky.
Here’s an example telepathy experiment Murphy was involved with in 1937 –

1937 – Before leaving on a search for a missing plane near the North Pole, arctic
explorer and friend Sir Hubert Wilkins agreed to help Sherman with an experiment
in mind-to-mind communication. Each day at a pre-arranged time, Wilkins
attempted to send thoughts of what had transpired that day to Sherman 3400
miles away in New York City. Sherman recorded his impressions and immediately
mailed the transcripts to Gardner Murphy, head of the parapsychology department
at Columbia university, who registered and filed them. When later compared to a
diary Wilkins had kept, Sherman’s impressions proved to be 70% accurate. The
full story is told in the book Sherman and Wilkins co-authored, Thoughts Through
Space [Creative Age Press,1942].
– Harold Sherman chronology.
Gardner was also involved with essentially supporting all these weird spin-off organizations
to help the CIA spread LSD among American youth – a subversion operation not an
“awakening” as so many dupes liked to think it was. This was while he was working at the
Menninger Foundation, which he started working at in 1952, and as part of this “Group for
the Advancement of Psychiatry.”
BIO – From 1952, he worked as director of research for the Menninger Foundation in
Topeka, Kansas. He was elected to the presidency of the American Psychological
Association in 1944. He subsequently served as the President of the British Society for
Psychical Research in 1949 (which he had joined in 1917), and was Director of the
Parapsychology Foundation in 1951.
Again, as noted earlier, Karl Menninger, being the brother of William Menninger and the
lovely man (extreme sarcasm) who instructed about child sexual abuse essentially being
“good” for their mental health.
GAP Report #8 sows that Bartemeier was there right in the beginning, starting out as
chairman of the Committee on Psychiatry in Industry while he was in Detroit. He was even
made president of the Group during 1963-65. You can see him still shilling John Rees
infilration of Society aspect, for GAP, with his book Psychiatry and Public Affairs. That same
report #8 also shows that Daniel Blain, President of the American Psychiatric Association
during the initial attacks period against Hubbard, was on the Group’s Committee on Therapy.
The fact that Hubbard targeted the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry in his
challenge was a really unique and I must say, ingenious, way of bringing into the limelight
the men he knew were essentially behind targeting him, without specifically naming
Thorvald, Overholser and the Bartemeier crew.
He was also calling their bluff at the same time, since he knew they knew…
That what he had found out about unconscious memory recording was TRUE.
What was Hubbard’s challenge to psychiatry?
“If two impartial judges will select two neurotic persons, without advice from
either psychiatrists or dianeticists, our Foundation will be happy to give them into
the hands of psychiatrists for one week, with before and after psychometries of
the most rigorous nature. Thereafter our Foundation will give them dianetic
processing for one week, with comparative psychometries. If the resultant
psychometries prove that dianetics had not done uniformly more for these
persons than psychiatry, Mr. Hubbard will be perfectly willing to withdraw his
book, “Dianetics,” and admit that dianetics is not better than psychotherapy.”
The silence was deafening.

Why would psychiatry not take up Hubbard in this challenge (if it was indeed by Hubbard) –
it was the perfect opportunity to shoot him down once and for all.
Unless…yeah. You guessed it. They already knew it worked. They didn’t want anyone
else to know, officially, that it worked. But also, there were a few other minor problems,
sarcastically speaking. Hubbard refused to HIDE it and it being so public and easily
available? Undercut the entire psychotherapy/psychiatry DRUG-fueled industry.
Can’t have that, right?
Hubbard had repeatedly entreated psychiatrists, psychologists and psychoanalysts, both

in-person and otherwise to inspect and try Dianetics for themselves and that he would be
happy to help in any serious study of Dianetics. Besides the fact that Dr. Winfred Overholser
shut him down after he refused Thorvald Solberg’s “offer”, not a single one of these
authoritative psychiatric types had ever actually investigated the subject.
Instead, you get squirrelly gossipy jesuit-style sub-understanding statements like this from
the American Psychiatric Association – I refer to the official letter of Daniel Blain to Diana
Bennett of the National Better Business Bureau dated 1 August 1950. (Folder 3 FDA
Declassified documents p. 320)
Daniel, do recall, was also part of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry and on the
same Committee on Therapy with Lawrence Kubie and George N. Raines (Bethesd Naval
Hospital, Project CHATTER).
Daniel is responding to her letter of 17 July 1950 (p. 322). Daniel refers to a vague source
then referring to a hodgepodge of equally vague sources, who he then refers to
all-inclusively as “their” opinion on Dianetics being:
“Hubbard’s approach is unscientific and unrealistic. His presentation is flamboyant and full of
contradictions. His technique is that used by hypnotists; his appeal is to the hysterical, as is
the appeal of most faith-healers, fortune-tellers, astrologers and cultists. He refuses scientific
and specific questioning, referring all questioners to his book. His emphasis on sensational
publicity is not in keeping with the behavior or conduct of a professional man whose chief
interest is in his patients’ welfare. His encouragement of lay practitioners of his system can
lead only to widespread quackery.”
Now after ALL that? Daniel says: “To date, this Association has not formulated an
official opinion on the subject of dianetics.”
Also, do you see how Daniel says: “He refuses scientific and specific questioning…”?
THAT is what Hubbard is calling their bluff on in this 12 February 1951 challenge.
The sad thing to me is that Hubbard, due to his anglophilic blindness, never saw the
forest-for-the-trees here. Ever.
He was so blinded to that he was essentially working FOR the very people he hated,
because they were in alignment with the British on this whole crazy “advancement of
psychiatry” thing, that he never correctly targeted what he would call “the real WHO’s” – a
WHO being the actual sources of the trouble, the original and HIGHEST sources.
He invariably fell for what was both the Vatican and British favorite misdirection line had
been for two centuries – that it’s “the communists” who are enslaving the world.
He actually says that in a 1960 lecture.
He also told the FBI that’s what happened to the HDRF – which, in light of this challenge,
means he’s indirectly accusing the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry of being
communist – which is total horseshit, of course.
The “Commies”
In the FBI files on L. Ron Hubbard, there’s a letter from agent Baumgardner (7 March 1951)
describing an interview with L. Ron Hubbard where he alleges various communist influences
in the HDRF – Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation.
There’s other examples of Hubbard talking about communists in the FBI files, you can easily
find them, but in that March 1951 interview, Hubbard provided Baumgardner with two flyers
from the HDRF from 1950, both of which I have pulled out by themselves, re-arranged the
images to be more in order and easier to read. They are now uploaded to the internet
archive. Flyer #1 Dianetics: A Brief Discussion and Flyer #2 Dianetics and Psychoanalysis.
Both of them have some interesting early details you may want to peruse.
–––
Oliver was targeting any doctor who became involved in Dianetics, as this response letter
from January 31, 1953 from F. R. Crowgey of the Columbiana County Medical Society
shows – about a doctor named Paul H. Beaver of Leetonia, Ohio. (Vol 4 of 18 FDA
documents p. 353)
Apparently Oliver was trying (he hoped) to get the guy positioned as a quack, but this letter
kind of killed THAT idea.
He is a man of unquestionable integrity with high standing in the community and well liked by
his associates. He became interested in Dianetics while visiting in California abuot 3 years
ago and has literally fallen for its teachings “hook, line and sinker.” I know that he, his wife
and son have been “audited” themselves. He carries on a legitimate practice and practices in
our two local hospitals without Dianetics.[…] I am some that most of we associates have
pretty much the same feeling toward Dr. Beaver which is that we like him very much and
trust him implicitedly, but that we do get a little bored with his Dianetic enthusiam.”
Then there’s this odd statement after telling Oliver to contact a Dr. Louis J. Karnosh who was
the head of Neuro-psychiatry at Cleveland Clinic, he says: “I do not wish to imply that Dr.
Karnosh is interested in Dianetics nor that Dr. Beaver is psychic, but they were
schoolmate…”
Psychic?? What’s that all about…I have no idea. Yet.
It ends with something that is very spooky to me, look at the almost begging to Oliver and
the AMA to wit that this is ok, right????
“…would like to ask if we are right in assuming that no harm is being done since Dr.
Beaver does not use Dianetics in our hospitals.”
That Oliver, he’s such a busy boy –
In that same file, there is an earlier letter (March 1953) from Else Kohede of the Wayne
County Medical Society, telling Oliver Field that the Police Department there is secretly
attempting to prove that the members of the Dianetic Associate in Detroit are practicing
medicine without a license, and that to do this they must first prove that one of the members
charged has “guilty knowledge”. Else wants to know from Oliver if any Dianetic Association
in the U.S. has been prosecuted or even warned, as that would be “very helpful to their
case”. (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p. 356)
Oliver USES this investigation 10 years later in a letter to Kermit Miller, 24 January 1963 (Vol
4 of 18 FDA documents p. 405) It’s a followup of their long phone conversation, but it’s what
he says about it that I think is interesting. He kind of leaves out HIS involvement with the
whole thing.
According to the Detroit (Mich.) News for March 26, 1353. two operators, Mrs. Refa Postel
and Earl Cunard were charged with practicing medicine without a license. We enclose a
photocopy of the newspaper item and photograph. Our files do not contain reference to any
disposition of this one.
For those that haven’t caught on yet, it seems that the Better Business Bureaus since like
Day One starting with the National office out of New York, is in cahoots with the AMA/Oliver
Field. One example, Sherman’s Exhibit 16 from the AMA files shows that the BBB of
Spokane Washington, of all places (my neck of the woods) sent a letter to the Los Angeles
BBB dated October 22, 1953 talking about Volney and the e-meter – with a CC to Oliver
Field!!! (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p. 358)
It’s also another nice example of a “stamped” document by Oliver Field.
An interesting side note is Exhibit 41: which is this odd truncated letter from Oliver Field
defining Scientology as “L, Ron Hubbard’s later version of “Dianetics”, which had such a
widespread interest shortly after his book was published…”(Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p.
368)
There is also a report presented by Hubbard’s HASI (Hubbard Association of Scientologists)

Report titled: Washington Office Report on Congress of Quackery by Harold Edwards –
after the FDA raid in 1963. (Vol 6 of 18 p.228-236, FDA documents) It looks as though this is
Exhibit 57 of Sherman’s exhibits, but the report is actually from within scientology’s Ability
magazine #48. Who is Harold Edwards? No clue. Yet.
An important historical oddity is that within that publication, it looks as though they had
started advertising Hubbards created-for-the-CIA Brainwashing Manual again? (also see
this) Not sure what that’s all about, at the moment, but the address given though? That’s the
address for the HASI.
As verified in the July 1957 issue of Galaxy Science

Fiction (p. 90) in which an ad for Hubbard’s book Fundamentals of Thought actually refers to
that box 242 etc. address as the HASI, although it does have an Sa added. Perhaps
standing for Scientology Ads? The ad itself says – The mind technology that was
developed for use in Space.
It forms a very good early example of how internal scientology staff were being misled as to
WHO was really behind all this. Both then and the later scientology espionage division, the
Guardian Office, followed in the footsteps of Hubbard’s blindness as to who the REAL
leaders of the attacks on Dianetics/Scientology were.
Hubbard and those “enemies”
In the 4th page of the Report titled: Washington Office Report on Congress of Quackery
by Harold Edwards – after the FDA raid in 1963. (Vol 6 of 18 p.228-236, FDA documents) it
says:
Leader in so indefensible, and lamentable an attack on a long established, honorable

healing profession was the individual bearing the interesting title – Director, Department of
Investigation, American Medical Association – by name, Oliver Field. Curious that a privately
owned business should have a competition control tool like this secret police arm. Adding
volume and authoritative approval to a modern brand of medical despotism was the voice of
Mr. C. Joseph Stetler, legal counsel for the A.M.A. These men expressed themselves most
feelingly for the state of health of Americans, and the towering menace to the well-being and
future of this nation from the smooth talking, morally degenerated “quacks” who “blandly”
offer false hope where no hope exists.
The AMA was the obvious source but again, you will notice how “Harold Edwards” doesn’t
seem to know what’s really behind that.
Again, though, it was Hubbard that was leading that particular focus. He had issued a policy
letter called Scientology Five: Press Policies. This policy was issued on August 14, 1963,
a little over seven months after the FDA raid. (Note: The AD13 part on it means 13 years
After Dianetics)
As an interesting historical aspect, this policy letter was issued a little over a week after
Hubbard had first started really going to town lecturing about “Marcabians” (aliens) and
began focusing on that they are who is doing the Between Lives implants that are screwing
us all up (as opposed to earlier statements).
That was Saint Hill Special Briefing Course Lecture Auditing Comm Cycles, given on 6
August. Note: He had previously mentioned a Marcabian “intelligence report” in 1961, leture
of 7 June titled: Points in Assessing.
In Scientology Five (found in older OEC volume #7 p. 510) –

Now Hubbard starts saying the AMA (American Medical Association) is the “who” (the bad
guys).
Certain vested interests, mainly the American Medical Association, a private

healing monopoly, wish to all possible harm to the Scientology movement over
the world in order to protect their huge medical-psychiatric income and desired
monopoly which runs into tens of billions annually. In their congresses they
complain that we and people like us cost them 1.1 billion dollars a year that they
don’t receive. Their sole interest is income. Reference: Minutes of various AMA
conferences.
Almost all our bad publicity and attacks is authored by two men, one named
Keaton, the AMA press man, and one named Field, their head of “investigation”.
These men flood bad tales about Scientology into press, magazines, radio, TV.
Their sole interest is a medical- psychiatrist monopoly for the AMA. Their publicity
goes overseas. The FDA is used by these people and FDA releases are sent
overseas.
Hitler and Stalin held power through medical psychiatry. They associate
themselves chiefly with the rich and powerful.
To me, this is pretty hilarious as yet another example where Hubbard doesn’t quite tell
everyone the WHOLE truth, just bits and pieces of it.
What you may not know, is that it’s also strongly on the hypocritical side as well because in
about 4 years he’s going to expand (while still leaving out HIS actual handlers) and change
this “who”.
Our enemies on this planet are less than 12 men. They are members of the Bank
of England and other higher financial circles. They own and control newspaper
chains, and they are, oddly enough, directors in all the mental health groups in the
world which have sprung up.
(taped lecture nicknamed RJ67, given on 20 September 1967 – Hubbard at mark

09:03)
RJ67 –
Audio Player
00:00
00:00
Use Up/Down Arrow keys to increase or decrease volume.
Video for those who prefer it that way –
First it’s “less than twelve”.
Then, a year later, now it’s an even “dozen men” – Executive Directive from L. Ron Hubbard
29 November 1968 titled: The War
You may not realize it staff member but there is only one small group that has
hammered Dianetics and Scientology for 18 years.
[…] For eighteen years it has poured lies and slander into the press and
government agencies. For eighteen years it has poured lies and slander into the
press and government agencies. Last year we isolated a dozen men at the top.
The “Commies”?
There’s something else you need to notice here in that particular Executive Directive..
Executive Directive from L. Ron Hubbard 29 November 1968 titled: The War
Last year we isolated a dozen men at the top. This year we found the organization
these used and all its connections over the world.
They are as red as paint. Their former president was a card carrying Communist
and they have four on their Board of Directors. Yet they reach into International
Finance, Health Ministries, Schools, the press. They even control immigration in
many lands.”
I think most people got all electrified over the whole implied illuminati/jews/world bankers
controlled opposition conspiracy theory idea and completely missed the fact that Hubbard
is calling these “enemies” of Scientology, these “dozen” – COMMUNISTS.
This isn’t the only time Hubbard would spew the approved of by ALL slavemaster
intelligence factions misdirecting propaganda idea that it’s “the communists” who are the
slavemasters/enslavers, he’d been doing it for a LONG time already by this point in time.
It is FOR WHO that is really interesting.
Robert Vansittart – the hidden head of British intelligence at all levels until well into the
1950’s. One of only two people to know who EVERY spy was in any capacity, anywhere, in
the British intelligence network.
Before WWII even ended, his first moves were covert (indirect, using
others overtly). Marking the beginning of what would become dubbed the Cold War, press
starts to appear. Like this about Stalin and communism in the Washington Times-Herald of
March 10, 1944. (Brezhnev FBI file p. 72)
Five years later, Vansittart goes overt (direct and as himself).
Lord Vansittart’s demand that Great Britain create a new and more active
diplomacy “to cope with our adversary behind the iron curtain” was expected today to
arouse a flurry of controversy in England. The Communists, of course will accuse him of
warmongering and the extreme right will applaud.
– J.C Oestreicher, INS Foreign Director; In View of News of the World; New Castle News, 11
March, 1949
Besides being involved with also positioning the new enemy with the OLD enemy (Nazis,
Germans) Vansittart was covertly pushing behind-the-scenes this ‘threat’ of communism and
advocating persecution of “anti-communist” activities. He actually even headed what was
called the British form of “McCarthyism”.
They called him Lord VanWitchhunt.
Ref: We Know All About You: The Story of Surveillance in Britain and America by Rhodri
Jeffreys-Jones
Next –
Miles Copeland, former British Special Operations Executive asset during WWII (Vansittart
was directly involved in both creating and running that organization) and then CIA when it
was created.
12 March 1947 – literally almost 3 years to the day after Vansittart

inaugurated the planting in the press of targeting Russia and communism, President
Truman comes out publicly warning about the “advances of the Soviets”. Miles, in his book
The Game Player, details on page 71 how only now the CIA was tasked to take intelligence
actions concerning this new “threat” of Russia and communism.
“Before President Truman publicly took a stand against Soviet advances in his “Truman
Doctine” speech of 12 March 1947, there was no mention at all of the Soviets in the various
directives and planning papers that guided our activities..”
Next –
L. Ron Hubbard as one of the propagandist fiction writers under the Vansittart and Round
Table network of authors before, during, and after WWII.
August 1947 – Just five months after the new ‘enemy’ was now announced by President
Truman, Hubbard provides a spy story along these very lines in Astounding Science Fiction
titled: The End Is Not Yet, a 3-part series about: “a few men against a
dictatorship.”
Segment #1 ends with character Professor Haus trying to recruit character Charles Martel
who is loosely patterned on Hubbard. As Vansittart was doing then currently, Hubbard then
positions Nazi Germany as having something to do with creating a war conditions between
Russia and the United States: “You really have the evidence that Fabrecken means to let the
war between the United States and Russia go through?”
Quote from the 2nd in the series continues the same PR positioning: “The essential trouble
with belligerent people is that they’re sure they’re right, their ends are good, and they’ll do
anything to prove it. Murder and mayhem and war, for instance”
Hubbard’s following right along in lockstep blaming the “commies” continued into the very
beginning of Dianetics.
Commensurate with spreading the Great Fear of the Enemy that British spymaster Vansittart
had begun, Hubbard stated that it was the Communist Party who had “cost him” this
[Dianetics] peration (FBI file p. 96) and that this began shortly after August 1950 when
Hubbard’s chemical memory-erasing experiments at the HDRF was stated to have revealed
“the method that the Russians use” (FBI file p. 100).
At this time Hubbard was calling this secret method “psychological warfare”. It wasn’t until
a later letter in 1955 that he referred to it as “brainwashing”.
“This is data: in August 1950 I found out a method the Russians use on such people as
Vogeler, Mindzenty and others to obtain confessions. I could undo that method. My second
book was to have shown how the Communists used narcosynthesis and physical
torture and why it worked as it did. Further, I was working on a technology of
psychological warfare to present it to the Defense Department. …I’m applying to the
Department of Defense for permission to deliver to them my work on psychological warfare.”
– Hubbard 1951 (FBI file p. 100)
“To the best of my recollection the accountant “Jerry” Rahn appeared in the Organization
(March 1951) about three days after the first despatch was sent to the Department of
Defense, by wire, concerning a solution to brain-washing. I can establish this more
accurately when I obtain, if I can, possession of my files and accounts.” – Hubbard 1955
(FBI file p. 179)
Parker Morgan, former OSS and now involved with the Hubbard Dianetic Research
Foundation, utilized all his investigation skills learned in the OSS and FBI to ascertain, in his
words, that there was evidence of Communist infiltration and that Communist Party
publications were also “attacking” the HDRF and the Dianetic techniques. (see FBI file).
Fingerprints were taken of all members and staff and submitted to the FBI, Oaths of Loyalty
to America were solicited, with Hubbard and others also conducting Lie-Detector checks
with the electrometer. (note that this is the real purpose of the meter, and is referred to as
such before Hubbard and others changed the term to “security checking” to hide that
aspect.)
Hubbard himself mentions that his proof regarding communist infiltration of the HDRF was
slight but that initiation of the use of a lie-detector check ceased the previous “turbulence”.
Lie detector use mentioned in May 1951 letter to Attorney General p. 100 –
Lie detector use mentioned in July 11, 1955 letter to FBI p. 179 –
There is strong evidence that both the reason for the ‘backing’ of forming the HDRF and the
type of research Hubbard was predominantly engaged in was directly tied to Vansittart and
Operation Gladio interests in combatting
communism by research into “the most through spiritual cure in history“, as Vansittart
referred to what was necessary for the enemy to be subjected to.
Vansittart, p. 15 of Black Record: Germans Past and Present – 1941
“…undergo the most thorough spiritual cure in history; and part at least of that cure will
have to be self-administered. It will have to comprise a complete change of heart, mind and
soul; of taste and temperament and habit; a new set of morals and values, a new, a
brand-new way of looking at life.”
Hubbard on 28 April 1959, in a lecture called: Theory of Processes –

“When you do this, you have somebody who can confront… he is more social, he is more
capable, he is a better asset of the society, he’s somebody to know, he’s somebody to talk
to. Now, there are the exact end goals of processing.”
The following month after that lecture, on May 1 of 1959, Hubbard stated that he wants to
create Homo Novis – New Man with his spiritual “cure” techniques, providing a curious
throwback to a previous declamatio (fakely old) text called the Lurian Kabala wherein it was
claimed that practice of Kabala techniques could create the New Adam.
…we are at a change point in the history of Dianetics and Scientology. We are at
that change point which is – changing Homo sap to Homo Novis, and that is the
only change point we are arrived at.
– End Of Course Lecture, an LRH lecture 1 May 1959
In Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, Hubbard wrote that: “The provision of a
remedy for unsocial conduct by members of the group is of more than passing interest to a
government for a continuance of its own corporal practices” (Chapter 8) and that “antisocial
activity is the result of engrams which dictate it. The patient is not responsible for what he
himself has done.”
This interest in a spiritual “cure” was described by Vansittart as needing to evolve the soul of
man through the introduction of new religions.
“And all this the numskulls have done in the name of Darwinism, the “struggle for existence,”
the “survival of the fittest,” which was already the basis of German aggression in 1914. What
scientific credit is left to a country that has applied evolution to the body, but not the
soul, of man…In watching public life for forty years, I have seen not only a sag in the
validity of dogmatic religion but an even more marked and disastrous slump in the
connected fields of ordinary decency, honesty…The loss of faith both in the supernatural
and in ourselves—there has been a connection between the two—has not made anyone any
happier. …Not one man in a thousand is strong enough to dispense with the support of a
belief…”A man must have a religion” I would therefore wish for the coming
generations—with luck we mostly live through two—a revival…” (Lessons of My Life 1943
Vansittart)
Hubbard in 1951 –
“It is an empirical observation that men without a strong and lasting faith in a Supreme
Being are less capable, less ethical, and less valuable to themselves and society. The
abandonment of the admission of a Supreme Being as a reality, intimate to the life of man,
makes prostitution the ideal conduct of a woman; perfidy and betrayal the highest ethic level
attainable by a man; and obliteration by treachery, bomb, and gun the highest goal attainable
by a culture. …there is no great argument about the reality of a Supreme Being, since one
sees, in the failure to countenance that reality, a slimy and loathsome trail, downward
into the most vicious depths.” (Science of Survival)
Hubbard clearly has the same goal as Vanisittart with his Dianetic and Scientology
techniques – performing a spiritual “cure” and creating a new spiritually evolved man. This
“cure” happened to be aimed towards the same threats against society that Vansittart (and
others) had long elucidated. The kind of people that Hubbard was dedicated to attracting
right from the beginning, the rebels, the non-conformists, the non-mainstream religious, the
anti-social/society, the “communists”.
According to an FBI memo dated March 7th, 1951 Hubbard told the FBI that “Dianetics can
be used to combat Communism” but would not reveal what those means were. (FBI file page
2)
Just one day earlier, one of the Trustees of the HDRF, John Campbell, had written a
six-page letter to Robert Heinlein discussing a number of topics including the matter
described above as “Communist activities.”
He wrote of the appearance of an attack on Dianetics by a “communist group that was not
playing for marbles.” Campbell claimed there was “definite evidence” that six people
suspected of being communists were “seeking to disrupt the business, and to disqualify
Ron.” Campbell then described how “some serious investigation was done, including
desk-prying, wastebasket studying, and all the means Parker Morgan, ex-Special Agent of
the FBI, could think of.” Campbell said that Sara was “the point of attack” and that she was
“drugged, and beaten” three times. Apparently Campbell or others had tried to recover the
information from these engramic memories, but that “it’s very difficult to get information,”
because “commands planted included, of course, a wild aversion to Dianetic processing.”
[Heinlein archives: CORR306-07].
We also see in this letter that Campbell claimed that Dianetics was the “counter-weapon” to
mind control.
–––
It is important that you understand that the term “communist” was not just used to represent
card-carrying members of the Communist Party.
It is an old, old, OLD slur that the slavemasters use to tar anyone who rebels against their
rule. See M. McClaughry, The Reckoning, Chapter Fifteen British Slavemasters Instigated
Communism.
As it had been for over a century by this time, it was used as a catch-all “enemy” label to
define and villify anyone not in agreement with the British and Vatican policy of hegemony
over the world. Both popes and leaders of the Round Table and British foreign intelligence
used the term to define “communists” as having some sort of mental defect or illness
causing their unnatural rebellion against what they referred to as “the natural order”. This
“order” is often cloaked in the term society.
In a similar time-honored tradition of attacking Thomas Jefferson with all manner of ludicrous
insults and invented conspiracies, this accusation of communist! even was used by the head
of the FBI in 1955 to portray a pamphlet which included the Jeffersonian Bill of Rights as
“literature favorable to Russia and in opposition to the U.S. foreign policy”. (FBI file p. 13)
image right – Hoover at Un-American “McCarthy” Committee talking about Communists.
According to the FBI, this also gets cross-related as part of case number 61-443, serial
number 1226. The prefix number of 61 indicates that it was filed under “treason.” Yes, you
heard that right. The Bill of Rights was being positioned as TREASONOUS (and communist)
material.
Commies EVERYWHERE!!!
As you can see, this Executive Directive from L. Ron Hubbard in 1968 titled: The War follows
perfectly in the time-honored propagandic tradition of the slavemasters.
It also forms a perfect example in contradiction with where Hubbard would say one thing for
posterity and yet his orders TO scientologists were 180 degrees opposite it.
I refer to that on 10 January 1968 Hubbard had issued a Policy Letter titled: Politics,
Freedom From. The interesting thing is that is actually a re-issue of a Secretarial Executive
Directive from June 14, 1965.(Reissued from LRH SECED 56 INT June 14, 1965)
This thing is a real exercise of mindfuck. Take the first line –
1. I hereby declare Scientology to be non-political and non-ideological.
Now look at this part of point 3 –
3. This does not change any policy relating to suppressive persons. It does delete
any words in any form which seek to bring about a statement of political
allegiance or antagonism.
And yet despite this obvious PRETEND posturing on Hubbard’s part – just one year later?
10 days after Hubbard had founded the Guardian Office (a very political organization) on
March 11 he wrote a very, very important document.
Secretarial Executive Directive from the Office of LRH, by L. Ron Hubbard dated 11 March
1966, found at the WhyweProtest forum in a posting from February 3, 2013. (archived here.)
Look at the top closely –

Oh, hey! What’s that?
It’s specifically routing a copy to his top spymaster.
Lord Salisbury.
As such, it is rather extremely political.
Backing up a little now, we have Hubbard reissuing that 1965 SECED as a policy letter on 10
January 1968 saying he wants deleted “any words” which “seek to bring about a
statement of political allegiance or antagonism” – and yet later that same year he’s
targeting the “dozen” enemies as being communists and telling scientologists that is the view
to have.
Very political.
Doesn’t get much more political than that.
Then, the following month, December 1968, he writes this –
Executive Directive From L. Ron Hubbard 20 December 1968 Western Countries
Western governments and peoples are under ceaseless and unrelenting attack
from the Communist forces in the “cold war”. The enemy has for a long time been
inside, getting laws passed, degrading the society, seizing persons in the name of
psychiatry, pushing up taxes, inflating money…..
The orders the governments followed in attacking us were originated by REDS, by

the usually foreign psychiatrist, operating as per Communist instructions to
destroy all Churches and Scientology in particular.
More political statements drummed into scientologists heads despite his “Politics, Freedom
From” so-called policy.
So now –
What’s with this twelve or “dozen” fixation by Hubbard?
In a research post I once did calledThe Twelve, I documented that a British intelligence asset
named Boris Brasol started presenting propaganda of the type that Winston Churchill was
particularly fond of using.
Let’s put Boris’s 1919 propaganda in here for comparison –
He wrote that its twelve leaders were all Jews. He named Trotsky, U.S. banker Jacob
Schiff, and his German friend and co-religionist Max Warburg. Brasol concludes in a snarky
joke where he says: “It is, of course, just a coincidence, that the dozen happen to be a
Jewish dozen.“
(MID, File 10110-920, Brasol Report #8, December 9, 1919 as documented by Virginia
McClaughry in L. Ron Hubbard’s Twelve Men “Enemies” Conspiracy Theory – Just a Reboot
of The Protocols of Zion; January 2018)
I doubt you will be surprised to learn that 3 years later, in Guardian Office Order 060571 (6
May 1971) Titled: Working Theory Hubbard now actually names ONE “jew” but only one.
Otto Neimayer. And now he’s going to say the “who” is his niece.
A secretary.
So far we have been using an Intelligence Hypothesis I developed in 1965.

…the Intelligence Hypothesis I formed was that it would have to be a member of
the World Bank with psychiatric connections or who planned usages of psychiatry
as part of world control.
It led us to WFMH and the NAMH. But it did not lead all the way until this year.
We found the central handler (one who orders operatives and operations) and
proved it by numerous correspondences we were given. The person is “Mary
Appleby” Secretary of the National Association of Mental Health of England. It is
she who writes and phones her contacts to start attacks on Scientology.
Her uncle (just now deceased) was Otto Niemeyer of the World Bank.
So that finally ends off the 1965 Intelligence Hypothesis as totally correct.
A secretary.
That’s Hubbard’s big “who” now?
Well, given that Hubbard was still trying desperately to be “useful” to the very people he is
supposedly “trying” to expose since 1965 and had been working for the CIA as an
off-the-books asset since 1954, and with British intelligence before, during, and after WWII,
including working with a Cecil, Lord Salisbury to support Appartheid in South Africa right
during the period he’s writing these “hypothesis” – what would we expect other than
completely intentional misdirection onto and revivification of a previous British intelligence
operation planted conspiracy theory from Hubbard?
Yet another way he was consistent in doing what British intelligence wanted.
Pointing the finger everywhere but where it goes.
And totally veered off now from that

tiny bit of truth he had in Dianetics
from way back in the beginning – 1950.
Here’s a little timeline for you showing what Hubbard is up to here in his “enemies”
identification and that it ALWAYS utilizes source propaganda from British and Vatican
slavemasters.
A Special Stand-Alone Timeline of Hubbard’s Propaganda about Who the “Enemy” is.
This is a stand-alone timeline about Hubbard and the “enemies” of Scientology and his
familiar British/Vatican propaganda on the topic which also incorporates a few elements from
the World Domination Conspiracy Deflections timeline. I don’t plan to incorporate this
stand-alone timeline into the Master Timeline, at the moment.
1919 December 19 – British intelligence asset named Boris Brasol started presenting
propaganda about “the enemy” of the type that Winston Churchill was particularly fond of
using. He wrote that its twelve leaders were all Jews. He named Trotsky, U.S. banker
Jacob Schiff, and his German friend and co-religionist Max Warburg. Brasol concludes in a
snarky joke where he says: “It is, of course, just a coincidence, that the dozen happen to be
a Jewish dozen.” (MID, File 10110-920, Brasol Report #8, December 9, 1919 as
documented by Virginia McClaughry in L. Ron Hubbard’s Twelve Men “Enemies” Conspiracy
Theory – Just a Reboot of The Protocols of Zion; January 2018)
1944 March 10 – Robert Vansittart – the hidden head of British intelligence at all levels until
well into the 1950’s, one of only two people to know who EVERY spy was in any capacity,
anywhere, in the British intelligence network, starts propagandizing for the next planned war.
Before WWII even ended, his first moves were covert (indirect, using
others overtly). Marking the beginning of what would become dubbed the Cold War, press
starts to appear. Like this about Stalin and communism in the Washington Times-Herald of
March 10, 1944. (Brezhnev FBI file p. 72)
1947 March 12 – Miles Copeland, former British Special Operations Executive asset during
WWII (Vansittart was directly involved in both creating and running that organization) and
then CIA when it was created. Literally almost 3 years to the day
after Vansittart inaugurated the planting in the press of targeting Russia and communism,
President Truman comes out publicly warning about the “advances of the Soviets”.
Miles, in his book The Game Player, page 71 details how now the CIA was tasked to take
intelligence actions concerning this new “threat” with Russia and Communism chosen as
the new enemy.
1947 August – L. Ron Hubbard as one of the propagandist fiction writers under the
Vansittart and Round Table network of authors before, during, and after WWII. – Just five
months after the new ‘enemy’ was now announced by President Truman, Hubbard provides
a spy story along these very lines in Astounding Science Fiction titled: The End Is Not Yet, a
3-part series about: “a few men against a dictatorship.” Segment #1

ends with character Professor Haus trying to recruit character Charles Martel who is loosely
patterned on Hubbard. As Vansittart was doing then currently, Hubbard then positions Nazi
Germany as having something to do with creating a war conditions between Russia and
the United States: “You really have the evidence that Fabrecken means to let the war
between the United States and Russia go through?”
Quote from the 2nd in the series continues the same PR positioning: “The essential trouble
with belligerent people is that they’re sure they’re right, their ends are good, and they’ll do
anything to prove it. Murder and mayhem and war, for instance”
1949 March 11 – British Spymaster Lord Vansittart goes overt (direct and as himself).
“Lord Vansittart’s demand that Great Britain create a new and more active
diplomacy “to cope with our adversary behind the iron curtain” was expected today to
arouse a flurry of controversy in England. The Communists, of course will accuse him of
warmongering and the extreme right will applaud.”
– J.C Oestreicher, INS Foreign Director; In View of News of the World; New Castle News, 11
March, 1949
Besides being involved with also positioning the new enemy with the OLD enemy (Nazis,
Germans) Vansittart was covertly pushing behind-the-scenes this ‘threat’ of communism and
advocating persecution of “anti-communist” activities. He actually even headed what was
called the British form of “McCarthyism”. They called him Lord VanWitchhunt. Ref: We
Know All About You: The Story of Surveillance in Britain and America by Rhodri
Jeffreys-Jones
1950 February 9 – Senator McCarthy’s communists-in-government speech to the

Republican Women’s Club of Wheeling, West Virginia.
1950 March 29 – British spymaster Robert Vansittart rose to speak in the House of Lords: ‘I
have full particulars of sixteen Communists and 100 percent fellow travellers who have got
themselves into good jobs in the department of Inland Revenue.‘ Distancing himself from
what was portrayed as McCarthy’s guesswork, he added ‘I am not talking from gossip or
hearsay. In some cases I have actually seen the Communist Party cards.’ Vansittart was
creating the British form of Great Fear of the Enemy, which was successful. The British
operated a kind of ‘silent’ McCarthyism where they took action behind closed doors and did
not release information to the press except for on rare occasions. Vansittart’s British method
was far worse, and far more frightening than American McCarthyism, simply because of its
Nazi-like behavior. People simply disappeared, information was suppressed. In fact,
prompting the author of 1984, George Orwell to confide in his diary (1940) that: ‘The police
are the very people who would go over to Hitler once they were certain he had won.’ The
British Foreign Office at this time, was all-out engaged in having to suppress rebellions in
what one author called ‘the remnants of its empire’. They suppressed news of the absolutely
ruthless undercover tactics they were using against ‘rebellious’ colonies – utilizing
American and Vatican co-operation through Operation Gladio. In fact, British
intelligence was engaging, in tandem with the CIA and the Vatican, in operations all around
the world to suppress any rebellions – whom they called communists – to British East and
British West (American anglophilic sycophants in power) as I call them. Anywhere from
Central and South America to Africa to India, to even America itself.
1950 – Hubbard’s HDRF and Operation GLADIO. There is strong evidence that both the
reason for the ‘backing’ of forming the HDRF and the type of research Hubbard was
predominantly engaged in was directly tied to Vansittart and Operation Gladio interests in
combatting communism by research into “the most through spiritual cure in history“, as
Vansittart referred to what was necessary for the enemy to be subjected to. Vansittart, p. 15
of Black Record: Germans Past and Present – 1941 “…undergo the most thorough
spiritual cure in history; and part at least of that cure will have to be self-administered. It
will have to comprise a complete change of heart, mind and soul; of taste and temperament
and habit; a new set of morals and values, a new, a brand-new way of looking at life.”
Hubbard on 28 April 1959, in a lecture called: Theory of Processes – “When you do this, you
have somebody who can confront… he is more social, he is more capable, he is a better
asset of the society, he’s somebody to know, he’s somebody to talk to. Now, there are the
exact end goals of processing.” The following month after that lecture, on May 1 of 1959
(End of Course Lecture) Hubbard stated that he wants to create Homo Novis – New Man
with his spiritual “cure” techniques, providing a curious throwback to a previous declamatio
(fakely old) text called the Lurian Kabala wherein it was claimed that practice of Kabala
techniques could create the New Adam. “…we are at a change point in the history of
Dianetics and Scientology. We are at that change point which is – changing Homo sap to
Homo Novis, and that is the only change point we are arrived at.” In Dianetics: The Modern
Science of Mental Health, Hubbard wrote that: “The provision of a remedy for unsocial
conduct by members of the group is of more than passing interest to a government for a
continuance of its own corporal practices” (Chapter 8) and that “antisocial activity is the
result of engrams which dictate it. The patient is not responsible for what he himself has
done.” This interest in a spiritual “cure” was described by Vansittart as needing to evolve the
soul of man through the introduction of new religions. “And all this the numskulls have done
in the name of Darwinism, the “struggle for existence,” the “survival of the fittest,” which was
already the basis of German aggression in 1914. What scientific credit is left to a country
that has applied evolution to the body, but not the soul, of man…In watching public life
for forty years, I have seen not only a sag in the validity of dogmatic religion but an even
more marked and disastrous slump in the connected fields of ordinary decency,
honesty…The loss of faith both in the supernatural and in ourselves—there has been a
connection between the two—has not made anyone any happier. …Not one man in a
thousand is strong enough to dispense with the support of a belief…”A man must have a
religion” I would therefore wish for the coming generations—with luck we mostly live
through two—a revival…” (Lessons of My Life 1943 Vansittart) Hubbard in 1951 – “It is an
empirical observation that men without a strong and lasting faith in a Supreme Being
are less capable, less ethical, and less valuable to themselves and society. The
abandonment of the admission of a Supreme Being as a reality, intimate to the life of man,
makes prostitution the ideal conduct of a woman; perfidy and betrayal the highest ethic level
attainable by a man; and obliteration by treachery, bomb, and gun the highest goal attainable
by a culture. …there is no great argument about the reality of a Supreme Being, since one
sees, in the failure to countenance that reality, a slimy and loathsome trail, downward
into the most vicious depths.” (Science of Survival) Hubbard clearly has the same goal as
Vanisittart with his Dianetic and Scientology techniques – performing a spiritual “cure” and
creating a new spiritually evolved man. This “cure” happened to be aimed towards the same
threats against society that Vansittart (and others) had long elucidated. The kind of people
that Hubbard was dedicated to attracting right from the beginning, the rebels, the
non-conformists, the non-mainstream religious, the anti-social/society, the “communists”.
1950 September – Hubbard stated that it was in this area of time that the Communist Party
who had “cost him” this [Dianetics] operation (FBI file p. 96) and that this began shortly after
August 1950 when Hubbard’s chemical memory-erasing experiments at the HDRF was
stated to have revealed “the method that the Russians use” (FBI file p. 100).
1951 – Parker Morgan, former OSS and now involved with the Hubbard Dianetic Research
Foundation, utilized all his investigation skills learned in the OSS and FBI to ascertain, in his
words, that there was evidence of Communist infiltration and that Communist Party
publications were also “attacking” the HDRF and the Dianetic techniques. (see FBI file).
Fingerprints were taken of all members and staff and submitted to the FBI, Oaths of Loyalty
to America were solicited, with Hubbard and others also conducting Lie-Detector checks
with the electrometer. (note that this is the real purpose of the meter, and is referred to as
such before Hubbard and others changed the term to “security checking” to hide that
aspect.)
1951 March – “To the best of my recollection the accountant “Jerry” Rahn appeared in the
Organization (March 1951) about three days after the first despatch was sent to the
Department of Defense, by wire, concerning a solution to brain-washing. I can establish this
more accurately when I obtain, if I can, possession of my files and accounts.” – Hubbard
1955 (FBI file p. 179)
1951 March 6 – One of the Trustees of the HDRF, John Campbell, had written a six-page
letter to Robert Heinlein discussing a number of topics including the matter described above
as “Communist activities.” He wrote of the appearance of an attack on Dianetics by a
“communist group that was not playing for marbles.” Campbell claimed there was “definite
evidence” that six people suspected of being communists were “seeking to disrupt the
business, and to disqualify Ron.” Campbell then described how “some serious investigation
was done, including desk-prying, wastebasket studying, and all the means Parker Morgan,
ex-Special Agent of the FBI, could think of.” Campchapterbell said that Sara was “the point
of attack” and that she was “drugged, and beaten” three times. Apparently Campbell or
others had tried to recover the information from these engramic memories, but that “it’s very
difficult to get information,” because “commands planted included, of course, a wild aversion
to Dianetic processing.” [Heinlein archives: CORR306-07]. We also see in this letter that
Campbell claimed that Dianetics was the “counter-weapon” to mind control.
1951 March 7 – FBI memo states that Hubbard told the FBI that “Dianetics can be used to
combat Communism” but would not reveal what those means were. (FBI file page 2).
1951 May 14 – Hubbard letter to attorney general stating that it was the Communist Party
who had “cost him” this [Dianetics] operation (FBI file p. 96) and that this began shortly after
August 1950 when Hubbard’s chemical memory-erasing experiments at the HDRF was
stated to have revealed “the method that the Russians use” (FBI file p. 100). At this time
Hubbard was calling this secret method “psychological warfare”. It wasn’t until a later letter in
1955 that he referred to it as “brainwashing”. “This is data: in August 1950 I found out a
method the Russians use on such people as Vogeler, Mindzenty and others to obtain
confessions. I could undo that method. My second book was to have shown how the
Communists used narcosynthesis and physical torture and why it worked as it did.
Further, I was working on a technology of psychological warfare to present it to the Defense
Department. …I’m applying to the Department of Defense for permission to deliver to them
my work on psychological warfare.” – Hubbard 1951 (FBI file p. 100) Hubbard himself
mentions that his proof regarding communist infiltration of the HDRF was slight but that
initiation of the use of a lie-detector check ceased the previous “turbulence”. Lie detector use
mentioned in May 1951 letter to Attorney General p. 100 – Lie detector use mentioned in
July 11, 1955 letter to FBI p. 179 – stating that a D.H. Rogers “registered positive on
Communist leanings.”
1953 October 3- Illuminati Conspiracy Theory Reboot by L. Ron Hubbard – lecturing

about “What is a Scientologist” Hubbard used a VERY particular term “money aristocracy”.
The lecture is titled: USES AND FUTURE OF SCIENTOLOGY (p. 155 of PDF) “There are
two parasitic groups in the world today…one of them is communism, the other is capitalism.
Communism is a military aristocracy which depends upon the worker, and capitalism is a
money aristocracy which depends upon the worker…” It gets promoted again in Auditor
magazine #115 in 1975, and touted in 2013 on some Scientologist’s site as “words of
wisdom”. It ain’t wisdom, as you’re about to find out. It’s propaganda.
No, it’s not wisdom. It’s Hubbard regurgitating a very specific phrase created in
Russian/British/Vatican Illuminati propaganda. It’s from an ILLUMINATI Conspiracy
Theory REBOOT from a British and Russian intelligence created propaganda piece called
The Protocols (of Zion) and World Revolution, using agents Boris Brasol, Casimir Pilenas
and Natalie De Bogory (see 1920 for more). It’s a 1920 Boston publication and it was the
first to use that term “On the ruins of natural and hereditary aristocracy we built an
aristocracy of our intellectual class—the money aristocracy. We have established this
new aristocracy on the qualification of wealth, which is dependent upon us, and also upon
science, which is promoted by our wise men.” (Protocol I)
1955 – In a similar time-honored tradition of attacking Thomas Jefferson with all manner of
ludicrous insults and invented conspiracies, this accusation of communist! even was used
by the head of the FBI in 1955 to portray a pamphlet which included the Jeffersonian Bill of
Rights as “literature favorable to Russia and in opposition to the U.S. foreign policy”. (FBI file
p. 13) According to the FBI, this also gets cross-related as part of case number 61-443,
serial number 1226. The prefix number of 61 indicates that it was filed under “treason.” Yes,
you heard that right. The Bill of Rights was being positioned as TREASONOUS (and
communist) material.
1960 January 3 – “Democracy is not the best political philosophy in the world; and nearly
everyone will agree that a benevolent monarchy is….But actually it’s the best form of
government...” (L. Ron Hubbard lecture entitled Zones of Control and Responsibility of
Government, 3 January 1960, SHSBC) What is the number one thing that both factions of
the slavemasters (Vatican and British nobility/monarchy) have promoted as ideal for
centuries? Priests and Kings rule the world. As symbolized by the ancient Nesilim symbol
– the double-headed eagle – which was the symbol of the Catholic Church/Holy Roman
Empire, no less. Here’s a Pope promoting it – “No of Chartres wrote to Pope Paschal II:
“When kingdom and priesthood are as one, in complete accord, the world is well
ruled…”– IMMORTALE DEI, Pope Leo XIII, November 1, 1885. And that’s what L. Ron
Hubbard promotes.
1960 December 31 – Communism label Reboot – L. Ron Hubbard, just back from an
intelligence mission to South Africa for Lord Salisbury (yes, one of THOSE Salisbury’s – the
Cecils) gives Afrikaan Scientologys a lecture called “A Talk on South Africa” – part of the
Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress. This lecture is one of the most amazing collection of
lies and manipulation by Hubbard that we think we have ever seen. It is truly
mind-twisting. Reminder: The communist label was used to position any rebellion against
the “unseen hand” rule. The Illuminati conspiracy theory etc. was used to mislead would-be
rebels as to WHO is the “unseen hand”. (see Jefferson 1774 entry) Slavemasters trying to
rule African natives, particularly SOUTH African natives, goes all the way back to the very
first “mission” of the Jesuits – the whole reason they were formed initially. (see intro to
World Domination Conspiracy Deflections timeline 1702, Loyola’s document #3) Hubbard
sounds exactly like British agent Vinberg (1920 May entry) promoting the fabricated
Protocols of Zion in Germany. “Vinberg accordingly demands that the natural leaders of the
nations shall once and for all recognize the political incompetence of the masses, turn their
backs on democratic politics, seize power and impose their dictatorship on these
‘anthropoid herds’.” Then the time will be ripe to unite the nations in a common front
against the world-conspiracy of the Jews. (Cohn, chapter 6) —-Substitute “communists” for
Jews, and “anthropoid herds” for the native Africans and that’s Hubbard in this lecture.
1963 August 14 – a little over seven months after the FDA raid., Hubbard issued a policy
letter called Scientology Five: Press Policies saying the AMA (American Medical
Association) is the “who” (the bad guys). “Certain vested interests, mainly the American
Medical Association, a private healing monopoly, wish to all possible harm to the Scientology
movement over the world in order to protect their huge medical-psychiatric income and
desired monopoly which runs into tens of billions annually.” Apparently, now per Hubbard
those “commies” are running the AMA.
1965 February 7 – In a signature issue within the subject of Scientology called Keeping
Scientology Working (that is put at the beginning of every course of study in Scientology
materials) Hubbard pushes the same old derogatory idea of “the people” – as separate from
the “special” people aka the slavemasters and their sycophants.
Some key quotes from this issue, my notes in [..].
First category: What L. Ron Hubbard thinks of “the people” –
● the not-too-bright have a bad point on the button Self-Importance.

● The lower the IQ, the more the individual is shut off from the fruits of observation.
● I once had the idea that a group could evolve truth. A third of a century has
thoroughly disabused me of that idea.
● the group left to its own devices …with wild dramatizations of the bank called “new
ideas”…
● The common denominator of a group is the reactive bank.
● [People] …only have their banks in common.
● They agree then only on bank principles.
● Person to person the bank is identical.
● It is only the aberrated group, the mob, [the people] that is destructive.
Second category: What L. Ron Hubbard thinks of Democracy –
● I don’t see that … democracy have done anything for man but push him further
into the mud.
● …democracy has given us inflation and income tax.
Democracy gave us income tax? No. That was one hundred percent because of the
British/Vatican slavemasters who BOUGHT and POSITIONED people the first time using
Lincoln in 1862, and then after it got overturned, they did it a second time by sticking that
little gem buried in the fine print of a banana tax bill the same year, even the same month
that they pushed through the Federal Reserve – all of which was the culmination of an
almost 50 year campaign to get themselves back where they started before President
Jackson destroyed their last financial control attempt – the Bank of the United states. L. Ron
Hubbard positioning income tax as a result of democracy is an absolutely horrible
misdirection and an attack on Jefferson and the Founding Fathers of America.
1965 February 13 – Highly racist and anti-democracy Policy Letter by L Ron Hubbard titled:
Politics. Now and then you hear me speak derisively of governments and
ideologies–including democracy. If, by seeing I criticize an ideology, anyone seeks to believe
I embrace its opposite, he has failed to get the point. What political system could work
amongst very aberrated people? A democracy or a Communism would be a huge joke in an
insane asylum. Well, isn’t it?…No political system applied to a colony of monkeys would
have anything to govern but monkeys. That’s plain, certainly. …The collective think of
apes is ape-think….Every human has in common with every other human the same reactive
bank. This is the most they have in common. Therefore a democracy is a
collective-think of reactive banks.” –Again, Hubbard is sounding exactly like British agent
Vinberg (1920 May entry) promoting the fabricated Protocols of Zion in Germany. “Vinberg
accordingly demands that the natural leaders of the nations shall once and for all recognize
the political incompetence of the masses, turn their backs on democratic politics, seize
power and impose their dictatorship on these ‘anthropoid herds’.” Then the time will be
ripe to unite the nations in a common front against the world-conspiracy of the Jews. (Cohn,
chapter 6)
1965 – Hubbard “intelligence hypothesis” — “an Intelligence Hypothesis I developed in

1965…the Intelligence Hypothesis I formed was that it would have to be a member of the
World Bank with psychiatric connections or who planned usages of psychiatry as part of
world control.” Hubbard Guardian Office Order 060571 (6 May 1971) Titled: Working Theory
1965 June 14 – Hubbard issues Secretarial Executive Directive from June 14, 1965 as a
policy letter titled: Politics, Freedom From. “1. I hereby declare Scientology to be
non-political and non-ideological.” “3. This does not change any policy relating to
suppressive persons. It does delete any words in any form which seek to bring about a
statement of political allegiance or antagonism.” —And yet Hubbard would continue to
do exactly what he said not to do.
1966 March 1 – Hubbard founds the Guardian office, a very political organization.
1966 March 11 – Hubbard wrote a very, very important document – Secretarial Executive
Directive 70. It specifically routed a copy to his top spymaster, Lord Salisbury. As such, it is
rather extremely political. Found at the WhyweProtest forum in a posting from February 3,
2013. (archived here.)
1966 July 19 – L. Ron Hubbard – “Political systems only exist because no one has
solved the problem of succession of a good ruler. That’s the problem a political system is
trying to solve. You talk to a whole bunch of people and you say, “A benevolent monarch is
a fine form of government if he is brilliant and runs his country well.” And you’ll find every
political ideologist will agree with you, no matter what he is. And they’ll say, “That’s true,” and
then they’ll come right in on the back of it, “but how would you succeed him?” And then we
get a political system. So they can’t guarantee that they can succeed him, you know, he
can’t have a successor. So the answer to it is don’t have successors; Clear him.” (About
Rhodesia lecture, SHSBC) What is the number one thing that both factions of the
slavemasters (Vatican and British nobility/monarchy) have promoted as ideal for centuries?
Priests and Kings rule the world. As symbolized by the ancient Nesilim symbol – the
double-headed eagle – which was the symbol of the Catholic Church/Holy Roman Empire,
no less. Here’s a Pope promoting it – “No of Chartres wrote to Pope Paschal II: “When
kingdom and priesthood are as one, in complete accord, the world is well ruled…”–
IMMORTALE DEI, Pope Leo XIII, November 1, 1885. And that’s what L. Ron Hubbard
promotes.
1967 September 20 – Hubbard gives a taped lecture called Rons Journal 1967. Now the
“enemies” are financial men but less than twelve. “Our enemies on this planet are less
than 12 men. They are members of the Bank of England and other higher financial
circles. They own and control newspaper chains, and they are, oddly enough, directors in all
the mental health groups in the world which have sprung up.” (taped lecture nicknamed
RJ67, given on 20 September 1967 – at mark 09:03)
1968 January 10 – Hubbard reissues Secretarial Executive Directive from June 14, 1965 as
a policy letter titled: Politics, Freedom From. “1. I hereby declare Scientology to be
non-political and non-ideological.” “3. This does not change any policy relating to
suppressive persons. It does delete any words in any form which seek to bring about a
statement of political allegiance or antagonism.” —And yet Hubbard continues to do
exactly what he said not to do.
1968 November 29 – Now it’s an even “dozen men” and they are “communist” – Executive
Directive from L. Ron Hubbard 29 November 1968 titled: The War—“You may not realize it
staff member but there is only one small group that has hammered Dianetics and
Scientology for 18 years. […] For eighteen years it has poured lies and slander into the
press and government agencies. For eighteen years it has poured lies and slander into the
press and government agencies. Last year we isolated a dozen men at the top. This year
we found the organization these used and all its connections over the world. They are as
red as paint. Their former president was a card carrying Communist and they have four
on their Board of Directors. Yet they reach into International Finance, Health Ministries,
Schools, the press. They even control immigration in many lands.”
1968 20 December – Executive Directive From L. Ron Hubbard titled: Western Countries
“Western governments and peoples are under ceaseless and unrelenting attack from the
Communist forces in the “cold war”. The enemy has for a long time been inside, getting
laws passed, degrading the society, seizing persons in the name of psychiatry, pushing up
taxes, inflating money…..The orders the governments followed in attacking us were
originated by REDS, by the usually foreign psychiatrist, operating as per Communist
instructions to destroy all Churches and Scientology in particular.” More political statements
drummed into scientologists heads despite his “Politics, Freedom From” so-called policy.
1971 May 6 –Hubbard Guardian Office Order 060571 (6 May 1971) Titled: Working Theory
Hubbard now actually names ONE “jew” but only one. Otto Neimayer. And now he’s going
to say the “who” is his niece. A secretary. “So far we have been using an Intelligence
Hypothesis I developed in 1965.…the Intelligence Hypothesis I formed was that it would
have to be a member of the World Bank with psychiatric connections or who planned usages
of psychiatry as part of world control. It led us to WFMH and the NAMH. But it did not lead all
the way until this year.We found the central handler (one who orders operatives and
operations) and proved it by numerous correspondences we were given. The person is
“Mary Appleby” Secretary of the National Association of Mental Health of England. It is she
who writes and phones her contacts to start attacks on Scientology.Her uncle (just now
deceased) was Otto Niemeyer of the World Bank.So that finally ends off the 1965
Intelligence Hypothesis as totally correct.”
1977 July 9 – Church of Scientology Guardian Office (which housed their Intelligence
division) is raided by the FBI.
1977 December 31 (date found here) – Illuminati Conspiracy Theory Reboot – Robert
Anton Wilson publishes (hardback) Cosmic Trigger Volume I: Final Secret of
the Illuminati (backup version here Issuu
version here) with Forewords by Timothy Leary who strangely chose to discuss a subject
that L. Ron Hubbard had taught his raided Intelligence division – The Guardian Office. A
subject called flair. —Remember, Tom Tripodi (CIA Operation Chaos, see 1967 entry) said
they (the CIA) were very concerned with protecting their RECRUITING pools.—Backstory:
L. Ron Hubbard’s mentor Commander Joseph Cheesman “Snake” Thompson, a naval
intelligence agent, once discussed with a fellow agent how important a person with an
Intelligence “sense” is. Apparently a more specific term came to be used to describe this
type of person that they called a “natural”, Seoane called it an Intelligence Impulse.* This
basically is a different wording for the same concept as this “sense” that Thompson was
teaching Seoane originally back in the early 1900′s. One could probably rightfully conclude
that Thompson was acting as a mentor to Seoane at that time. (*Beyond the Ranges, by
Colonel Seoane as told to Robert l Neimann.) This “sense”, as Seoane described it, was: An
Intelligence Impulse, the faculty for instantly recognizing what was valuable information,
and what was not. And, most importantly of all, how to interpret and evaluate it. This
particular way of referring to this quality as an Intelligence Impulse appears to have first
been used by another ONI (Office of Naval Intelligence) man – Sidney F. Mashbir* about 7
years prior to Seoane’s book. (*I Was an American Spy, Mashbir, Vantage Press,New York,
1953, p. 34,35) Sidney went into quite a bit of detail concerning just what this quality was, as
he saw it. He believed that intelligence officers were born, not made. “You can send a
candidate for Intelligence work to every school of every service, in every army and country in
the world, but if that “inner spark” that baffles definition is lacking he will always be a dud.
…You could study Intelligence, Cryptanalysis, Photo-Interpretation, Battle Order, Terrain,
and Prisoner Interrogation all your life, but you’d never be worth a damn as a real
Intelligence officer if you didn’t have that Intelligence impulse.” “You must be able to see
the invisible, hear the inaudible, feel the intangible, taste what is tasteless, and smell what is
odorless.” This “evaluation” quality is described well (or rather hinted at) in a 1951 quote by
General Walter Bedell Smith – he calls people that can do this the “inspired class“. “You
can never really become an Intelligence Officer of the inspired class unless you happen to
be born with that delicate touch which produces a reasonable and measurable evaluation
without full knowledge of all the facts…” L. Ron Hubbard, after much experience with
British Intelligence, brought in a further description of this “ability” they so desire in the
slavemaster spy-camps. In 1973, to his Guardian Office Staff, Hubbard referred to it as
“flair“. This is just 4 years before Leary’s Forewords to Wilson’s Cosmic Trigger book. —We
have the Intelligence “hat pack” of the former Guardian’s Office and current Office of Special
Affairs – which basically contains the materials for training Hubbard’s

in-house intelligence personnel. One of the issues (which you can just see where the file is
open above) is called Intelligence, Its Role, dated June 8, 1973. On the first page of the
issue – is where it starts talking about this quality called “flair”. — “The most precious and
infinitely valued characteristic in an Intelligence post is “FLAIR”, “a keen natural discernment;
an aptitude, a knack”. This is so rare that in governments and armies there may be only
one such person in a whole generation or even in two or three generations, so do not
underestimate the skill or value of the characteristic.” —–What’s of real interest here, is the
disturbing similarity to the Forewords written by CIA agent Timothy Leary to Cosmic Trigger.
Leary presents the same idea that this Guardian Office issue does
– the “only one” per generation or so. —In each of the 100 generations since Buddha, a few
Intelligence Agents are born…
Did Leary do this because Hubbard’s Intelligence organization just go nailed? I say yes,
because Cosmic Trigger even mentions L. Ron Hubbard – did you know that? In a rather
interesting way too. —“According to “Sirius Rising,” the Illuminati are preparing Earth, in
an occult manner, for extraterrestrial contact. Part of the magical preparation, which only
Illuminated Ones can understand, included: (a) The founding of Cal Tech at 33° of latitude.
(This was actually partially the work of aerospace engineer and occultist Jack Parsons, who
was indeed a disciple of Crowley, as we have seen. In fact, so many of the scientists at Cal
Tech were involved in Crowleyan magick, according to some reports, that the government
grew concerned and sent in agents to infiltrate the O.T.O. and find out how subversive it
might be. L. Ron Hubbard, founder of Scientology, was admittedly a member of that lodge
of the O.T.O. at that time, and later claimed he had infiltrated it for Naval
Intelligence.)—-Err, No. Hubbard didn’t claim that himself, he wouldn’t break secrecy like
that. The Church of Scientology Guardian Office – yes, the very same
intelligence organization that just got raided – that said that. On 5 October, 1969, the London
Times Spectrum published an article titled: “The odd beginning of L. Ron Hubbard’s Career”
in which Hubbard’s connection to Jack Parson’s ‘Babylon Working’ rituals was ‘exposed’.
Read the text here. On 28 December 1969, the ‘Church of Scientology’ – which really meant
the PR or Public Relations department of the Guardian Office – issued a statement that the
London Times printed and titled: Scientology: New Light on Crowley. You’ll note they didn’t
even get the dang address of Parson’s place right, it was 1003 not 100.
The Church of Scientology has sent us the following information.
“Hubbard broke up black magic in America…L. Ron Hubbard was still an officer of the US
Navy …he was sent in to handle the situation. He went to live at the house and investigated
the black magic rites and the general situation and found them very bad….. Hubbard’s
mission was successful far beyond anyone’s expectations. The house was torn down.
Hubbard rescued a girl they were using. The black magic group was dispersed and
destroyed and has never recovered. The physicists included many of the 64 top US
scientists who were later declared insecure and dismissed from government service with so
much publicity.” —Note that it is written in the 3rd person. — Hubbard wasn’t there to do
“occult”, he was there to drive Parsons crazy and wreck his business using Parson’s
obsession with the occult against him. Both of which he did. Why? Because he was
considered an insecure threat to the U.S. intelligence community – NOT because he was
farting around with “black magic”. Robert Anton Wilson did get it right that it was a black
intelligence operation for the Office of Naval Intelligence – a mindfuck operation. Just like
Wilson is doing right here. There is only one person besides myself, that I know of, that
had the temerity and clarity of mind to even try to observe what actually happened with L.
Ron Hubbard and Jack Parsons concerning all the so-called black magic goings-on. Author
George Pendle. Look at what he wrote on p. 262 of Strange

Angel – Were these really spirits speaking to him, conjured up by his rituals, or was
someone else providing Parsons with the phenomena he so desperately wanted?
Hubbard had taken over Smith’s old bedroom across the hall, so he and Betty would have
been ideally positioned to stage “supernatural occurrences,” especially with the help of the
house’s secret passageways. If Hubbard was using his imaginative skills to give Parsons
satisfaction, then Parsons was all too willing to accept the gift.
But hey, all that about the Illuminati preparing for ET contact? The part that said “the
Illuminati are preparing Earth, in an occult manner, for extraterrestrial contact.“ Now that’s
rather an odd thing for Wilson the CIA propagandist to throw in there. —Note: Two years
later, Leary’s idea given in the Forewords about those “intelligence agents” shows up in
another book in 1979 (see 1979 entry) —To give you an idea of what else is in Cosmic
Trigger – ‘In researching occult conspiracies, one eventually faces a crossroad of mythic
proportions (called Chapel Perilous in the trade).’ ‘Everything you fear is waiting with
slavering jaws – but if you are armed with the wand of intuition, the cup of sympathy, the
sword of reason and the pentacle of valor, you will find there (the legends say) the Medicine
of Metals, the Elixir of Life, the Philosopher’s Stone, True Wisdom and Perfect Happiness.’
‘You come out the other side either a stone paranoid or an agnostic; there is no third way. I
came out an agnostic.’ There are ‘those without the pentacle of valor who stand outside the
door of Chapel Perilous, trembling and warning all who would enter that the chapel is really
an insect Horror Machine programmed by Death Demons and dripping fetidly with green
goo.’—Colorful. Sounds like a video game. Do note that he IS rather snarkily making fun of
anyone actually trying to penetrate their conspiracy THEORIES to find the actual conspiracy.
I doubt that’s an accident. A better overview of all the rambling topics that Wilson discusses
are: Freemasons, Discordianism, Sufism, the Illuminati, Futurology, Zen Buddhism, Dennis
and Terence McKenna, Jack Parsons, the occult practices of Aleister Crowley and G.I.
Gurdjieff, Yoga, and many other esoteric or counterculture philosophies, personalities, and
occurrences.
–––
So basically…the Illuminati Conspiracy Theory Reboot “enemies” of Scientology, per

Hubbard, are a conspiracy of 12 Communists including a Jewish Banker, (with some alien
Marcabians thrown in there somewhere) all bent on taking over the world using psychiatry
and psychological warfare methods.
Minor problem with that theory, it was the British and the Vatican who were spearheading the
rise of the use of psychiatry, not the communists – and it was THEM that was bent on
controlling the world. The very same people Hubbard was working for.
Not too original as a misdirection, now is it.
Scientology-related people carrying on in Hubbard’s tradition of misleading others
with British-Vatican 200 year old Conspiracy Theories
1980 April 19-20 – Robert Anton Wilson starts showing up with Scientology Guardian
Office lawyer John J. Matonis at Future of Freedom Conferences (this was the second
one). Matonis, the Guardian’s Office, and the formation of Scientology’s intelligence front
group called CCHR – Citizen’s Commission on Human Rights, his adventures helping get
the Catholic cult, the Society of St. Pius X (the SSPX) off the ground and with CCHR trying
to rescue a famous wealthy son (Otto Koehler Jr.) who was locked up in a mental hospital
and showing up in AFRICA to speak before the South African Commission of Inquiry into
scientology (Garrison, ch. 10) are just some of the bizarre cross-connections going on with
that guy. He’s even featured in an old Auditor magazine of the Church of Scientology. Auditor
#127 1976. Matonis, in 1972, had started appearing in a known-to-be infested with CIA
disinformation writers propaganda magazine called Liberty billed as ‘a Magazine for
Religious Freedom’. (Volume 7, #2, March-April 1972) You can see him pushing the
Hubbardian “Wundt did it” disinformation. Considering that this magazine often carried total
propaganda designed to ‘attract’ so-called communists by, sadly, using quite a bit of truth
about the things wrong in the world today, I’d say that all by itself becomes rather
enlightening in a whole different way about what Ron Hubbard was doing by pushing that
same crap on (or rather through) his followers.
Matonis was a scientologist, and not just any old scientologist. He’s
listed as a CLEAR in the 2006 From Clear to Eternity Newsletter. In 1968,

Matonis spoke at the American Trial Lawyers convention concerning the ‘troubles’
scientology (not named) had been having gaining FOIA documents. Salt Lake Tribune,
August 7, 1968.
2008 – Illuminati Conspiracy Theory REBOOT of 1800’s attacks on Thomas Jefferson.

Rons Org/Ex-Guardian Office/Church of Scientology Operation Save Scientology Aka The
Religious Liberty League – Randy McDonald and his many pen names, including Ashton
Gray creates a website. The internet archive first captured it all the way back in 2008 –
exactly when the concurrent Karen de la Carriere/Jeffrey Augustine “Anonymous” PR control
operation got going initially. If you look at the archived version you’ll see that a book
called Created Equal: The Biggest Lie was planned that far back. This book is carrying on
L. Ron Hubbard’s tradition of trashing democracy and blaming the body partner, an
equal spiritual being, as “the cause” for everything bad basically – aka “the reactive mind”.
Quotes advertising the book: “When Thomas Jefferson penned the famous folly that “all
men are created equal,” …Jefferson simply plagiarized Locke, word for word. But why
would Jefferson bother to steal such a naive and patently absurd sentiment? And how could
the same bizarre philosophy that became a cornerstone of American democracy turn up a
world away as core elements of Marxism?” – See how he positioned democracy with
communism? “… the feverish ravings of a lunatic. Created Equal: the Greatest Lie
exposes for the first time—and offers an antidote for—the toxic concepts that have
poisoned the very groundwater of rational thought around the world. An absolute
must-read coming soon.” –Bizarre philosophy, feverish ravings, toxic concepts. Randy
McDonald sounds exactly like Catholic Popes foaming at the mouth about the Revolutinists.
For example, Opium cartel financier Braschi, Pope Pius VI in our 1791 April 13 entry, talking
about people that agree with the Revolutionists. enemies of religion …vicious plans
..appealing to his ambition or his stupidity… a few wretched…silence the enemies ..elected
by a low mob…evil deeds …seduced by treacherous deceit…the way to perdition…We
will anathematize them …the mud of his own foolishness…it is the one true religion
[substitute Scientology for “religion” and you’ll have Randy McDonald’s current attitude]
beware of lending your ears to the treacherous speech of the philosophy of this age
which leads to death.—Or how about Pope Gregory XVI railing against Thomas Jefferson,
Democracy and the American Revolution “…a pestilence more deadly to the state than any
other. […] cities …perished as a result of this single evil, namely immoderate freedom of
opinion, license of free speech …” – see how Randy sounds just like him? All those
picturesque adjectives. This was all later rebooted and positioned AGAIN with “communism”
in 1937 by Pope Pius XI, saying how bad “absolute equality” was. Gregory XVI and Pius XI
also held all these listed items to be “insanity” – “…liberty of conscience and worship is each
man’s personal right, which ought to be legally proclaimed and asserted in every rightly
constituted society; and that a right resides in the citizens to an absolute liberty, which
should be restrained by no authority whether ecclesiastical or civil, whereby they may be
able openly and publicly to manifest and declare any of their ideas whatever, either by word
of mouth, by the press, or in any other way.” As Mike McClaughry said about this in his book:
“So, American ideas of liberty and the right to state any idea in public – the Pope called that
insanity! “ And that’s exactly what new covert Catholicism operatives like Randy McDonald
are doing.
2010 – Rons Org/Ex-Guardian Office/Church of Scientology Operation Save Scientology

Aka The Religious Liberty League begins more overtly. Merrell Vannier, one time ‘volunteer’
intelligence agent for scientology’s Guardian Office revealed that he was the creator and
author of the Save Scientology site on 2 March, 2015. (screenshot here). Because the
Internet Archive’s Wayback Machine has somehow been prevented from archiving his post, I
have created a PDF of this page for researchers use in case the ‘live’ version goes missing.
2013 September 23 – The gross betrayal of Thomas Jefferson by Merrell Vannier was first
revealed in a post here done on 13 January 2014. Since I did that post, he has taken his
post down. In my original 2014 post about Merrell’s adventures in false Jefferson quotes, I
had said: “Now that I have completely shredded the Save Scientology sock-puppets
demagoguery, watch them and see if they correct their vicious attacks against Jefferson.”
Merrell didn’t correct it in any accountable kind of way. He simply removed it from view. The
link was this and if you try it you will get a “Page not found”. He took it down sometime after
29 May 2016, as that was the last time that the Wayback Machine archived it. Here is a PDF
of that post and its comments as last archived by the Wayback Machine. Posting as admin
(of the Save Scientology blog) in a comment of September 23, 2013 Merrell wrote a big
comment responding to Independent Scientologist Dani Lemberger from Israel. “The history
of democracy is abysmal. Thomas Jefferson, one of America’s Founding Fathers, wrote:
(1) “A democracy is nothing more than mob rule, where fifty-one percent of the people may
take away the rights of the other forty-nine.” (2) “The best argument against democracy is a
five minute conversation with the average voter.” LRH also expressed his negative opinion
of, and experiences with, democracies, mentioning that the only thing in common with all
people is the reactive mind, and therefore, that group think is reactive think.” Those
“Jefferson” quotes Vannier is using? THEY ARE FALSE QUOTES. The first quote is
disproven by the good people at the Monticello website that track such spurious Jefferson
quotes The second one is even worse. Not only is the second quote NOT Jefferson, it is a
quote most often attributed to the absolutely horrible man Winston Churchill. Clearly
Merrell LIKED these false quotes because they supported his misguided and self-serving
views about democracy, and by he also revealed that he and his Religious Liberty League
buddies are supportive of L. Ron Hubbard’s subversive intelligence campaign against
Americans. He also revealed, probably unintentionally, who their HANDLERS are. And yet
they claim they are the religious liberty league. So, Religious Liberty League? No. It’s The
Good and Ethical Slave League.
2014 – November – By this time, Virginia McClaughry’s research work postings here at the
blog were causing the operatives of the Rons Org/Ex-Guardian Office/Church of Scientology
Operation Save Scientology Aka The Religious Liberty League – a lot of trouble. At an
obscure Rons Org dominated forum (Bill Ryan) a poster calling themselves Cuitlahuac
point-blank lies (post #10) and accuses Mike McClaughry of working for the government to
take over Scientology. “an infiltrated agent named Mike McClaughry, one of the architects
of the takeover of Scientology by the government of the US and its extraterrestrial rulers.”
Which means THAT is what the McDonald/Rons Org/OSA contingent told him and what they
have been telling other people for years now.
2016 – Chalet Reports website shows up to start advertising for Watergate: The Hoax book.
The site was first archived April 2, 2016. (see 2008 – Chalet Books)
2016 February 11 – Rons Org/Ex-Guardian Office/Church of Scientology Operation Save

Scientology Aka The Religious Liberty League – Robin Adair aka remoteviewed – currently
posting at Mark Rathbun’s blog – shows himself aligned with Religious Liberty League,
leaves a comment promoting Randy McDonald book: Watergate the Hoax and a website
supposedly fixing Hubbard’s War History which is obviously one of their Operations as well –
The “margaret” website. Note: Randy McDonald, in particular, has a long history of
pretending to be a woman posting, going all the way back to the newsgroup posts of “The
Librarian”. …Others from our friends in the so called “Intelligence” Community and State
Department when they were accusing us of running guns, selling drugs and having
orgies (the latter I somehow missed and was the main reason I got into Scientology….just
kidding) and various other assorted “crimes”. “Take a look at how Margaret has pretty much
deconstructed the myths perpetrated by Cooper, Russell and later plagiarized by Wright and
later promoted in that shoddy “doc” by Gibney….http://www.chaletbooks.com/chaletreports/
like the writer of this series of posts says: “Only fiction doesn’t leave a paper trail.” And much
of what Tony writes is nothing but fiction.” (Robin Adair February 11, 2016 at 12:40 am;
comments section of Dani Lemberger Nails Ortega as a Religious Bigot posted by Merrell
Vannier 07 Feb 2016) – Note the “sore point” regarding Hubbard’s intelligence operations
where he was involved and supporting running guns etc. That’s Robin/Randy etc. being
pissed at Virginia’s research work proving all that – which Mike incorporated into his
Scientology Roots book and trying to position us as being part of the U.S. Intelligence
community covertly. Much like their mouthpiece “Cuitlahuac” started doing at an obscure
Rons Org connected forum called Project Avalon in 2014. (see 2014) Note: How do I know
Robin is behind the screen name remoteviewed? Robin Adair’s blog –
remoteviewed.wordpress.com – look at his about page from 2013. Robin also posted as RJ
at Mark Rathbun’s blog for a number of years until Marty began “changing” and then Robin
exited stage left. How do I know RJ is a posting identity of Robin Adair? Because Robin
revealed that himself in 2010.You can see another example of Robin Adair in action over at
the Religious Liberty League site (Savescientology.com) in the comments of the same post I
just mentioned about Dani Lemberger. He was talking with Merrell Vannier and trying to
deny any scientologist involvement in running guns and selling drugs. Of course,
there’s just one minor problem with that denial – several top Guardian’s office persons (and
Hubbard himself) were involved in both of those things. As just one example – see
Scientology Roots Chapter Nine – 2 Hubbard’s Lifelong Intelligence Career; Scientology’s
Elusive Jerry McDonald – Drugs, Guns, and The Brotherhood, V. McClaughry – 2015.
Merrell had done a posting lauding the attack of Dani Lemberger on Tony Ortega, and Robin
Adair had responded to which Merrell then does the strutting rooster routine about a ‘piece’
he has written about Tony Ortega’s background that he will only run if Ortega doesn’t stop
attacking ‘the religion’ of scientology. “Thank you for the post. Good points. Dani Lemberger
actually did a better job than I exposing him; I just reported on it. I’m saving my piece for a
later time, but will only run it if Ortega continues to attack the religion of Scientology and
people who practice the religion for the purpose of bettering their lives and others’ — in their
estimation, which is the only valid measuring stick. Ortega has an interesting history,
especially for a person who likes to judge and attack others. I’ll leave it at that for now.”
(comments section of Dani Lemberger Nails Ortega as a Religious Bigot posted by Merrell
Vannier 07 Feb 2016)
2017 December 1 – Illuminati Reboot – Scientology operation – Randy McDonald’s book

Created Equal: The Greatest Lie” trashing Democracy and Equality etc., is published at
Amazon under a pseudonym of “Ashton Gray”.
Finally, let’s close with this out the whole “enemies” section with this.
Oliver Field’s Pet Peeve – Orgone Therapy
Oliver Field was kind of obsessed with Wilhelm Reich and his orgone therapy, to put it in the
mildest possible terms. During the FDA case against Scientology and it’s e-meter, it’s like he
saw Reich everywhere. There was even a note in the FDA files saying: “Is United Research
connected with Wilhelm Reich? Oliver Field thinks it is possible.” (Vol 4 of 18 p. 238
FDA documents)
Why is Sherman asking about United Research?
Well, that’s actually one of my favorite parts about this.

Why?
Because it shows that AMA clubfooted “investigators” are definitely kept out of the loop as to
CIA and OSS secret projects. They wouldn’t KNOW WHY Hubbard was supposed to be
attacked – there is no way in hell Thorvald would have told such lowly and no security
clearance desk-jockeys, so the irony meter goes on serious overload here as to why
Hubbard keeps “escaping” what I’m sure were Oliver’s best efforts. Hubbard had OSS/CIA
British intelligence protection. Oliver had to have been literally tearing his hair out for
decades wondering why Hubbard keeps escaping his desperately clutching grasp.
United Research comes up because of Mr. Moshier’s son. Mr. Moshier is featured in quite a
few of the AMA/FDA files.
His son had been recruited for auditing in 1961 by Dr. Dwight Wayne Batteau, the director
of United Research, Cambridge Mass. (His son was working there). It’s listed in Industrial
Research Laboratories of the United States. It also comes up in combined Defense
Department and Office of Naval Research (ONR) documents, such as this one.
You know, Thorvald’s neck-of-the-woods (or it was, anyway)
United Research appears to have had some kind of role with the covert experiments of
Project Bluebird, initiated first by the Navy in 1947, then joined by the CIA April 20, 1950.
That’s kind of a double-whammy as far as secrecy goes.
It just shows how utterly DUMB Oliver Field was that he thinks United Research is some kind
of quacky outfit that is connected with Wilhelm Reich.
Oliver definitely gets another dunce cap for that one.

There’s much more my research found out was really going on at United Research but
suffice it to say Oliver was probably more obsessed with Wilhelm Reich than he was with
Hubbard, and that’s saying something.
It’s like the guy saw Reich everywhere.
He even suspected the dang museum erected after Reich’s death. Look at this –
[1961] the FDA received a letter from Oliver Field, the director of the American Medical
Association, in which the Wilhelm Reich Museum established in Orgonon is described:
“The museum shows some of his paintings, but his scientific equipment is limited to a very
small laboratory with a few glass slides (as he left it) , with photographs, scales,
oscilloscope, Geiger counter and telescope. The impression one receives is that this man, in
the prime of a possible medical discovery, was clamped into prison. The library is apparently
stocked with recent editions referring to his work. His body lies in a sarcophagus next to his
home, and the trustees are raising money for a monument to be erected on the premises.
I believe an investigation should be instituted to determine for what purposes the money
is being collected through the public sale of tickets. While I realize no medical problem is
now involved, there could be a possibility of a renewal of Reich’s former teachings on
Orgonomy.”
(Wilhelm Reich vs. the USA by Jerome Greenfield, p. 274)
A possibility. Jesus. Could this guy be any more obsessed?
He should have said: “While I realize that anyone reading this will think I’m behaving like a
crazy person because even the tiniest possibility that ANY one might use these teachings
just sends me into paroxysms of red-faced anger. I just can’t help myself.”
He’s dead and someone might be interested anyway?
Jerome wrote about this:
This letter is one of the most explicit expressions of what was only implicit in all the legal
proceedings: that the main purpose of the FDA action was not the concern for the
health of people using the accumulator, but the spread of Reich’s “teachings on Orgonomy.”
Right.
What was it that Austin Smith’s best buddy, Camarillo ghoul Dr. Ravitch said again:
“[…] one hears that the medical profession is really a medical trust that is trying to
keep out all forms of treatment but its own.”
Hear. Hear.
That was very Jacques Ellul of Dr. Ravitch to try and level that as a “crazy” accusation
towards Dianeticians that said that at a meeting Ravitch covertly attended (hiding his real
reason for being there) because…
There is quite a bit of evidence now that is true in far too many cases than it should be, for
such an “innocent” and “goodly” thing as Oliver Field and Austin Smith were supposedly
doing.
Or as Jacques Ellul put it in Propaganda: the Formation of Men’s Attitudes —
First of all, the propagandist must insist on the purity of his own intentions and, at the same
time, hurl accusations at his enemy. But the accusation is never made haphazardly or
groundlessly. The propagandist will not accuse the enemy of just any misdeed; he will
accuse him of the very intention that he himself has and of trying to commit the very
crime that he himself is about to commit.
Suppressing Cancer Cures
Now.
With all that in mind, let’s have a look at Oliver in action.
“Crackdown on Quackery” – Life Magazine
“Experts Sound Off on Menace”
November 1, 1963
“A doctor is a quack when he claims to be able to cure obviously incurable diseases, and
when he uses discredited or unestablished methods of treatment and makes great claims for
them.”
Really look at this part of that statement. “cure obviously incurable diseases”
Incurable.
Like cancer?
So…cancer is INCURABLE? And what the frickin’ hell is the word obviously doing in there?
obvious to whom…ah, the AMA, of course. They have decreed it is obviously incurable.
Then why, may I ask, is there such a HUGE AMA-driven industry TO CURE CANCER
using…their approved of drugs and “therapy” methods that DAMAGE the body more than
it helps.
It’s kind of like this picture that I use to show the psychiatrist types of ridiculous “cures” for
people hearing voices.
Death.
“Well, at least the voices are gone.”

BILLIONS of dollars are made in profits in their attempts to cure cancer that doesn’t
actually cure it. That makes THEM quacks by the very definition Oliver Field gave!
A doctor is a quack when he claims to be able to cure obviously incurable diseases.
If the doctor adds the word MIGHT in front of it, does that kind of chicken-livered Jesuit style
sub-understanding word-parsing addition make that doctor NOT a quack? That’s a rhetorical
question, kids, meaning it isn’t even a question, it’s a fact. That is exactly why they stick that
big “maybe” in front of their so-called cancer treatments.
So, what are we really dealing with here? Saving humanity from quacks?
Or…saving humanity from some quacks and suppressing REAL RESEARCH and hiding it
under the “quack” label. (while, in many cases, keeping actual cures for themselves).
Guilty.
It’s why you can’t just assume it’s an either/or logic that should be applied when dealing with
people like this. THEY DO NOT WANT TO BE CAUGHT so have become quite
sophisticated at mixing things in the hopes of making detection and exposure difficult or
impossible even.
It’s not impossible for me, I always catch them. Always. It shouldn’t be for you either, if you
stop letting it be. It takes excellent use of one’s perception and work to find what they’re up
to. It is never impossible to do so.
But it is DIFFICULT.
Don’t just sit there and go, well, if the AMA says its quackery, a cult (or whatever) well then.
Automatically the truth is that it is not. No. You’d come out wrong probably more than you’re
right if you take that lazy-ass route of decision making.
Look at Oliver Field in action on exactly this point of curing cancer. I’m not saying the Hoxy
Cancer Cure is or isn’t a cure, I’m saying watch what Oliver does and says, with the
understanding that Oliver was still attacking this person even when he’s old and about to die.
They mount LIFELONG campaigns against people, and in L. Ron Hubbard’s case, even
beyond the grave.
It’s as if Oliver thinks he’s battling the devil himself in what he does – and I’m not actually
joking about that. For him to be attacking whoever this Hoxy Cure person is, he is saying
that they are quacks because they have made: “claims to be able to cure obviously
incurable diseases.”
I’ll say it again, THEY claim that cancer is INCURABLE.
You getting what this is really saying yet?
THEY DON’T WANT TO CURE

CANCER FOR EVERYONE
● Think of all the people that wouldn’t die – can’t have that. Too many people.
● Think of all the people who wouldn’t suffer – can’t have that. Won’t be as stressed,
might get “ideas”
● Think of all the freedom people would have not having to WORRY ABOUT getting
cancer – can’t have that. Might start focusing on us.
● Think of all the MONEY and POWER we would lose – definitely can’t have that.
They NEED death.

.
Now who’s the devil in this scenario. The quack. The cultist. The charlatan.
They are.
The other reasons they have for this abominable behavior is DISRUPTION of their agenda,
the portion of that agenda that deals with “planned” release of things in such a way as to
maximize profits and control. You see where JAMA fits into that and what they do to stop or
control the speed of both research and cures.
Let me show you how they treat people who offer ANY way of alleviating cancer and other
life-threatening diseases that are not controllable. This first one has to do with the man who
used methotrexate – chemotherapy, in other words. Dr. Min Chiu Li in 1958.
After the first two patients went into remission using Li’s treatment, they were presented at
NCI Grand Rounds at the Clinical Center. The subject of the rounds was “the spontaneous
regression of cancer”. Li was told that if he persisted in using his radical treatment, he would
be fired. He persisted, he was fired.
FOURTEEN YEARS later, when they had created the monopolized drug patents off of HIS
research, they gave Dr. Li the Lasker prize.
How many people died who didn’t have to because of that delay? Too many.
Since then, there was, I believe it was a Japanese scientist who actually perfected
chemotherapy based on the large molecule targeting system idea. What that means is this.
The cancer cells have big “mouths” or holes that they suck up nutrition from. Bigger than
normal cells. This scientist created a large molecule poison or chemotherapy that only the
cancer cells could “eat” with their big hogging “mouths”. He had something like a 98 percent
success rate on brain tumor patients, one of the hardest to cure. The tumors shrunk
dramatically because they were literally being starved. More than TWENTY YEARS later,
they’re still dragging their feet on this type of chemotherapy. Here’s another example article.
How many people died who didn’t have to because of that still ongoing delay? Probably tens
of thousands of people at least. How much money is being poured into their coffers from the
current inferior form of chemotherapy? Billions and Billions of dollars.
WHY are they dragging their feet?

In favor of even MORE expensive genetic engineering – gene “therapy”, that’s why.
Let me give you an example that is near and dear to my heart. Lorenzo’s oil.
Lorenzo had Adrenoleukodystrophy – a rare genetic (inherited) disorder characterized by the

breakdown or loss of the myelin sheath surrounding nerve cells in the brain and progressive
dysfunction of the adrenal gland.
Think of it like an electric wire whose protective rubber or plastic sheathing is being
destroyed. You get unprotected “current” spilling out, not arriving at full strength where it
should while also spreading where it shouldn’t.
But what was breaking down the sheathing? Why was the body doing this? That was the
question that Lorenzo’s parents set themselves the task to figure out, to save their son’s life.
They studied all the available medical data themselves and at one particular low point for the
father, he gets told in a dream what the problem is. He figures it out, then contacted over 100
firms around the world until they find an elderly British chemist, Don Suddaby, willing distill
the proper formula. The oil, erucic acid, proves successful in normalizing the accumulation of
the very long chain fatty acids in the brain that had been causing their son’s steady decline.
Lorenzo’s Oil is a combination of a 4:1 mix of oleic acid (olive oil) and that erucic acid.
They found a kind of cure that slowed down the disease and even restored some of
Lorenzo’s body-damage. An oil. A natural oil – not some patented drug. They were
understandably excited to share their find that was restoring their son to them. What
happened?
The very same kinds of people, like Oliver Field, Austin Smith of the AMA and the FDA not
only tried to stop them from researching it in the first place, they refused to help them and
even when they found Lorenzo’s Oil – refused to approve it!. Those that sucked up to the
Great Gods of the AMA and FDA, were just as bad, as this scene from the Lorenzo’s Oil
movie shows.
There’s an absolutely wonderful part of this scene @2:31 where the father was told he was
arrogant for thinking he could do better than the “doctors”, and he passionately explains the
actual real meaning of the word. It’s from the Latin Arrogare – To claim for oneself.
Lorenzo’s father says that yes, he IS arrogant because:
“I claim the RIGHT to fight for my kids life, and no doctor […] has the RIGHT to stop me from
asking questions which might help me save him!”
Hear, Hear.
The FDA refused to approve it for… what is it now? THIRTY FIVE years. Even as late as
2013 the foundation that distributed the oil was still trying to get FDA approval for mass
distribution etc., and today even though they are still disributing it, the FDA won’t let them
even ship it to anyone but a physician.
And in the meantime in 2018?
The FDA is GRANTING the big business engineered gene-therapy company Bluebird BIO
– Breakthrough Therapy approval designation for Lenti-D™ testing of gene therapy for the
disease Lorenzo had. What do they call this study? Starbeam.
What can we expect the price tag for this to be? We can use the price tag for Bluebird Bio is
currently charging. $1.8 million dollars PER PATIENT. Think I’m kidding? Read this June
2019 article. Bluebird’s CEO tries to justify this out-of-reach for EVERYONE BUT THE
RICH price tag, by saying: “the one-time treatment is a game changer for patients, giving
them a “lifelong benefit””
Think that’s the only one? It’s not. Spark Therapeutics’ Luxturna gene therapy treatment for
a hereditary eye disease is running about $425,000—per eye! Novartis’ cancer cell therapy,
Kymriah, runs $475,000!
Their ever-so generous solution to this extraordinarily high price tag? A five year payment
plan.
Yea. Great. I’ll take three.
Do you know what they’re USING to do this gene therapy study on Lorenzo’s disease? The
HIV virus!!!
“For the gene therapy, the children had their own stem cells harvested from their blood
rather than bone marrow. Then, scientists used a unique tool to infuse the cells in a lab with
the healthy ABCD1 gene: a lentivirus made from a disabled form of HIV. The lentivirus acts
as a “vector,” carrying and inserting the healthy gene into the stem cell DNA.
“These vectors are kind of like living medicines,” said Dr. David Williams, the chief scientific
officer at Boston Children’s Hospital and the senior author of the study. Once in the body,
these altered blood stem cells constantly regenerate to keep treating the patient’s disease.
The advantage of using disabled HIV over other viral carriers is that HIV actually delivers
the healthy gene more safely, without apparently altering any neighboring DNA, Williams told
Live Science.”
An ENGINEERED virus works better to deliver ENGINEERED genes? Gee. Who woulda
thunk it. Seems a bit dangerous to be using the HIV virus at all, if you ask me.
So, now you know what the AMA and its attack dogs primary function is – to protect the
slavemasters plan, their power, and their fortunes – and of course, THEIR health.
Now that you know all this, take a look again at this video of clips of Morris Fishbein, the
editor of JAMA, in action.
And what was that Oliver’s buddy Dr. Ravitch said again?
“…one hears that the medical profession is really a medical trust that is trying to
keep out all forms of treatment but its own.”
(JAMA; January 13, 1951, Vol 145, No. 2, “Dianetics” letter to editor Austin Smith by Camarillo ghoul Dr. Samuel
J. Ravitch. Note: the article listing for this journal pulls this one letter out as a separate listing just to highlight
it!; Note: The address Ravitch lists is the address for Camarillo State Hospital: Department of Mental Hygiene.
Which, if you don’t know, “mental hygiene” was kind of a code-name for Eugenics.)
Need I say more?

Didn’t think so.
Getting the media attack engine going now –

Notice how the first visible attack is just 12 days after Austin E. Smith told Oliver Field to get
busy, then there’s a 15 day delay before the Main Event – the big media outlets attack.
● Publisher’s Weekly Vol. 158 June 17, 1950, page 2627: At American Bookseller’s
Association convention, New York (Harvard) psychiatrist Fredric Wertham
denounces Dianetics as “neither a good book nor a hoax,” but a “harmful mixture
of science and science fiction“. His papers also mention this. (reference
originally found here) This duo split kind of attack is repeated in two pulp/fanzine
attacks. Boggs: Dianetics: Fad or Science, Silverberg: Dianetics: Fact or Fantasy.
● New York Times Book Review July 2, 1950, page 9: How to Backtrack and Get
Ahead; “Dianetics” reviewed (unfavorably) by Dr. Rollo May (this site has wrong
date) Punchline: “the absurdity of trying to view man as a machine.“
Note: Many years ago, the late Arnie Lerma had put together the internet’s most extensive
collection of news items re: Dianetics and Scientology. You can view his collection listing
here. There are some he missed though, some very key early ones that I have now
documented.
Right in here, is where another line of attack gets activated by the self-styled Dynamic Duo
of health and welfare, Austin and Oliver, that should be mentioned – The National Better
Business Bureau out of NYC, NY. On July 17th, Diana Bennett of the NBBB suddenly! – yea,
we know why – decided to send out a wave of letters, including one to the American
Psychiatric Association that same day. (see same reference below p. 320). It is not known
who ELSE she sent out out letters to, but she did also send one to the Hubbard Dianetic
Research Foundation – the HDRF itself.
As Secretary of the HDRF, Charles Parker Morgan responded to Diana on 22 July 1950,
stating he was a Trustee of the HDRF and he had worked for the OSS. (FDA declassified
documents; CD #1, Folder 3 PDF p. 324)
One week after this second letter campaign was spawned by Austin and Oliver – the next
wave of media attacks begin. Notice the introduction of one of Oliver’s favorite attack points
– the derogatory term cult.
● Of Two Minds July 24, 1950, TIME Magazine editorial; Punchlines: “A new cult is
smoldering through the U.S. underbrush. it’s name: dianetics. Last week its bible
was steadily climbing the U.S. bestseller lists. […]unveiled dianetics in the
magazine Astounding Science-Fiction. As a result, its earliest devotees were
science fiction fans.” “touch of Coueism” “mild resemblance to Buchmanite
confession“—Suspect that part of the reason for the title name choice of this
article (which is unsourced, by the way) and the choice of targeting it as “coueism”
– a fancy way of calling it a form of hypnosis or auto-suggestion- is actually
related to Myers/Pitzer two minds/two beings idea which was attacked heavily
by the AMA in the early 1900’s.
● JAMA July 29, 1950 QUERIES AND MINOR NOTES section. Editor Austin E.
Smith sets up a “question” then has two unnamed authorities answer it.
Punchlines: Answer 1: “a long article appeared recently in a science-fiction
magazine. The author, L. Ron Hubbard, is best known as a science-fiction
writer.” Answer 2: “Apparently the author thinks […]of man as a machine.
● 1950 August — President of American Psychiatric Association (APA) Daniel Blain
to Diana Bennett of the National Better Business Bureau dated 1 August 1950.
(Folder 3 FDA Declassified documents p. 320) Daniel was also part of the Group
for the Advancement of Psychiatry, on the same Committee on Therapy that
George N. Raines and Lawrence Kubie were on. See Menninger, Notices and
Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948 and January 1950
Report #8 —–Daniel is responding to her letter of 17 July 1950 (p. 322). Points:
unscientific…unrealistic….flamboyant…full of contradictions…hypnotists…
appeal is to the hysterical…faith-healers…fortune-tellers…astrologers… and
cultists…refuses scientific and specific questioning…sensational
publicity…not in keeping with the behavior or conduct of a professional
man …lay practitioners…widespread quackery.”
● Letters to the Editor; Re: Rollo May 2 July book review, NY Times August 6, 1950;
FREDERICK L. SCHUMAN letter/review. L. Ron Hubbard answers, Rollo May
answers Hubbard.
So there’s our first four, ok six items not counting the Time article. I also added to that list a
behind-the-scenes attack by the President of the American Psychiatric Association himself –
Daniel Blain. (full entry is in the Master Timeline)
Before we really get going here, I think it’s important that we take a moment and notice a few
things from a December 9, 1949 letter from Hubbard to Campbell, with it’s attached bogus
critique of Dianetics under the pen-name Irving Kutzman. What’s interesting is the points that
stand out that the sicced-on Hubbard critics would later use, but also the one thing NONE of
them would talk about. It’s funny, because that’s one that I already caught as OMITTED
before I even looked at this letter again.
Hubbard’s Attack points –
● approached with extreme caution

● Spirit of caution
● upstart fad
● the mind is too complex
● The concept of the mind [note that it does not say “man”] as an electronic
computing machine, as espoused by Professor McCulloch, as written about by Dr.
Werner in another new idea, Cybernetics, is an interesting idea but of no real use.
Electronics and engineering cannot solve the problems of the human mind. That is
very solidly and unarguably the province of psychiatry.
The one thing no critic EVER talked about –
The only new things in Dianetics are few. The discovery of the actual nature of
unconsciousness and that the brain records continually has some validity and possibly
some use to psychiatry. That these memories can be recovered was demonstrated by
Mr. Hubbard.
And chew on this in relation to Thorvald’s “kidnap” attempt of Hubbard four months later –
That these unconscious areas alone contain aberrative data is open to question in view of
the sexual basis of classical Freudian psychology. That this data is probably aberrative,
there is no real doubt. I have many times found them with narco-synthesis and I am
glad to discover a technique which will penetrate these hitherto questionable blanks
as that experience would assist in filling out a case.
Now look at these initial entries again, in relation to that –
date) Punchline: “the absurdity of trying to view man as a machine.“
● NBBB July 17, 1950 – courtesy of the self-styled Dynamic Duo of health and
welfare, Austin and Oliver, The National Better Business Bureau out of NYC, NY.
tasks Diana Bennett of the NBBB to send out a wave of letters, including one to
the American Psychiatric Association that same day. (see same reference below
p. 320). It is not known who ELSE she sent out out letters to, but she did also
send one to the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation – the HDRF itself. As
Secretary of the HDRF, Charles Parker Morgan responded to Diana on 22 July
1950, stating he was a Trustee of the HDRF and he had worked for the OSS.
● Behind-the-scenes-attack – President of American Psychiatric Association (APA)
Daniel Blain to Diana Bennett of the National Better Business Bureau dated 1
August 1950. (Folder 3 FDA Declassified documents p. 320) Daniel was also part
of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, on the same Committee on
Therapy that George N. Raines and Lawrence Kubie were on. See Menninger,
Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948 and
January 1950 Report #8 —–Daniel is responding to her letter of 17 July 1950 (p.
322). Points: unscientific…unrealistic….flamboyant…full of
contradictions…hypnotists… appeal is to the
hysterical…faith-healers…fortune-tellers…astrologers… and
So, that’s what we have within one month of the first move by Dr. Wertham.
I pondered about how I wanted to lay this out, and I decided to first: especially single out our
first three main attacks, Wertham, May and Smith (not including the Time article right now)
because these literally set the stage for all the rest. I am also going to provide the
documentation for these and quite a few others, including some really important ones which
apparently no one has bothered to do for decades, including all forms of critics or
scientologists.
Why not?
Umm…well. We’ll just politely call it lazy research, for now.
After we take up these first three guys, then we’ll need to take a side trip into the world of
Pulps and Fanzines as to what’s going on there re Dianetics. We’ll make a timeline of those,
then we’ll come back around and I’ll show you the other major media attacks, shorthand but
documented, then combine the two timelines and finish with the chosen Black PR slogans
analysis.
Sound good?
Then away we go –
First, let’s take up Renfield Dr. Wertham. My initial research into him (once I got past the
logjam of Google results that kept talking about comic books) landed me in an obscure 1950
letter from James Blish to Red Boggs, in two equally obscure (to most of us these days)
fanzine/newsletters.
That’s where I came across the indication of just how much Fredric Wertham was invested
into targeting Dianetics. I’ll document this fully in our side trip section, but I’ll tell you one
thing that Blish said now. He was taking Boggs to task for his rather overstated and vicious
review of Dianetics in July 1950, literally just two weeks after Dr. Wertham decided – read,
was asked – to specifically target Dianetics. In the part where Blish is challenging Boggs on
the use of “reputation” as an indicator of anything, he says: “The reputation of Dr.
Frederick Wertham, also damned good, is also no guarantee, whether he’s for or agin
dianetics (he’s violently agin.)”
Violently, eh?
Well, says me at the time, that sounds like something to dig into, hard. And so…I did. You
know what happens then.
If there’s anything to find, I’m going to find it.
I liked the MAD magazine #24 portrayal of “doctor” Fredric Wertham (born Friedrich Ignatz
Wertheimer) reading a horror comic like it’s a dang lab experiment or something. Frederic
had launched a crusade to save young Americans from the “invidious influence” of lurid
comic books in the late 1940s.
Note: You can read Wertham’s book here.
Quoted website – “Matters reached a head in 1954 with the publication of psychiatrist
Fredric Wertham’s Seduction of the Innocent (Rinehart & Co, 1954), which led to a wave of
censorship and a stigma against the art form that lingers to this day. Wertham asserted,
among other claims, that Batman and Robin were romantically involved, that Wonder
Woman’s strength and independence gave little girls the wrong idea about women’s place in
society, and that crime comics taught children how to commit crimes.” Note: You can read
Wertham’s book here.
Trivia: Wertham appeared on the Mike Douglas Show (Week of April 10, 1967; Episode
156) shilling his book about the involvment of medical professionals in the Holocast A Sign
for Cain, arguing with Barbara Feldon and Vincent Price about it. I would have loved to see
that one. (you know me and Vincent Price, I love his range of expressions)
This guy Wertham was what is politely called a poser.
After Wertham’s manuscript collection at the Library of Congress was unsealed in 2010,
Carol Tilley, a University of Illinois librarian and information science professor, investigated
his research and found his conclusions to be largely baseless. In a 2012 study, Tilley wrote
“Wertham manipulated, overstated, compromised, and fabricated evidence—especially
that evidence he attributed to personal clinical research with young people—for rhetorical
gain.” (wikipedia cite: Tilley, Carol (2012). “Seducing the Innocent: Fredric Wertham and the
Falsifications that Helped Condemn Comics”. Information & Culture. 47 (4): 383–413. )
Yep. Sounds about right.
I’d like to dive into Wertham’s backgound a bit more extensively because of two reasons.
One, I think he is a complicated man who deserves a bit of “airing” to fill in the picture about
him and Two, because it is actually quite relevant to our Hubbard story here. I don’t know
how to explain it more than that really, I just know that it just IS the right thing to do here.
I gave you the basics already, now I’m going to bump up the documentation and history a lot
more than that. There are some fairly big shoulders of others that I’m going to be standing
on here, and I want to thank them before-hand for everything they have done to bring pieces
about this man to the Age of Internet.
This is practically a whole article in and of
itself and though I might normally have separated it out, I think in this case it’s more
important that it be here in this story of what was going on in and around L. Ron Hubbard
and Dianetics, because of just how many connections Wertham turns out to have.
Connections that most people don’t even know existed.
There are a number of things I have done ground-breaking research on and are a World’s
first reveal regarding Dr. Wertham.
Without further ado, come with me and see.

Let’s start with 1929, when Dr. Fredric Wertham received what he said is the first ever grant
by the NRC – the National Research Council of the United States.
Adolf Meyer
pretentious to the end

This document by Gabriel Mendes details what actually happened with this NRC grant in
1929, starting on p. 105. Wertham was refused initially but his mentor, Adolf Meyer (Phipps
clinic; John Hopkins Hospial) wrote letters to every member of the Committee appealing the
decline. A month later, Wertham was granted his scholarship which sent him to Munich,
Germany to study “the brain as an organ” at a time when Ernst Rudin’s racial hygiene plans
were in full swing. The author finds this move difficult to understand (as would anyone)
because:
“While his research project would be conducted solely in the neurological laboratories of the
Munich Institute, he must have been aware of the overarching program of the institute, which
aligned psychiatric research with the broad project of German racial hygiene. …Emil
Kraepelin, who had overseen the establishment of the Munich Institute, and his student
Ernst Rudin, director of the Department of Genealogical Demographics, were central to the
infusion of eugenic thought into German psychiatric research. Rudin was the key figure in
establishing a wide-ranging investigation of the genetic basis of psychiatric diseases. “The
results of [Rudin’s] psychiatric genetics,” explain two German medical historians, “would
provide knowledge and techniques with the help of which Nature’s ‘remorseless weeding
out’ could be replaced by a policy of preventive selection, carried out by scientifically-based
political measures directed against the transmission of defective hereditary dispositions.”
“Preventive selection” would provide the scientific sanction for Nazi eugenic campaigns.
…by 1930 being a Jewish medical scientist in Munich, irrespective of name changes and
Americanization, could prove quite dangerous for Wertham, as the “positive” eugenics
program of improving the populace had turned toward targeting Jews as the greatest stain
on the purity of the “Aryan” race.”
ERNST RUDIN
Kraepelin’s new Munich Institute that Wertham was so hot to go and supposedly only study
“spriochetes” and brain syphilis, had only just opened in 1928 at 2 Kraepelinstrasse.
GERMAN INSTITUTE FOR PSYCHIATRIC RESEARCH IN MUNICH CIRCA 1930
The building was financed primarily by a donation of $325,000 from the Rockefeller
Foundation. Department heads were Walther Spielmeyer, Ernst Rüdin, Felix Plaut, Kurt
Schneider and Franz Jahnel. Rudin, a student of Kraepelin’s, took over the directorship of
the Institute in 1931, while also remaining head of genetics.
That is the same year that Wertham was still there, but soon to return to the U.S.
Also while Wertham was here, because Kraepelin had believed that faulty genetic heredity
was the root of most psychiatric problems, there was strong support for surgical sterilization
of all schizophrenic, manic-depressive and “feeble-minded” patients – this was going on
LONG BEFORE Hitler made it a “law” in 1933.
The world was literally going Schizophrenic! crazy.

In 1880, before Kraepelin’s dementia praecox idea, Germany had had 47,228 patients in
public asylums, but by 1913, this number had increased five times that to 239,583, even
though the total population had not quite doubled. The percentage of patients diagnosed
with schizophrenia increased from 42% to 56%, and two-thirds of all new admissions
were given that diagnosis. A massive increase of psychiatric patients, especially those
diagnosed with schizophrenia, was also being observed in England, the United States, and
other countries during these same years. (Psychiatric Genocide: Nazi Attempts to Eradicate
Schizophrenia 2010)
Of course, many people diagnosed “schizophrenic” weren’t but were sterilized anyway. One
example was a man who objected to his role in WWI and had decided he wouldn’t agree
with killing others anymore. Though cogent, no signs whatsoever of any mental problems, he
was still diagnosed schizophrenic by the institute and sterilized against his will.
Ernst Rudin had a special interest in schizophrenia, which he believed was caused by a
Mendelian recessive gene, and advocated that “people who are themselves mentally ill
…should not have children.”
People with those views werent just in Nazi Germany, for example Rudin’s student Franz
Kallmann, a Berlin psychiatrist, gave a speech in 1935 where he advocated the examination
of all relatives of individuals with schizophrenia to identify nonaffected carriers, which he
believed could be done by noting “minor anomalies,” and then the compulsory sterilization of
such individuals.
A year later, Kallmann emigrated to New York, where he continued his twin research and
later became one of the founders of the American Society of Human Genetics. You see what
that is really cloaking.
I probably should note here that in World Within (p.18) Fredric was quite clear in his support
of labelling people schizophrenic but it is what he said that Kraepelin meant by that, that is
particularly chilling.
Fredric doesn’t realize what he’s revealing here, but I do. He said that schizophrenia does
NOT mean split personality, that Kraepelin was referring to a “coming-apart of special
psychological reactions” and that it’s called schizophrenia because “the division of the most
various psychic functions is one of its most important attributes.” Here’s the key part – he
says it means a “definitely pathological emotional withdrawal from the environment with a
progressive blunting of the personality.”
To illustrate just how chilling this is, if we take the example of the man who objected to his
role in WWI and had decided he wouldn’t agree with killing others anymore – you see just
exactly what people like Wertham, Kraepelin, etc. meant by “environment”. They mean
rebelling against THEIR SOCIETY, not agreeing to do THEIR AGENDA. And even though
the man had no signs whatsoever of any mental problems? He is classified as
schizophrenic because he disagrees with the slavemasters and their war-mongering
agenda.
Now we know what is REALLY going on with this damn “schizophrenic” label.
What has always been going on with it.
Also right when Wertham was there, the Munich Institute had started studies on the
prevalence of Schizophrenia in Germany, by Carl Brugger. Considering it especially
important to identify individuals with schizophrenia (because he too believed it was carried
by a recessive gene), he used key informants, hospital records, and interviews of community
residents to identify them. Citing Rüdin’s work, Brugger said that “only sterilization ensures
that the genes do not spread all over the nation.” (Psychiatric Genocide: Nazi Attempts to
Eradicate Schizophrenia 2010)
So, Wertham was right in the middle of all that and I can guaran-damn-ty you that he wasn’t
in disagreement with any of it. On that note: I like what Gabriel Mendes said:
“The impact of Wertham’s perceived unprofessional behavior—his duplicity,

“aggressiveness,” and self-deception—is crucial for understanding the path he followed…”
I’ll say.
I think later in his life he became even more deeply conflicted, hence his publication of Sign
for Cain in 1966, but even then, you can still see that psychiatric “final solution” still showing
through. The book talks about how he was against hyper-nationalism and
hyper-individualism which he considered “both of which seek satisfaction for themselves as
the cost of others.”
Oh, jesus christ. So sayeth the hypocrite – because so does psychiatry with its insane
ideas and dictatorial treatment of others.
His eugenics underpinnings really shine through when he says that “elimination of these
would create a civilization without violence” and that “nobody will have to be afraid any
longer of violent interference with his life or that of his children.” And who decides who has
these things that need elimination? Psychiatrists like Wertham. Doesn’t sound much
different, I’m sorry to say, than Hitler’s need to ELIMINATE jewish people or schizophrenic
people and their “unacceptable” ideas.
Wertham’s hypocritical and duplicitous attitude there explains a LOT about the way he
behaved in life. I’ll repeat what Gabriel Mendes said again:
“The impact of Wertham’s perceived unprofessional behavior—his duplicity,

“aggressiveness,” and self-deception—is crucial for understanding the path he followed…”
The really scary-weird coinciding thing, to me, is that within 2 years of his return from that
rats nest in Munich, he published a paper on mescaline, the very drug the Nazis would later
experiment with on prisoners in Dachau.
An encyclopedia entry on the internet portrayed Wertham as having “published the first study
on the effects of mescaline”.
That is not true as worded.

BERINGER
In the United States, yes, but what is left out here is that he already knew a LOT about
mescaline from having been at the Munich Institute in 1921 working directly with Kraepelin,
Wertham’s hero. He most certainly would have heard of Kurt Beringer’s mescaline study
going on at Kraepelin’s old stomping grounds, the Heidelberg University psychiatric clinic.
Karl Jaspers was teaching psychology in the psychiatric clinic at Heidelberg, in what had
previously been Emil Kraepelin’s department. Between 1914 to 1921 he developed what he
called the “biographical method” where patients were carefully studied as to their
personalities, life situations and emotional states. Working right alongside was Kurt Beringer,
who in 1921 began a programmed series of mescaline experiments that ran for several
years utilizing over sixty mostly male doctors or medical students, and using doses of 200mg
on up to even 600 mg. Beringer described the effects of mescaline in detail in the 1927 “The
Mescaline Intoxication” (Der Meskalinrausch) which established the groundwork for the
experimental psychosis.
Meanwhile, just before WWI, Wertham spent quite a bit of time in England taking medical
courses at King’s College, London University. He liked to read Fabian Society writings and
Karl Marx in his spare time and worked wth the British on treating soldiers “mentally scarred”
from battle. (shell shock)
Interestingly enough, he would have run into Dr. Winfred Overholser during this time period,
because that’s exactly what HE was doing during WWI. Overholser was in France “treating
soldiers mentally scarred in battle…as Lieutenant in the Neuro-psychiatric Section of the
U.S. Army Medical Corps from February 1918 to June 1919…”
Both Overholser and Wertham would have also become well aquainted with British
psychiatrist (called alienists sometimes back then) John Rawlings Rees who was brought
into the British Army to treat soldiers suffering from shell shock. They called it battle
neurosis when the soldiers did not want to kill and be killed.
Notice the corollary to diagnosing that man schizophrenic because he didn’t want to kill
any more people. (The German man we talked about earlier)
What were they doing with these supposedly insane soldiers? They were using abreactive
therapy on the soldiers who had developed “battle neurosis”. (Freud Encyclopaedia edited
by Edward Erwin)
They also used electric shock on the soldiers to “cure” their lack of desire to kill other men,
women and children. They attached electrodes to the ‘patients’ body and then delivered
electric shocks of up to 20,000 volts for one second each, repeated ten to twenty times daily.
(Madhouse: A Tragic Tale of Megalomania and Modern Medicine by Andrew T. Scull)
The Shaping of Psychiatry by War by John Rawlings Reese, 1945 –
In World War I the British army had a “consulting psychologist” and a number of
neurologists. Many of them, in fact, were psychiatrists. They were brought into the army’s
machinery in response to the critical situation created by the wave of battle neurosis at first
called “shell shock.”
… Doctor Thomas Salmon came over to England in 1917… The main concern of
psychiatrists in the last war was with treatment and they were very successful in treating
battle neurosis just behind the lines and in tackling the more resistant cases in base
hospitals.
…the best results with the war neuroses are obtained when they have active treatment.
“Psychosurgery” in the shape of abreaction followed by simple re-education should as a

rule precede a period of rest under narcosis. [That euphemistic description is hiding that
means they DRUGGED them into a coma]
There is, however, no question that the general method of abreaction followed by
sedation is applicable to many cases in civilian life, particularly in psychosomatic conditions,
and it is well worth further experiment.
That means, psychotherapy WITH DRUGS and “shock” therapies.
Exactly what Wertham would be a major proponent of later on, as was Dr. Overholser.
Everybody just changed the order of which was done first, is all.
Cementing the British connection to these two here, after WWI, my husband’s The
Reckoning chapter Down the Mental Health Rabbit hole, documents that in 1920 John Rees
and pals formed the Tavistock Institute of Medical Psychology (aka Tavistock Clinic). The
plan was that the treatment used on soldiers was going to be used on society – social
psychiatry was born. 3, 75, 76
And, just as in 1954 when Wertham would use as his infiltration point of children as a
publicly “acceptable” victim for the “evils of comics”, according to John Rawlings Rees it was
child psychiatry that they started with at the Tavistock Clinic.
A think of the poor children routine, you understand.

It should be kept very clear in your mind that this BRITISH plan was literally the blueprint for
what both Wertham and Overholser would later champion in the U.S.
By 1935, Rees had this plan well begun. In 1934 William Sargant was committed to a mental
hospital. Lord Moran encouraged Sargant to take up psychiatry, so in 1935, William Sargant
(another ghoulish monster psychiatrist) went to work at Maudsley Hospital, where he worked
along with psychiatrist John Rawlings Rees. Sargant used abreactive therapy in
conjunction with drugs and electroshock, just like John Rees was doing during World
War I.
All this with WWI wasn’t the first time that Wertham and Overholser would be on directly
parallel paths.
For example –
Dr. Winfred Overholser was appointed director of the Division for the Examination of
Prisoners of the Massachusetts Department of Mental Diseases from 1925 to 1930. He was
commissioner of the Massachusetts Department of Mental Diseases, 1934-1936, where he
helped enact the Briggs Law which “provided for the prompt recognition of defendants who
should be in hospitals, thus preventing trial of mentally ill persons.” (Overholser, Briggs Law
1935). He was removed by Governor James M. Curley for abuses in the hospitals being
exposed. Instead of being prosecuted, in 1937 he was rewarded with an even bigger
position as superintendent of the government-run Saint Elizabeth’s Hospital, Washington,
D.C., where he remained until 1962. (Overholser Papers)
Following directly in Overholser’s footsteps of work on forensic psychiatry and helping get
psychiatry into the U.S. court systems, the 1954 Senate Hearings (p. 80) show that from
1932-52 Wertham was the senior psychiatrist of the New York City Department of Hospitals,
and that right away upon that appointment, he organized and became director of the
Psychiatric Clinic of the Court of General Sessions in New York. The first clinic of its kind in
the United States, where he examined prisoners regarding competency for standing trial.
At the same time, from 1933-36 he was made the assistant to the director of Bellevue
Hospital; in charge of prison ward; in charge of children’s psychiatric ward; in charge of
alcoholic ward.
Along this “forensic psychiatry” interest that Overholser and Wertham shared, it should be
noted that after WWII, Overholser would be backed to use the case of Ezra Pound to get
psychiatry fully into the American justice system, allowing the “mentally unfit to stand trial”
defense to be a valid one which resulted in Pound getting out of treason charges. Pound
was given a private room at St Elizabeth’s and according to some, was treated like royalty by
the psychiatrist. It is now widely considered that Overholser’s conclusions on Pound’s mental
state were not only wrong, but deliberately so. In yet another example of the
Overholser/Wertham duo, sometimes “looking” opposed, other times not, Fredric played
“bad cop” in this case and was quite vocal in his supposed criticism of the Ezra Pound case
findings.
So far, Wertham is closely paralleling Overholser in two of the main excuses used by the
British and the Vatican to get Wundtian psychiatry into power positions – “mentally scarred
from battle soldiers” who wouldn’t fight their wars for them, and finding ways to get
psychiatry into our LEGAL system.
You see what I mean.
Not only that, take a closer look at Wertham’s background as detailed in the 1954 Senate
Hearings (p. 80)
● 1922-29 Psychiatrist at Adolf Meyer Phipps Psychiatric Clinic, Johns Hopkins

Hospital and University.
● 1926-28 chief resident psychiatrist, Johns Hopkins Hospital.
● 1926-29 assistant in charge of the Menal Hygiene clinic, Johns Hopkins Hospital,
taught psychiatry, psychotherapy and brain anatomy at Johns Hopkins Medical
School.
Do you know what the fact that he was in those positions at that time means? It means
Wertham was involved with training the ghoulish Dr. Donald Ewen Cameron, who was an
absolute monster after this.
Cameron left London for Baltimore, Maryland, in 1926, to become assistant psychiatrist at
the Phipps Clinic at Johns Hopkins Hospital…. Continuing his climb through the academic
ranks, he became an instructor in psychiatry there within two years, holding a Henderson
Research Scholarship. In Baltimore Cameron worked under Adolf Meyer, perhaps his
greatest influence… a pragmatist who worked to improve the lot of mental patients, using
any approach that seemed to him sensible and practical. (I Swear By Apollo; Gillmor p.
7-9)
There is a third area the two of them were in tandem on. Using drugs to induce psychosis
and manipulate the mind of another to some pre-established agenda.
Picking up again with Wertham’s WWI time period, after the war ended he returned to school
and then went to work directly with Kraepelin in 1921 – the same year that Berringer
began his mescaline study.
Wertham, over 11 years later, suddenly chose to bring up the mescaline psychosis
“biographical” method in a study published July 1932 titled: Inconstancy of the Formal
Structure of the Personality – Experimental Study of the Infleunce of Mescaline on the
Rorschach test; together with Manfred Blueler. THAT was the “first study on the effects of
mescaline” published in the U.S.
“Behind every twisted thought lies a twisted

molecule.”
– 1994 interview, psychiatrist Leo Hollister
quoted a line by Ralph Gerard from the 1950’s, saying it was the moral for all of biological
psychiatry.
Note that Wertham is discussing the breakdown of personality using mescaline, ergo trying
to twist thought by introducing a “twisted molecule” – mescaline – and let’s fast forward to
April 1942 when Wertham joined the WWII effort in what was called the Fourth Registration,
often called the “Old Man’s Draft,” because it registered men who were 45 to 64 years old at
the time. The men had to fill out an extensive questionnaire allegedly just to collect
information on the industrial capacity and skills of these older men, not to draft them.
And what was one of Wertham’s skills from 1932? Working with personality-changing,
psychosis inducing drugs like mescaline. Twisting thought.
Overholser was “consultant” to the Office of Scientific Research and Development, the
OSRD, where he would head up the truth drug committee that was coordinated under
Chadwell’s Division 19 together with the OSS (precursor to the CIA) psychological
assessment unit. At the same time, Overholser was also CHAIRMAN of the National
Research Council’s Committee on Neuropsychiatry which worked to secure military status
for civilian occupational therapists. He chaired the first meeting, the Conference on
Occupational Therapy on 15 May 1942, barely 2 weeks after Fredric’s draft
questionnaire had been submitted. (Army WWII Medical history)
I think it’s a good possibility that Fredric helped out the OSS Truth Drug Committee in some
way, and perhaps even with the Manhattan Project testing of the drug chosen in the end, a
variant of marijuana. But what did they try first? Mescaline.
And only six months after Wertham had done his draft documents.
This is a condensed timeline entry I made for my (ACIM) A Course in Miracles article –
1942 October – At the request of the Psychological Warfare Branch of N.I.S, Division 19, of
the NDRC (which now came under the OSRD) a committee was “activated” to investigate
the feasibility of using drugs in the interrogation of Prisoners of War, that was just the
“acceptable” shore story. Responsibility for the facilitation of the Committee’s efforts was
transferred from N.I.S. to the Office of Research and Development of the OSS on January 1,
1943. —This was the truth drug committee headed by Overholser.— In my research into
the activities about the British Security Coordination – I tracked down details and photos of
every single member of it. But who else was “over” this, and quite secretly too, was Division
19.
Division 19, formed in June 1940, was a highly secretive combined OSS and National
Defense Research Committee (OS-RDB) organization headed by the equally little known Dr.
H. Marshall Chadwell. The now newly re-named Division 19’s first project was the ‘special
weapons project’ which included obtaining and field testing drugs like LSD, concentrated
marijuana, etc., but it also included the “Mafia Plan” or Operation Underworld – both of which
were headed by Chadwell recruit and now OSS man George Hunter White. Why any of that
is relevant is because of the first end result of that infamous Truth Drug Committee.
(see 1943 September 25 entry of ACIM timeline)
Definitely very possible Wertham had some kind of involvement with that.
There is another time when Wertham would parallel CIA and military intelligence interests
(including the Office of Naval Research) that Overholser also worked closely with both, doing
the SAME twisting of thought and personality research using mescaline, again.
As to the Navy side of it, you would know this as Project CHATTER which had began in
1947.
procedure. Charles Savage papers show that he was a “Research Psychiatrist” at the Naval
Medical Research Institute and the National Naval Medical Center, both Bethesda,
Maryland.—John Marks details (archived here) – “a highly classified Navy program called
people to reveal their innermost secrets.” Project CHATTER – Biological and
Psychological Weapons ===Notice those two are two of the ONR’s research divisions
===Senate Report: ‘…the program focused on the identification and testing of such drugs for
use in interrogations and in the recruitment of agents. The research included laboratory
experiments on animals and human subjects involving Anabasis aphylla [anabasine],
scopolamine, and mescaline in order to determine their speech-inducing qualities.”
===Essentially a continuation of the OSS truth drug committee, which was also mixed up
with the Manhattan project.===“After the war, the CIA and the military picked up where the
OSS had left off in the secret search for a truth serum. The navy took the lead when it
initiated Project CHATTER in 1947, the same year the CIA was formed. Described as an
“offensive” program, CHATTER was supposed to devise means of obtaining information
from people independent of their volition but without physical duress. Toward this end
Dr. Charles Savage conducted experiments with mescaline (a semi-synthetic extract of the
peyote cactus that produces hallucinations similar to those caused by LSD) at the Naval
Medical Research Institute in Bethesda, Maryland. But these studies, which involved animal
as well as human subjects, did not yield an effective truth serum, and CHATTER was
terminated in 1953. The navy became interested in mescaline as an interrogation agent
when American investigators learned of mind control experiments carried out by Nazi
doctors at the Dachau concentration camp during World War II. After administering the
hallucinogen to thirty prisoners, the Nazis concluded that it was “impossible to impose
one’s will on another person as in hypnosis even when the strongest dose of mescaline
had been given.” But the drug still afforded certain advantages to SS interrogators, who
were consistently able to draw “even the most intimate secrets from the (subject] when
questions were cleverly put.” Not surprisingly, “sentiments of hatred and revenge were
exposed in every case.”” Acid dreams. p. 15 of the book PDF)===Charles Savage’s abstract
notes that LSD had “no specific therapeutic advantage in depression” but that the
“hallucinations may prove of value in psychotherapy.” and on p. 14 that “LSD affords
suggestion.” (a report titled: Lysergic Acid Diethyl Amide (LSD-25): A Clinical-Psychological
Study by LT Charles Savage, Medical Corps, Us, Navy dated September 9, 1951. It starts
on p. 5 of the PDF.) See Hubbard’s research 1948 entry.
That program was still running, and the CIA was just about to roll over their secret
BLUEBIRD program into a continuation called ARTICHOKE that followed along these same
lines as CHATTER – when in March 1952, Wertham suddenly re-activates and this time
publicizes in Joe-average media, the value of mescaline.
In the Atlantic Monthly #189 of March 1952 (pp. 52–55) Wertham takes an excerpt of a
segment titled: “A psychosomatic study of my–self.”

that was included in a soon to be published book called When Doctors Are Patients and
retitles it: A study of pain. In that segment, its notable that he discusses mescaline and its
effect on his pain.
In the opening of the article, you can see that there is some CURRENT study of subjects
having experimentally induced psychosis that is referred to only in the vaguest possible way.
Dr. Fredric Wertham, Director of the Psychiatric division at Queens General Hospial in New
York, was obliged to undergo a series of painful operations without general
anaesthetics. In a sense he was his own guinea pig, and the notes he made on pain have
proved of professional interest. His article is drawn from the book: When Doctors are
Patients… Such a contrast between euphoria and anxiey occurs in experimentally
induced mescaline psychosis, as shown by the retrospective accounts of subjects.
The timing is a bit too coincidental here for my tastes, and I would have to say that it sounds
like Wertham may have had at least some involvement with the CIA/Navy interest in
TESTING mescaline again for torture/brainwashing purposes. Having surgery while under
mescaline certainly fits that area of interest. Wertham seems to be used to be a “public face”
for much higher people’s areas that they want to influence the general public on, in this case,
TAKING HALLUCINOGENIC DRUGS and how THEY HELP.*
*Interestingly enough, jumping ahead a little here, Harry Warner Jr. specifically noted that
“success” stories about LSD had been being tested in the fanzines in 1951.
And then, two years later, we have Wertham spearheading and being the public face yet
again, this time in yet another psychiatry should rule the world! rather obvious move. One
both promoting psychiatry’s role in policing what is and isn’t “criminal” behavior ,as well as
now entering our governing process (the Senate) with a none too thinly veiled attack on
Jeffersonian democracy – the Ban the Comics event.
WERTHAM EXAMINING COMICS
That began when Wertham published his book Seduction of the Innocent on April 19, 1954 –
said to be a day that has “lived in infamy” for comics fans.
But just BEFORE that was the Monte Durham incident.
I wrote a series once covering a document from 1946 called: The Psychiatry of Enduring
Peace and Social Progress – and one of my segments was about Sullivan, Fortas, Chapman
and Southard, all featured in that document one way or another. Attorney (and judge) Abe
Fortas was known in Washington circles to have a serious interest in psychiatry, still a
controversial science at the time, and was considered an “expert” in it as well.
In 1953 this expertise led to his appointment to represent the indigent Monte W. Durham,
whose insanity defense had been rejected at trial two years earlier, before the United States
Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia Circuit. Durham’s defense had been denied
because the District Court had applied the M’Naghten Rules, requiring that the defense
prove the accused didn’t know the difference between right and wrong for an insanity plea to
be accepted. Adopted by the British House of Lords in 1843, generations before modern
psychiatry, this test was still in near universal use in U.S. jurisprudence over a century later.
The effect of this standard was to exclude psychiatric and psychological testimony
almost entirely from the legal process. In a critical turning point for U.S. criminal law, the
Court of Appeals accepted Fortas’ call to abandon the M’Naghten Rule and allow for
testimony and evidence regarding defendants’ mental state. A precedent setting case
indeed, and one that Overholser was intimately involved with, as well as peripherally Fredric
Wertham.
So, see, bringing out Wertham in this particular public way, was no accident.
It was another fifth column action of psychiatry. As one of Wertham’s oldest British
colleagues John Rawlings Rees put it – Let us all, therefore, very secretly be “fifth
columnists”[…] long term planning …the right kind of propaganda.”
fifth column – a group of secret supporters of an enemy that engage in espionage, sabotage,
and other subversive activities within the borders of a nation.
Rees also had said: we have done much to infiltrate …a number of professions. …the
two most difficult are law and medicine.
That is what Wertham is doing with our U.S. Senate now – our law-making body.
One other important element here is the “opposition” in this case – Lauretta Bender. Yes, the
very same Lauretta Bender that “pioneered” BRUTAL treatment of children, using ECT,
metrazol, insulin shock therapy on children as young as three years old, while Wertham is
heading up the child psychiatry unit at Bellevue.
LAURETTA BENDER
Per his own words and submitted C.V. to the Senate Hearing – from 1933-36 he was made
the assistant to the director of Bellevue Hospital; in charge of prison ward; in charge of
children’s psychiatric ward; in charge of alcoholic ward.
That means that Lauretta was working and learning under him when she was made a
director of the children’s inpatient ward at Bellevue in 1934. Under Wertham, Bender merrily
began her brutal treatments of children, starting with insulin shock therapy that she was
particularly fond of doing to those diagnosed as “childhood schizophrenia”, which today we
call autism. Lauretta herself had to repeat third-grade 3 times in her home town of
Butte,Montana, perhaps lending clarity to the source of her truly insane treatment of other
slow children.
They would administer massive doses of insulin to induce a coma in the children, six days a
week for one-two months usually, but in some cases Wertham and Bender did much longer
courses, years in fact. Before or during the coma, seizures sometimes occurred.
Children would toss, roll about, moan, and twitch spasmodically, even vomit. Some of these
children died from this “therapy”. This is DEATH therapy, and just as the child was coming
out of it, finding out he isn’t dead, vulnerable, scared out of their minds, and desperate for
any kindness, there would be the twin Doctors of Death, Wertham and Bender, ready to
deliver their “lessons” they called psychotherapy.
When Overholser and others led the way in shifting from insulin and metrazol shock to ECT
in the early 1940’s, Bender administered ECT to the children, maintaining that it was safe
and effective in “eliciting more appropriate behavior from children.” By the mid-1950s,
Bender estimated that more than 500 children at Bellevue had received ECT, typically daily
for a period of 20 days. When LSD, other hallucinogenics and Thorazine came out, she used
those too on her victims.
So, Bellevue wasn’t exactly a Bluebird of Happiness kind of place, as this unfortunate
vintage positioning of it tried to portray, especially under doctors Wertham and Bender.
How does this sick twinship relate to the 1954 Senate Hearings?
I’ll tell you. It relates because Dr. Rees had just given his address entreating his fellow
psychiatrists and psychologists) to be a “fifth columnist” and infiltrate novels (which included
comics) and other sources of fiction read by Joe Average.
What does one do to infiltrate? One pretends to be supportive of something. Right on cue,
just one year later, together with Reginald S. Lourie, M.D., she published an article in the
American Journal of Orthopsyhiatry XI titled “The Effect of Comic Books on the Ideaology of
Chidren” discussing the therapeutic effects of comics on children. (reprinted in Alter Ego #87
& #88) and…
Voila!
Shortly after her article appeared, in 1942 DC comics hired Dr. Bender to head their Editorial
Advisory Board.
Well, that’s about perfect, right? Infiltration complete. For the next 10+ years, her name
could be seen in virtually every DC comic.
But, don’t forget the timing here, because we’re right in the middle of World War II and what
was the forerunner to the OSS (itself predecessor to the CIA) the COI or Coordinator of
Information was planned to be split into two organizations. The Office of War Information, the
OWI – which was led by a totally British controlled Round Table man Elmer Davis handled
all media propaganda, and the OSS, the spy organization, also led by a totally British and
Vatican controlled man – William Donovan.
Both of which were covertly controlled by the British Security Coordination – a spy
organization established to make sure American got in and stayed in the war the British
Round Table men wanted fought.
The OWI would take a keen interest in comics and fanzines because they offered a cover
(intelligence cover) means of spreading propaganda to a HUGE audience. Nearly half of all
U.S. servicemen were regular comic and fanzine readers. Comics were also uncensored, so
propagandists could use levels of violence, racism, and sexuality to create totally racist
propaganda against the “enemies” in WWII. And because its comics, hey, “we” (the U.S.
government) don’t look like we did it. Perfect deniability.
The Writers’ War Board was created January 1942 in New York City. The President was Rex
Stout. It was already secretly

controlled by the British of course, but it looked like it was independent. Stout was even one
of the people that the BSC spy organization used to help legitimize their front group called
“Friends of Democracy”, he was even made its President (NY Times article Nov. 1942) but
Stout was also involved in sponsoring the BSC’s founded in 1941 Fight for Freedom front
group that had a membership of practically the Who’s Who in intelligence.
So, his Writers War Board was a completely controlled INTELLIGENCE operation.
The outer story was that the WWB was staffed by “volunteers” committed to the creation of
anti-fascist, pro-American culture, but in reality it would soon receive both funding (pay) and
direction from the OWI via Mr. Sherwood (you can watch him dissemble about it and leave
out the British intelligence connection to the Senate in 1944 here) . Sherwood made sure
that Stout’s writers would weave images and stories in various comics and fanzines for
civilians and servicemen, all designed to fuel a hatred of “fascism”. Some obvious examples
can be found here.
An interesting side note is that by 1943, Robert Rosen was shown as the Chairman of the
War Writer’s Board or WWB. (Variety 1943) I don’t know what that was about, but another
Variety article showed just how much power this Board actually wielded, including on
Hollywood, uilizing a “five bombs” rating for ignorance, indifference or shortsighedness
against a film called “Mission to Moscow”. Teachers in Illinois were even directed to instruct
students not to watch the film.
So, now.
Consider the timing of Lauretta Bender hired by DC comics to head their Editorial Advisory
Board this very same year.
Yea, you got it now.
Every good controlled opposition* needs an opponent, someone to demonize/champion

right?
Enter Fredric Wertham.
*Controlled Opposition definition – a strategy in which an individual, organization, or

movement is covertly controlled or influenced by a 3rd party and the controlled entity’s true
purpose is something other than its publicly stated purpose. The controlled entity
serves a role of mass deception, surveillance or political/social manipulation. The controlled
party is portrayed as being in opposition to the interests of the controlling party.
It is at this point that I am going to introduce ground-breaking research addressing what the
heck was Fredric doing during WWII – besides the Truth Drug committee.
–––––
That BIG FAT HOLE in Wertham’s history – World War II
We’re going to call this area of time Wertham’s Fifth Column Activities (as requested by
british psychiatrist John Rawlings Rees in 1940)
There are two areas here:

● Censorship work
● Drug research and human experimentation
First area – Drug research and human experimentation; subsection we’ll call shock therapies
combined with psychoanalysis – soldiers with shell shock.
From the 1954 Senate hearings (p. 80) we see:
● 1936-39, director of the Mental Hygiene Clinic of Bellevue Hospital.
1936 happens to be the exact same year that Dr. Sakel moved to New York and promoted
the use of insulin coma treatment in US psychiatric hospitals.
Wertham is listed in the encyclopedia as doing pioneering work combing insulin with
psychotherapy.
It so happens that Wertham’s one-time student and junior psychiatrist Ewen Cameron billed
himself as the first psychiatrist in North America to use insulin coma therapy on
schizophrenic patients in March of 1936 – according to Cameron and Worcester State
Hospital in Massachusetts year-end report.
Meanwhile, immediately upon becoming superintendent of St. Elizabeths, Wertham’s

tandem partner Dr. Overholser instituted insulin shock therapy which promised “50 percent
remissions”. (it was a lie, by 1941 the results were so abysmal he had to stop).
Perhaps a more graphic example of just what that “pioneering” by Cameron, Wertham and
Overholser was really about is in order.
In each type of shock therapy, the patient was induced into a state of shock/coma and then
brought back to consciousness. When slowly brought out of the insulin coma with glucose
injections, they said that “his or her personality would be temporarily “readjusted” (what a
euphemism) and Doctors would then discuss problems with the patient in an attempt to
“banish his delusions”. That’s what they called this good heart-to-heart psychotherapy.
Remember what we learned that Therapy and Research Division of the AMA did? It gave
MONEY for: “ investigations and laboratory research in the actions of drugs and
pharmaceutical products.” Like insulin shock therapy. So what Wertham and Bender were
doing to these children (and adults, for that matter) was AMA-backed and at this time the
Director would have been Morris Fishbein (whom L. Ron Hubbard likes to call “Fishcake”)
This whole procedure (including using other similar shock or coma-inducing procedures) has
a nick name – DEATH “therapy” – otherwise known as the core demonic belief of
Catholicism. “The baptized one ‘dies’ to all sin and is ‘reborn’ in Christ. Aka artificially
brought mentally to amentia (retardation).
They would all do this to soldiers returned from the war with “shell shock” who weren’t
recovering fast enough (meaning wanting to go kill some more)
Next, we have –
Marijuana research and George Hunter White/Harry Anslinger.
● 1939-52 Consulting psychiatrist, Triboro Hospital, New York City.

● 1939-1952 Director, Psychiatric Services and Mental Hygiene Clinic, Queens
General Hospital.
A few years later, in 1939, Wertham had a fight with his boss at Bellevue and gets
transferred to Queens General Hospital Mental Hygiene Clinic. At first, Wertham appeared
rather demoralized and forlorn. He wrote to his Phipps Clinic mentor Dr. Meyer: “I am longing
for a position where I could use my gradually acquired facility for organizing, teaching and
research and clinical work…give up psychiatry altogether.” (Under the Strain of Color,
Mendes)
Ah, but never fear. George White is about to show up literally almost right on top of him,
plus, he would soon hire and strike up a friendship with child psychiatrist Hilde L. Mosse,
who was a character unto herself.
Mosse was only in her late 20s when she emigrated to the U.S. from Germany and
completed her medical interneship at Schenectady, and then Wertham took her under his
wing as her mentor. It is unknown to what degree their relationship may have gone beyond
that, but Mosse was an admirable woman in my opinion. She later tirelessly campaigned
against the ridiculous over-diagnosing of children as schizophrenic, going straight into the
teeth of crazy-woman Lauretta Bender. Still, she had to have seen some pretty terrible things
being done under Wertham’s watch there at Queens, as well.
HILDE L. MOSS
A couple of years later, a 2015 NY Times article indirectly spills the beans about what
Wertham would have been doing with psychiatric patients at Queens General.
The article is talking about how in October 1941, the Times had reported on the opening of
several new buildings at Hillside Hospital in Queens (today called Zucker Hillside Hospital).
As was the wont in those days, hospitals that used insulin treatments referred to themselves
as having “pioneered” that and other shock treatments. “The hospital has pioneered in the
use of insulin and metrazol, and also in the electric shock treatment, which has proved
useful in shortening the average stay of patients,” the article read.
You probably don’t know that Oxygen pressures were also being experimented with by the
US Navy revealing that pressure at four atmospheres could be a treatment for
Schizophrenia because it mimicked the effects of insulin shock therapy (NY Times 2 April
1940)
Right exactly at this time – John Rawlings Rees and his Tavistock Clinic boys are taking over
psychiatry in the British Army in World War II. (The Reckoning M. McClaughry) and on 18
June 1940 is when John Rees gives an Address to the Annual Meeting of the National
Council for Mental Hygiene where he asks for everyone (like Wertham) to be “fifth
columnists”.
Speaking of Fifth Column –
● Marijuana with George White

● Truth Drug Committee as well
● Personality testing, OSS
Dr. Fishbein/Harry Anslinger/George Hunter White/Truth Drug committee –
Wertham’s papers show that he had two folders categorized under “Research files” on the
topic of marijuana starting in 1939 and going well into the 1970’s.
Why would that be?
I would surmise that it had to have been related to Harry Anslinger’s Federal Narcotics
Bureau/Treasury Department crusade to get revenue from marijuana by taxing it, starting in
1937. That was NOT an innocent situation, as I discovered in my research into George
Hunter White’s early years.
But, what that also shows is a connection right to the AMA in helping that organization
squash or control for hidden nefarious purposes, any drugs that the AMA doesn’t control. For
example, in my article I tracked down the Senate hearings on the marijuana tax, and keeping
in mind the very powerful position of EDITOR of JAMA, look what Anslinger points out here:
The evidence that they are largely true is contained in this recent statement in the Journal of
the American Medical Association:
The problems of greatest menace in the United States seem to be the rise in the use of
Indian hemp (marihuana) with inadequate control laws, and the oversupply of narcotic drugs
available in the Far East threatens to inundate the western world.
Mr. Vinson: Whose article is that? That was in the American medical Association Journal?
Dr. Woodward: That is from an editorial that appeared in the issue of the Journal of the
American Medical Association for January 23, 1937, on page 3, in the nature of a review of
the report on the Traffic in Opium and Other Dangerous Drugs in the United States of
America for the year ending December 31, 1935, and published by the Bureau of Narcotics
of the Treasury Department.
– Hearings on TAXATION OF MARIHUANA H.R. 6385, Tuesday, May 4, 1937, House of Representatives
Committee on Ways and Means, Washington, D.C. The committee met at 10:30 a.m., Hon. Robert L. Doughton
(chairman) presiding.
It’s probably worth reminding you just how powerful that editor of Jama position is, and that
at this time its Dr. Morris Fishbein writing that editorial. Fishbein was editor of JAMA from
1924 to December 1949, when he appoined Austin E. Smith, his protege’ since 1940, to
replace him.
The same man who would call upon Wertham to be the first “authority” attack on L. Ron
Hubbard’s Dianetics book, plus, remember at that time,1950, Wertham was still the
President of the Association for the Advancement of Psychotherapy and the co-editor of the
American Journal of Psychotherapy (1943-1951, Senate Hearings (p. 80), so he definitely
had his own vested interest in damning Dianetics.
Dr. Fishbein’s JAMA editorial of 23 January titled: Opium Traffic in the United States 1937 –
as quoted in Hearings on TAXATION OF MARIHUANA H.R. 6385 – specifically positions
marijuana as an equal menace to opium –
Closely allied with the opium traffic is the present situation with regard to Indian hemp, or
marihuana.
….The two problems of greatest menace at the present time seem to be the rise in use of
Indian hemp with inadequate control laws and the oversupply of narcotic drugs available in
the Far East, which threatens to inundate the western world.
Fishbein approves of the medical use of marijuana in psychotherapy in his editorial, as

evidenced by his representative, Dr. Woodward at the hearings:
[AMA guy] Dr. Woodward: I know of none. That use, by the way, was recognized by John
Stuart Mill in his work on psychology, where he referred to the ability of Cannabis or
Indian hemp to revive old memories, and psychoanalysis depends on revivification of
hidden memories.
By the way, the discussions between Woodward and Congressional Representative Mr.
Vinson are particularly entertaining, here’s one example.
Mr. Vinson: How long has it been that the American Medical Association has been critical of
the Federal Government in the matter of enacting legislation looking toward the control of the
marihuana habit?
Dr. Woodward: It is not a habit that is connected with the medical profession and the medical
profession knows very little of it.
Mr. Vinson: I did not ask you that, doctor.
Dr. Woodward: It arises outside of the medical profession, and the American Medical
Association has no more evidence concerning it or the extent of the marihuana habit than
this committee has.
Mr. Vinson: My question was this. has the American Medical Association taken cognizance
of the marihuana habit and the need for its control?
Dr. Woodward: Only in connection with the development of a uniform State narcotics act.
Mr. Vinson: Let us see, doctor—-
The funny part if you continue reading it, is watching Woodward try to get out of that the
AMA editorial was critical of the government and that it did appear to any reader that the
AMA was making those conclusions. Woodward tries to blame it on Anslinger, which Vinson
and others wouldn’t go for at all.
A few month after these hearings, George White’s boss Anslinger went even further in this
crusade he was tasked to do. He wrote an article for the American Magazine in July of 1937.
[marijuana is] …as dangerous as a coiled rattlesnake.
How many murders, suicides, robberies, criminal assaults, holdups, burglaries, and deeds of
maniacal insanity it causes each year, especially among the young, can be only conjectured.
…No one knows, when he places a marijuana cigarette to his lips, whether he will become a
philosopher, a joyous reveler in a musical heaven, a mad insensate, a calm philosopher, or a
murderer.
… They were not told that addicts may often develop a delirious rage during which they are
temporarily and violently insane; that this insanity may take the form of a desire for
self-destruction or a persecution complex to be satisfied only by the commission of some
heinous crime.
– Marijuana: Assassin of Youth The American Magazine Volume 124, July 1937
I’m sure that you recognize the exact same grandstanding and even along the exact
same lines that Wertham did regarding comic books later. This connection between
Anslinger, George White, and Wertham and comics goes even further though. George White
had spun this whole tale of capturing an alleged Chinese Opium-trafficer who George
portrayed right exactly on the same lines as the comic image of Chinese pioneered in March
of 1937 (Detective comics). George said his imaginary bustee was a: “wrinkled, cadaverous
Tong man with a drooping white mustache.”
My point being that these people USED comics to suit their agenda, whatever it was, and
changed towards them for the same reason.
Shortly after the Hip Sing Tong bust in December of 1937, George found himself promoted
to the Federal Bureau of Narcotics (the FBN) New York City office – a ‘plum’ job.
Gee. You know, right where Wertham is.
George’s FBI file (p. 1) details his addresses in New York starting in 1937 through 1941. One
of his address is in Queens, the one for 1939-40 that says 65th Avenue Forest Hills New
York.
That’s practically a hop, skip and a jump from where Wertham was.
This map I made from Wikipedias list of hospitals addresses shows you –
This is where Triboro Hospital was – that other one Wertham was working at then. Basically
right in the same building set.
What could George and Fredric be doing together? Unclear. But what is clear, is that within a
few years that Truth Drug committee is going to get going, and Wertham is kind of an
authority on mescaline and apparently also marijuana.
Fifth Column – and right in the middle of WWII –
● 1943-1951 President of the Association for the Advancement of Psychotherapy;

co-editor of the American Journal of Psychotherapy.
Why was this done right in the middle of World War II? It was created to advance methods of
psychotherapy among members of the medical profession and to familiarize members
with progress in the field.
● JAMA August 1943 #122 p. 1267 Wertham Psychoanalysis and the scientific
method
Now here’s something else I don’t think pretty much anyone ever understood the
significance of….
Censorship work, fifth column.

Interestingly enough, the C.V. that Wertham prepared for the 1954 Senate Hearings (p. 80)
specifically mentions: Psychiatric consultant to the Chief Censor of the United States
Treasury Department.
That is NOT in his LOC papers listing. Odd, don’t you think?
Here’s what I found.
Report on the Office of Censorship (WWII) shows that Byron Price, a newspaperman, was
made the Director of Censorship in December 1941 under the newly created Office of
Censorship. So that tells us when Wertham would have been doing this AND that it was
during WWII.
This ties directly to the War Writers Board and the Office of War Information (OWI) because
in 1942 the Advertising Research Foundation released a study that determined that the
comics section of the newspaper was the most read section of the paper by adults
(excluding the advertisements). A later study, performed by the Market Research Company
of America found that roughly half of the U.S. population (about 70 million Americans),
read comic books. (Tales from the Code Sergi 2012)
Although the author I took the above from fails to realize the connection of all this to the
Writers War board, the outet the OWI used to change ALL comics content (and fanzines,
and a whole lot else), it’s still a great history of the surrounding events, so I am going to
excerpt it directly –
In response, the Bureau of Intelligence (the predecessor to today’s FBI and successor to
much of the CPI) created a series of intelligence reports analyzing the content of comics at
the time for use by the Office of War Information (the OWI).
The OWI did not like what they saw in these intelligence reports. First, two thirds of the
comics surveyed had nothing to do with the war effort and the ones that did were not
concerned with fighting or winning the war and the themes of the books were inconsistent
with the goals of the OWI. As Richard L. Graham states in his book, Government Issue,
Comics for the People, 1940s-2000s:
Perhaps it was the comics’ portrayal of the enemy during this time that was most troubling to
the OWI. The Bureau of Intelligence observed that mainstream comic strips at the time had
no trouble using exaggerated physical stereotypes, depicting Nazis as Teutonic buffoons and
the Japanese as blood-drooling torturers. While these characterizations of the enemy as “the
other” provided an impetus for hatred and stirred strong emotional reactions at home and
abroad, they were often accompanied by portrayals o( the enemy as lazy and posing little
threat. The OWl felt these depictions were too simplistic and misleading and could lead to
overconfidence (although this didn’t necessarily stop the OWl from using similar depictions in
its own materials).
As a result, the OWI created their own media division to distribute comics that would
promote its own messages about civilian sacrifice and the importance of the war effort. This
division also assisted other agencies to get their messages out. These organizations
included: the Department of the Treasury, the Federal Security Agency, and the branches of
the United States Military.
Government comics were re-born.
Interesting, eh? You might also want to peruse this article, it gives some great historic
examples about how wartime censorship actually continued after WWII, covertly. It was
called by President Eisenhower “News Management”.
That same article points out something very important, that the Office of Censorship was
CLOSED on August 15, 1945, the day after the Japanese surrender after having nuclear
bombs dropped on their heads. (verified in Report on Office of Censorship p. 17,18)
Thus, Wertham’s consultancy also ended. Therefore this tells us another thing he was doing
in this giant hole in his history during WWII – Censoring.
I think it bears mentioning that given Wertham’s involvement with the Office of Censorship
during WWII, I think that he became big-headed about the power he could wield through it as
“consultant”. In fact, one of the targets during the War was one of Wertham’s later favorite
targets to villify – Superman. But, it’s what it was censored on (a connection the author fails
to note), it was about atom-smashing aka the highly top secret Manhattan Project was in a
comic!
Even fiction was censored. A typical incident occurred on April 14, 1945, when the
“Superman” comic strip published in most daily newspapers showed the Man of Steel in a
university physics lab, where an evil professor told him, “The strange object before you is the
cyclotron-popularly known as an ‘atom smasher.’ Are you still prepared to face this test, Mr.
Superman?” When the Man of Steel accepted the professor’s challenge, the assembled
guests shouted in horror, “No, Superman, wait! Even you can’t do it!” (“Superman,”
Washington Post, April 14, 1945, B7)
The Office of Censorship complained to the syndicate that distributed the comic strip, and
the Superman plot was promptly rewritten to eliminate any future reference to atom
smashing.
The year before, 1944, Byron Price’s Office of Censorship had the FBI investigate John W.
Campbell’s Astounding Science-Fiction magazine because of the story Deadline by Cleve
Cartmill, that it had in its March issue. Why? Because it had a detailed description of an
atomic bomb (Berger) and they were worried that the then top secret Manhattan Project had
a “leak”.
Another thing that most historians seem to have overlooked is the highly CATHOLIC
involvement with Wertham and censoring comics. This article details that starting on p. 26.
Overall, I think I’m beginning to see another reason for keeping his files “locked” unil 2010.
(Tilley, Seducing the Innocent 2012)
How about you?
Because, man, these kind of connections are not something the government would have
wanted to be known. I don’t blame the Library of Congress for that, they had to have been
ordered to keep these files unavailable.
––––
Those Evil Comics
Literally as soon as WWII was over, per Senate testimony Fredric started an investigation
into comics in the winter of 1945/46, helped by a “group of associates”. (listen to him say that
live at around 5:57) He said it was a “sober, painstaking, laborious study.” (8:02 in the live
testimony) Carol Tilley’s scholarly article kind of shoots that all to hell and gone, because it
turns out he literally just made things up in this study of his.
Wertham’s public attacks on comic books began with an article in a publication he was the
co-editor of, the American Journal of Psychotherapy Vol II No. 3 1948 pp. 472-490 –
Psychopathology of comic books March 19, 1948 – which he had presented at a symposium
held by the Assocation for the Advancement of Psychotherapy (which he was President of).
He explained his belief that comic book readers were sexually aggressive and that this led to
them committing crimes. Wertham’s remarks in extended form then appeared in the
Saturday Review of Literature, March 29, 1948, as well as simultaneously in Collier’s
Magazine in a piece called “Horror in the Nursery”
In that same Journal of Psychotherapy issue, Paula Elkisch Ph.D on February 2, 1948 wrote
The Child’s Conflict about Comic Books, about how Wertham had asked her to join the
“Psychopathology of Comic Books.”
From there, Wertham continued to work to PR-position comic books with violence. For
example, the Friday, March 2, 1949 issue announced that Werthams’s symposium for that
year would be “Psychopathology of Violence” and would be held on April 29. I’m sure he
worked the evils of comic books into that too.
Coming back around now to when he published his coup de grace book in April of 1954 –
Comic book fans were none too please with Wertham’s antics. A 14-year-old boy actually
created his own comics lampooning Wertham.
Even Jerry Lewis movies got in on the fun –
Let’s examine some of the testimony at these hearings.
Wertham opens (listen at 2:29) by saying that he was the first psychiatrist given a grant by
the NRC to do research on the brain, and that what he did in Germany was supposedly just
studying spirochetes and brain syphilis. Then he says; “It came in good stead when I later
researched comic books.”
Of course, now that we know what was really going on there in Germany, the VIOLENCE
Wertham was learning from his mentors, sterilization, etc., that statement makes a kind of
twisted macabre sense now.
There’s some other really priceless statements you can listen to, like these: at around 16:19
the Senator from Missouri asks “that anyone who could draw that sort of thing would have to
have some singular twist or abnormality in his mind or am I wrong in that?” Wertham’s
answer is they found that assumption to be wrong. Portrays the comic creators as “these
people have to make it this way or else”.
You vill draw ze strangulation or ELSE!

Wertham has Hitler on the brain, I think.
Actually, that was lampooned too in the movies.
Another tidbit is that Wertham is clearly taking Rees’s fifth column instructions to heart,
weaving psychiatry into all kinds of literature, for example, listen at around 18:30. The man
actually had the gall to portray a declamatio* fictional character named St. Augustine as the
“first modern scientific psychologist” because as a young man in Rome he saw these “very
bloody sophistic spectacles” and he didn’t like it. Wertham then works in his particular angle
into an already fictional character (see this – the section on Blaise Pascal) and says that St.
Augustine “became unconsciously delighted with it and he kept on going. In other words, he
was tempted, he was seduced by this mass appeal and he went. And I think it’s exactly
the same thing with children…” (meaning comics).
* Declamatio is a rhetorical device (a technique) wherein a writer or speaker invents a

character of the past (otherwise known as BACKDATING) and further invents things said
and done by the ancient fictitious character. In my research into backdated overpopulation
myths and the forging of the bible, I came across much evidence that every single supposed
source or author are actually all declamatios. Not one exception.
If you borrow the 1947 book In The World Within: Fiction Illuminating Neuroses of our Time,
from the internet archive, you’ll see that there is an

extensive introduction by Fredric where he just rambles on and on inserting more of these
kind of ridiculous “ancient” psychiatry precedents into history and literature. Truly painful to
read, I must say, but Fredric’s intense anglophilia shows through loud and clear, he’s
following Rawlings-Rees’s 1940 instructions to the letter.
And how about this one, listen starting around 26:38 “one other comic that we have found to
be particular injurious to the ethical development of children and those are the Superman
comic books. They arouse in children fantasies of sadistic joy in seeing people
punished….we call this the Superman complex and in these the crime is always REAL.
Superman’s crimes are GOOD…show complete contempt for the police…”
Sadistic joy in seeing people punished…
You mean like the joy and sadistic pleasure that Bender and Wertham had torturing patients
with DEATH “therapies” and how their crimes in so doing were GOOD for them, and how
psychiatrists consider themselves the SUPERMEN of modern society?
That what you mean, Dr. Wertham?
You can also listen at around 51:12, where Wertham even tries ye old crying children (in
basements) routine to shore up his “evil comics” routine, and how he’s really “not after
[unintelligible] censorship” and tries to portray himself as heroic because “ I have been
followed…threatened…its a miracle my book was published.”
I don’t know about that, but I do know he was lampooned and even positioned as a
communnist.
My personal favorite though is this one – listen at 1:04:02 where one of the senators says
“Hitlers theory of telling the same story over and over again” and another senator says “the
big lie”. Wertham says “yeah well I hate to say that, Senator, but Hitler was a beginner
compared to the comic book industry.They get the children much YOUNGER.”
Comic Books = worse than Hitler?
Bill Gaines, the publisher for EC Comics (horror comics) and the man just positioned as
Hitler by Wertham, his testimony followed Wertham and it did not go well, to put it mildly. He
said some really stupid and self-incriminating things.
If you listen at around 1:12:36 Gaines starts off trying to create an atmosphere of sympathy
and good fame because his dead father was intrumental in starting the comic book industry,
then he quotes an 1800’s legal decision by Judge Woolsey, “It is only with the NORMAL
person that the law is concerned.” – which is like… What? What the hell does that have to
do with anything?… and if you jump to around 1:31:20 or so you are going to see where he
just kills his credibility, just tanks himself completely.
One of the Senators sets him up by showing him one of his comics about a story about a
little girl in a bad situation who emerges triumphant as a result of murder and torture. Gaines
says: “That’s right. But, it’s fiction.” The Senator asks him if he thinks this does any good for
children and Gaines says: “I don’t think it does them a bit of good, sir, but I don’t think
it does them a bit of harm either.”
Yep, that about killed it right there.
You can read his full testimony in the official Senate Hearings publication, starting on page
78.
As to Wertham’s twin in this controlled opposition extravaganza, Bender, her testimony was
on April 22, 1954. You can see a nice plaintext outline of the various testimonies here, and
see hers in the official Senate Publication here.
EC went out of business as a result of these hearings and the Comic book “industry”
instituting a self-policing policy as a defense against government regulation, like the movie
industry had done decades earlier. The Comics Magazine Association of America’s (CMAA)
was established with its Comics Code Authority (CCA) whose motto was “Good shall triumph
over evil.” Horror and other comics literally disappeared overnight, and new ones came out
bearing the official stamp of the CCA.
But, Gaines went right out and founded Mad magazine which became even more of an icon
for lampooning cartoonists to thumb their noses at authority.
Kefauver’s Senate hearing was about power, about shifting money away from EC comics,
controlling the remaining rest, and more importantly creating a “need” for children to watch
television which was also, just as John Rawlings Rees had said in 1940, an infiltrated
medium of propaganda sending the “right” messages.
I learned about Wertham’s later attempts to re-PR position himself through writing another
book, “World of Fanzines” in 1973, through a McGill university thesis (All our Innocences
Beaty 1999 McGill) where Wertham is particularly focused on science fiction and its fandom.
Page 271 demonstrates to me that Wertham is actually trying to reverse his negative image
by going overboard praising fanzines – such as L. Ron Hubbard wrote for.
Finally, I’d like to remind everyone of the HIDING of Wertham’s papers for so many years.
“Although Wertham’s wife, Hesketh, transferred ownership of his extensive personal archive
to the Library of Congress soon after his death in the early 1980s, Wertham’s papers there
remained under an embargo until the late spring of 2010. “ (Carol Tilley, Seducing the
Innocent: Fredric Wertham and the Falsifications that Helped Condemn Comics, 2012)
Coming back into our main L. Ron Hubbard and Dianetics history now –
The other really interesting thing about Wertham – well, besides the fact that he was clearly
tasked to “attack” Dianetics by Thorvald and Overholser along the blurring-the-truth lines
of his already existing job of attacking fanzine/comic authors (like Hubbard was) – is that he
himself inadvertently proves the power of command during what was literally an engramic
incidents – his own. Which all put together makes his “book review” of Dianetics about as
dubious as they come.
No one ever said the ancient Cecil Method (which is what this is) of trying to control public
opinion was ever honest, let alone moral. And this guy was definitely neither.
Wertham was a real Renfield to Overholser’s Dracula. He even looks like a Renfield.
Shall I attack Hubbard for you, Master?
Renfield, Bram
Stoker’s Dracula
I have now documented just how close the paths together were of Dr. Winfred Overholser
and Fredric Wertham, but in relation to this 1954 Comic Book hearings? There is yet another
example of the support of Wertham by Overholser.
Overholser submitted a review of Wertham’s book.
Big thanks to lotsoti.org for putting this very important document online.
That is from the Saturday Review April 24, 1954 issue. Winfred is basically PROMOTING
Fredric’s book “The Seduction of the Innocent” and trying to give it credibility.
As we have already discussed in-depth, Fredric had launched this crusade against comics
back in the late 1940’s, that it was this book which caused a wave of censorship eventually
and a stigma that still exists to this day, and that it was this book that was also later exposed
by his papers as being essentially completely fabricated.
And yet? There’s Overholser helping spearhead promotion of this blatant Psychological
Warfare operation ala the little known and secretive Psychological Strategy Board.
The very first public attack on

Dianetics came from a Dr. Overholser
Igor.
Fredric Wertham
We touched on this topic a little bit in the Office of Censorship are of Wertham’s history, but
I’d like to expand on that a little more specifically.
I suspect another actual reason (rather than just the one Wertham blathers on about) for
the attack on comics had more to do with things getting revealed in them, however
cheesily, that they didn’t want getting revealed. Wings #15 from 1941 is one example. The
issue depicts black cannibal native-looking people being brainwashed by Mein Kampf (p. 61)
but the last page showed this:
Here’s another example talking about Brainwashing in Hong Kong – Headline #74
February 1956. That’s probably a little too close for comfort on what people like Harold G.
Wolff were up to, hence the “approved” positioning with supposed Asian brainwashing of
people.
Notice that it sports the Comics Code Authority (CCA) seal.
It’s pretty obvious that Wertham is definitely forwarding someone else’s actual agenda with
all this about comics, but as I said earlier I think his status with the Office of Censorship went
to his head and he’s still trying to be at the forefront of carrying on in the tradition of that kind
of clout – which in this era of Wertham’s history is now called “News Management”.
For Wertham, that might as well read “Comics Management”, the way he’s going about i.
Next –
We’re going to take up the first major media attack on Hubbard and Dianetics, it’s from
another Overholser Igor.
Both Firsts were Overholser

mentees?
Yep.
And no, I’m not going to type out the text on this one (Oh, ok fine, I did – ha). The internet
archive description page where the article PDF is has the full text. Image follows.
I’m sorry, but ex-scientologist or not, I simply have to draw attention to a hugely glaring
omission in this first major public media attack. Sometimes you need to look for what ISN’T
there, not just what is.
What ISN’T there?
There is not ONE word about what Hubbard actually discovered, the period of
UNCONSCIOUSNESS is the engram. Not one word.
Why?
Because THAT was considered a secret and is what the Thorvald, the ONR and the Navy
were still actively researching DOING things to man in that state.
They didn’t want to draw attention to the true (and probably only) innovative discovery that
Hubbard had actually made – the “unconscious” part of trauma that he called engram could
be brought back into consciousness. And the flip side, commands could be laid in
during the unconscious part that carried a lot of effect.
Think they wanted Joe average to know that shit was REAL?
Oh, no, no, no.
Just take a look at my fully documented ACIM (A Course in Miracles) timeline and you’ll see
just all kinds of secret projects going right along exactly that line. Also, take a look again at
this that Hubbard said back in December of 1949 when he was parenthetically proposing
criticism against Dianetics from the Overholser psychiatric types. The one that I had notated
as: – The one thing no critic EVER talked about –
The only new things in Dianetics are few. The discovery of the actual nature of
some use to psychiatry. That these memories can be recovered was demonstrated by
Mr. Hubbard.
See? Rollo May is completely avoiding that.
There is also this very interesting, intentionally chosen button being used, driven by a
carefully chosen misconstruing of what Hubbard said in Dianetics. The last paragraph
punchline: “the absurdity of trying to view man as a machine.”
Hubbard did not say MAN was a machine, he was referring to the MIND and it’s
COMPUTATIONS that can get “jammed” like a machine. The book is riddled with
comparisons along that line, but not as a mind=machine period, idea.
Rollo May knew that his characterization would “jam” the minds of the readers who,
correctly, would view and react to “Man as a machine” as a wrong idea – that’s what he
wanted to leave them with. That wrong EQUALS Dianetics wrong. Classic propaganda
maneuvering.
Why Rollo May?

That’s a good question.
Let’s just have a look as to whether he’s connected to Overholser – of course he is.
A 1958 Publication by the Joint Commission on Mental Illness and Health Monograph Series
1 titled: “Current Concepts of Positive Mental Health” features Rollo May on p. 57 as having
a correct and approved view, and guess who’s on this Commission? Oh, that’s right.
Winfred Overholser.(p. 128)
Ministering to Deeply Troubled People, with a foreword especially by Winfred Overholser, the
author cites Rollo on p. 98. The author also specifically acknowledges Overholser “helping”
him in 1944. (p. 22)
Then, when the very first Handbook of Psychiatry came out in 1959, Winfred not only
reviewed it, (Psychoanalytic Quarterly 1960 29:266-267) but again promotes who’s “in” –
and mentions “The Psychotherapies chapters”, Muncie, Goldstein, Rollo May…“ Also, see
this? “Here at last is a compilation in the tradition of the German Handbücher: a
comprehensive presentation of the best in modern psychiatric thought by acknowledged
authorities in their respective fields. Dr. Arieti is assisted by a distinguished editorial board:
Kenneth E. Appel…” He fails to mention that Appel is the PRESIDENT of that same Joint
Commission on Mental Illness and Health that featured Rollo May as having a correct and
approved view.
That Overholser, he sure does get around, doesn’t he?
Last, but not least, located in California’s Big Sur area, the Esalen Institute “helped mid-wife much of
what came to be known as the human-potential movement. Seminar leaders in Esalen’s first three
years included Gerald Heard, Alan Watts, Arnold Toynbee, Linus Pauling, Norman O. Brown, Carl
Rogers, Paul Tillich, Rollo May, and a young graduate student named Carlos Castaneda,” (The
Aquarian Conspiracy, p. 137).
He helped get Esalen going? That’s just great.

I debated on whether to put this before or after this section we’re in, but I decided it should
go here.
The 6 August 1950 Letters to the Editor following Rollo’s missive should also be viewed for
historical interest, which I have typed the text of and you can see it in full at the link. Please
note, there’s a whole lot of editing of these letters, who knows what got left out.
I’ll include an image of the exchanges –

The
points I want to bring out have to do with the original chosen punchline (2 July) employed by
Dr. May, which was: “the absurdity of trying to view man as a machine.“
Schuman comes along and sort of catches that and says: “…our reviewer here misses the
central point: “Man is intended to be a self-determined organism.” Not really an answer, in
my book. He misses that Dr. May characterized Hubbard as viewing MAN as a machine, and
Schuman doesn’t really deal with that as directly as should have been done.
But then Hubbard comes along and sort of both clarifies and somewhat confuses the issue
by saying: “The most glaring evidence that May did not study his subject before he wrote his
review lies in his confusion of dianetics with a mechanical conception of the human
mind. Nowhere in the handbook of dianetics does anyone label the human mind a
machine. “ That was Hubbard’s way of trying to handle Rollo’s “MAN as a machine” jibe, I
guess.
Rollo replies and takes off from that but says he’s answering Schuman, reiterates his original
chosen jobe and — “With regard to Professor Schuman’s contention that dianetics does
not view man as a machine, let me simply quote a few from the scores of such references
in the book: “Consider the analytical mind as a computing machine” (p. 43); apropros of the
auditors practicing on cases, “there is nothing which develops an understanding of a
machine like handling it in action” (p. 173); the “auditor can turn somatics on and off in a
patient like an engineer handles switches” (p. 291).”
Crikey!
Look at these guys. Could we please have a debate that actually stays on topic and doesn’t
practice perfect examples of Jesuit sub-understanding? Particularly Rollo and Hubbard.
Rollo rather conveniently forgets to comprehend the meaing of the words consider, like and
“a machine” while citing examples of what were metaphors about the MIND. Not MAN.
Although his last example quote, to be fair, does make “a patient” sound like a machine.
Sound like is not the same as “view man as a machine” and Rollo knows it. It’s why he
doesn’t address Hubbard’s statement of “Nowhere in the handbook of dianetics does anyone
label the human mind a machine.” because he knows thats true, Hubbard didn’t. But Rollo
wants his propaganda line to stand in the readers minds, so that’s why he responds the way
he did on that point. And it’s also why, in an obvious snit, Rollo ends his reply with the other
part of the two main chosen slogans. He positions Hubbard’s work as only worthy of a
science fiction fanzine, ie: “Dianetics first appeared in the magazine Astounding Science
Fiction and it is in this magazine that you can learn, if you wish, about Mr. Hubbard and his
work.”
Rollo’s equivalent of a child saying:
So THERE.
It’s worthy of note that at the time Rollo said the above, it was literally just a week after
Austin E. Smith had published his attack (jumping a little ahead here) and one of his
“experts” had said: “Articles on dianetics have not appeared in national psychiatric journals,
but a long article appeared recently in a science-fiction magazine.The author, L. Ron
Hubbard, is best known as a science-fiction writer.” The negative implications there are
obvious, it’s just as obvious as it is to see Rollo now doing the same PR-positioning in his
snitty reply to Hubbard.
But Hubbard doesn’t actually answer Rollo’s original statement and answers something else
instead when he says: “Nowhere in the handbook of dianetics does anyone label the human
mind a machine.”
Also, Hubbard doesn’t even catch the big one, although, who knows, maybe he did because
we don’t know what he said that the Editor “edited” out of his reply. I refer to my point about
that Rollo May steers clear of the area of secret projects, the UNCONSCIOUS parts of
trauma that Hubbard was having success recovering details from. We don’t see that
discussed in any of these replies.
We also see Rollo reveal that it is his JOB. Which means someone told him to do it. “[…] my
job was to review a book, not to set up an experimental laboratory”
You mean like the laboratory that head of the ONR Thorvald wanted to set up Hubbard in?
Just thought I’d throw that in there…
JAMA editor Austin E. Smith’s contribution to the melee’ –
Firstly, just about every single person out there is citing this one wrong. They keep
misleading people that it’s in a “Book Reviews” section. Here’s just one example, reference
2569 in this book. That’s not where it was, at all.
It took some doing, but I found it. I finally found this and went through it and there it was. It
was in the QUERIES AND MINOR NOTES section. Here’s a PDF of it.
Putting it in the QUERIES AND MINOR NOTES section was a whole “hit” in itself positioning
Dianetics as “minor”, but it’s also positioned up against questions about Toxic Products Used
In Cleaning Clothes and Chronic Ulcers on Leg and Fenestration for Otosclerosis (whatever
the hell that means).
Nice. Real nice.
So petty these guys are.
Here’s the image for you – plain text below.

The “set up” by Austin E. Smith, the editor: An anonymous “M.D.” says:
“Patients are beginning to request medical opinion on “dianetic treatment,” and I am at a loss
as to what they should be told. What is the attitude of leading psychiatrists toward the
method as recommended in the book on “dianetic therapy” by L. Ron Hubbard?”
The intro “spike” comes next – Just helpin’ out, you know – “This inquiry was referred to two
authorities, whose replies follow.—Ed.”
Followed by authorities with no names that I could see on this page:
ANSWER — Dianetic treatment cannot be considered a “form of psychiatry.” It does not take
cognizance of the observations and views of psychiatrists. Articles on dianetics have not
appeared in national psychiatric journals, but a long article appeared recently in a
science-fiction magazine. The author, L. Ron Hubbard, is best known as a science-fiction
writer. The author of the recently published “Handbook on Dianetics” makes fantastic claims
as to the efficacy of his therapy, completely brushes aside current medical psychiatric
understanding of mental disturbances and of psychotherapy. Because it promises so much
to the reader, the book and the views of the author will probably attract attention. The book
will be confusing to readers and cannot be recommended by responsible physicians.
ANSWER–The 400 page “Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health,” by L. Ron
Hubbard, is the only material available on this subject known to the writer. Although a
preface is written by a physician, the subject is not presented as being related to medicine.
Psychiatry would certainly not claim it. The author is a layman and describes in his system of
“treatment” a method whereby one layman can help another overcome a psychologic illness.
Apparently the author thinks in terms of mathematics and of man as a machine. His theory is
that psychologic difficulties are caused by “blocked engrams,” memory images which are
confused or distorted in the body cells of the subject. Once these are “recalled” and “cleared”
the subject gets well and remains well. The author makes gross errors in his
oversimplification of the personality structure and function. His elaborate claims in the
“treatment” results are unsupported.
Notice anything?
I did.
It’s a tag team. One keeps commenting on Hubbard’s background as a science-fiction writer,
the other does the deliberate mischaractization of Hubbard’s words and premises to mean
man as a machine.
I feel like I’m looking at sock-puppets JAMA-style.

And again, neither of them speak of the real point-of-interest that all the secret projects
had right then – that “unconscious” part of the engram, the power of it.
On that note, now it’s time for us to take that side trip.
Side trip into the world of Pulps and Fanzines
with items concerning Hubbard and Dianetics or Scientology
that have been either completely overlooked (not even known about)
or not correctly documented and cross-referenced

JOHN W. CAMPBELL JR. ASTOUNDING SCIENCE FICTION DECEMBER 1949 (P. 80)
.
Right in here, literally one day before the Main Event of mass-media exposure, we get
another interesting (and little known to other researchers) point of attack.
This time from something (found here) called the Science Fiction Newsletter #16 July 1,
1950 (previously named Bloomington News Letter unil the April 1950 issue). It doesn’t say
much, but you can still see the main chosen slogans and “positioning” of Hubbard’s work
showing up. Boggs is referring to the May 1950 issue of Astounding where Hubbard’s article
Dianetics: Evolution of a Science was published – at the same time the book Dianetics: The
Modern Science of Mental Health came out.
Back history – The December 1949 issue of Astounding carried the first hint of Dianetics
(p.80). This is the exact same month Austin Smith replaced Fishbein as editor of
JAMA. The March 1950 issue carried another teaser about the upcoming artice by Hubbard
about dianetics, an intro by Campbell. (p. 4) titled: “Of Human Memory”. The April 1950
issue of announces the 16,000 word article is ready and will come out next month (p. 132)
Campbell believes it will cause “one full-scale explosion across the country.” It says the title
will be Dianetics: An Introduction to a New Science. Perhaps overlooked by most amidst the
claims for Dianetics being laid out by Campbell is this one “Evidence that insanity is
contagious and IS NOT HEREDITARY.” which flies straight into the teeth of eugenics
psychiatrists like Dr. Wertham and Overholser. Important: Just after this issue came out is
when Thorvald Solberg tried to draft Hubbard into secret projects in the Office of Naval
Research.
Discussing John Campbell Jr., on the first page Dean Walter “Redd” Boggs is talking about
that Campbell has “resorted” to the formula relied on by Sunday supplements—the
Sensation, the Eye-opener, then refers to “hoaxes” such as “The Aphrodite Project” following
that formula. So, he has positioned the ideas of “sensation” “eye-openers” with “hoaxes”
in the reader’s mind, and THEN –
“While “project” and its brethern somewhat weakened ASF’s repuation, as is indicated by
Campbell’s frequent assertion that this article or that one is “definitely not a hoax,” these
attempts were relatively harmless compared to his latest Eye-Opener: “Dianetics.” In
publishing this brainstorm by L. Ron Hubbard, Campbell has produced a Sensation by
adopting the READER’S DIGEST method–seeking the verdict of the uninformed public
before submitting the work to the psychology experts for the “ruthless criticism and
cross-checking that is the very life-blood of science.” That a hack writer‘s “new science,”
presented full-blown to the world in a two-bit pulp, will revolutionalize psychotherapy is as
wild a dream as the one entertained by the fanzine editor who advertised an article
purporting to reveal solar-origin hypothesis guaranteed to put Lplace in his place and make
Buffon a buffoon.”
Note: Arthur Levine wrote responding to Red Boggs attack/review from July 1950, his
response appears in October 1950 Science Fiction Newsletter #17.
Next –
This is an odd one. Renascence, v. 1, issue 1, August 1950; Dianetics Review wih
Reservations a long article by Kenneth MacNichol pages 4-5. The issue is dated August
1950 and yet the article specifically states: “The book is not yet published at the date of this
writing. One long article by Hubbard has appeared in Science Fiction with two editorials by
JWC who also contributed a long article in a day-old issue of the fanzine Rhodomagnetic
Digest.”
So, whoever this is waited three months to publish this? Somethings fishy.
Especially considering what’s on page 4. “Man is not a machine; not a robot.”
Say what?
Yea. Hmm. And this is being published AFTER Rollo May brought that idea out. Note to self:
I don’ think I buy the backdating of this so I am going to file it based on the publishing date
itself.
p. 5 Now here is something I found particularly interesting –
“The most hopeful thing to be found here is Hubbard’s own warning, bluntly expressed and
accepted, that dianetics is a method of procedure that, properly conducted, yields
useful results. After that, says Hubbard, let the theory go, because it may or may not
be valid. It is a starting place. No matter if the theory is altogether false assumption if
practice works. Wih more and more data, theory can be corrected.” Excellent advice–
Let it be well remembered by all future students of dianetics. Then, whatever dianetics may
be at this moment, the time must arrive when, sufficiently corrected—and corrected,
possibly, almost beyond recognition, both theory and practice will be altogether sound.”
Yep. So there’s that.
Now for some more high weirdness, this time from a 14-year-old-kid.
All Our Yesterdays 31: Spaceship by Harry Warner Jr. talks about the very young Robert
Silverberg from Brooklyn and his Spaceship fanzine he started in 1949. Well, in #6 (3
December 1949), he’s very happily outing people’s real identities under pen names One of
them was L. Ron Hubbard.
Note: all Spaceship magazines that I am examining were originally found here.
Would it surprise you to know that this little fanzine newsletter was one of the first outlets to
demonize Hubbard and Dianetics? I thought it might.
One wonders just how connected to Red Boggs this Saul Diskin character (that you’re about
to see) may have been. Why? Because now that Silverberg is under Diskin’s “co” editorship
influence, later on we see him supposedly do a fully fleshed out attack on Dianetics that is
titled rather similarly to Boggs July attack. Boggs’ title: Dianetics: Fad or Science, Silverberg’
title: Dianetics: Fact or Fantasy.
Odd.
We also might want to note the possibility that someone had rifled Campbell’s files (Oliver
Field perhaps) and found the December 9, 1949 letter from Hubbard with it’s attached bogus
critique of Dianetics under the pen-name Irving Kutzman, because one part of it has a
psychiatrist having a Dianetics session for “stomach pains”. It’s a rather crazed sort of
session too, on the psychiatrists part.
With all that in mind, read this by Diskin.

SAUL, LATER IN LIFE.
It was Spaceship #9, July 1950. Page 12 carries an attack story disguised as fiction by
mystery man Saul Diskin called “Cancelled, a dianetic fantasy”. Saul was born in New
York City on Aug. 22, 1934, and raised in Brooklyn, so he was only 15 when he wrote this
story. (about to turn 16). In 1951 he goes off to Vermont to go to college, at age 17. His
obituary doesn’t have one word about this writing career of his.
Saul details a rather odd story about Thomas Portune, Dianetic Auditor who audits Dudley
Farnham (who has shooting pains in his stomach). During this “session” Saul makes it look
like Dianetics is doing straight hypnotism, installing a “canceller”. The “incident” run is
Dudley’s having read a Superman story. The session is interrupted, meanwhile Dudley is
mumbling about being Superman, jumps out a 3 story window landing standing without
injury, with the auditor screaming out the window “Cancelled! Cancelled!”.
A Superman story?
Well, if that isn’t practically a verbatim black propaganda idea along the lines of what Dr.
Wertham was saying about Superman comics, about how they gave people delusions of
power and such and how DANGEROUS that is. So, with this ridiculously out of place and
time story by Saul Diskin (remember, the first major media attack, the Rollo May New York
Times article hadn’t even come out yet) it looks to me that Wertham may have “tapped” Saul
Diskin just after Wertham did his attack at the Book fair. So…
Everyone say hello Fredric.

Over in the Wild West, we have –
The Western Star #3 August 26, 1950 Hubbard announces sure cure for atheism then on
actual article page it says: FLASH!! Ron Hubbard says in effect: Dianetics will cure atheism
and is being adopted by many churches. Chew that one good. This little cult is getting up
steam now. Swank HDQ in Jersey and offices in NYC $500 per month for the “master”…”
And this is interesting. Hubbard’s display in Los Angeles of a Clear – “brought a clear all the
way from Boston but the demonstration fizzled when stage-fright prevented the girl from
really performing. All she could say was that she felt better every day since “taking the cure”
however she was toally unable at the time to demonstrate any feats of memory. But Ron was
a capable enough showman to keep most of the audience from feeling let down.”
Bet you haven’t seen a review of it like that before.
Note the positioning of Saint Hubbard and the dragon, that the Church of Scientology would
later use to promote its “Bridge to Freedom”.
This is from Scientology’s Advance Magazine #53 1978. See what I mean?
Wow.
So anyway, the Western Star article finished with this at the end – very subtle.
$$$$ % dianetics % $$$$
Next –
In the fanzine Orb, v. 2, issue 1, 1950, “Report from up yonder” insert by Bob Johnson, he
talks about a trip to a sci-fi convention in Portland, during which he had a “dianetic session”
presumably from Harry B. Moore on August 27th. “The first night, we stayed at the
Commercial Hotel in Vernal, Utah. I went through my first Dianetics session, then…… and
didn’t quite know what to think of it…… It’s sorta hard to get used to ‘living through an
experience’ instead of remembering little patches.”
Then on p. 20 in where it looks like this was either September 1 or 2 in Portland Oregon –
Theodore (Ted) Sturgeon and Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman began to speak about Dianetics.
“After this, Forrie Ackerman and Ted Sturgeon gave talks on Dianetics. The hall had filled
steadily, and by now was at its bulgingest. I expect about 250 or 275 people attended this.
Unfortunately Forrie and Ted both beat round the bush, without really hitting anything of
importance. It was intensely interesting to fans like myself who are neophytes to Dianetics,
but to the many more experienced people in the room, it was a little tiring. I enjoyed every
minute of it, however, and I am positive that many others did. This continued till after 11,
when everyone concerned decided that if the next part of the program were to be held, we’d
all better clear out. The whole group dispersed, and then re-gathered,with quite a few fen
who had not attended the previous lecture, at the GUILD Theatre, where there was a special
stfnal preview of DESTINATION MOON.”
P. 23 talks about how Bob got sick suddenly, and that he thought it was dianetic session
related. But it’s what Harry said that’s interesting, note how he makes the ‘file clerk’ sound
like an entirely separate person or thing than Bob, which makes it seem that Harry knew that
Hubbard actually thought the “reactive mind” was composed of entities. (see Philip K. Dick
story a little later on here).
“The second night we stayed at Mountain Home, Idaho. Harry was planning to audit Heisner.
While we were starting to eat our dinner, I suddenly developed a terrific sinus attack. Harry
said it was my file clerk wanting attention so it could be audited instead of Charles.
Since Chas had priority, I had to grin and bear it. While at the cafe, I had to ask for a hot
towel to hold against my face, the attack was so bad. Get this: I have never had any trouble
with my sinus in my life, outside of the occasional clogging of head colds, and such. I have
never experienced any pain remotely as severe as I did at this time, Now, draw your own
conclusions about Dianetics being dangerous or not. […] Somewhere, in the middle of a
Helios or Vom, my sinus trouble was forgotten, and therefore vanished.[…] The third night
was spent in Burgoyne, Idaho, where I was given a thorough auditing. Lots of things
were found out, but it seems like I have few engrams, but scads of locks. “
One of the other things discussed in that story was the deciding of where the next
convention would be held and by who. Harry B. Moore won the vote, and the next one would
be held in New Orleans.
Now James Blish shows up to challenge Red Boggs, the first fanzine attacker of Dianetics.
James Blish goes after Boggs for what he said in Science Fiction Newsletter #16, which
Boggs then reprints in a different fanzine called Spacewarp, the September 1950 issue,
where Boggs discusses Blish’s letter in his “File 13” column – which he makes a point of
noting is the “13th” installment.
Spacewarp September 1950, column File 13, #13 by Red Boggs.
DIANETICS — FAD OR SCIENCE?
James Blish submits the following rebuttal to my remarks in Science Fiction News
Letter (July 1950) concerning dianetics. If you read SFNL — and you should,
because it has a lot more in it besides my column — you may remember I accused
aSF editor John W. Campbell of publishing Hubbard’s “Dianetics” article in order
to produce a Sensation “by adopting the Reader’s Digest method — seeking the
verdict of the uninformed public before submitting the work to psychology
experts for the ‘ruthless criticism and cross-checking that is the very life-blood of
science.'” I concluded by remarking that the possibility of “a hack writer’s ‘new
science,’ presented full-blown to the world in a two-bit pulp, will revolutionize
psychotherapy,” is a wild dream.
Here is Jim’s rebuttal:
“Your comment on Campbell’s publication of Hubbard’s dianetics article has some

limitations about which your readers should know. It is; first of all, the comment of
a man who has not read Hubbard’s book (Dianetics, Hermitage House, N. Y., $4).
Secondly, it is the comment of a man who lives in Minneapolis and who has hence
been unable to run any kind of check upon Hubbard’s, Campbell’s, and Winter’s
claims for dianetics. Third, it uses push-button terms which do not reflect the
actual situation.
“Point (1) I leave to your innate honesty. If it moves you to go and get the book
and read it, if only to give the chance to say you have too read it, it will have
accomplished its purpose.
“(2) Admittedly it is most difficult to check many of the claims made by the
dianetics boys; they are being very cagey about the question of formal evidence,
despite their talk about rigid examination of the claims. I think it germane to note,
however, that I first tackled Hubbard’s book for laughs, from the point of view of a
dogmatic, classical Freudian; that since that time I have managed, despite
considerable evasive action on the part of the dianetics people, to check some of
their most extravagant claims, as well as some of their minor ones; and that thus
far the claims check with the facts. My checking includes, as might be expected,
practice of dianetic therapy upon myself, my wife, and friends. It also includes,
however, specific checks of clinical evidence from good sources unconnected
with Hubbard, Winter or Campbell. (Details on request.) Did you attempt to make
any such checks?
“(3) Your description of Hubbard as a ‘hack writer’ and of aSF as a ‘two-bit pulp
magazine’ brings up the question of the reputation of the parties involved. As a
question, it is not asked very well, and so pre-determines a bad answer. Hubbard
is inarguably a hack writer, especially these days, but if the claims made for
dianetics check all the way out to the end, he is also an original thinker of
staggering gifts. I do not yet make the latter claim for Hubbard, but I observe that
these two categories are not mutually exclusive, and that no one can rule out the
latter without examining critically and intensively what Hubbard says he has
accomplished. As for aSF, it is to be sure a magazine costing 25¢, printed on
something rather unlike pulp paper, and containing stories something like those
printed in less toney pulp magazines. It also has an audience rated as the most
intelligent and the most technically knowledgeable of any general magazine in this
country — by which I mean to exclude only actual technical magazines and the
literary quarterlies — surely the most remarkable audience ever commanded by a
mass magazine. Whether or not an audience which greets articles on the
mechanisms of electronic computers with interest is a bad introduction to
dianetics is not, after all, a very open question. When you observe, furthermore,
that the article was deliberately delayed pending the publication of the book,
which contained a great deal of material aimed directly at specialists in the field of
psychotherapy, the analogy with Reader’s Digest practice breaks down with great
rapidity. (There is, I will add, still some justice in the analogy; I object to it only as
a quarter-truth, with the qualification that there were serious, considerable
motives behind Campbell’s and Hubbard’s proceeding as they did.)
“If the question of reputation is to enter into our discussion, then we can’t stop at
labeling the reputation of Hubbard and aSF, however. We have to ask: what is the
reputation of Campbell? of Dr. Joseph A. Winter? of Hermitage House? of Nancy
Roodenberg? What is the reputation of the psychosomatic clinic of New York’s
Presbyterian Medical Center, which vouches for a specific, spectacular success
for dianetic therapy? of the two oculists who have reported with amazement that
they have had to revise their patients’ glasses formulae upwards? (One of my own
checks.)
“Moreover, we have to ask: just how pertinent is this whole question of reputation.
The reaction of an established authority to any teetotally revolutionary discipline
is historically predictable. The reputation, for instance, of Dr. Winter really proves
nothing, no matter how good it is (and it’s plenty damned good.) The reputation of
Dr. Frederick Wertham, also damned good, is also no guarantee, whether he’s for
or agin dianetics (he’s violently agin.)
“The question is, DOES IT WORK? If it does, I don’t care whether Hubbard is
Christ or Barrabas. And I’m irritated by your prejudging an idea by the reputation
of the man who advance it. Why not check first? Not the reputations, that’s
worthless. Check the idea.”
Which ends Jim Blish’s remarks.
Admittedly, my remarks in the SFNL column were those of one who has not read
Hubbard’s book, and for that matter read Hubbard’s aSF article with much mental
confusion. But that fact, I think, merely points up my whole argument: that
Hubbard’s “new science” has been given to the uninformed public rather than to
the scientists. Granted that aSF has an intelligent, technically trained faction in its
audience. It also has a plethora of readers like me — moderately intelligent,
technically untrained guys, whose wide-eyed acceptance of such a “science”
(which is clearly but perhaps not correctly labeled “world-shaking”) is the same
sort of half-witted “fad” as General Semantics degenerated into. The spectacle of
a bunch of fuggheaded juveniles loudly mouthing dianetical catch-phrases can do
LRH’s idea no good.
Dianetics has two strikes against it already: it has been immoderately publicized
in a “two-bit pulp” — a term I used deliberately in the original article, not to mirror
my own thoughts, but to show how a lot of non-stf-reading scientists will and do
regard aSF — and it has been proposed by a man who has absolutely no standing
in psychological or psychiatric fields at all, and is, in their eyes, merely a “hack
writer of pseudo-science.” That Hubbard’s livelihood is based, in part, on pulp
writing cannot be helped, of course, and I agree that it bears no direct relation to
his ability as a thinker. But since this one fact — who it was that formulated
dianetics — is unalterable, I see no reason for making his “science” endure the
added onus of pulp presentation and a “fad” status among brainless juveniles. No
reason, that is, except one of publicity. Of course, publicity of the sort Campbell
has given dianetics may help the “new science” just as much as it helped aSF. But
is enough good to come from that publicity to outweigh the above-mentioned bad
points?
My reaction to reports so far concerning the “success” of dianetics is merely “So

what?” Unless testimony is once again, after so long, considered an infallible
source of psychological information, then we’ll have to discount most of the
present reports on dianetical “successes.” Experimental investigation is
necessary to establish dianetics on a scientific basis, and this will be done by
scientists who know what they are about, and not by dewy-eyed amateurs who
rush to LASFS or ESFA meetings to report their “successes in the same
irresponsible way that Shaverites report their occult experiences. After all
Coueism “worked,” too; it even had some psychological basis; but I never heard
of a psychologist who believed Coueism was a universal cure-all merely because
a bunch of harebrained people said, By god, I am getting better and better!
You’re right: the question is, does dianetics work? But it needs a chance to prove
itself. It needs the serious attention of psychology for the next 10 or 50 years, just
as such a revolutionary “science” as psychoanalysis did. It doesn’t need publicity
among uninformed people such as aSF readers. Is dianetics to be a cultish fad, or
a science? The way it has developed so far, I foresee ads of the Dianetics
Research Foundation occupying the same place that Rosicrucian ads do today,
while psychology, the well-grounded science of behavior, carried on as before.
After all, psychology is now a pretty sound science, and its successes, if not
spectacular like dianetics, are at least decisive enough to show that it’s on the
right track.
I plead innocent to “prejudging” dianetics as far as its value is concerned. As

someone points out in the current aSF, anyone would be crazy not to want to
believe it. I hope that it is all that Hubbard claims. But I am from Hannibal — I want
to be shown. I don’t want the anecdotes of fad-happy juveniles. I want the results
of experimental investigation, showing a correlation of plus .80.
Is that too much to ask?
Notice how many times Boggs exhibits a completely derogatory view of the readership of
science-fiction magazines. It begs the question – WHAT is the man doing in the field then?
Not only that, Boggs seems to have made sure that this issue of Spacewarp carries two,
count ’em TWO other attacks on Dianetics.
The first is by Rick Sneary in his column called 1958. Sneary (I’ll restrain myself on the
obvious pun to be had there) writes a long, rambling, typo-ridden missive re: Dianetics. He
admits he hasn’t even read the book, but yet still manages to pepper his missive with the
usual – “claims too much” and that “hypnotism” is employed, and that “others” say it is “badly
written” and a new one – that “some parts of the book doesn’t sound like Hubbard’s
writings” to which he adds that it does seem amazing “that he could conduct experiments
turn ut the large quantity of fiction he has been, and still find time to write this book.”
Then there’s this:
EXCERPT FROM A LETTER BY A GUY WHO WISHES TO REMAIN
NAMELESS
********* ****** * ******** ** * **** **** ******* ** ******** **********
That says “everyone obediently swallows Hubbard’s crackpot Dianetics simply because
Campbell printed it in SF.” <rolling my eyes here> Okey dokey then. Note: Ye old Nameless
is named in the index as Art Rapp.
Just after this, we now see a fully fleshed out assault on Dianetics appear in Spaceship #10
October 1950. It carries a directly critical – no cagey “fantasy” story – article by Robert
Silverberg titled Dianetics: fact or fantasy?
p. 6 and wow, gee golly gosh! What do we see there? Why, it’s the AMA chosen PR line!
What a coincidence: “Can it be proven the human mind is just a machine…”
It starts out saying “Your editor along with many others went immediately head-over-heels in
favor of the book.” Interesting, eh? If this was written by Robert, then we have to consider
the timing in that right after that, immediately came Saul Diskin to help him with his nasty
Dianetic fantasy lampooning in July? It makes it look like he clearly influenced Robert
because then if we go with that this is BY the 14 year old Robert, the first sentence is
followed by this: “After a careful re-reading, it begins to appear that Dianetics is not all that
it’s reputed to be.”
Well, that’s not too obvious, is it. Again, either Saul, Mr. critical, is who told him he needed to
re-read it, or that’s all bullshit and this is obviously just some other kind of PR trick.
The interesting thing is there is this rather odd plea message buried in the article. Almost as
if our hidden “they” were offering Hubbard an out or a way back – if only he would come
study Dianetics their way. See what you think.
It starts by referring back to the Rollo May article, says that if Dianetics had offered itself as
a forward stop, “one which should bear careful examination, it probably would be gratefully
received.” with the implication that the reason it wasn’t is because “they persisted in calling it
the final step in mental science” then Robert counters all his own criticism with the
mind-jamming statement of “I’ll withhold my opinion for a while”.
Right. After pretty much giving it.
In a later rather interesting counterpoint, Arthur Levine wrote a response in Spaceship #17
(1951?) p. 8, excerpted: “I can see that by initially reaching an audience of ASf readers,
Hubbard may have hoped to secure a relatively large number of scientifically-minded,
intelligent experimenters who would not be handicapped by too large a backgrund and belief
in other methods of psychotherapy.”
Meanwhile down in Kentucky –

Kentucky fanzine Dawn issue 11 November 1950 has a pretty great article by Ken Beale
(Bronx, New York) refers to Lester Del Ray having called dianetics “a kind of streamlined
hypnotism” but debunks that in an interesting way, “Unfortunately, this doesn’t account for
the fact that the insane, who according to modern authority cannot be hypnotised without
drugs, were given Dianetic Therapy successfully.” citing editor John Campbel’s speech at the
4th N.Y. conclave last May (1950).
That same month –
James Blish gave a favorable assessment of Dianetics in Planet Stories November 1950:
“Dianetics: A Door To The Future”. You can read the full issue here – the Blish article starts
on p. 104 of the PDF.
It might interest you to know that James Blish also did a rather tongue-in-cheek story
lampooning the depictions of Hubbard as a “cult” leader then saturating the press (courtesy
of Austin Smith, JAMA editor and his pitbull George Field). It was a fanzine story called The
Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951. He described his character as the
“red-haired man” who was one of the “Council” (p. 33) and then directly called him Elron (p.
35).
I decided to do my own review of the story just now, and as it turns out others
characterizations of it are completely off. And I mean WAY off. As I suspected, the character
of Hubbard is positioned with Mahrt, the opponent of the “giants” called Warriors of the Day
who act omnipotent but aren’t and how they are against Mahrt and Elron and are afraid of
“Mahrt”. That’s the first thing, now I’ll make a few notes of key points.
Xota was a totally telepathic world, all living things down to blades of grass. Tipton was the
“chosen of Mahrt” somehow transported from Earth to Xota. Meeting the council: both men
were described as having “postures that bespoke years of command worn easily and well.”
Tipton is told that “Mahrt is the embodiment of all the forces of mental darkness and evil.”
The “Warriors of the Day” are described as the “advancing hordes of an interstellar
civilization, spreading inward from the outermost limb of the galaxy. Unless something
unguessable can be done, they will engulf Xota as they have engulfed a thousand other
worlds.” Mahrt is actually the key enemy of these “warriors”. Tipton and the talking giant cat
have an argument, Tipton ends up on the warriors ship where they say they invented the
myth of Mahrt as part of figuring out militarily how to defeat a totally telepathic planet. He
knew they were lying, that Mahrt was real. Connecting telepathically with Mahrt, he teleports
back to Mahrts temple.
“What about Elron?” Tipton says to the girl he meets in the temple, as to what his standing is
about Mahrt. “He has all the earmarks of a ‘suspect everything’ personality, and from what
I’ve been able to observe of his intelligence, should be more dangerous than Yrinon and
Lanja together. I wouldn’t back him against Chrestos, I don’t think, but against the two
humans he’s a sure thing.” The girl answers that Elron is our high priest. They go to Elron
who wants Tipton put in irons and wants to kill him in a ritual. At the ritual, Mahrt inhabits
Tipton, things don’t go as planned. Elron hoped to be the “sword” and was humiliated that
Tipton was instead.
Now here is a direct parallel to real life – the book says: “When a man has built up an
elaborate organization, founded in the hope of perpetuating itself forever, the arrival of an
event which promises to deprive that organization of meaning within a year or so could
hardly be welcome.” This is a reference to the arrival of the first Austin Smith/ Oliver Field
backed moves to destroy the HDRF.
Blish speaks of a myth system, where Hubbard as Elron is “far more a servant of the
Warriors than any other person on Xiota” which is perhaps Blish recognizing the Hubbard
then covert CIA involvement. Then there’s an interesting discussion of the Warriors
corrupting the telepathic Xotans with the cult of Mahrt, “the evil god who sleeps in the back
of every telepathi’s brain.” The real Mahrt grants Tipton the power of “the sleeping planetary
mind” needing “never again fear the psychic probes of the Warriors of the day.” There’s
various battling and another visit with the warriors to rescue the girl and then the story turns
and Tipton is really Mahrt and he had created himself as a fragment, suppressed the
memory and now needed to rejoin because of the suppression of the I am We are Mahrt
collective mind. It continues, sounding like something out of an acid trip (LSD). Then the
“fist” of Mahrt struck and broke the Warriors of the day.
Long story short, the supposed railing against Hubbard as “high priest” of the “cult of Mahrt”
was actually a very, very subtle lampooning of OTHER forces at work in regarding human
potentiality, plus a collective “God” imagery mixed in, to boot. It ends with a “new Sword” was
being forged…a Kodiak bear, to strike against the suppression of knowledge of a “racial
consciousness”. Ending with: “On Earth, a whimpering creature stirs, and opens too-wise
eyes upon the forests of the great North. It is tiny now, but in later years it will be great; and a
trail to nowhere awaits it. -A Kodiak bear.”
That’s entirely possible to be a reference to the spiritual subject Hubbard was then in the
process of forming in 1951, Scientology, put together with the old Kodiak bear story Hubbard
liked to tell or…it’s a reference to something much older based in the North that I won’t go
into right now.
You can read more about how Blish’s story was resurrected and twisted beyond recognition
to be Elron Elray and the Galactic Federation by Captain Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org, the
so-called “freezone Scientologists” currently led by Max and Erica Hauri, whom my husband
Mike McClaughry once accurately characterized as a trap for people leaving the Church of
Scientology) and a previous Stanford Research Insitute pal of CIA remote-viewer program
leader Hal Puthoff.
Someone else did quite the seriously twisted take-off from Blish’s story, Philip K. Dick. He
published The Turning Wheel in Science Fiction Stories #2 in 1954.
The whole story is very weird, it seems to be some sort of intentional positioning of Hubbard
as a caucasian “god” with futuristic Red China. There’s talk of sterilization of the “caucs” by
one of the bards, etc. The first mention is a religious saying: “Elron be with you.” The
chinese-styled character of the story is one of the “Bards” were at the top of a caste system.
They were “holy men who guided man to clearness.” Refers to Elron Hu who lived in “the
hideous days of the Time of Madness.” with a VERY weird picture of the great hairy/spider
eye of Hubbard presiding over the Dinosaurs age.
Nice, sarcastically speaking.
Scientology OT levels scholars might find one of the passages interesting because as
Sung-wu, one of the Bards, starts instructing some lowest caste Tinkerist in the way of
Elron-Hu – the first two catechisms are:
“First!” snapped Sung-wa. “Who are you?”
“Second! What are you?
And the tenth is “Clearness!” (just after Ninth, which is about death). Which seems to be
positioning that one can’t be Clear unless they die.
But those top two questions Dick incorporated in his story? Well.
In 1950, Hubbard’s Dianetics book talked about “demon circuits”. A couple of years later,
Hubbard revealed he really meant those were spirits which he initially called entities or “theta
bodies”. (see this post) Later, he resurrected this as part of what he called advanced
operating levels – OT 3 for short – 1967 where he now called them body thetans. Around
two decades later, David Mayo was sent to “audit” a sick L. Ron Hubbard in the 1980’s. The
procedures developed by David Mayo are known as New Era Dianetics for Operating
Thetans – NED for OTs, or NOTs. New questions were developed for handling the body
thetans (demons). It was said that a body thetan could consider themselves to be any body
part – a hair, lung, blood cell, etc. Therefore the new questions were – 1. What are you? 2.
Who are you? The body thetan was then supposed to realize he was himself and leave the
body. The NOTs series of issues were written by David Mayo, not by L. Ron Hubbard. The
original OT levels were replaced with the new OT levels for OT 4, 5, 6 and 7. (Scientology
Roots Chapter 17)
Dick’s story ends with a rather thinly veiled positioning of a cult (Dianetics) of followers
worshipping a sci-fi space ship, positioned with (Hubbard) Elron Hu.
Next –
Harry Moore’s New Orleans Sci-fi Convention – Nolacon planned for September 1951,
began putting out its own newsletters. Nolacon Bulletin #1 March 1951 carried an article
titled: Why Dianetics? which is unfortunately incompletely preserved and cuts off at the
bottom.
Harry announced: “With the increasing weight of evidence that Dianetics works on the
individual and for the group, your committee has seen fit to schedule a symposium on the
subject at your convention.” Mentions something called ultra safe “Hurdy-Gurdy” processing.
Interjected in this time period,was our Brooklyn youngster, Robert Silverberg. In All Our
Yesterdays 31: Spaceship by Harry Warner Jr., Harry said that he was being helped
(co-edited) with Spaceship by another Brooklyn fan, Saul Diskin who left to go to college late
in 1951. Look at the interesting cover of this issue #12 – April 1951 The Master.
Meanwhile –
The May 1951 installment of Marvel Science Stories, contained positive articles on dianetics
from L. Ron Hubbard and Theodore Sturgeon –
Creep, Creep, Creep, go the agitators behind the scenes and then –
In what looks to be early 1951, April or May after Harry’s announcement in March (whoever
made the PDF has the date wrong because it’s talking about Nolacon which hadn’t
happened yet) ODD magazine #9 “Duggie” and “Rich” (Richard Elsberry) in a section called
Nothing Serious by Elsberry, were all fired up and complaining about Dianetics being at the
upcoming Nolacon, They appear to be soliciting attacks and trying to drum up anti-support. I
think it’s Richard doing the tirading about it, and he specifically refers to Harry Moore, the
backer of the convention as a “dianetics backer”. At the end Duggie adds “(((YES, what
about you? If you have any views about this question, we will be glad to print all that space
will allow for in our next issue.)))”
Parenthetically speaking –
Yea. I bet you would.
Next –
Nolacon Bulletin #2 July 1951 – index page.
It looks to me that the Austin Smith/Oliver Field duo is hard at work trying to disrupt the
scheduled symposium on Dianetics. Harry points out that Norwescon (the Portland one that
Bob Johnson attended) “didn’t prevue their session on Dianetics” and that “It was one of
the two with the highest attendance.” Harry notes that now (since March) he has “a dozen
or so guys” that simply “WILL NOT PLAY unless we agree to play it all their way. We can’t
have even one 1-2-hour seminar or they will stay away.” There’s more interesting points as
well, but this whole “rejection” pseudo-grass roots campaign sounds…organized to me.
It looks to me that Hubbard or one of his friends may have become aware of this Saul Diskin
crap, because in the last issue that Diskin co-edited #12 (came out some time before the
July 1951 issue), there was an article from B. Chandler “giving cautious approval to the use
of dianetics, after 23 hours of processing” and recommended to other fans to try the
discipline with care. Harry Warner noted that similar stories about LSD had been being
tested in the fanzines, which is interesting since LSD experimentation was still Top Secret
under Projects CHATTER and BLUEBIRD then.
Oddly enough, Silverberg, or maybe we’d be more accurate saying its Saul Diskin? had
jumped right on the bandwagon in this issue, positioning Dianeticians such as Chandler
thusly: “The lunatic fringe is here in fandom, and we’ve been forced to put up with them
and laugh at their antics,” Bob wrote. To me, this is Saul’s influence, and yet another nail in
the coffin cementing the idea that Dr. Wertham, Austin Smith, and his pet bulldog Oliver Field
are just all over the pulps and fanzines, infiltrating them. That is exactly the kind of thing
they did, got other authors to do their dirty work to make it look more like it was everywhere
and not an organized, solicited, campaign. Dr. Wertham, himself an Igor-type, was asked to
attack Hubbard and Dianetics and he did.
Apparently there was a new approach thought up, probably because people weren’t quite
falling for all this staged “follow the pied piper” criticism. Spaceship #13 July 1951 p. 22 has
an interesting supposed “counterblast from a non-skeptic”.
Marion Z Bradly writes: “Ron Hubbard was a qualified s-f writer and also a qualified scientist.
Whether or not you agree with his dianetics follery, his article was interesting and
reasonable logical and his NAME ALONE is a high drawing-card. (Or was, previous to the
Engram racket.)”
She also positions Hubbard with Rosicrucians. If you look at this sampling of ads in fanzines
from AMORC (rosicrucians) at the Havelin Collection – They started their digitalization
project in 2015 – it’s actually pretty interesting as to Dianetics claims and especially the later
Scientology “advanced” levels.
Look at this one!

Jeesh.
To understand just how vicious and aggressive the stir-the-pot activities were by this time
from our dynamically insane duo of Smith & Field from the AMA, with Thorvald lurking in the
background like some ghoul, I bet you don’t know what happened at that Nolacon, just
before the Dianetics segment was about to start.
Sam Moskowitz, who later alleged to the FDA that Hubbard had said (back in 1948 –
BEFORE Dianetics) that the way to make money was to start a religion – a highly
entertaining story – attended Nolacon and wrote about it afterwards. He detailed what to me,
was a beyond obvious arranged disruption of the scheduled session on Dianetics. Scaring
people away would be a minimum part of that goal, is my guess.
1951 — Nolacon I, New Orleans
Nolacon I: A Torrid Affair
by Sam Moskowitz
In the morning, after an opening address abou how the atomic age isn’t so bad and an
address by Sam Moskowitz, “A real donnybrook developed, kindled by those who did not
want to permit a scheduled session on Dianetics to be held. It finally went on, retaining 27
people.”
*donnybrook – a scene of uproar and disorder; a heated argument.
Would have loved to be the fly-on-the-wall at that event, and I just wonder what kind of
“warnings” and “disagreements” they were yelling…I just don’t have any clue what they
could be.
You can see photos from the Nolacon here. I’ve pulled some out that I think are relevant and
also aren’t probably known about by Scientology historians.
The organizer and Dianetics supporter of Nolacon, Harry B. Moore is on the left.
Nolacon Theodore Sturgeon From the collection of Mike Resnick –

Rare pic of Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman, L Ron Hubbard’s literary agent at Nolacon 1951 –
Nolacon 1951 – Sam Merwin, friend of L. Ron Hubbard –
After Nolacon, Sam Merwin reviewed Hubbard’s Typewriter in the Sky and Fear in “Science
Fiction Bookcase” Amazing Stories, Nov. 1951: 158-59.
Pulps and Fanzines Timeline
● December 1949 issue of Astounding carried the first hint of Dianetics (p.80). This
is the exact same month Austin Smith replaced Fishbein as editor of JAMA.
● Spaceship #6 (3 December 1949), 14-year-old Robert Silverberg from Brooklyn is
very happily outing people’s real identities under pen names One of them was L.
Ron Hubbard. Note: all Spaceship magazines that I am examining were originally
found here.
● March 1950 issue carried another teaser about the upcoming artice by Hubbard
about dianetics, an intro by Campbell. (p. 4) titled: “Of Human Memory”
● April 1950 issue of announces the 16,000 word article is ready and will come out
next month (p. 132) Campbell believes it will cause “one full-scale explosion
across the country.” It says the title will be Dianetics: An Introduction to a New
Science. Perhaps overlooked by most amidst the claims for Dianetics being laid
out by Campbell is this one “Evidence that insanity is contagious and IS NOT
HEREDITARY.” which flies straight into the teeth of eugenics psychiatrists like Dr.
Wertham and Overholser. Important: Just after this issue came out is when
Thorvald Solberg tried to draft Hubbard into secret projects in the Office of Naval
Research.
● Science Fiction Newsletter #16 July 1, 1950 (found here previously named
Bloomington News Letter unil the April 1950 issue). Discussing John Campbell Jr.,
on the first page Dean Walter “Redd” Boggs is talking about that Campbell has
“resorted” to the formula relied on by Sunday supplements—the Sensation, the
Eye-opener, then refers to “hoaxes” such as “The Aphrodite Project” following that
formula. So, he has positioned the ideas of “sensation” “eye-openers” with
“hoaxes” in the reader’s mind, and THEN – “Campbell has produced a Sensation
by adopting the READER’S DIGEST method–… a hack writer‘s “new science,”
presented full-blown to the world in a two-bit pulp —Boggs is referring to the May
1950 issue of Astounding where Hubbard’s article Dianetics: Evolution of a
Science was published – at the same time the book Dianetics: The Modern
Science of Mental Health came out.
● Spaceship #9, July 1950. Page 12 carries an attack story disguised as fiction by
mystery man Saul Diskin called “Cancelled, a dianetic fantasy”. Saul was born
in New York City on Aug. 22, 1934, and raised in Brooklyn, so he was only 15
when he wrote this story. (about to turn 16). In 1951 he goes off to Vermont to go
to college, at age 17. His obituary doesn’t have one word about this writing career
of his. Saul details a rather odd story about Thomas Portune, Dianetic Auditor who
audits Dudley Farnham (who has shooting pains in his stomach). During this
“session” Saul makes it look like Dianetics is doing straight hypnotism, installing a
“canceller”. The “incident” run is Dudley’s having read a Superman story. The
session is interrupted, meanwhile Dudley is mumbling about being Superman,
jumps out a 3 story window landing standing without injury, with the auditor
screaming out the window “Cancelled! Cancelled!”. —practically a verbatim black
propaganda idea along the lines of what Dr. Wertham was saying about
Superman comics, about how they gave people delusions of power and such and
how DANGEROUS that is.
Interjection
One wonders just how connected to Red Boggs this Saul Diskin character may have been.
Why? Because now that Silverberg is under Diskin’s “co” editorship influence, later on we
see him supposedly do a fully fleshed out attack on Dianetics that is titled rather similarly to
Boggs July attack. Boggs’ title: Dianetics: Fad or Science, Silverberg’ title: Dianetics: Fact or
Fantasy. We also might want to note the possibility that someone had rifled Campbell’s files
(Oliver Field perhaps) and found the December 9, 1949 letter from Hubbard with it’s
attached bogus critique of Dianetics under the pen-name Irving Kutzman, because one part
of it has a psychiatrist having a Dianetics session for “stomach pains”. It’s a rather crazed
sort of session too, on the psychiatrists part.
● Renascence, v. 1, issue 1, August 1950; Dianetics Review wih Reservations a

long article by Kenneth MacNichol pages 4-5. The issue is dated August 1950 and
yet the article specifically states: “The book is not yet published at the date of this
writing. One long article by Hubbard has appeared in Science Fiction with two
editorials by JWC who also contributed a long article in a day-old issue of the
fanzine Rhodomagnetic Digest.” page 4. “Man is not a machine; not a robot.”
p. 5 “The most hopeful thing to be found here is Hubbard’s own warning, bluntly
expressed and accepted, that dianetics is a method of procedure that,
properly conducted, yields useful results. After that, says Hubbard, let the
theory go, because it may or may not be valid. It is a starting place. No
matter if the theory is altogether false assumption if practice works. Wih
more and more data, theory can be corrected.” Excellent advice– Let it be well
remembered by all future students of dianetics. Then, whatever dianetics may be
at this moment, the time must arrive when, sufficiently corrected—and corrected,
possibly, almost beyond recognition, both theory and practice will be
altogether sound.”
● Western Star #3 August 26, 1950 Hubbard announces sure cure for atheism
then on actual article page it says: FLASH!! Ron Hubbard says in effect: Dianetics
will cure atheism and is being adopted by many churches. Chew that one good.
This little cult is getting up steam now. Swank HDQ in Jersey and offices in NYC
$500 per month for the “master”…” And this is interesting. Hubbard’s display in
Los Angeles of a Clear – “brought a clear all the way from Boston but the
demonstration fizzled when stage-fright prevented the girl from really performing.
All she could say was that she felt better every day since “taking the cure”
however she was toally unable at the time to demonstrate any feats of memory.
But Ron was a capable enough showman to keep most of the audience from
feeling let down.” Image positioning Saint Hubbard and the Dragon that the
Church of Scientology would later use to promote its “Bridge to Freedom”. Image
from Scientology’s Advance Magazine #53 1978. Article ends with MONEY
motivation positioning. $$$$ % dianetics % $$$$
● October 1950 – Arthur Levine wrote responding to Red Boggs attack/review from
July 1950, his response appears in October 1950 Science Fiction Newsletter #17.
● Orb, v. 2, issue 1, October? 1950, “Report from up yonder” insert by Bob Johnson,
he talks about a trip to a sci-fi convention in Portland, during which he had a
“dianetic session” presumably from Harry B. Moore on August 27th. “The first
night, we stayed at the Commercial Hotel in Vernal, Utah. I went through my first
Dianetics session, then…… and didn’t quite know what to think of it…… It’s sorta
hard to get used to ‘living through an experience’ instead of remembering little
patches.” Then on p. 20 in where it looks like this was either September 1 or 2 in
Portland Oregon – Theodore (Ted) Sturgeon and Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman began
to speak about Dianetics. “I expect about 250 or 275 people attended this.
Unfortunately Forrie and Ted both beat round the bush, without really hitting
anything of importance. It was intensely interesting to fans like myself who are
neophytes to Dianetics, but to the many more experienced people in the room, it
was a little tiring. I enjoyed every minute of it, however, and I am positive that
many others did. ” P. 23 talks about how Bob got sick suddenly, and that he
thought it was dianetic session related. But it’s what Harry said that’s interesting,
note how he makes the ‘file clerk’ sound like an entirely separate person or thing
than Bob, which makes it seem that Harry knew that Hubbard actually thought the
“reactive mind” was composed of entities. (see Philip K. Dick story a little later on
here). “The second night we stayed at Mountain Home, Idaho. Harry was planning
to audit Heisner. While we were starting to eat our dinner, I suddenly developed a
terrific sinus attack. Harry said it was my file clerk wanting attention so it
could be audited instead of Charles. Since Chas had priority, I had to grin and
bear it. While at the cafe, I had to ask for a hot towel to hold against my face, the
attack was so bad. Get this: I have never had any trouble with my sinus in my life,
outside of the occasional clogging of head colds, and such. I have never
experienced any pain remotely as severe as I did at this time, Now, draw your own
conclusions about Dianetics being dangerous or not. […] Somewhere, in the
middle of a Helios or Vom, my sinus trouble was forgotten, and therefore
vanished.[…] The third night was spent in Burgoyne, Idaho, where I was
given a thorough auditing. Lots of things were found out, but it seems like I have
few engrams, but scads of locks. ” One of the other things discussed in that story
was the deciding of where the next convention would be held and by who.
Harry B. Moore won the vote, and the next one would be held in New Orleans.
● Spacewarp September 1950, column File 13, #13 by Red Boggs. James Blish
goes after Boggs for what he said in Science Fiction Newsletter #16, which Boggs
then reprints in this different fanzine. Boggs discusses Blish’s letter in his “File 13”
column – which he makes a point of noting is the “13th” installment. Rebuttal
points: “It is; first of all, the comment of a man who has not read Hubbard’s
book…it uses push-button terms…thus far the claims check with the facts.” Re:
that Hubbard published about science-fiction in pulps “It also has an audience
rated as the most intelligent and the most technically knowledgeable of any
general magazine in this country”. Then these two: The reaction of an established
authority to any teetotally revolutionary discipline is historically predictable…The
reputation…really proves nothing…The reputation of Dr. Frederick Wertham, also
damned good, is also no guarantee, whether he’s for or agin dianetics (he’s
violently agin.)” Finishes with the line “does it work…check the idea not the
reputaion”. Boggs has a cow, disses his own audience in the process. “given to
the uninformed public rather than to the scientists….a bunch of fuggheaded
juveniles loudly mouthing dianetical catch-phrases…a “fad” status among
brainless juveniles“. With that kind of atitude one might ask – WHAT is this man
doing in the field then? Then he goes right to the Rollo May positioning.“After all
Coueism “worked,” too; it even had some psychological basis; but I never heard of
a psychologist who believed Coueism was a universal cure-all merely because a
bunch of harebrained people said, By god, I am getting better and better!” Rollo
May had said: “People can be cured of symptoms by all kinds of
means–by…Coue autosuggestion…Which was positioned with the
bone-pointing practices of primitives, etc. Transference and autosuggestion
“cures” are easy enough to achieve, but no reputable therapist considers them
true cures.” Then he again positions Hubbard as: “a man who has absolutely no
standing in psychological or psychiatric fields at all…merely a “hack writer of
pseudo-science.,,,added onus of pulp presentation”. Boggs seems to have made
sure that this issue of Spacewarp carries two other attacks on Dianetics. The first
is by Rick Sneary in his column called 1958. Snearywrites a long, rambling,
typo-ridden missive re: Dianetics. He admits he hasn’t even read the book, but
yet still manages to pepper his missive with the usual – “claims too much” and that
“hypnotism” is employed, and that “others” say it is “badly written” and a new one
– that “some parts of the book doesn’t sound like Hubbard’s writings” to
which he adds that it does seem amazing “that he could conduct experiments turn
out the large quantity of fiction he has been, and still find time to write this book.”
Then there’s this: EXCERPT FROM A LETTER BY A GUY WHO WISHES TO
REMAIN NAMELESS (Nameless is named in the index as Art Rapp) That says
“everyone obediently swallows Hubbard’s crackpot Dianetics simply because
Campbell printed it in SF.”
Interjection
For those who get excited about that “it works” line Blish was using. Psychiatrists using
barbaric ECT do the same thing. In 2003, assessing the effectiveness of ECT in a series
of depressed Israeli patients, Bernard (“Benny”) Lerer (1948–), director of the Biological
Laboratory of Hadassah University Hospital in Ein Karem, Israel, said to a journalist from the
newspaper Haaretz, “Have you ever asked yourself how it is that a treatment with such a
terrible stigma, a treatment that the public is afraid of and is said to be primitive and
unhelpful—has, despite all this, survived into the 21st century, and not in obscure little
places but in the world’s most advanced medical centers? The answer is simple. Because
it works.”
● Spaceship #10 October 1950. A fully fleshed out assault on Dianetics appears,
directly critical – no cagey “fantasy” story this time – article by Robert Silverberg
titled Dianetics: fact or fantasy? p. 6 “Can it be proven the human mind is just
a machine…” It starts out saying “Your editor along with many others went
immediately head-over-heels in favor of the book.” If this was written by Robert,
then we have to consider the timing in that right after that, immediately came Saul
Diskin to help him with his nasty Dianetic fantasy lampooning in July. It makes it
look like he clearly influenced Robert because then if we go with that this is BY the
14 year old Robert, the first sentence is followed by this: “After a careful
re-reading, it begins to appear that Dianetics is not all that it’s reputed to be.”
There is a rather odd plea message buried in the article. Almost as if our hidden
“they” were offering Hubbard an out or a way back – if only he would come study
Dianetics their way. See what you think. It starts by referring back to the Rollo
May article, says that if Dianetics had offered itself as a forward stop, “one which
should bear careful examination, it probably would be gratefully received.” with the
implication that the reason it wasn’t is because “they persisted in calling it the final
step in mental science” then Robert counters all his own criticism with the
mind-jamming statement of “I’ll withhold my opinion for a while”. After pretty
much giving it.
● Planet Stories November 1950: “Dianetics: A Door To The Future”. James Blish
gave a favorable assessment of Dianetics – the Blish article starts on p. 104 of the
PDF.
● Kentucky fanzine Dawn issue 11 November 1950 has a pretty great article by Ken
Beale (Bronx, New York) refers to Lester Del Ray having called dianetics “a kind
of streamlined hypnotism” but debunks that in an interesting way, “Unfortunately,
this doesn’t account for the fact that the insane, who according to modern
authority cannot be hypnotised without drugs, were given Dianetic Therapy
successfully.” citing editor John Campbel’s speech at the 4th N.Y. conclave last
May (1950).
● Spaceship #17 (1951?) Arthur Levine wrote a response in p. 8, excerpted: “I can
see that by initially reaching an audience of ASf readers, Hubbard may have
hoped to secure a relatively large number of scientifically-minded, intelligent
experimenters who would not be handicapped by too large a backgrund and belief
in other methods of psychotherapy.”
● Nolacon Bulletin #1 March 1951 Harry Moore’s New Orleans Sci-fi Convention –
Nolacon planned for September 1951, began putting out its own newsletters.
Carried an article titled: Why Dianetics? which is unfortunately incompletely
preserved and cuts off at the bottom. Harry announced: “With the increasing
weight of evidence that Dianetics works on the individual and for the group, your
committee has seen fit to schedule a symposium on the subject at your
convention.” Mentions something called ultra safe “Hurdy-Gurdy” processing.
● Spaceship issue #12 – April 1951 The Master. In All Our Yesterdays 31:
Spaceship by Harry Warner Jr., Harry said that he was being helped (co-edited)
with Spaceship by another Brooklyn fan, Saul Diskin who left to go to college late
in 1951.
● Marvel Science Stories May 1951 contained positive articles on dianetics from L.
Ron Hubbard and Theodore Sturgeon –
● ODD magazine #9 In what looks to be early 1951, April or May after Harry’s
announcement in March (whoever made the PDF has the date wrong because it’s
talking about Nolacon which hadn’t happened yet) Creep, Creep, Creep, go the
agitators behind the scenes and then – “Duggie” and “Rich” (Richard Elsberry)
in a section called Nothing Serious by Elsberry, were all fired up and complaining
about Dianetics being at the upcoming Nolacon, They appear to be soliciting
attacks and trying to drum up anti-support. I think it’s Richard doing the tirading
about it, and he specifically refers to Harry Moore, the backer of the convention as
a “dianetics backer”. At the end Duggie adds “(((YES, what about you? If you have
any views about this question, we will be glad to print all that space will allow for in
our next issue.)))”
● Spaceship #12 – It looks to me that Hubbard or one of his friends may have
become aware of this Saul Diskin crap, because in the last issue that Diskin
co-edited #12 (came out some time before the July 1951 issue), there was an
article from B. Chandler “giving cautious approval to the use of dianetics, after 23
hours of processing” and recommended to other fans to try the discipline with
care. Harry Warner noted that similar stories about LSD had been being tested in
the fanzines, which is interesting since LSD experimentation was still Top Secret
under Projects CHATTER and BLUEBIRD then. Silverberg, or maybe we’d be
more accurate saying its Saul Diskin? had jumped right on the bandwagon in this
issue, positioning Dianeticians such as Chandler thusly: “The lunatic fringe is
here in fandom, and we’ve been forced to put up with them and laugh at their
antics,” Bob wrote. To me, this is Saul’s influence, and yet another nail in the coffin
cementing the idea that Dr. Wertham, Austin Smith, and his pet bulldog Oliver
Field are just all over the pulps and fanzines, infiltrating them. That is exactly the
kind of thing they did, got other authors to do their dirty work to make it look more
like it was everywhere and not an organized, solicited, campaign. Dr. Wertham,
himself an Igor-type, was asked to attack Hubbard and Dianetics and he did.
● Nolacon Bulletin #2 July 1951 It looks to me that the Austin Smith/Oliver Field duo
is hard at work trying to disrupt the scheduled symposium on Dianetics. Harry
points out that Norwescon (the Portland one that Bob Johnson attended) “didn’t
prevue their session on Dianetics” and that “It was one of the two with the
highest attendance.” Harry notes that now (since March) he has “a dozen or so
guys” that simply “WILL NOT PLAY unless we agree to play it all their way. We
can’t have even one 1-2-hour seminar or they will stay away.” There’s more
interesting points as well, but this whole “rejection” pseudo-grass roots campaign
sounds…organized to me.
● Spaceship #13 July 1951 Apparently there was a new approach thought up,
probably because people weren’t quite falling for all this staged “follow the pied
piper” criticism of Boggs, Silverberg/Diskin et al. p. 22 has an interesting
supposed “counterblast from a non-skeptic”. Marion Z Bradly writes: “Ron
Hubbard was a qualified s-f writer and also a qualified scientist. Whether or not
you agree with his dianetics follery, his article was interesting and reasonable
logical and his NAME ALONE is a high drawing-card. (Or was, previous to the
Engram racket.)” She also positions Hubbard with Rosicrucians. If you look at this
sampling of ads in fanzines from AMORC (rosicrucians) at the Havelin Collection
– They started their digitalization project in 2015 – it’s actually pretty interesting as
to Dianetics claims and especially the later Scientology “advanced” levels.
Interjection –
● Nolacon I: A Torrid Affair September 1-3 1951 by Sam Moskowitz Nolacon I, New
Orleans. “In the morning, after an opening address abou how the atomic age isn’t
so bad and an address by Sam Moskowitz, “A real donnybrook developed,
kindled by those who did not want to permit a scheduled session on Dianetics to
be held. It finally went on, retaining 27 people.”. You can see photos from the
Nolacon here. I’ve pulled some out that I think are relevant and also aren’t
probably known about by Scientology historians. Photos of Harry B. Moore,
Theodore Sturgeon, Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman, L Ron Hubbard’s literary
agent, Sam Merwin, friend of L. Ron Hubbard
● “Science Fiction Bookcase” Amazing Stories, Nov. 1951: 158-59. After Nolacon,
Sam Merwin reviewed Hubbard’s Typewriter in the Sky and Fear.
● The Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951 James Blish also
did a rather tongue-in-cheek story lampooning the depictions of Hubbard as a
“cult” leader then saturating the press (courtesy of Austin Smith, JAMA editor and
his pitbull George Field). It was a fanzine story called The Warrior’s Choice in
Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951. He described his character as the
“red-haired man” who was one of the “Council” (p. 33) and then directly called him
Elron (p. 35). I decided to do my own review of the story just now, and as it turns
out others characterizations of it are completely off. And I mean WAY off. As I
suspected, the character of Hubbard is positioned with Mahrt, the opponent of the
“giants” called Warriors of the Day who act omnipotent but aren’t and how they
are against Mahrt and Elron and are afraid of “Mahrt”. That’s the first thing, now I’ll
make a few notes of key points. Xota was a totally telepathic world, all living things
down to blades of grass. Tipton was the “chosen of Mahrt” somehow transported
from Earth to Xota. Meeting the council: both men were described as having
“postures that bespoke years of command worn easily and well.” Tipton is told that
“Mahrt is the embodiment of all the forces of mental darkness and evil.” The
“Warriors of the Day” are described as the “advancing hordes of an interstellar
civilization, spreading inward from the outermost limb of the galaxy. Unless
something unguessable can be done, they will engulf Xota as they have engulfed
a thousand other worlds.” Mahrt is actually the key enemy of these “warriors”.
Tipton and the talking giant cat have an argument, Tipton ends up on the warriors
ship where they say they invented the myth of Mahrt as part of figuring out
militarily how to defeat a totally telepathic planet. He knew they were lying, that
Mahrt was real. Connecting telepathically with Mahrt, he teleports back to Mahrts
temple. “What about Elron?” Tipton says to the girl he meets in the temple, as to
what his standing is about Mahrt. “He has all the earmarks of a ‘suspect
everything’ personality, and from what I’ve been able to observe of his
intelligence, should be more dangerous than Yrinon and Lanja together. I wouldn’t
back him against Chrestos, I don’t think, but against the two humans he’s a sure
thing.” The girl answers that Elron is our high priest. They go to Elron who
wants Tipton put in irons and wants to kill him in a ritual. At the ritual, Mahrt
inhabits Tipton, things don’t go as planned. Elron hoped to be the “sword” and
was humiliated that Tipton was instead. Now here is a direct parallel to real life –
the book says: “When a man has built up an elaborate organization, founded
in the hope of perpetuating itself forever, the arrival of an event which
promises to deprive that organization of meaning within a year or so could
hardly be welcome.” This is a reference to the arrival of the first Austin Smith/
Oliver Field backed moves to destroy the HDRF. Blish speaks of a myth system,
where Hubbard as Elron is “far more a servant of the Warriors than any other
person on Xiota” which is perhaps Blish recognizing the Hubbard then covert
CIA involvement. Then there’s an interesting discussion of the Warriors
corrupting the telepathic Xotans with the cult of Mahrt, “the evil god who sleeps in
the back of every telepathi’s brain.” The real Mahrt grants Tipton the power of “the
sleeping planetary mind” needing “never again fear the psychic probes of the
Warriors of the day.” There’s various battling and another visit with the warriors to
rescue the girl and then the story turns and Tipton is really Mahrt and he had
created himself as a fragment, suppressed the memory and now needed to rejoin
because of the suppression of the I am We are Mahrt collective mind. It continues,
sounding like something out of an acid trip (LSD). Then the “fist” of Mahrt struck
and broke the Warriors of the day. Long story short, the supposed railing against
Hubbard as “high priest” of the “cult of Mahrt” was actually a very, very subtle
lampooning of OTHER forces at work in regarding human potentiality, plus a
collective “God” imagery mixed in, to boot. It ends with a “new Sword” was being
forged…a Kodiak bear, to strike against the suppression of knowledge of a “racial
consciousness”. Ending with: “On Earth, a whimpering creature stirs, and opens
too-wise eyes upon the forests of the great North. It is tiny now, but in later years it
will be great; and a trail to nowhere awaits it. -A Kodiak bear.” That’s entirely
possible to be a reference to the spiritual subject Hubbard was then in the process
of forming in 1951, Scientology, put together with the old Kodiak bear story
Hubbard liked to tell or…it’s a reference to something much older based in the
North that I won’t go into right now. You can read more about how Blish’s story
was resurrected and twisted beyond recognition to be Elron Elray and the
Galactic Federation by Captain Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org, the so-called “freezone
Scientologists” currently led by Max and Erica Hauri, whom my husband Mike
McClaughry once accurately characterized as a trap for people leaving the Church
of Scientology) and a previous Stanford Research Insitute pal of CIA
remote-viewer program leader Hal Puthoff.
● Science Fiction Stories #2 in 1954. The Turning Wheel Philip K. Dick did quite the
seriously twisted take-off from Blish’s story.The whole story is very weird, it seems
to be some sort of intentional positioning of Hubbard as a caucasian “god” with
futuristic Red China. There’s talk of sterilization of the “caucs” by one of the
bards, etc. The first mention is a religious saying: “Elron be with you.” The
chinese-styled character of the story is one of the “Bards” were at the top of a
caste system. They were “holy men who guided man to clearness.” Refers to
Elron Hu who lived in “the hideous days of the Time of Madness.” with a VERY
weird picture of the great hairy/spider eye of Hubbard presiding over the
Dinosaurs age.Scientology OT levels scholars might find one of the passages
interesting because as Sung-wu, one of the Bards, starts instructing some lowest
caste Tinkerist in the way of Elron-Hu – the first two catechisms are: “First!”
snapped Sung-wa. “Who are you?”
“Second! What are you? And the tenth is “Clearness!” (just after Ninth, which is
about death). Which seems to be positioning that one can’t be Clear unless they
die.In 1950, Hubbard’s Dianetics book talked about “demon circuits”. A couple of
years later, Hubbard revealed he really meant those were spirits which he initially
called entities or “theta bodies”. (see this post) Later, he resurrected this as part of
what he called advanced operating levels – OT 3 for short – 1967 where he now
called them body thetans. Around two decades later, David Mayo was sent to
“audit” a sick L. Ron Hubbard in the 1980’s. The procedures developed by David
Mayo are known as New Era Dianetics for Operating Thetans – NED for OTs, or
NOTs. New questions were developed for handling the body thetans (demons). It
was said that a body thetan could consider themselves to be any body part – a
hair, lung, blood cell, etc. Therefore the new questions were – 1. What are you?
2. Who are you? The body thetan was then supposed to realize he was himself
and leave the body. The NOTs series of issues were written by David Mayo, not
by L. Ron Hubbard. The original OT levels were replaced with the new OT levels
for OT 4, 5, 6 and 7. (Scientology Roots Chapter 17) —Dick’s story ends with a
rather thinly veiled positioning image of a cult (Dianetics) of followers worshipping
a sci-fi space ship, positioned with (Hubbard) Elron Hu.
Back to the major media attacks now

–
This is what we have.
date) Punchline: “the absurdity of trying to view man as a machine.” “Books like
this do harm…grandiose promises…oversimplification of human
psychological problems.”
● Behind-the-scenes attack — President of American Psychiatric Association (APA)
● The Nation: August 5, 1950, page 131: Cure For All Ills; unfavorable book review
of “Dianetics”, by Milton Sapirstein (plain text here) Punchline: “The real and, to
me, inexcusable danger in dianetics lies in its conception of the amoral, detached,
100 per cent efficient mechanical man.”
answers Hubbard. Rollo dissembles on his “man as a machine” view and then –
ADDS the other chosen Punchline: “Dianetics first appeared in the magazine
Astounding Science Fiction and it is in this magazine that you can learn, if you
wish, about Mr. Hubbard and his work.”
● Letters August 14, 1950, TIME Magazine, several letters, one example: Dianetics:
Believe It or Not LEE PARMAN, ROBERT HARLOW taking on the “cult” idea
presented in Time July 24 1950 article; Hubbard responds: “Sir: Thank you for
your quite accurate description of dianetics . . .Our only regret is that you . . .
mistook the publisher’s synopsis in the book to be the opinion of the author. Los
Angeles, while giving dianetics an excellent reception, is not entirely informed as
to the science. Secondly, you would seem to make me over-evaluate dianetics in
my own opinion. In 50 years a valid opinion as to what dianetics is doing or can do
for the whole society may be expressed: I doubt anyone would be foolish enough
to express such a wild enthusiasm about his own work, and I do not …L. RON
HUBBARD Elizabeth, N.J.”
● The New Republic, August 14, 1950 Scathing book review by Martin Gumpert;
Punchlines: “L. Ron Hubbard… science-fiction writer”. Fredric Schuman
protests, editors respond: “While Dr. Schuman is a distinguished authority on
political science, we do not feel that on issues involving psychiatry he is entitled to
any more respect than any other layman. His suggestion that no one should write
about dianetics without having experienced it seems to us like saying that no one
can be an authority on cyanide of potassium unless he has eaten some.”
● Newsweek August 21, 1950 Punchlines: “successful author of scientific fiction.”
● NY TImes September 9, 1950 Psychologists act against Dianetics by Lucy
Freeman (text here) “In explaining the action of the council, Dr. E. Lowell Kelly, a
member of it and of the board of directors”.
● Postgraduate Medicine September 1950 Contributing editor Dr. Morris Fishbein
(former editor of the Journal of the American Medical Association; JAMA) called
Dianetics Poor Man’s Psychoanalysis; Punchlines: “He is an engineer, explorer,
and writer of science fiction and, as such, beneath the professional notice of
practicing physicians. To most doctors, the dianetics concept is unscientific and
unworthy of discussion or review…mind-healing cult.” (as quoted in Newsweek
October 16, 1950)
● American Scientist October 1950 Autumn Issue Volume 38 Number 4 Article on
Page 603-609 Sacred Cows in Collision
author Yvette Gittleson; section on Dianetics titled: De Profundis Via Dianetics;
Punchlines: “mechanical-brain analogy is reflected at its worst in a best-selling
horror called Dianetics. […] Dianetics made its debut in Astounding Science
Fiction, which is where the reviewer should leave it because that is where
astounding science fiction belongs.” Other items of interest: “In the first two
months following publication, about 20,000 copies of Dianetics were sold, without
benefit of advertising (in the conventional sense). During this period, book review
editors associated with serious publications gave it a wide berth. On July 2, the
New York Times broke the spell with a three column review by Dr. Rollo May.”
● Tests & Poison September 18, 1950, TIME Magazine, basically repeate of July 24,
1950 article. Punchlines: “concocted by science-fiction Writer L. Ron Hubbard”.
disses Fred Schuman (August 6 1950 letter to NY TImes; letter to New Reublic 14
August 1950) as “Williams College’s cause-chasing Professor Frederick L.
Schuman”
Now we will blend the two attack timelines together.
Main MEDIA Timeline

● December 1949 issue of Astounding carried the first hint of Dianetics (p.80). This
is the exact same month Austin Smith replaced Fishbein as editor of JAMA.
● Spaceship #6 (3 December 1949), 14-year-old Robert Silverberg from Brooklyn is
very happily outing people’s real identities under pen names One of them was L.
Ron Hubbard. Note: all Spaceship magazines that I am examining were originally
found here.
● March 1950 issue carried another teaser about the upcoming artice by Hubbard
about dianetics, an intro by Campbell. (p. 4) titled: “Of Human Memory”
● April 1950 issue of announces the 16,000 word article is ready and will come out
next month (p. 132) Campbell believes it will cause “one full-scale explosion
across the country.” It says the title will be Dianetics: An Introduction to a New
Science. Perhaps overlooked by most amidst the claims for Dianetics being laid
out by Campbell is this one “Evidence that insanity is contagious and IS NOT
HEREDITARY.” which flies straight into the teeth of eugenics psychiatrists like Dr.
Wertham and Overholser. Important: Just after this issue came out is when
Thorvald Solberg tried to draft Hubbard into secret projects in the Office of Naval
Research.
denounces Dianetics as “neither a good book nor a hoax,” but a “harmful
mixture of science and science fiction”. His papers also mention this.
(reference originally found here) This duo split kind of attack is repeated in two
pulp/fanzine attacks. Boggs: Dianetics: Fad or Science, Silverberg: Dianetics: Fact
or Fantasy.
● Science Fiction Newsletter #16 July 1, 1950 (found here previously named
Bloomington News Letter unil the April 1950 issue). Discussing John Campbell Jr.,
on the first page Dean Walter “Redd” Boggs is talking about that Campbell has
“resorted” to the formula relied on by Sunday supplements—the Sensation, the
Eye-opener, then refers to “hoaxes” such as “The Aphrodite Project” following that
formula. So, he has positioned the ideas of “sensation” “eye-openers” with
“hoaxes” in the reader’s mind, and THEN – “Campbell has produced a Sensation
by adopting the READER’S DIGEST method–… a hack writer‘s “new science,”
presented full-blown to the world in a two-bit pulp —Boggs is referring to the May
1950 issue of Astounding where Hubbard’s article Dianetics: Evolution of a
Science was published – at the same time the book Dianetics: The Modern
Science of Mental Health came out.
date) Punchlines: “the absurdity of trying to view man as a machine.” “Books like
this do harm…grandiose promises…oversimplification of human psychological
problems.”
● Spaceship #9, July 1950. Page 12 carries an attack story disguised as fiction by
mystery man Saul Diskin called “Cancelled, a dianetic fantasy”. Saul was born
in New York City on Aug. 22, 1934, and raised in Brooklyn, so he was only 15
when he wrote this story. (about to turn 16). In 1951 he goes off to Vermont to go
to college, at age 17. His obituary doesn’t have one word about this writing career
of his. Saul details a rather odd story about Thomas Portune, Dianetic Auditor who
audits Dudley Farnham (who has shooting pains in his stomach). During this
“session” Saul makes it look like Dianetics is doing straight hypnotism, installing a
“canceller”. The “incident” run is Dudley’s having read a Superman story. The
session is interrupted, meanwhile Dudley is mumbling about being Superman,
jumps out a 3 story window landing standing without injury, with the auditor
screaming out the window “Cancelled! Cancelled!”. —practically a verbatim black
propaganda idea along the lines of what Dr. Wertham was saying about
Superman comics, about how they gave people delusions of power and such and
how DANGEROUS that is.
Interjection
● Behind-the-scenes attack –President of American Psychiatric Association (APA)
● Renascence, v. 1, issue 1, August 1950; Dianetics Review wih Reservations a
long article by Kenneth MacNichol pages 4-5. The issue is dated August 1950 and
yet the article specifically states: “The book is not yet published at the date of this
writing. One long article by Hubbard has appeared in Science Fiction with two
editorials by JWC who also contributed a long article in a day-old issue of the
fanzine Rhodomagnetic Digest.” page 4. “Man is not a machine; not a robot.”
p. 5 “The most hopeful thing to be found here is Hubbard’s own warning, bluntly
expressed and accepted, that dianetics is a method of procedure that,
properly conducted, yields useful results. After that, says Hubbard, let the
theory go, because it may or may not be valid. It is a starting place. No
matter if the theory is altogether false assumption if practice works. Wih
more and more data, theory can be corrected.” Excellent advice– Let it be well
remembered by all future students of dianetics. Then, whatever dianetics may be
at this moment, the time must arrive when, sufficiently corrected—and corrected,
possibly, almost beyond recognition, both theory and practice will be
altogether sound.”
● The Nation: August 5, 1950, page 131: Cure For All Ills; unfavorable book review
of “Dianetics”, by Milton Sapirstein (plain text here) Punchline: “The real and, to
me, inexcusable danger in dianetics lies in its conception of the amoral, detached,
100 per cent efficient mechanical man.”
answers Hubbard. Rollo dissembles on his “man as a machine” view and then –
ADDS the other chosen Punchline: “Dianetics first appeared in the magazine
Astounding Science Fiction and it is in this magazine that you can learn, if you
wish, about Mr. Hubbard and his work.” Adds a new punchline: “People can be
cured of symptoms by all kinds of means–by…Coue autosuggestion…Which
was positioned with the bone-pointing practices of primitives, etc. Transference
and autosuggestion “cures” are easy enough to achieve, but no reputable
therapist considers them true cures.
● Letters August 14, 1950, TIME Magazine, several letters, one example: Dianetics:
Believe It or Not LEE PARMAN, ROBERT HARLOW taking on the “cult” idea
presented in Time July 24 1950 article; Hubbard responds: “Sir: Thank you for
your quite accurate description of dianetics . . .Our only regret is that you . . .
mistook the publisher’s synopsis in the book to be the opinion of the author. Los
Angeles, while giving dianetics an excellent reception, is not entirely informed as
to the science. Secondly, you would seem to make me over-evaluate dianetics in
my own opinion. In 50 years a valid opinion as to what dianetics is doing or can do
for the whole society may be expressed: I doubt anyone would be foolish enough
to express such a wild enthusiasm about his own work, and I do not …L. RON
HUBBARD Elizabeth, N.J.”
● The New Republic, August 14, 1950 Scathing book review by Martin Gumpert;
Punchlines: “L. Ron Hubbard… science-fiction writer”. Fredric Schuman
protests, editors respond: “While Dr. Schuman is a distinguished authority on
political science, we do not feel that on issues involving psychiatry he is entitled to
any more respect than any other layman. His suggestion that no one should write
about dianetics without having experienced it seems to us like saying that no one
can be an authority on cyanide of potassium unless he has eaten some.”
● Newsweek August 21, 1950 Punchlines: “successful author of scientific fiction.”
● Western Star #3 August 26, 1950 Hubbard announces sure cure for atheism
then on actual article page it says: FLASH!! Ron Hubbard says in effect: Dianetics
will cure atheism and is being adopted by many churches. Chew that one good.
This little cult is getting up steam now. Swank HDQ in Jersey and offices in NYC
$500 per month for the “master”…” And this is interesting. Hubbard’s display in
Los Angeles of a Clear – “brought a clear all the way from Boston but the
demonstration fizzled when stage-fright prevented the girl from really performing.
All she could say was that she felt better every day since “taking the cure”
however she was toally unable at the time to demonstrate any feats of memory.
But Ron was a capable enough showman to keep most of the audience from
feeling let down.” Image positioning Saint Hubbard and the Dragon that the
Church of Scientology would later use to promote its “Bridge to Freedom”. Image
from Scientology’s Advance Magazine #53 1978. Article ends with MONEY
motivation positioning. $$$$ % dianetics % $$$$
● NY TImes September 9, 1950 Psychologists act against Dianetics by Lucy
Freeman (text here) “In explaining the action of the council, Dr. E. Lowell Kelly, a
member of it and of the board of directors”.
Dianetics Poor Man’s Psychoanalysis; Punchlines: “He is an engineer, explorer,
and writer of science fiction and, as such, beneath the professional notice of
practicing physicians. To most doctors, the dianetics concept is unscientific and
unworthy of discussion or review…mind-healing cult.” (as quoted in Newsweek
October 16, 1950)
● Spacewarp September 1950, column File 13, #13 by Red Boggs. James Blish
goes after Boggs for what he said in Science Fiction Newsletter #16, which Boggs
then reprints in this different fanzine. Boggs discusses Blish’s letter in his “File 13”
column – which he makes a point of noting is the “13th” installment. Rebuttal
points: “It is; first of all, the comment of a man who has not read Hubbard’s
book…it uses push-button terms…thus far the claims check with the facts.” Re:
that Hubbard published about science-fiction in pulps “It also has an audience
rated as the most intelligent and the most technically knowledgeable of any
general magazine in this country”. Then these two: The reaction of an established
authority to any teetotally revolutionary discipline is historically predictable…The
reputation…really proves nothing…The reputation of Dr. Frederick Wertham, also
damned good, is also no guarantee, whether he’s for or agin dianetics (he’s
violently agin.)” Finishes with the line “does it work…check the idea not the
reputaion”. Boggs has a cow, disses his own audience in the process. “given to
the uninformed public rather than to the scientists….a bunch of fuggheaded
juveniles loudly mouthing dianetical catch-phrases…a “fad” status among
brainless juveniles“. With that kind of atitude one might ask – WHAT is this man
doing in the field then? Then he goes right to the Rollo May positioning.“After all
Coueism “worked,” too; it even had some psychological basis; but I never heard of
a psychologist who believed Coueism was a universal cure-all merely because a
bunch of harebrained people said, By god, I am getting better and better!”
—Rollo May had said: “People can be cured of symptoms by all kinds of
means–by…Coue autosuggestion…Which was positioned with the
bone-pointing practices of primitives, etc. Transference and autosuggestion
“cures” are easy enough to achieve, but no reputable therapist considers them
true cures.” —-Then Boggs again positions Hubbard as: “a man who has
absolutely no standing in psychological or psychiatric fields at all…merely a
“hack writer of pseudo-science.,,,added onus of pulp presentation”. Boggs
seems to have made sure that this issue of Spacewarp carries two other attacks
on Dianetics. The first is by Rick Sneary in his column called 1958. Snearywrites a
long, rambling, typo-ridden missive re: Dianetics. He admits he hasn’t even read
the book, but yet still manages to pepper his missive with the usual – “claims too
much” and that “hypnotism” is employed, and that “others” say it is “badly written”
and a new one – that “some parts of the book doesn’t sound like Hubbard’s
writings” to which he adds that it does seem amazing “that he could conduct
experiments turn out the large quantity of fiction he has been, and still find time to
write this book.” Then there’s this: EXCERPT FROM A LETTER BY A GUY WHO
WISHES TO REMAIN NAMELESS (Nameless is named in the index as Art
Rapp) That says “everyone obediently swallows Hubbard’s crackpot Dianetics
simply because Campbell printed it in SF.”
Interjection
For those who get excited about that “it works” line Blish was using. Psychiatrists using
barbaric ECT do the same thing. In 2003, assessing the effectiveness of ECT in a series
of depressed Israeli patients, Bernard (“Benny”) Lerer (1948–), director of the Biological
Laboratory of Hadassah University Hospital in Ein Karem, Israel, said to a journalist from the
newspaper Haaretz, “Have you ever asked yourself how it is that a treatment with such a
terrible stigma, a treatment that the public is afraid of and is said to be primitive and
unhelpful—has, despite all this, survived into the 21st century, and not in obscure little
places but in the world’s most advanced medical centers? The answer is simple. Because
it works.”
● Tests & Poison September 18, 1950, TIME Magazine, basically repeat of July 24,
1950 article. Punchlines: “concocted by science-fiction Writer L. Ron Hubbard”.
disses Fred Schuman (August 6 1950 letter to NY TImes; letter to New Reublic 14
August 1950) as “Williams College’s cause-chasing Professor Frederick L.
Schuman”
● Spaceship #10 October 1950. A fully fleshed out assault on Dianetics appears,
directly critical – no cagey “fantasy” story this time – article by Robert Silverberg
titled Dianetics: fact or fantasy? p. 6 “Can it be proven the human mind is just
a machine…” It starts out saying “Your editor along with many others went
immediately head-over-heels in favor of the book.” If this was written by Robert,
then we have to consider the timing in that right after that, immediately came Saul
Diskin to help him with his nasty Dianetic fantasy lampooning in July. It makes it
look like he clearly influenced Robert because then if we go with that this is BY the
14 year old Robert, the first sentence is followed by this: “After a careful
re-reading, it begins to appear that Dianetics is not all that it’s reputed to be.”
There is a rather odd plea message buried in the article. Almost as if our hidden
“they” were offering Hubbard an out or a way back – if only he would come study
Dianetics their way. See what you think. It starts by referring back to the Rollo
May article, says that if Dianetics had offered itself as a forward stop, “one which
should bear careful examination, it probably would be gratefully received.” with the
implication that the reason it wasn’t is because “they persisted in calling it the final
step in mental science” then Robert counters all his own criticism with the
mind-jamming statement of “I’ll withhold my opinion for a while”. After pretty
much giving it.
Punchlines: “mechanical-brain analogy is reflected at its worst in a best-selling
horror called Dianetics. […] Dianetics made its debut in Astounding Science
Fiction, which is where the reviewer should leave it because that is where
astounding science fiction belongs.” Other items of interest: “In the first two
months following publication, about 20,000 copies of Dianetics were sold, without
benefit of advertising (in the conventional sense). During this period, book review
editors associated with serious publications gave it a wide berth. On July 2, the
New York Times broke the spell with a three column review by Dr. Rollo May.”
● October 1950 – Arthur Levine wrote responding to Red Boggs attack/review from
July 1950, his response appears in October 1950 Science Fiction Newsletter #17.
● Orb, v. 2, issue 1, October? 1950, “Report from up yonder” insert by Bob Johnson,
he talks about a trip to a sci-fi convention in Portland, during which he had a
“dianetic session” presumably from Harry B. Moore on August 27th. “The first
night, we stayed at the Commercial Hotel in Vernal, Utah. I went through my first
Dianetics session, then…… and didn’t quite know what to think of it…… It’s sorta
hard to get used to ‘living through an experience’ instead of remembering little
patches.” Then on p. 20 in where it looks like this was either September 1 or 2 in
Portland Oregon – Theodore (Ted) Sturgeon and Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman began
to speak about Dianetics. “I expect about 250 or 275 people attended this.
Unfortunately Forrie and Ted both beat round the bush, without really hitting
anything of importance. It was intensely interesting to fans like myself who are
neophytes to Dianetics, but to the many more experienced people in the room, it
was a little tiring. I enjoyed every minute of it, however, and I am positive that
many others did. ” P. 23 talks about how Bob got sick suddenly, and that he
thought it was dianetic session related. But it’s what Harry said that’s interesting,
note how he makes the ‘file clerk’ sound like an entirely separate person or thing
than Bob, which makes it seem that Harry knew that Hubbard actually thought the
“reactive mind” was composed of entities. (see Philip K. Dick story a little later on
here). “The second night we stayed at Mountain Home, Idaho. Harry was planning
to audit Heisner. While we were starting to eat our dinner, I suddenly developed a
terrific sinus attack. Harry said it was my file clerk wanting attention so it
could be audited instead of Charles. Since Chas had priority, I had to grin and
bear it. While at the cafe, I had to ask for a hot towel to hold against my face, the
attack was so bad. Get this: I have never had any trouble with my sinus in my life,
outside of the occasional clogging of head colds, and such. I have never
experienced any pain remotely as severe as I did at this time, Now, draw your own
conclusions about Dianetics being dangerous or not. […] Somewhere, in the
middle of a Helios or Vom, my sinus trouble was forgotten, and therefore
vanished.[…] The third night was spent in Burgoyne, Idaho, where I was
given a thorough auditing. Lots of things were found out, but it seems like I have
few engrams, but scads of locks. ” One of the other things discussed in that story
was the deciding of where the next convention would be held and by who.
Harry B. Moore won the vote, and the next one would be held in New Orleans.
● Planet Stories November 1950: “Dianetics: A Door To The Future”. James Blish
gave a favorable assessment of Dianetics – the Blish article starts on p. 104 of the
PDF.
● Kentucky fanzine Dawn issue 11 November 1950 has a pretty great article by Ken
Beale (Bronx, New York) refers to Lester Del Ray having called dianetics “a kind
of streamlined hypnotism” but debunks that in an interesting way, “Unfortunately,
this doesn’t account for the fact that the insane, who according to modern
authority cannot be hypnotised without drugs, were given Dianetic Therapy
successfully.” citing editor John Campbel’s speech at the 4th N.Y. conclave last
May (1950).
● 1951 January 13 – Letter to the Editor of Jama by a Camarillo State Hospital
ghoul Dr. Samuel J. Ravitch. —Points: cult (uses 4 times)…Science Fiction
Magazine….. the staying power of chiropractic…little scientific background
to support it….first psychotic breakdown occurred during such “auditing.”
…dangers inherent in such amateurish “auditing” …devotees of
cults…fanatics…religious fervor…exploitation of
testimonials…dianeticized…religious zeal…the good old chiropractic
way…nonsensical tomfoolery. – Samuel J. Ravitch, M.D. Box A, Camarillo,
Calif.” (JAMA; January 13, 1951, Vol 145, No. 2)—- Note: the article listing for this
journal pulls this one letter out as a separate listing just to highlight it!)
● Spaceship #17 (1951?) Arthur Levine wrote a response in p. 8, excerpted: “I can
see that by initially reaching an audience of ASf readers, Hubbard may have
hoped to secure a relatively large number of scientifically-minded, intelligent
experimenters who would not be handicapped by too large a background and
belief in other methods of psychotherapy.”
● Nolacon Bulletin #1 March 1951 Harry Moore’s New Orleans Sci-fi Convention –
Nolacon planned for September 1951, began putting out its own newsletters.
Carried an article titled: Why Dianetics? which is unfortunately incompletely
preserved and cuts off at the bottom. Harry announced: “With the increasing
weight of evidence that Dianetics works on the individual and for the group, your
committee has seen fit to schedule a symposium on the subject at your
convention.” Mentions something called ultra safe “Hurdy-Gurdy” processing.
● Spaceship issue #12 – April 1951 The Master. In All Our Yesterdays 31:
Spaceship by Harry Warner Jr., Harry said that he was being helped (co-edited)
with Spaceship by another Brooklyn fan, Saul Diskin who left to go to college late
in 1951.
● Marvel Science Stories May 1951 contained positive articles on dianetics from L.
Ron Hubbard and Theodore Sturgeon –
● 1951 May 1 – release of supposed April 15 – FORGERY “letter” from
Hubbard to Sara —May 1, 1951 titled: “Letter indicates Dianetics founder, baby
fled to Cuba”. also see (Exhibit 5 Leo Bartemeier Council on Mental Health AMA
files – article: Dianetics Chief, Ill in Cuba, Defies Wife (Folder #4 on p. 5.) Points:
hopelessly insane…paranoid schizophrenic
● ODD magazine #9 In what looks to be early 1951, April or May after Harry’s
announcement in March (whoever made the PDF has the date wrong because it’s
talking about Nolacon which hadn’t happened yet) Creep, Creep, Creep, go the
agitators behind the scenes and then – “Duggie” and “Rich” (Richard Elsberry)
in a section called Nothing Serious by Elsberry, were all fired up and complaining
about Dianetics being at the upcoming Nolacon, They appear to be soliciting
attacks and trying to drum up anti-support. I think it’s Richard doing the tirading
about it, and he specifically refers to Harry Moore, the backer of the convention as
a “dianetics backer”. At the end Duggie adds “(((YES, what about you? If you have
any views about this question, we will be glad to print all that space will allow for in
our next issue.)))”
● Spaceship #12 – It looks to me that Hubbard or one of his friends may have
become aware of this Saul Diskin crap, because in the last issue that Diskin
co-edited #12 (came out some time before the July 1951 issue), there was an
article from B. Chandler “giving cautious approval to the use of dianetics, after 23
hours of processing” and recommended to other fans to try the discipline with
care. Harry Warner noted that similar stories about LSD had been being tested in
the fanzines, which is interesting since LSD experimentation was still Top Secret
under Projects CHATTER and BLUEBIRD then. Silverberg, or maybe we’d be
more accurate saying its Saul Diskin? had jumped right on the bandwagon in this
issue, positioning Dianeticians such as Chandler thusly: “The lunatic fringe is
here in fandom, and we’ve been forced to put up with them and laugh at their
cementing the idea that Dr. Wertham, Austin Smith, and his pet bulldog Oliver
Field are just all over the pulps and fanzines, infiltrating them. That is exactly the
kind of thing they did, got other authors to do their dirty work to make it look more
like it was everywhere and not an organized, solicited, campaign. Dr. Wertham,
himself an Igor-type, was asked to attack Hubbard and Dianetics and he did.
● Nolacon Bulletin #2 July 1951 It looks to me that the Austin Smith/Oliver Field duo
is hard at work trying to disrupt the scheduled symposium on Dianetics. Harry
points out that Norwescon (the Portland one that Bob Johnson attended) “didn’t
prevue their session on Dianetics” and that “It was one of the two with the
highest attendance.” Harry notes that now (since March) he has “a dozen or so
guys” that simply “WILL NOT PLAY unless we agree to play it all their way. We
can’t have even one 1-2-hour seminar or they will stay away.” There’s more
interesting points as well, but this whole “rejection” pseudo-grass roots campaign
sounds…organized to me.
● Spaceship #13 July 1951 Apparently there was a new approach thought up,
probably because people weren’t quite falling for all this staged “follow the pied
piper” criticism of Boggs, Silverberg/Diskin et al. p. 22 has an interesting
supposed “counterblast from a non-skeptic”. Marion Z Bradly writes: “Ron
Hubbard was a qualified s-f writer and also a qualified scientist. Whether or not
you agree with his dianetics follery, his article was interesting and reasonable
logical and his NAME ALONE is a high drawing-card. (Or was, previous to the
Engram racket.)” She also positions Hubbard with Rosicrucians. If you look at this
sampling of ads in fanzines from AMORC (rosicrucians) at the Havelin Collection
– They started their digitalization project in 2015 – it’s actually pretty interesting as
to Dianetics claims and especially the later Scientology “advanced” levels.
Interjection –
● Nolacon I: A Torrid Affair September 1-3 1951 by Sam Moskowitz Nolacon I, New
Orleans. “In the morning, after an opening address abou how the atomic age isn’t
so bad and an address by Sam Moskowitz, “A real donnybrook developed,
kindled by those who did not want to permit a scheduled session on Dianetics to
be held. It finally went on, retaining 27 people.”. You can see photos from the
Nolacon here. I’ve pulled some out that I think are relevant and also aren’t
probably known about by Scientology historians. Photos of Harry B. Moore,
Theodore Sturgeon, Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman, L Ron Hubbard’s literary
agent, Sam Merwin, friend of L. Ron Hubbard
● “Science Fiction Bookcase” Amazing Stories, Nov. 1951: 158-59. After Nolacon,
Sam Merwin reviewed Hubbard’s Typewriter in the Sky and Fear.
● The Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951 James Blish also
did a rather tongue-in-cheek story lampooning the depictions of Hubbard as a
“cult” leader then saturating the press (courtesy of Austin Smith, JAMA editor and
his pitbull George Field). It was a fanzine story called The Warrior’s Choice in
Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951. He described his character as the
“red-haired man” who was one of the “Council” (p. 33) and then directly called him
Elron (p. 35). I decided to do my own review of the story just now, and as it turns
out others characterizations of it are completely off. And I mean WAY off. As I
suspected, the character of Hubbard is positioned with Mahrt, the opponent of the
“giants” called Warriors of the Day who act omnipotent but aren’t and how they
are against Mahrt and Elron and are afraid of “Mahrt”. That’s the first thing, now I’ll
make a few notes of key points. Xota was a totally telepathic world, all living things
down to blades of grass. Tipton was the “chosen of Mahrt” somehow transported
from Earth to Xota. Meeting the council: both men were described as having
“postures that bespoke years of command worn easily and well.” Tipton is told that
“Mahrt is the embodiment of all the forces of mental darkness and evil.” The
“Warriors of the Day” are described as the “advancing hordes of an interstellar
civilization, spreading inward from the outermost limb of the galaxy. Unless
something unguessable can be done, they will engulf Xota as they have engulfed
a thousand other worlds.” Mahrt is actually the key enemy of these “warriors”.
Tipton and the talking giant cat have an argument, Tipton ends up on the warriors
ship where they say they invented the myth of Mahrt as part of figuring out
militarily how to defeat a totally telepathic planet. He knew they were lying, that
Mahrt was real. Connecting telepathically with Mahrt, he teleports back to Mahrts
temple. “What about Elron?” Tipton says to the girl he meets in the temple, as to
what his standing is about Mahrt. “He has all the earmarks of a ‘suspect
everything’ personality, and from what I’ve been able to observe of his
intelligence, should be more dangerous than Yrinon and Lanja together. I wouldn’t
back him against Chrestos, I don’t think, but against the two humans he’s a sure
thing.” The girl answers that Elron is our high priest. They go to Elron who
wants Tipton put in irons and wants to kill him in a ritual. At the ritual, Mahrt
inhabits Tipton, things don’t go as planned. Elron hoped to be the “sword” and
was humiliated that Tipton was instead. Now here is a direct parallel to real life –
the book says: “When a man has built up an elaborate organization, founded
in the hope of perpetuating itself forever, the arrival of an event which
promises to deprive that organization of meaning within a year or so could
hardly be welcome.” This is a reference to the arrival of the first Austin Smith/
Oliver Field backed moves to destroy the HDRF. Blish speaks of a myth system,
where Hubbard as Elron is “far more a servant of the Warriors than any other
person on Xiota” which is perhaps Blish recognizing the Hubbard then covert
CIA involvement. Then there’s an interesting discussion of the Warriors
corrupting the telepathic Xotans with the cult of Mahrt, “the evil god who sleeps in
the back of every telepathi’s brain.” The real Mahrt grants Tipton the power of “the
sleeping planetary mind” needing “never again fear the psychic probes of the
Warriors of the day.” There’s various battling and another visit with the warriors to
rescue the girl and then the story turns and Tipton is really Mahrt and he had
created himself as a fragment, suppressed the memory and now needed to rejoin
because of the suppression of the I am We are Mahrt collective mind. It continues,
sounding like something out of an acid trip (LSD). Then the “fist” of Mahrt struck
and broke the Warriors of the day. Long story short, the supposed railing against
Hubbard as “high priest” of the “cult of Mahrt” was actually a very, very subtle
lampooning of OTHER forces at work in regarding human potentiality, plus a
collective “God” imagery mixed in, to boot. It ends with a “new Sword” was being
forged…a Kodiak bear, to strike against the suppression of knowledge of a “racial
consciousness”. Ending with: “On Earth, a whimpering creature stirs, and opens
too-wise eyes upon the forests of the great North. It is tiny now, but in later years it
will be great; and a trail to nowhere awaits it. -A Kodiak bear.” That’s entirely
possible to be a reference to the spiritual subject Hubbard was then in the process
of forming in 1951, Scientology, put together with the old Kodiak bear story
Hubbard liked to tell or…it’s a reference to something much older based in the
North that I won’t go into right now. You can read more about how Blish’s story
was resurrected and twisted beyond recognition to be Elron Elray and the
Galactic Federation by Captain Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org, the so-called “freezone
Scientologists” currently led by Max and Erica Hauri, whom my husband Mike
McClaughry once accurately characterized as a trap for people leaving the Church
of Scientology) and a previous Stanford Research Insitute pal of CIA
remote-viewer program leader Hal Puthoff.
seriously twisted take-off from Blish’s story.The whole story is very weird, it seems
to be some sort of intentional positioning of Hubbard as a caucasian “god” with
futuristic Red China. There’s talk of sterilization of the “caucs” by one of the
bards, etc. The first mention is a religious saying: “Elron be with you.” The
chinese-styled character of the story is one of the “Bards” were at the top of a
caste system. They were “holy men who guided man to clearness.” Refers to
Elron Hu who lived in “the hideous days of the Time of Madness.” with a VERY
weird picture of the great hairy/spider eye of Hubbard presiding over the
Dinosaurs age.Scientology OT levels scholars might find one of the passages
interesting because as Sung-wu, one of the Bards, starts instructing some lowest
caste Tinkerist in the way of Elron-Hu – the first two catechisms are: “First!”
snapped Sung-wa. “Who are you?”
“Second! What are you? And the tenth is “Clearness!” (just after Ninth, which is
about death). Which seems to be positioning that one can’t be Clear unless they
die.In 1950, Hubbard’s Dianetics book talked about “demon circuits”. A couple of
years later, Hubbard revealed he really meant those were spirits which he initially
called entities or “theta bodies”. (see this post) Later, he resurrected this as part of
what he called advanced operating levels – OT 3 for short – 1967 where he now
called them body thetans. Around two decades later, David Mayo was sent to
“audit” a sick L. Ron Hubbard in the 1980’s. The procedures developed by David
Mayo are known as New Era Dianetics for Operating Thetans – NED for OTs, or
NOTs. New questions were developed for handling the body thetans (demons). It
was said that a body thetan could consider themselves to be any body part – a
hair, lung, blood cell, etc. Therefore the new questions were – 1. What are you?
2. Who are you? The body thetan was then supposed to realize he was himself
and leave the body. The NOTs series of issues were written by David Mayo, not
by L. Ron Hubbard. The original OT levels were replaced with the new OT levels
for OT 4, 5, 6 and 7. (Scientology Roots Chapter 17) —Dick’s story ends with a
rather thinly veiled positioning image of a cult (Dianetics) of followers worshipping
a sci-fi space ship, positioned with (Hubbard) Elron Hu.
And there you have it.
Before we do our final Thorvald/Austin/Oliver Black PR campaign analysis,
I had promised earlier that I would bring together all the timeline entries so we’re going to do
that now,
plus adding just about every other item of significance from the main article.
Master Timeline
Introduction to first (earliest) entries:
Of Two Minds – Two Beings.
Here and there in history, few and far between, there have been men and women who did
start going in the right direction and they were always viciously attacked or at the very least
marginalized and/or forced OFF that particular course. I’ll probably write more in-depth on
this one day, but here’s an example. If you take a look at this post of mine, you’ll see an
absolutely amazing description from the 1800’s by a man named – Dr. George Calvin Pitzer.
He was born 1835 and died 1909 in Los Angeles. He helped found the American Medical
College. That was one of the schools that was destroyed in Flexner’s rampage of hate
against such things.
1898 – George C. Pitzer wrote a book called Suggestion – this is within the time period
where the British had been “investigating” telepathy and other abilities through the
Cecil’s-formed (spy family since the time of Queen Elizabeth) Society for Psychical
Research. A school was formed around Pitzer’s experiences with what he called the
‘subjective’ mind, called The St. Louis School of Suggestive Therapeutics and Medical
Electricity.—what is his definition of suggestion? “…in the treatment of disease, we mean
the presentation of ideas to the mind of the patient…”—You can clearly see the DRUGS
clash and especially – COMPETITION TO BRITISH OPIUM TRADE – on p. 26 where Pitzer
addresses attackers of hypnotism: “They know that opium and morphine, chloral and
cocaine are ruining, actually killing their hundreds every year; yet, while they can tell us
of no deaths nor other disastrous results coming directly from the legitimate use of
hypnotism, they keep on dosing their patients with chloral and morphine, and warn us
against hypnotism as a dangerous thing.” See Why China article for a history of British (and
Vatican) slavemasters utter perfidy in dominating the opium trade. Pitzer defines hypnosis:
“Hypnosis is the state in which the subjective mind is uppermost, and the objective mind is
partially or totally in
abeyance—drowsy or sound asleep.“ — You will note that what Hubbard later tripped over
is that there is no need to put anyone to “sleep” to access the other “mind” or being. Now
THAT is very scary to slavemasters because it’s hard to attack as being hypnosis – which is
why they hypocritcally tried so hard to do exactly that – accuse Dianetics of being hypnosis. I
have had Dianetics and I was never “asleep” in any form whatsoever. Closing one’s eyes
doesn’t mean you are asleep.—Pitzer’s definition of “unconscious” or “subjective
mind” that isn’t unconscious — “The subjective mind is a distinct entity. It occupies the
whole human body.” as opposed to the “objective” or “awake” mind” —Did you know that
union-of-the-two was actually the original point of hypnosis back then? Of course, as usual,
coming from the arrogant I’m-better-than-you-and-won’t-even-acknowledge-you-exist
mentality, that didn’t always come out quite like how some people planned. But that union
though, that was a very real desire.====Some of what Pitzer wrote is downright amazing in
its prescience. He walks right along the line of what I have just been telling you and that
would not do in the hands of the “commoners”, at all – from the slavemasters perspective. I
highly suggest you look over that section of my post because contained in what he was
presenting, even though “off” with the idea of needing sleep, lay the real reason he was
targeted. He was veering dangerously close to the truth that has been suppressed for
centuries=====
1900 – Pitzer moved his school to Los Angeles, California in 1900 –The LA Times ad linked
to there, notes that: Suggestion, without antagonizing them, supersedes Christian
Science, Mental Science, Divine Science, Metaphysical Healing, Magnetic Healing, and all
other mental or faith-cure methods of healing disease.
1903 –OF TWO MINDS –Fredric Myers, British Society of Psychical Research book
summing up 25 years of study—-…Is there for us also any possibility of a like resurrection
into reality and day? Is there for us any sleep so deep that waking from it after the likeness
of perfect man we shall be satisfied; and shall see face to face; and shall know even as also
we are known? (The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers
Volume I – 1903) —No. It is not SLEEP or some drugged up unaware state that is needed.
That much I’ll say for the moment. Just like Hubbard, Robertson, Walter and I imagine a host
of others throughout history, watch British Society of Psychical Research man, Fredric
Myers, do the exact same flinch, the exact same running way to a more “comfortable
theory.” —First, let me show you how he recognizes there is someone else there. From
Fredric Myers 700+ pages book set published in February 1903 – note: Beneath is a
reference to what Fredric Myers called the subliminal mind, what some call today the
subconscious mind.”That some guess of a more continuous consciousness, of an identity
unmoved and stable beneath the tossing of the psychic storm, must needs have been
suggested by all those strange interruptions?” (The Human Personality and Its Survival of
Bodily Death by Frederic Myers Volume I) An identity, ie: a PERSON. One who is
UNMOVED and stable – despite everything you do to it. I think that’s beautiful. A truly
magnificent being to stay so true to their “job”, their selves, all this time. Wouldn’t you say?
Enough to make some people feel they might not quite be living up to their end of the
bargain.— Here’s Myers talking about the ‘subliminal’ self, versus some other self, you
understand. “The subliminal (or ultra-marginal) mental life is sufficiently complex and
continuous to justify us in speaking of a subliminal Self. ‘ (The Human Personality and Its
Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers Volume I )— Now watch him flinch and run
away from that truth – and invent the same wrong-headed theory about MULTIPLE beings.
He starts pushing (fact-slipping) that this other ‘self’ is some kind ‘complex’ of lives – aka
demons. “…each man is essentially a spirit, controlling an organism which is itself a
complex of lower and smaller lives.…the man of genius …effects a successful
co-operation of an unusually large number of elements of his personality — reaching a stage
of integration slightly in advance of our own. (The Human Personality and Its Survival of
Bodily Death by Frederic Myers – Volume II)—-Notice that now instead of there being
another self? Or person? It’s an organism. And…it’s a COMPLEX of LOWER – see the
arrogant attitude – and SMALLER – more arrogance – lives.
1906 – AMA – So where does this special Bureau of Investigation come in? It had been
formed before the Flexner rape-and-pillage of American medicine, by…a Brit. Why am I not
surprised. Well, anyway, it was formed in 1906, under the name “Propaganda Department”,
headed by Arthur J. Cramp, MD. “The department prepared abstracts of government reports
on the chemical composition of nostrums seized in interstate commerce.” (JAMA article)
—What the heck are nostrums? 1) a medicine, especially one that is not considered
effective, prepared by an unqualified person OR 2) a pet scheme or favorite remedy,
especially one for bringing about some social or political reform or improvement.
Clearly they started out meaning the first one, but later years brought increased activity to
the department, whose name was changed to the Bureau of Investigation in 1925. Then the
bureau added other forms of “quackery” to its investigations. Example of an actual quack
investigation by Oliver Field in 1954. —Right from the beginning that’s one of the main things
that the JAMA was used for – sort of a WHO IS IN and WHO IS OUT game. As soon as
Cramp was hired on as an editor of the Journal of the American Medical Association, he
began contributing regular pieces about quackery to it….Cramp believed in what he once
called “public education through publicity” (Cramp 1920, 788), and he believed that “the best
that the medical profession can do in protecting the public is to turn the light on the methods
of the faddist and the quack, so that his ignorance or fraud becomes apparent” (Cramp
1927b, 727–728). This was the mission of the Propaganda for Reform Department, which
became the Bureau of Investigation in 1925 and the Department of Investigation in 1958
(Hafner et al. 1992, viii). (JAMA article)
1905-1910 In the early half of the 20th century, a coup was organized on the medical
research facilities, hospitals and universities. The Rockefeller family, ye ole step-n-fetch-its
of the actual slavemasters, sponsored research and donated sums to universities and
medical schools which had drug based research. Establishments and research which
were were not drug based were refused funding and soon dissolved in favor of the lucrative
pharmaceutical industry. In 1939 a “Drug Trust” alliance was formed by the Rockefeller
empire and the German chemical company I.G. Farben (Bayer). After World War II, I.G.
Farben was dismantled but later emerged as separate corporations within the alliance. Since
WWII, the pharmaceutical industry has steadily netted increasing profits to become the
world’s second largest manufacturing industry; after the arms industry. Abraham Flexner was
empowered to investigate the quality of medical education in all 161 medical schools that
existed in 1910. He helped destroy the credibility and funding sources for nearly all schools
using non-drug based medicine. 161 medical schools dwindled down to 81 by 1919 and
medical graduates declined from 5,747 to 2,658. “Overcrowding” of the profession became
the public AMA theme for the “opportunities of those already in the profession to acquire a
livelihood.” said one AMA President at the time.— The AMA also practiced severe
discrimination against black medical schools and black doctors. They did not apologize for
this for over 150 years, until July 2008. (Exploring the AMA’s History of Discrimination, 2008)
[…] you find that in 1910, the American Medical Association commissioned a report of all
medical schools. They were very interested in lowering the number of physicians. They
wanted to raise the professional stature of physicians, and they wanted to do that by
exclusion. They commissioned Abraham Flexner to go to every medical school in the U.S.
and Canada and make an assessment — basically which medical schools should and
should not be encouraged to continue. When Flexner did this, he deemed every black
medical school substandard and recommended they all be closed, except for two, Howard
and Meharry.And he also went beyond that to stipulate that black physicians should only
treat black patients, that black physicians should have their roles curtailed. And he warned
that an essentially untrained Negro bearing an MD label is dangerous. So he looked on all
black physicians with a jaundiced eye. His recommendations were prophetic. All the black
schools except for Howard and Meharry closed — they could not attract funding any longer
because of the damning indictment of them. And black physicians were indeed kept from
specialties like surgery. They were kept from research.—In general, schools and doctors
were asked if they would (or did) practice “modern scientific medicine” – translation- Did
they use DRUGS.
1909 – Slavemasters rampage of hate against medical methods that challenge their
“supremacy” – The Flexner report trashes one of the schools that George Pitzer was a
professor at. Flexner graded American [the school Pitzer helped found] along with several
other Missouri medical schools as “utterly wretched” following his visit in 1909.– American
Medical College, Barnes Medical College, and National University of Arts and Sciences
Collection—You can read the Flexner report here – Missouri starts on page 269. Judging
from its review of American Medical College (Eclectic) as “utterly wretched” on p. 276, you’ll
see that “eclectic” clearly wasn’t part of the future planned program. Flexner’s report didn’t
exactly rate Pitzer’s Suggestion school directly, but from what I understand, was his way of
having it be beneath rating. You can at least see it mentioned in the list of Missouri schools
evaluated though, in this Report of the Missouri Medical Association July 1911 to June 1912,
just after the Flexner report came out in 1910. It mentions Pitzers school on p. 34.—Note
that Pitzer had actually moved to Los Angeles, California in 1900, so that’s interesting that
they’re even still talking about it.
1914 – WWI – just before WWI, Fredric Wertham spent quite a bit of time in England taking
medical courses at King’s College, London University. He liked to read Fabian Society
writings and Karl Marx in his spare time and worked wth the British on treating soldiers
“mentally scarred” from battle. (shell shock) Interestingly enough, he would have run into Dr.
Winfred Overholser during this time period, because that’s exactly what HE was doing during
WWI. Overholser was in France “treating soldiers mentally scarred in battle…as Lieutenant
in the Neuro-psychiatric Section of the U.S. Army Medical Corps from February 1918 to June
1919…” Both Overholser and Wertham would have also become well aquainted with British
psychiatrist (called alienists sometimes back then) John Rawlings Rees who was brought
into the British Army to treat soldiers suffering from shell shock. They called it battle
neurosis when the soldiers did not want to kill and be killed. Notice the later corollary to
diagnosing that man schizophrenic because he didn’t want to kill any more people. (The
German man we talked about earlier) –What were they doing with these supposedly insane
soldiers? They were using abreactive therapy on the soldiers who had developed “battle
neurosis”. (Freud Encyclopaedia edited by Edward Erwin) —They also used electric shock
on the soldiers to “cure” their lack of desire to kill other men, women and children. They
attached electrodes to the ‘patients’ body and then delivered electric shocks of up to 20,000
volts for one second each, repeated ten to twenty times daily. (Madhouse: A Tragic Tale of
Megalomania and Modern Medicine by Andrew T. Scull) — The Shaping of Psychiatry by
War by John Rawlings Reese, 1945: In World War I the British army had a “consulting
psychologist” and a number of neurologists. Many of them, in fact, were psychiatrists. They
were brought into the army’s machinery in response to the critical situation created by the
wave of battle neurosis at first called “shell shock.” … Doctor Thomas Salmon came over to
England in 1917… The main concern of psychiatrists in the last war was with treatment and
they were very successful in treating battle neurosis just behind the lines and in tackling the
more resistant cases in base hospitals. …the best results with the war neuroses are
obtained when they have active treatment. “Psychosurgery” in the shape of abreaction
followed by simple re-education should as a rule precede a period of rest under narcosis.
[That euphemistic description is hiding that means they DRUGGED them into a coma] There
is, however, no question that the general method of abreaction followed by sedation is
applicable to many cases in civilian life, particularly in psychosomatic conditions, and it is
well worth further experiment. That means, psychotherapy WITH DRUGS and “shock”
therapies. Exactly what Wertham would be a major proponent of later on, as was Dr.
Overholser.
1916 – LEO BARTEMEIER later head of AMA Council on Mental Health — What was Leo
Bartemeier’s masters dissertation at the Catholic University of America? It was titled:
Doctrine of Pleasure-Pain and Learning. (Catholic University Bulletin Volumes 21-22; 1916)
Note: In Freudian psychoanalysis, the pleasure principle (German: Lustprinzip) is the
instinctive seeking of pleasure and avoiding of pain. Right on cue with ye ole Jesuits goals.
1920 Tavistock – Cementing the British connection to these two here, after WWI, my
husband’s The Reckoning chapter Down the Mental Health Rabbit hole, documents that in
1920 John Rees and pals formed the Tavistock Institute of Medical Psychology (aka
Tavistock Clinic). The plan was that the treatment used on soldiers was going to be used on
society – social psychiatry was born. 3, 75, 76 And, just as in 1954 when Wertham would use
as his infiltration point of children as a publicly “acceptable” victim for the “evils of comics”,
according to John Rawlings Rees it was child psychiatry that they started with at the
Tavistock Clinic. A think of the poor children routine, you understand. —It should be kept
very clear in your mind that this BRITISH plan was literally the blueprint for what both
Wertham and Overholser would later champion in the U.S.
1920’s – Wertham background as detailed in the 1954 Senate Hearings (p. 80) 1922-29
Psychiatrist at Adolf Meyer Phipps Psychiatric Clinic, Johns Hopkins Hospital and University.
1926-28 chief resident psychiatrist, Johns Hopkins Hospital.1926-29 assistant in charge of
the Menal Hygiene clinic, Johns Hopkins Hospital, taught psychiatry, psychotherapy and
brain anatomy at Johns Hopkins Medical School. Do you know what the fact that he was in
those positions at that time means? It means Wertham was involved with training the
ghoulish Dr. Donald Ewen Cameron, who was an absolute monster after this. Cameron left
London for Baltimore, Maryland, in 1926, to become assistant psychiatrist at the Phipps
Clinic at Johns Hopkins Hospital…. Continuing his climb through the academic ranks, he
became an instructor in psychiatry there within two years, holding a Henderson Research
Scholarship. In Baltimore Cameron worked under Adolf Meyer, perhaps his greatest
influence… a pragmatist who worked to improve the lot of mental patients, using any
approach that seemed to him sensible and practical. (I Swear By Apollo; Gillmor p. 7-9)
1920’s – The AMA Therapy and Research Division or Therapeutical Research as it was
called back in the 1920’s, had to do with MONEY for: “…the Trustees’ make an appropriation
each year. This appropriation is used for investigations and laboratory research in the
actions of drugs and pharmaceutical products. The results are published is various
medical journals…” Under “therapy and research” comes all manner of horrific things.
Anywhere from electro-shock and insulin shock therapies to lobotomies and “thought reform”
experiments to electromagnetic field manipulation and genetic engineering which when
combined with drugs it then qualifies as “research”. So that’s bad enough all by itself – this
Therapy and Research division. —So what is this Council on Pharmacy and Chemistry? It
was formed in 1905 to evaluate DRUGS and “various medicinal preparations”. On February
23, 1957 they decided to be more blunt about it and renamed the thing: The Council on
Drugs. The original founding rules noted that articles and research about new drugs etc.
would be submitted to the JAMA as the determination point. Powerful position. You can
just imagine how that selection process of who gets highlighted and who doesn’t, went. Want
public promotion of your drug? 1. Gimme some scratch. 2. DO WE LIKE YOU? cuz if we
don’t…you’re outta here. — Real scientific. It looks scientific, but that’s not what goes on
behind-the-scenes. Items 1 and 2 above must be A-ok or it ain’t appearing in JAMA.
—You see, that Council had to accept the “new article” – as they also called the drug or
chemical. So this means, when all those nasty drugs like Metrazol, Thorazine, etc. etc. came
out? These guys had chosen to accept it, then they promoted it, and then they get PAID for
doing so. One way or another. Here’s an example of new drugs “accepted” in 1955. There
was a LOT of money involved in what the JAMA editor did. I mean literally mountains of it.
1924 – Dr. Morris Fishbein becomes editor of JAMA from 1924 to December 1949, when he
appointed Austin E. Smith, his protege’ since 1940, to replace him.
1920’s and 1930’s – Germany – many people diagnosed “schizophrenic” weren’t but were
sterilized anyway. One example was a man who objected to his role in WWI and had
decided he wouldn’t agree with killing others anymore. Though cogent, no signs whatsoever
of any mental problems, he was still diagnosed schizophrenic by the institute and sterilized
against his will. –Wertham explains what Kraepelin meant by dementia
praecox/schizophrenia. In World Within (p.18) Fredric was quite clear in his support of
labelling people schizophrenic but it is what he said that Kraepelin meant by that, that is
particularly chilling.He said that schizophrenia does NOT mean split personality, that
Kraepelin was referring to a “coming-apart of special psychological reactions” and that it’s
called schizophrenia because “the division of the most various psychic functions is one of its
most important attributes.” Here’s the key part – he says it means a “definitely pathological
emotional withdrawal from the environment with a progressive blunting of the personality.” To
illustrate just how chilling this is, if we take the example of the man who objected to his
role in WWI and had decided he wouldn’t agree with killing others anymore – you see just
exactly what people like Wertham, Kraepelin, etc. meant by “environment”. They mean
rebelling against THEIR SOCIETY, not agreeing to do THEIR AGENDA. And even though
the man had no signs whatsoever of any mental problems? He is classified as
schizophrenic because he disagrees with the slavemasters and their war-mongering
agenda. Now we know what is REALLY going on with this damn “schizophrenic” label.
1930’s – Overholser and Wertham parallel paths – Dr. Winfred Overholser was appointed
director of the Division for the Examination of Prisoners of the Massachusetts Department of
Mental Diseases from 1925 to 1930. He was commissioner of the Massachusetts
Department of Mental Diseases, 1934-1936, where he helped enact the Briggs Law which
“provided for the prompt recognition of defendants who should be in hospitals, thus
preventing trial of mentally ill persons.” (Overholser, Briggs Law 1935). He was removed by
Governor James M. Curley for abuses in the hospitals being exposed. Instead of being
prosecuted, in 1937 he was rewarded with an even bigger position as superintendent of the
government-run Saint Elizabeth’s Hospital, Washington, D.C., where he remained until 1962.
(Overholser Papers) —Following directly in Overholser’s footsteps of work on forensic
psychiatry and helping get psychiatry into the U.S. court systems, the 1954 Senate Hearings
(p. 80) show that from 1932-52 Wertham was the senior psychiatrist of the New York City
Department of Hospitals, and that right away upon that appointment, he organized and
became director of the Psychiatric Clinic of the Court of General Sessions in New York. The
first clinic of its kind in the United States, where he examined prisoners regarding
competency for standing trial. At the same time, from 1933-36 he was made the assistant to
the director of Bellevue Hospital; in charge of prison ward; in charge of children’s psychiatric
ward; in charge of alcoholic ward. —Along this “forensic psychiatry” interest that Overholser
and Wertham shared, it should be noted that after WWII, Overholser would be backed to use
the case of Ezra Pound to get psychiatry fully into the American justice system, allowing the
“mentally unfit to stand trial” defense to be a valid one which resulted in Pound getting out of
treason charges. Pound was given a private room at St Elizabeth’s and according to some,
was treated like royalty by the psychiatrist. It is now widely considered that Overholser’s
conclusions on Pound’s mental state were not only wrong, but deliberately so. In yet
another example of the Overholser/Wertham duo, sometimes “looking” opposed, other times
not, Fredric played “bad cop” in this case and was quite vocal in his supposed criticism of the
Ezra Pound case findings.
1930’s through 2019 – AMA Blocking cancer and other disease treatments – they do this to
attack and stop any DISRUPTION of their agenda, the portion of that agenda that deals with
“planned” release of DRUGS and TREATMENTS in such a way as to maximize profits and
control. You see where JAMA fits into that and what they do to stop or control the speed of
both research and cures. Now for some examples of who Austin and Oliver will call “quack”
– people who offer ANY way of alleviating cancer and other life-threatening diseases that are
not controllable. — Example #1 – 1958 Dr. Min Chiu Li, the man who used methotrexate –
chemotherapy, in other words. After the first two patients went into remission using Li’s
treatment, they were presented at NCI Grand Rounds at the Clinical Center. The subject of
the rounds was “the spontaneous regression of cancer”. Li was told that if he persisted in
using his radical treatment, he would be fired. He persisted, he was fired.FOURTEEN
YEARS later, when they had created the monopolized drug patents off of HIS research, they
gave Dr. Li the Lasker prize.How many people died who didn’t have to because of that
delay? Too many. Example #2 –I believe it was a Japanese scientist who actually perfected
chemotherapy based on the large molecule targeting system idea. What that means is this.
The cancer cells have big “mouths” or holes that they suck up nutrition from. Bigger than
normal cells. This scientist created a large molecule poison or chemotherapy that only the
cancer cells could “eat” with their big hogging “mouths”. He had something like a 98 percent
success rate on brain tumor patients, one of the hardest to cure. The tumors shrunk
dramatically because they were literally being starved. More than TWENTY YEARS later,
they’re still dragging their feet on this type of chemotherapy. Here’s another example article.
How many people died who didn’t have to because of that still ongoing delay? Probably tens
of thousands of people at least. How much money is being poured into their coffers from the
current inferior form of chemotherapy? Billions and Billions of dollars. WHY are they
dragging their feet? In favor of even MORE expensive genetic engineering – gene “therapy”,
that’s why. Example #3 — Lorenzo’s oil. Lorenzo had Adrenoleukodystrophy – a rare
genetic (inherited) disorder characterized by the breakdown or loss of the myelin sheath
surrounding nerve cells in the brain and progressive dysfunction of the adrenal gland. Think
of it like an electric wire whose protective rubber or plastic sheathing is being destroyed. You
get unprotected “current” spilling out, not arriving at full strength where it should while also
spreading where it shouldn’t. But what was breaking down the sheathing? Why was the body
doing this? That was the question that Lorenzo’s parents set themselves the task to figure
out, to save their son’s life. They studied all the available medical data themselves and at
one particular low point for the father, he gets told in a dream what the problem is. He figures
it out, then contacted over 100 firms around the world until they find an elderly British
chemist, Don Suddaby, willing distill the proper formula. The oil, erucic acid, proves
successful in normalizing the accumulation of the very long chain fatty acids in the brain that
had been causing their son’s steady decline. Lorenzo’s Oil is a combination of a 4:1 mix of
oleic acid (olive oil) and that erucic acid. They found a kind of cure that slowed down the
disease and even restored some of Lorenzo’s body-damage. An oil. A natural oil – not some
patented drug. They were understandably excited to share their find that was restoring their
son to them. What happened? The very same kinds of people, like Oliver Field, Austin Smith
of the AMA and the FDA not only tried to stop them from researching it in the first place, they
refused to help them and even when they found Lorenzo’s Oil – refused to approve it!.
Those that sucked up to the Great Gods of the AMA and FDA, were just as bad, as this
scene from the Lorenzo’s Oil movie shows. There’s an absolutely wonderful part of this
scene @2:31 where the father was told he was arrogant for thinking he could do better than
the “doctors”, and he passionately explains the actual real meaning of the word. It’s from the
Latin Arrogare – To claim for oneself. Lorenzo’s father says that yes, he IS arrogant
because: “I claim the RIGHT to fight for my kids life, and no doctor […] has the RIGHT to
stop me from asking questions which might help me save him!” Hear, Hear. The FDA
refused to approve it for… what is it now? THIRTY FIVE years. Even as late as 2013 the
foundation that distributed the oil was still trying to get FDA approval for mass distribution
etc., and today even though they are still disributing it, the FDA won’t let them even ship it to
anyone but a physician. And in the meantime in 2018? The FDA is GRANTING the big
business engineered gene-therapy company Bluebird BIO Breakthrough Therapy approval
designation for Lenti-D™ testing of gene therapy for the disease Lorenzo had. What do they
call this study? Starbeam. What can we expect the price tag for this to be? We can use the
price tag for Bluebird Bio is currently charging. $1.8 million dollars PER PATIENT. Think I’m
kidding? Read this June 2019 article. Bluebird’s CEO tries to justify this out-of-reach for
EVERYONE BUT THE RICH price tag, by saying: “the one-time treatment is a game
changer for patients, giving them a “lifelong benefit”” Think that’s the only one? It’s not.
Spark Therapeutics’ Luxturna gene therapy treatment for a hereditary eye disease is running
about $425,000—per eye! Novartis’ cancer cell therapy, Kymriah, runs $475,000! Their
ever-so generous solution to this extraordinarily high price tag? A five year payment plan.
Yea. Great. I’ll take three. Do you know what they’re USING to do this gene therapy study on
Lorenzo’s disease? The HIV virus. “For the gene therapy, the children had their own stem
cells harvested from their blood rather than bone marrow. Then, scientists used a unique tool
to infuse the cells in a lab with the healthy ABCD1 gene: a lentivirus made from a disabled
form of HIV. The lentivirus acts as a “vector,” carrying and inserting the healthy gene into the
stem cell DNA. “These vectors are kind of like living medicines,” said Dr. David Williams, the
chief scientific officer at Boston Children’s Hospital and the senior author of the study. Once
in the body, these altered blood stem cells constantly regenerate to keep treating the
patient’s disease. The advantage of using disabled HIV over other viral carriers is that HIV
actually delivers the healthy gene more safely, without apparently altering any neighboring
DNA, Williams told Live Science.” An ENGINEERED virus works better to deliver
ENGINEERED genes? Gee. Who woulda thunk it. Seems a bit dangerous to be using the
HIV virus at all, if you ask me. So, now you know what the AMA and its attack dogs
primary function is – to protect the slavemasters plan, their power, and their fortunes – and
of course, THEIR health.
1932 – Wertham, over 11 years later, suddenly chose to bring up the mescaline psychosis
“biographical” method in a study published July 1932 titled: Inconstancy of the Formal
Structure of the Personality – Experimental Study of the Infleunce of Mescaline on the
Rorschach test; together with Manfred Blueler. THAT was the “first study on the effects of
mescaline” published in the U.S. “Behind every twisted thought lies a twisted molecule.”
(1994 interview, psychiatrist Leo Hollister
quoted a line by Ralph Gerard from the 1950’s, saying it was the moral for all of biological
psychiatry.) See where DRUGS fits into this plan? Note that Wertham is discussing the
breakdown of personality using mescaline, ergo trying to twist thought by introducing a
“twisted molecule” – mescaline. —The really scary-weird coinciding thing, to me, is that
within 2 years of his return from that rats nest in Munich, he published a paper on
mescaline, the very drug the Nazis would later experiment with on prisoners in Dachau.
Fredric already knew a LOT about mescaline from having been at the Munich Institute in
1921 working directly with Kraepelin, Wertham’s hero. He most certainly would have heard
of Kurt Beringer’s mescaline study going on at Kraepelin’s old stomping grounds, the
Heidelberg University psychiatric clinic. Beringer ran a programmed series of mescaline
experiments that ran for several years utilizing over sixty mostly male doctors or medical
students, and using doses of 200mg on up to even 600 mg. Beringer described the effects of
mescaline in detail in the 1927 “The Mescaline Intoxication” (Der Meskalinrausch) which
established the groundwork for the experimental psychosis.
1933-36 Per his own words and submitted C.V. to the Senate Hearing – Wertham was made
the assistant to the director of Bellevue Hospital; in charge of prison ward; in charge of
children’s psychiatric ward; in charge of alcoholic ward. That means that Lauretta was
working and learning under him when she was made a director of the children’s inpatient
ward at Bellevue in 1934. Under Wertham, Bender merrily began her brutal treatments of
children, starting with insulin shock therapy that she was particularly fond of doing to those
diagnosed as “childhood schizophrenia”, which today we call autism. Lauretta herself had to
repeat third-grade 3 times in her home town of Butte,Montana, perhaps lending clarity to the
source of her truly insane treatment of other slow children. They would administer massive
doses of insulin to induce a coma in the children, six days a week for one-two months
usually, but in some cases Wertham and Bender did much longer courses, years in fact.
Before or during the coma, seizures sometimes occurred. Children would toss, roll about,
moan, and twitch spasmodically, even vomit. Some of these children died from this
“therapy”. This is DEATH therapy, and just as the child was coming out of it, finding out he
isn’t dead, vulnerable, scared out of their minds, and desperate for any kindness, there
would be the twin Doctors of Death, Wertham and Bender, ready to deliver their “lessons”
they called psychotherapy. When Overholser and others led the way in shifting from insulin
and metrazol shock to ECT in the early 1940’s, Bender administered ECT to the children,
maintaining that it was safe and effective in “eliciting more appropriate behavior from
children.” By the mid-1950s, Bender estimated that more than 500 children at Bellevue had
received ECT, typically daily for a period of 20 days. When LSD, other hallucinogenics and
Thorazine came out, she used those too on her victims.
1935 – Leo Bartemeier’s masters – Ugo Cerletti was “called” – meaning by Pope Pius XI –
and was appointed to Chair of the Department of Mental and Neurological Diseases at the
University of Rome and director of its mental patient clinic. The University of Rome has
always been under the direct control of the Popes. Lucio Bini was Ugo’s assistant. Short
story – Ugo Cerletti was the Roman Catholic inventor of Electro Convulsive Therapy. Ugo
used electroshock to provoke epileptic fits in animals. Many of the animals died.
Schizophrenic epileptics seemed less schizophrenic after an epileptic fit. Cerletti thought
producing convulsions in humans by electro shock, might be useful as a treatment for
schizophrenia. (Later in time that idea was proven wrong.)
1935 – Morris Fishbein took over for Cramp as JAMA editor in 1935.
1935 – The Rees plan was well begun. In 1934 William Sargant was committed to a mental
hospital. Lord Moran encouraged Sargant to take up psychiatry, so in 1935, William Sargant
(another ghoulish monster psychiatrist) went to work at Maudsley Hospital, where he worked
along with psychiatrist John Rawlings Rees. Sargant used abreactive therapy in
conjunction with drugs and electroshock, just like John Rees was doing during World
War I.
1936-39- Wertham is director of the Mental Hygiene Clinic of Bellevue Hospital. (1954
Senate hearings p. 80) 1936 happens to be the exact same year that Dr. Sakel moved to
New York and promoted the use of insulin coma treatment in US psychiatric hospitals.
Wertham is listed in the encyclopedia as doing pioneering work combing insulin with
psychotherapy. It so happens that Wertham’s one-time student and junior psychiatrist Ewen
Cameron billed himself as the first psychiatrist in North America to use insulin coma
therapy on schizophrenic patients in March of 1936 – according to Cameron and Worcester
State Hospital in Massachusetts year-end report. Meanwhile, immediately upon becoming
superintendent of St. Elizabeths, Wertham’s tandem partner Dr. Overholser instituted insulin
shock therapy which promised “50 percent remissions”. (it was a lie, by 1941 the results
were so abysmal he had to stop). Perhaps a more graphic example of just what that
“pioneering” by Cameron, Wertham and Overholser was really about is in order. In each type
of shock therapy, the patient was induced into a state of shock/coma and then brought back
to consciousness. When slowly brought out of the insulin coma with glucose injections, they
said that “his or her personality would be temporarily “readjusted” (what a euphemism) and
Doctors would then discuss problems with the patient in an attempt to “banish his delusions”.
That’s what they called this good heart-to-heart psychotherapy. Remember what we learned
that Therapy and Research Division of the AMA did? It gave MONEY for: “ investigations
and laboratory research in the actions of drugs and pharmaceutical products.” Like insulin
shock therapy. So what Wertham and Bender were doing to these children (and adults, for
that matter) was AMA-backed and at this time the Director would have been Morris Fishbein
(whom L. Ron Hubbard likes to call “Fishcake”) This whole procedure (including using other
similar shock or coma-inducing procedures) has a nick name – DEATH “therapy” – otherwise
known as the core demonic belief of Catholicism. “The baptized one ‘dies’ to all sin and is
‘reborn’ in Christ. Aka artificially brought mentally to amentia (retardation). They would all do
this to soldiers returned from the war with “shell shock” who weren’t recovering fast enough
(meaning wanting to go kill some more)
1937 – Leo Bartemeier’s masters – It was that same man, Pope Pius XI, Pacelli’s (Pius
XII) mentor, who said that there is a Spiritual Battle for the minds of men (Pius XI) —for the
evil we must combat is at its origin primarily an evil of the spiritual order. From this
polluted source the monstrous emanations of the communistic system flow with satanic
logic.– Pope Pius XI DIVINI REDEMPTORIS (On Atheistic Communism) 19 March 1937
—Another way of saying “spiritual” is mental – in the sense of you are talking about the
unseen realm of Man. His thoughts, his heart, his mind, so to speak. What this Pope is
saying is that is what he wants the focus on. The MINDS of man. His DECISIONS. Which
also happens to be the realm of (and the reason for) propaganda in the first place. Jesuits
(and the top Catholic leaders) are ALL about messing with people’s minds. That’s their real
goal actually.—…[The Jesuit Society] it seeks to rival the Divinity in its knowledge of the
human heart. From the contemplation of this pious work, we will turn to the famous
Constitutions of the Society. The Institute of the Jesuits is contained in fifteen distinct works;
the book of the Constitutions being the groundwork of the system: strongly, deeply built; with
a knowledge of mental architecture unsurpassed, except in the Spiritual Exercises of the
same cunning Builder. Subsequent Rules, Decrees, Canons, &c., are stated to have
‘resulted from the spirit of the Institute, which they are intended to uphold and enforce. The
Novitiate written in 1846 by former ‘novice’ Jesuit Andrew Steinmetz
1938 April – Leo Bartemeier’s masters – It was Pius XI, with Pacelli right by his side, that
gave the world ECT as a “cure” for and a solidarity with using it on people labeled
“schizophrenic”. In April 1938, Ugo Cerletti first used ECT on a human patient, diagnosed as
schizophrenic. Ugo used a patient he had previously experimented on at Mombello Asylum –
his name was Enrico. Ferdinando Accornero was one of the students observing and he
provides an eyewitness account. That same year (with Pius XII’s approval) our man Leo
Bartemeier here, became the first Catholic training analyst (in that period analysis was
not in favor in many Catholic clerical circles, and Catholicism was not in particularly good
order with the analysts).
1939-52 — Wertham is Consulting psychiatrist, Triboro Hospital, New York City; 1939-1952
Director, Psychiatric Services and Mental Hygiene Clinic, Queens General Hospital. (1954
Senate hearings p. 80) Wertham had a fight with his boss at Bellevue and gets transferred to
Queens General Hospital Mental Hygiene Clinic. At first, Wertham appeared rather
demoralized and forlorn. He wrote to his Phipps Clinic mentor Dr. Meyer: “I am longing for a
position where I could use my gradually acquired facility for organizing, teaching and
research and clinical work…give up psychiatry altogether.” (Under the Strain of Color,
Mendes) Ah, but never fear. George White is about to show up literally almost right on top of
him, plus, he would soon hire and strike up a friendship with child psychiatrist Hilde L.
Mosse, who was a character unto herself. —A couple of years later, a 2015 NY Times article
indirectly spills the beans about what Wertham would have been doing with psychiatric
patients at Queens General. The article is talking about how in October 1941, the Times had
reported on the opening of several new buildings at Hillside Hospital in Queens (today called
Zucker Hillside Hospital). As was the wont in those days, hospitals that used insulin
treatments referred to themselves as having “pioneered” that and other shock treatments.
“The hospital has pioneered in the use of insulin and metrazol, and also in the electric
shock treatment, which has proved useful in shortening the average stay of patients,” the
article read.
1939 – George Hunter White right on top of Wertham’s location – George’s FBI file (p. 1)
details his addresses in New York starting in 1937 through 1941. One of his address is in
Queens, the one for 1939-40 that says 65th Avenue Forest Hills New York. — That’s
practically a hop, skip and a jump from where Wertham was. See Wikipedias list of hospitals
addresses for the hospitals Wertham was at—Notes: Shortly after the Hip Sing Tong bust in
December of 1937, George found himself promoted to the Federal Bureau of Narcotics (the
FBN) New York City office – a ‘plum’ job.Gee. You know, right where Wertham is.
1939 – Wertham’s papers show that he had two folders categorized under “Research files”
on the topic of marijuana starting in 1939 and going well into the 1970’s. Dr.
Fishbein/Harry Anslinger/George Hunter White/Truth Drug committee – I would surmise this
had to have been related to Harry Anslinger’s Federal Narcotics Bureau/Treasury
Department crusade to get revenue from marijuana by taxing it, starting in 1937. That was
NOT an innocent situation, see George Hunter White: The Early Years.—Morris Fishbein,
JAMA editor, was helping out Anslinger with this CONTROL OF DRUGS game. “The
problems of greatest menace in the United States seem to be the rise in the use of Indian
hemp (marihuana) with inadequate control laws, and the oversupply of narcotic drugs
available in the Far East threatens to inundate the western world.” (Dr. Fishbein’s JAMA
editorial of 23 January titled: Opium Traffic in the United States 1937 – as quoted in
Hearings on TAXATION OF MARIHUANA H.R. 6385) —Fishbein also specifically positions
marijuana as an equal menace to opium –-Please be aware that as is now medically
well-known, Marijuana helps with pain from cancer, with Glaucoma, and a number of other
things. That was being suppressed by Fishbein and Anslinger. —contrast that with the fact
that Fishbein approves of the medical use of marijuana in psychotherapy in his editorial, as
evidenced by his representative, Dr. Woodward at the hearings: I know of none. That use, by
the way, was recognized by John Stuart Mill in his work on psychology, where he referred to
the ability of Cannabis or Indian hemp to revive old memories, and psychoanalysis
depends on revivification of hidden memories.”George White’s boss Anslinger went
even further in this crusade he was tasked to do. He wrote an article for the American
Magazine in July of 1937. [marijuana is] …as dangerous as a coiled rattlesnake.How many
murders, suicides, robberies, criminal assaults, holdups, burglaries, and deeds of maniacal
insanity it causes each year, especially among the young, can be only conjectured. …No
one knows, when he places a marijuana cigarette to his lips, whether he will become a
philosopher, a joyous reveler in a musical heaven, a mad insensate, a calm philosopher, or a
murderer. … They were not told that addicts may often develop a delirious rage during which
they are temporarily and violently insane; that this insanity may take the form of a desire for
self-destruction or a persecution complex to be satisfied only by the commission of some
heinous crime.– Marijuana: Assassin of YouthThe American Magazine Volume 124, July
1937—I’m sure that you recognize the exact same grandstanding and even along the
exact same lines that Wertham did regarding comic books later. This connection
between Anslinger, George White, and Wertham and comics goes even further though. In
my George White article I document how George White spins this whole tale of capturing an
alleged Chinese Opium-trafficer who George portrayed right exactly on the same lines as the
comic image of Chinese pioneered in March of 1937 (Detective comics). George said his
imaginary bustee was a: “wrinkled, cadaverous Tong man with a drooping white mustache.”
My point being that these people USED comics to suit their agenda, whatever it was, and
changed towards them for the same reason. —What could George and Fredric be doing
together? Unclear. But what is clear, is that within a few years that Truth Drug committee is
going to get going, and Wertham is kind of an authority on mescaline and apparently also
marijuana.
1940 February – A graduate of the Queens University Faculty of Medicine in Kingston,

Ontario, Dr. Smith joined the A.M.A. staff after completing his residency, becoming the
organization’s director of therapy and research. After writing “The Drugs You Use,” (Revere,
1948,) a practical guide to the proper use of drugs, he was made editor of the organization’s
journal in 1949. (NY Times 1993 obituary) —Prior to being JAMA editor he was the
Secretary for the Council on Pharmacy and Chemistry American Medical Association.
(Science 20 Aug 1943) —He was also the Director of the Division of Therapy and
Research, appointed apparently in February 1940 just as World War II was getting going.
Convenient, considering things like the Truth Drug Committee were going to start up
“researching” in a little over two years later.
1940 April 2 — You probably don’t know that Oxygen pressures were also being
experimented with by the US Navy revealing that pressure at four atmospheres could be a
treatment for Schizophrenia because it mimicked the effects of insulin shock therapy (NY
Times 2 April 1940)
1940 June 18 – Dr. Rees gave his address entreating his fellow psychiatrists and
psychologists) to be a “fifth columnist” and infiltrate novels (which included comics) and
other sources of fiction read by Joe Average. What does one do to infiltrate? One pretends
to be supportive of something. Right exactly at this time – John Rawlings Rees and his
Tavistock Clinic boys are taking over psychiatry in the British Army in World War II. (The
Reckoning M. McClaughry; The British Way V. McClaughry) and on 18 June 1940 is when
John Rees gives an Address to the Annual Meeting of the National Council for Mental
Hygiene where he asks for everyone (like Wertham) to be “fifth columnists”. Let us all,
therefore, very secretly be “fifth columnists”[…]long termplanning …the right kind of
propaganda.” fifth column – a group of secret supporters of an enemy that engage in
espionage, sabotage, and other subversive activities within the borders of a nation. —Rees
also had said: we have done much to infiltrate…a number of professions. …the two most
difficult are law and medicine.
1940 October- Dr. Rees address published in Mental Health magazine, Vol. 1 No. 4.
1941 – Right on cue, just one year later, together with Reginald S. Lourie, M.D., Lauretta
Bender published an article in the American Journal of Orthopsychiatry XI titled “The Effect
of Comic Books on the Ideaology of Children” discussing the therapeutic effects of comics
on children. (reprinted in Alter Ego #87 & #88) and… Voila!
1941 June 28 – less than six months before Pearl Harbor, Roosevelt signed the Executive
Order creating the Office of Scientific Research and Development (OSRD), with
Vannevar Bush as Director, personally responsible to the traitorous President Roosevelt. As
Director of OSRD, Bush was given “final responsibility for the entire program of civilian
scientific research and development, not only in the fields of instrumentalities of warfare, but
also in all fields of military medicine.” The NDRC, itself transferred intact from the
Council of National Defense to the new OSRD…and a new Committee on Medical
Research (CMR) was established. —- Both Overholser and Harry Stack Sullivan were
known for their secretive human experiments they did in the name of “mental healing.
Overholser as Superintendent at Saint Elizabeths Hospital and Harry Stack Sullivan as the
leading psychiatrist at Chestnut Lodge (an extremely creepy place). They were hiding what
they were doing to people under this military “medical research” and “personnel
selection”.
1941 December – Report on the Office of Censorship (WWII) shows that Byron Price, a
newspaperman, was made the Director of Censorship in December 1941 under the newly
created Office of Censorship. On of their main target is comics, and there’s Loretta
Bender right in position. (see 1942)
1942 January – The Writers’ War Board was created January 1942 in New York City. The
President was Rex Stout. It was already secretly controlled by the British of course, but it
looked like it was independent. Stout was even one of the people that the BSC spy
organization used to help legitimize their front group called “Friends of Democracy”, he was
even made its President (NY Times article Nov. 1942) but Stout was also involved in
sponsoring the BSC’s founded in 1941 Fight for Freedom front group that had a membership
of practically the Who’s Who in intelligence. So, his Writers War Board was a completely
controlled INTELLIGENCE operation. The outer story was that the WWB was staffed by
“volunteers” committed to the creation of anti-fascist, pro-American culture, but in reality it
would soon receive both funding (pay) and direction from the OWI via Mr. Sherwood (you
can watch him dissemble about it and leave out the British intelligence connection to the
Senate in 1944 here) . Sherwood made sure that Stout’s writers would weave images and
stories in various comics and fanzines for civilians and servicemen, all designed to fuel a
hatred of “fascism”. Some obvious examples can be found here. An interesting side note is
that by 1943, Robert Rosen was shown as the Chairman of the War Writer’s Board or WWB.
(Variety 1943) I don’t know what that was about, but another Variety article showed just how
much power this Board actually wielded, including on Hollywood, uilizing a “five bombs”
rating for ignorance, indifference or shortsighedness against a film called “Mission to
Moscow”. Teachers in Illinois were even directed to instruct students not to watch the film.
1942 – Shortly after her article appeared, in 1942 DC comics hired Dr. Bender to head their
Editorial Advisory Board. Well, that’s about perfect, right? Infiltration complete. For the next
10+ years, her name could be seen in virtually every DC comic. But, don’t forget the timing
here, because we’re right in the middle of World War II and what was the forerunner to the
OSS (itself predecessor to the CIA) the COI or Coordinator of Information was planned to be
split into two organizations. The Office of War Information, the OWI – which was led by a
totally British controlled Round Table man Elmer Davis handled all media propaganda, and
the OSS, the spy organization, also led by a totally British and Vatican controlled man –
William Donovan. Both of which were covertly controlled by the British Security
Coordination – a spy organization established to make sure American got in and stayed in
the war the British Round Table men wanted fought.
1942 – The C.V. that Wertham prepared for the 1954 Senate Hearings (p. 80) specifically
mentions: Psychiatric consultant to the Chief Censor of the United States Treasury
Department. That is NOT in his LOC papers listing. Odd, don’t you think? So that tells us
when Wertham would have been doing this AND that it was during WWII. This ties directly to
the War Writers Board and the Office of War Information (OWI) because in 1942 the
Advertising Research Foundation released a study that determined that the comics section
of the newspaper was the most read section of the paper by adults (excluding the
advertisements). A later study, performed by the Market Research Company of America
found that roughly half of the U.S. population (about 70 million Americans), read comic
books. (Tales from the Code Sergi 2012) Although the author I took the above from fails to
realize the connection of all this to the Writers War board, the outlet the OWI used to change
ALL comics content (and fanzines, and a whole lot else), it’s still a great history of the
surrounding events, so I am going to excerpt it directly – In response, the Bureau of
Intelligence (the predecessor to today’s FBI and successor to much of the CPI) created a
series of intelligence reports analyzing the content of comics at the time for use by the Office
of War Information (the OWI). The OWI did not like what they saw in these intelligence
reports. First, two thirds of the comics surveyed had nothing to do with the war effort and the
ones that did were not concerned with fighting or winning the war and the themes of the
books were inconsistent with the goals of the OWI. As Richard L. Graham states in his book,
Government Issue, Comics for the People, 1940s-2000s: Perhaps it was the comics’
portrayal of the enemy during this time that was most troubling to the OWI. The Bureau of
Intelligence observed that mainstream comic strips at the time had no trouble using
exaggerated physical stereotypes, depicting Nazis as Teutonic buffoons and the Japanese
as blood-drooling torturers. While these characterizations of the enemy as “the other”
provided an impetus for hatred and stirred strong emotional reactions at home and abroad,
they were often accompanied by portrayals o( the enemy as lazy and posing little threat. The
OWl felt these depictions were too simplistic and misleading and could lead to
overconfidence (although this didn’t necessarily stop the OWl from using similar depictions in
its own materials). As a result, the OWI created their own media division to distribute
comics that would promote its own messages about civilian sacrifice and the importance of
the war effort. This division also assisted other agencies to get their messages out. These
organizations included: the Department of the Treasury, the Federal Security Agency, and
the branches of the United States Military. Government comics were re-born.—Interesting,
eh? You might also want to peruse this article, it gives some great historic examples about
how wartime censorship actually continued after WWII, covertly. It was called by President
Eisenhower “News Management”. —Overall, I think I’m beginning to see another reason for
keeping Wertham’s files “locked” unil 2010. (Tilley, Seducing the Innocent 2012)
1942 April — Wertham joined the WWII effort in what was called the Fourth Registration,
often called the “Old Man’s Draft,” because it registered men who were 45 to 64 years old at
the time. The men had to fill out an extensive questionnaire allegedly just to collect
information on the industrial capacity and skills of these older men, not to draft them. And
what was one of Wertham’s skills from 1932? Working with personality-changing,
psychosis inducing drugs like mescaline. Twisting thought. —Overholser was “consultant” to
the Office of Scientific Research and Development, the OSRD, where he would head up the
truth drug committee that was coordinated under Chadwell’s Division 19 together with the
OSS (precursor to the CIA) psychological assessment unit. At the same time, Overholser
was also CHAIRMAN of the National Research Council’s Committee on Neuropsychiatry
which worked to secure military status for civilian occupational therapists. He chaired the first
meeting, the Conference on Occupational Therapy on 15 May 1942, barely 2 weeks after
Fredric’s draft questionnaire had been submitted. (Army WWII Medical history) —I think
it’s a good possibility that Fredric helped out the OSS Truth Drug Committee in some way,
and perhaps even with the Manhattan Project testing of the drug chosen in the end, a variant
of marijuana. But what did they try first? Mescaline. And only six months after Wertham
had done his draft documents.——And another reason for keeping Wertham’s files
“locked” unil 2010. (Tilley, Seducing the Innocent 2012) I don’t blame the Library of
Congress for that, they had to have been ordered to keep these files unavailable.
1942 – June OWI created. The OWI would take a keen interest in comics and fanzines
because they offered a cover (intelligence cover) means of spreading propaganda to a
HUGE audience. Nearly half of all U.S. servicemen were regular comic and fanzine readers.
Comics were also uncensored, so propagandists could use levels of violence, racism, and
sexuality to create totally racist propaganda against the “enemies” in WWII. And because its
comics, hey, “we” (the U.S. government) don’t look like we did it. Perfect deniability.
1942 October – At the request of the Psychological Warfare Branch of N.I.S, Division 19, of
the NDRC (which now came under the OSRD) a committee was “activated” to investigate
the feasibility of using drugs in the interrogation of Prisoners of War, that was just the
“acceptable” shore story. Responsibility for the facilitation of the Committee’s efforts was
transferred from N.I.S. to the Office of Research and Development of the OSS on January 1,
1943. —This was the truth drug committee headed by Overholser.— In this post about
the activities about the British Security Coordination – I go into quite a bit of detail about this
Committee, tracking down details and photos of every single member of it. I highly suggest
you peruse it. But who else was “over” this, and quite secretly too, was Division 19. Division
19, formed in June 1940, was a highly secretive combined OSS and National Defense
Research Committee (OS-RDB) organization headed by the equally little known Dr. H.
Marshall Chadwell. The now newly re-named Division 19’s first project was the ‘special
weapons project’ which included obtaining and field testing drugs like LSD, concentrated
marijuana, etc., but it also included the “Mafia Plan” or Operation Underworld – both of which
were headed by Chadwell recruit and now OSS man George Hunter White. Why any of that
is relevant is because of the first end result of that infamous Truth Drug Committee –
testing on Manhattan Project personnel. (see 1943 September 25 entry of ACIM timeline)
1943 — Fifth Column – and right in the middle of WWII – Wertham’s c.v. as given to the
Senate in 1954 — 1943-1951 President of the Association for the Advancement of
Psychotherapy; co-editor of the American Journal of Psychotherapy. Why was this done right
in the middle of World War II? It was created to advance methods of psychotherapy among
members of the medical profession and to familiarize members with progress in the field.
JAMA August 1943 #122 p. 1267 Wertham Psychoanalysis and the scientific method— Why
the “medical” profession? Fifth column action, infiltrating the fields of medicine –
“Therapy” with Drugs is to be made the only real acceptable form of psychotherapy.
1944 – WWII – Leo Bartemeier became the president of the American Psychoanalytic
Association 1944 -1945 (Leo’s papers) Reminder: It was that same man, Pope Pius XI,
Pacelli’s (Pius XII) mentor, who said that there is a Spiritual Battle for the minds of men (Pius
XI) —for the evil we must combat is at its origin primarily an evil of the spiritual order.
From this polluted source the monstrous emanations of the communistic system flow with
satanic logic.– Pope Pius XI DIVINI REDEMPTORIS (On Atheistic Communism) 19 March
1937 —Another way of saying “spiritual” is mental – in the sense of you are talking about the
unseen realm of Man. His thoughts, his heart, his mind, so to speak. What this Pope is
saying is that is what he wants the focus on. The MINDS of man. His DECISIONS. Which
also happens to be the realm of (and the reason for) propaganda in the first place. Jesuits
(and the top Catholic leaders) are ALL about messing with people’s minds. That’s their real
goal actually.—…[The Jesuit Society] it seeks to rival the Divinity in its knowledge of the
human heart. …with a knowledge of mental architecture unsurpassed… The Novitiate
written in 1846 by former ‘novice’ Jesuit Andrew Steinmetz
1944 February and November — Thorvald Solberg was working on the Manhattan project
with Leslie Groves, joining the Tolman Committee in November 1944. Tolman – as in
Richard C. Tolman. “…in February 1944, he learned something of Abelson’s work on thermal
diffusion at Philadelphia. Of all the officers in the bureau at that time, Solberg probably was
the only one who had been exposed to any details about the Manhattan project. Mills
and Solberg joined the Tolman committee early in November 1944 for a series of
interviews with scientists and engineers from all parts of the Manhattan project. (Nuclear
Navy 1946-1962 Richard G. Hewlett and Francis Duncan; archived here.) Solberg was
appointed as a deputy member by Major General Leslie R. Groves himself. To do what?
Admiral Solberg had been a deputy member of the “Tolman Committee”, appointed by Major
General Leslie R. Groves in the fall of 1944, almost a year before the “Trinity Test” of the
atomic bomb at Alamogordo, New Mexico, to investigate further technical developments in
atomic energy for both civilian and military purposes. This committee, under the
chairmanship of Mr. R. C. Tolman, had studied many suggestions from personnel connected
with the atomic energy projects concerning “the use of nuclear energy for power and the
use of radioactive by-products for scientific, medical, and industrial purposes.” (An
Administrative History of the Bureau of Ships during World War II, Volume IV.)
1944 – Byron Price’s Office of Censorship had the FBI investigate John W. Campbell’s
Astounding Science-Fiction magazine because of the story Deadline by Cleve Cartmill, that
it had in its March issue. Why? Because it had a detailed description of an atomic bomb
(Berger) and they were worried that the then top secret Manhattan Project had a “leak”.
1945 April 14 – I think it bears mentioning that given Wertham’s involvement with the Office
of Censorship during WWII, I think that he became big-headed about the power he could
wield through it as “consultant”. In fact, one of the targets during the War was one of
Wertham’s later favorite targets to villify – Superman. But, it’s what it was censored on (a
connection the author fails to note), it was about atom-smashing aka the highly top secret
Manhattan Project was in a comic! Even fiction was censored. A typical incident occurred on
April 14, 1945, when the “Superman” comic strip published in most daily newspapers
showed the Man of Steel in a university physics lab, where an evil professor told him, “The
strange object before you is the cyclotron-popularly known as an ‘atom smasher.’ Are you
still prepared to face this test, Mr. Superman?” When the Man of Steel accepted the
professor’s challenge, the assembled guests shouted in horror, “No, Superman, wait! Even
you can’t do it!” (“Superman,” Washington Post, April 14, 1945, B7) The Office of Censorship
complained to the syndicate that distributed the comic strip, and the Superman plot was
promptly rewritten to eliminate any future reference to atom smashing.
1945 April 21 – WWII – a commission of American “experts” arrived to Europe to study the
reasons for the large number of psychiatric casualties turning up in the various area
commands. Bartemeier was elected head of the commission, which included Karl
Menninger, Lawrence Kubie, John Romano and John Whitehorn. (Leo’s papers) The
commission had intended to proceed in pairs or individually to different active fronts but the
collapse of German resistance mitigated against such a plan. Instead, they basically hung
out with the British neuropsychiatrists at the 130th General Hospital. They would have
worked very closely with John Rawlings Rees, Eric Trist, and others of the British
Tavistock group. For some reason, in their after report they made a big deal of what, to me,
was their successful misleading of patients that they saw. Misleading them as to that
because they were civilians, they were no danger to them. That’s about the biggest lie you
could possibly imagine when it comes to these guys, and what they gloated about is the
infiltration aspect they got away with – my assessment of what they’re saying. See for
yourself – Being civilians facilitated the obtaining of information from some patients. It also
enabled us to identify ourselves very readily with either privates or officers . . . because we
were not, in fact, in any one of these positions ourselves . . . We were not under any
compulsion or obligation to find ways of getting men back to duty. It was our function only to
study the conditions without the necessity of serving any utilitarian purpose by which Army
doctors are always bound and constrained. (Office of Medical History; CHAPTER IV:
European Theater of Operations) The four men – Karl Menninger, being the brother of
William Menninger and the lovely man (extreme sarcasm) who instructed in 1942 about
Child Sexual Abuse Being Good For Their Mental Health.—John Romano – also Jesuit
trained (at Marquette) was one of the founding members of the Group for the Advancement
of Psychiatry, later part of its Committee on Medical Education together with Karl Menninger
and others. (GAP Report #8 April 1949) If you can believe the hypocrisy, this guy actually
wrote an article on medical ethics not long before he died. In 1945, Romano was offered and
accepted the Chair of Psychiatry at the University of Rochester Medical School (established
1920) until 1971; he was a founding member of the National Institute of Mental
Health—John Whitehorn, having just gotten done helping out Dr. Overholser with the Truth
Drug Committee 1942-44 (later moving on to being part of the board of the CIA front group
for MKULTRA experiments, the Society for the Investigation of Human Ecology in 1957;
Marks, Manchurian Candidate)—Lawrence Kubie, also having just gotten done helping out
Dr. Overholser with the Truth Drug Committee 1942-44 (he also shows up mixed up with
Cybernetics in 1953).“On October 31, 1942, at the request or the Psychological Warfare
Branch of N.I.S., the National Research Council activated a committee to investigate the
feasibility of using drugs in the interrogation of Prisoners of War. Responsibility for the
facilitation of the Committee’s efforts was transferred from N.I.S. to the Office of Research
and Development of the OSS, the precursor to the CIA, on 1 January 1943. The original
committee consisted of Dr. Winfred Overholser (chairman), Prof. of Psychiatry at
George Wash. U. and Director of St. Elizabeth’s Hospital, Wash., D.C.;Dr. John Clare
Whitehorn, Prof. of Psychiatry at Johns Hopkins;Dr. Edward A. Strecker, [name misspelled
as Stricker] Prof. of Psychiat. at U. Pa.;Dr. Lawrence S. Kubie, Assoc. in Neurol. at the
Nurological Institute N.Y.C.(McClaughry, V., British Security Coordination Compendium II:
The Party Boys; Aug. 2014) Look who else was later added to the committee – Karl
Menninger’s brother William. Those Menningers, they sure get around. Almost as much as
Overholser. —Col. R.D. Halloran of the Surgeon General’s Office, Director of and
implemented the new Neuropsychiatry Division in August 1942. Dr. Winfred Overholser
presented a bronze plaque in memory of him at the Walter Reed Army Medical Center, in
1954, crediting Colonel Halloran with establishing the groundwork for the Army’s present-day
psychiatric program. He died at his desk November 10 1943, William C. Menninger
replaced him. Mentioned in connection with “shell shock” and Fear studies in Popular
Science, August 1943.(click to enlarge) —Important Note – it just so happens that the
Tavistock boys, right at the time of the Truth Drug committee shifting under the OSS, were
there in the U.S. doing “tours” of American Hospitals. Note that particularly John Rees, and
Dr. Hargreaves were the poster-boys for these happy (I’m being sarcastic) little gatherings.
—-What were these “psychiatric casualties” Bartemeier is the pied piper leading them all to
examine? You can actually see it starting to be advertised in that Popular Mechanic
magazine above, but it was just exactly as as what happened in WWI – People that didn’t
want to kill for them any more. Can’t have that, right? (these people are cowards, they
never fight their own wars directly and are very vindictive against people won’t fight for
them). Only this time, instead of calling it shell shock, or battle neurosis – know what
Bartemeier and friends would call it now? Combat Exhaustion. —Just exactly how did
they end up on this mission? Well, they kind of elected themselves, in a manner of
speaking. Two of those four men (besides Bartemeier) were on the Committee on
Neuropsychiatry of the National Research Council – formed in October 1940. Guess who
headed it? Dr. Overholser. Yep. That’s right, That gives us our Overholser tie-in to the AMA
through Bartemeier. The other members were Drs. Franklin G. Ebaugh, Foster Kennedy,
Adolf Meyer, Tracy Putnam and Harry Steckel (who was also on the Truth Drug committee)
John Whitehorn and I believe Romano as well. However, by the time this little mission was
formed in 1945, Overholser’s committee was actually under the new OSRD. see 1941 June
28 entry.
1945 August 15 – That same article points out something very important, that the Office of
Censorship was CLOSED on, the day after the Japanese surrender after having nuclear
bombs dropped on their heads. (verified in Report on Office of Censorship p. 17,18) Thus,
Wertham’s consultancy also ended.
1945 September 2 — World War II officially ends
1945 – Classifying documents. Scientists involved with the [Manhattan] project, nonetheless,
advocated for more openness and freedom of research, and project contractors pushed for
the Army to declassify reports relating to their wartime work. As a result, Groves in early
November 1945 asked Richard C. Tolman, a Caltech chemist and scientific adviser to
Groves, to draft a declassification policy. Tolman assembled a committee composed of
Robert Bacher, Ernest O. Lawrence, J. Robert Oppenheimer, Frank Spedding, Harold Urey,
and John Ruhoff. (Smyth and Tolman Committee Reports) What was one of the major
results? Something us researchers still have to deal with even now. CLASSIFIED redacted
documents. In its report, the Tolman Committee concluded that “in the interest of national
welfare it might seem that nearly all information should be released at once.” But national
welfare had to be considered in light of national security. Still, “it is not the conviction of the
[Tolman] Committee that the concealment of scientific information can in any long term
contribute to the national security of the United States.” […] Thus, the Tolman Committee
concluded that secrecy could be justified for reasons of national security and then only
if “there is a likelihood of war within the next five or ten years.” Applying this general
philosophy to the question of secrecy in medical research, it recommended that “all reports
on medical research and all health studies” be immediately declassified except for those
reports that contained information independently classified in the interest of short-term
national security. While the Tolman Committee report generally advocated openness, it also
set the precedent for keeping declassification guides secret. (Smyth and Tolman
Committee Reports) OK, so let me get this straight. Documents from CHATTER, BLUEBIRD
etc. etc are still redacted and it’s what…70 years later? So, by these rules, apparently every
decade for the last 70 years someone used the excuse to not declassify them fully because
WAR was expected within “the next five or ten years”. Ergo, apparently WAR is still expected
(more like planned) even now?
1945/56 Winter – Literally as soon as WWII was over, per Senate testimony Fredric
Wertham started an investigation into comics in the winter of 1945/46, helped by a
“group of associates”. (listen to him say that live at around 5:57) He said it was a “sober,
painstaking, laborious study.” (8:02 in the live testimony) Carol Tilley’s scholarly article kind
of shoots that all to hell and gone, because it turns out he literally just made things up in this
study of his.
1946 January 17, 22 and 24 – Operation Crossroads. The mission of Joint Task Force One
was publicly announced by its Commander on 24 January, when Vice Admiral Blandy told
the Senate Committee on Atomic Energy: “The mission of Joint Task Force One is primarily
to determine the effects of the atomic bomb upon naval vessels in order to gain
information of value to the national defense.” He also announced that the atomic bomb tests
had been assigned the code name Operation Crossroads. …He then instructed Admiral
Solberg to prepare an administrative order setting up a special section in the bureau to
handle Crossroads work. This order, dated 22 January, set up Code 180, the Crossroads
Section; and on the same day Admiral Solberg was designated as head of the section
and Captain Kniskern as his senior assistant. A number of officers took up duties in the
section immediately, and others were added as rapidly as they could be freed from current
duties. (An Administrative History of the Bureau of Ships during World War II, Volume IV.)
1946 – Office of Naval Research (ONR) established “to plan, foster and encourage scientific
research.” The Chief of Naval Research is the senior military officer in charge of scientific
research in the United States Navy. ONE of its divisions was Psychological research. All of
ONR’s scientific work is performed under its Research Group made up of seven operating
units- the Earth, Material, Physical, Mathematical, Biological, Psychological and Naval
Sciences Divisions. (November 1956 Navy magazine p.16 of PDF) Note: The above is
followed by rather overly innocent descriptions of each one. Under Biological and
Psychological we’ve got just a world of secret projects going on there.
1946 April 13 – It was Pius XII who initiated the covert intelligence operation against
America’s youth under the guise of “anti-communism”. By April 13, 1946, it was announced
– the Vatican had officially entered the American Student political fray. This change in
church policy was heralded by Father John Courtney Murray, a leading Jesuit and the
religion editor of the prominent Catholic journal America. “To wrest the initiative from
those who have for their goal the destruction of Christian civilization.” (Pius XII and
John Courtney Murray, “Operation University,” America, issue 75 April 13, 1946, 34-35;
You can read Operation University here.) — It was Pius XII that heralded the infiltration
of America’s universities for mind control purposes – 1946.—“What the Holy See wants
in confronting the Soviet threat is an ‘Operation University…the intellectual penetration of the
university milieu—the winning of the universities, professors and students, for the ideas that
underlie peace and Christian world order.” “Pius XII wants the Catholic international student
movement to be a strong ally in the mission upon which he has focused the eyes of the
universal church.”
1946 May – Bartemeier helped establish THE group for the “Advancement of Psychiatry”
(the Society for Biological Psychiatry was also formed this year in January). If you try to
look up what that Group is, you get vague statements like this: “GAP was founded in May
1946 by a group of young psychiatrists who had served in World War II.” But really, all 5 of
these men who Overholser had approved going to Europe, were right there in the beginning
together with William C. Menninger. ====William Menninger wrote: ” the founding group was
seeking a way in which American psychiatry could give more forceful leadership, both
medically and socially.” GAP’s later formulated way of doing this, or one way, was to
deliberately target and discuss “controversial” psycho-social issues, evident in the 1950
Committee on Social Issues’ Report “The Social Responsibility of Psychiatry, A Statement of
Orientation” published out of New York. THEY WANTED MORE EMPHASIS ON DRUGS.
That’s what that is really about. Here’s an example of a report coming out of New York. The
thing practically reads like a manifesto of what John Rawlings Rees and the British wanted
to see happen. BUT if we look earlier, we see that GAP’s very first report was by the
Committee on Therapy on the subject of “promiscuous and indiscriminate use of
electro-shock therapy.” (Menninger, Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10
#1, January 1948) Look whose name is on the Committee of Therapy – why, it’s George
Raines! He’s still listed on it in that January 1950 Report #8 —- Part of Sherman’s summary
document that we opened this Oliver Field section with verifies Omar Garrison’s quoting of a
letter from Theodore Wiprud to Austin E. Smith evincing George N. Raines supposed
attitude towards Hubbard and Dianetics.(Vol 4 of 18 p. 242 ) Notice that it says: “Captain
George N. Raines Navl Medical Center, Bethesda, Maryland knew both Winter and Hubbard
as “phonies.”.” And oh look! Who else is on that committee with George? Why, it’s Lawrence
Kubie of Leo Bertemeier’s special little WWII team, who also was on the original Truth
Drug committee with Overholser. And Daniel Blaine, the President of the APA, was also
part of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, on the same Committee on Therapy
that George N. Raines and Lawrence Kubie were on. See Menninger, Notices and Bulletins.
Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948 and January 1950 Report #8 —-Such a
small world. All right there in 1950, the same year that they all wanted to kidnap Hubbard
and his research to be just as out of view as George Raines and Charles Savage Project
CHATTER work.As you now know, Wikipedia’s description of the 1946 founders as
“psychiatrists who had served in WWII” is quite the blandly euphemistic way to describe who
some of these people were and who they hired and associated with. —-As another
example, take Gardner Murphy, the Director of Research at the Menninger Foundation. He
was chosen by Elmo Roper to be part of a secret “troika” – group of 3 – psychologists to
perform psychological warfare just before the COI became the OSS – the precursor to the
CIA. So that would have been in 1942 approximately during WWII. Before WWII (also
during and after) Gardner Murphy was very active in telepathy research for the ASPR
(American Society of Psychical Research) You can have a look at what that was all about in
the relevant section of my library article on William Dudley Pelley who was part of the
“spiritual” propaganda campaign the British were running back then. Gardner is also featured
in my Evil Twins #1 post about Ashtar, Galactic Federation, UFO-ology as Religion –
Scientology and Unification Church where Britisher Anthony Brooke was helping proselytize
Americans into believing that Reverend Moon was connected with alien intelligences from
Ashtar command. Yep, it’s really that kooky. (I suggest you read the whole thing) Here’s an
example telepathy experiment Gardner was involved with in 1937 –“Before leaving on a
search for a missing plane near the North Pole, arctic explorer and friend Sir Hubert Wilkins
agreed to help Sherman with an experiment in mind-to-mind communication. Each day at a
pre-arranged time, Wilkins attempted to send thoughts of what had transpired that day
to Sherman 3400 miles away in New York City. Sherman recorded his impressions and
immediately mailed the transcripts to Gardner Murphy, head of the parapsychology
department at Columbia university, who registered and filed them. When later compared
to a diary Wilkins had kept, Sherman’s impressions proved to be 70% accurate.” The full
story is told in the book Sherman and Wilkins co-authored, Thoughts Through Space
[Creative Age Press,1942]. – Harold Sherman chronology. Gardner was also involved with
essentially supporting all these weird spin-off organizations to help the CIA spread LSD
among American youth – a subversion operation not an “awakening” as so many dupes liked
to think it was. This was while he was working at the Menninger Foundation, which he
started working at in 1952, and as part of this “Group for the Advancement of
Psychiatry.”—-BIO – From 1952, he worked as director of research for the Menninger
Foundation in Topeka, Kansas. He was elected to the presidency of the American
Psychological Association in 1944. He subsequently served as the President of the British
Society for Psychical Research in 1949 (which he had joined in 1917), and was Director
of the Parapsychology Foundation in 1951. Again, as noted earlier, Karl Menninger, being
the brother of William Menninger and the lovely man (extreme sarcasm) who instructed
about Child Sexual Abuse Being Good For Their Mental Health – Proof
1946 – William Menninger and his good friend Leo Bartemeier go to work work to try and
take over the American Psychoanalytic Society (founded in 1911) and turn it more
“psychiatric” (which means DRUGS) going on about how psychiatry is the “parent” or senior
of the psychoanalysts — doing John Rees’s work with a vengeance, I see.—Leo had just
been the President of that same Society from 1944-45. (Leo’s papers)
1946 July 26 — The most destructive part of the blast was the cloud of radioactive water.
U.S. Army Photographic Signal Corps On July 26, 1946, the U.S. military tried a new type of
nuclear test. A joint Army/Navy task force had suspended a nuclear device, oddly named
Helen of Bikini, 90 feet below the surface of the water, in the middle of Bikini Atoll, one of the
isolated rings of coral and land that make up the Marshall Islands. Arrayed around the
21-kiloton bomb were dozens of target ships. When Helen of Bikini exploded, it created a
giant, underwater bubble of hot gas. In seconds, the bubble hit the seafloor, where it blasted
a crater 30 feet deep and at least 1,800 feet wide. At the same time, the surface of lagoon
erupted into a giant column of water, two million tons of it, which shot more than 5,000
feet into the air, over an area a half-mile wide. In the seconds after the blast hit the
surface, a cloud of radioactive condensation unfurled across the lagoon, hiding the column
of water shooting upwards. At the top, a mushroom cloud of gas bloomed against the sky.
That first underwater test, the Baker event, instilled new awe for the power of the bomb. The
Navy had believed that many of the target ships could survive the blast, be decontaminated,
and sail out of the lagoon. But within two weeks, Navy leaders had to admit that the ships
were so soaked in radiation that they couldn’t be saved, and the Marshall Islands became a
graveyard for irradiated vessels. After that, even in the years that the United States and the
Soviet Union regularly tested nuclear bombs, only a few were ever underwater. (Atlas
Obscura article from 2016) -The “Navy” actually being Thorvald Solberg.
1946 October—Bartemeier’s commission men submitted a paper in October 1946: Combat

Exhaustion to the Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease. (pps.104, 358–389; 489–525.
https://doi.org/10.1097/00005053-194610000-00002)
1947 – the OSS became the CIA, and the newly named intelligence agency was authorized
for propaganda including psychological operations for which it immediately began recruiting
psychologists to spread the belief, promoted by the CIA within America’s borders, that
–…the Communist regimes in the Soviet Union and China had invented secret, sophisticated
mind control techniques, although the agency knew the contention was unfounded
(McCoy, 2006, p.34). They used this false idea both to gain funding from Congress but also
to generate approval within the DOD for human experimentation projects along these very
lines.
1947 – The office of Naval Research had founded its “Psychological Sciences” research
program becoming the first extramural research program of the DOD – the Department of
Defense. “Within two years of its initiation of the ONR research program, the Navy doled out
117 contracts at 58 universities under its newly founded Psychological Sciences research
program (Page, 1954). In the first five years of the post-war period, the ONR provided
$2million per year, or $16 million in estimated equivalent [21 million in 2019 dollars],
establishing this office as the greatest single source of funding for psychological
research until the founding of the National Science Foundation (NSF) in 1950 (Darley,
1957).” (2008 paper by psychologist Frank Summers. (short title) Making Sense of the APA
– some of the text can be found here)—- “During its tenth year, the Psychological Sciences
Division of ONR was supporting 143 separate contracts for research in various fields of
psychology.” Summary tables are presented of financial support of contract research
projects by the Psychological Sciences Division, ONR from 1946 through 1956, areas
of contract support by Psychological Sciences Division 1946-1956 and the geographic
distribution of 143 ONR contracts active in the year 1956. Psychology’s place within ONR,
the substantive work of the branches of the Psychological Sciences Division (Physiological
Psychology Branch, Personnel and Training Branch, Group Psychology Branch, Engineering
Psychology Branch, and the Manpower Branch), ONR’s impact on psychology (in terms of
publications, conferences and symposia, and the training of graduate students), the
evolution of psychology in a government agency, and perspectives of the present and the
future are presented. (John G. Darley, “Psychology and the Office of Naval Research: A
Decade of Development,” American Psychologist 12 (June 1957):305. That also included
SECRET projects. End notes (17 and 18) from this publication were very helpful in
establishing WHEN and HOW SECRET it was that the Office of Naval Research was
funding such projects, and that people were not permitted to say what they were really
doing. John G. Darley, “Psychology and the Office of Naval Research: A Decade of
Development,” American Psychologist 12 (June 1957):305. Psychologists, such as McGill
University’s Donald Hebb, whose work on sensory deprivation for the Canadian Defense
Research Board emerged directly out of war-inspired concerns with “brainwashing” were not
permitted to say as much in their published studies. See Gilgen, American Psychology Since
World War II, 122.
procedure. Charles Savage papers show that he was a “Research Psychiatrist” at the Naval
Medical Research Institute and the National Naval Medical Center, both Bethesda,
Maryland.—John Marks details (archived here) – “a highly classified Navy program called
people to reveal their innermost secrets.” Project CHATTER – Biological and
Psychological Weapons ===Notice those two are two of the ONR’s research divisions
===Senate Report: ‘…the program focused on the identification and testing of such drugs for
use in interrogations and in the recruitment of agents. The research included laboratory
experiments on animals and human subjects involving Anabasis aphylla [anabasine],
scopolamine, and mescaline in order to determine their speech-inducing qualities.”
===Essentially a continuation of the OSS truth drug committee, which was also mixed up
with the Manhattan project.===“After the war, the CIA and the military picked up where the
OSS had left off in the secret search for a truth serum. The navy took the lead when it
initiated Project CHATTER in 1947, the same year the CIA was formed. Described as an
“offensive” program, CHATTER was supposed to devise means of obtaining information
from people independent of their volition but without physical duress. Toward this end
Dr. Charles Savage conducted experiments with mescaline (a semi-synthetic extract of the
peyote cactus that produces hallucinations similar to those caused by LSD) at the Naval
Medical Research Institute in Bethesda, Maryland. But these studies, which involved animal
as well as human subjects, did not yield an effective truth serum, and CHATTER was
terminated in 1953. The navy became interested in mescaline as an interrogation agent
when American investigators learned of mind control experiments carried out by Nazi
doctors at the Dachau concentration camp during World War II. After administering the
hallucinogen to thirty prisoners, the Nazis concluded that it was “impossible to impose
one’s will on another person as in hypnosis even when the strongest dose of mescaline
had been given.” But the drug still afforded certain advantages to SS interrogators, who
were consistently able to draw “even the most intimate secrets from the (subject] when
questions were cleverly put.” Not surprisingly, “sentiments of hatred and revenge were
exposed in every case.”” Acid dreams. p. 15 of the book PDF)===Charles Savage’s abstract
notes that LSD had “no specific therapeutic advantage in depression” but that the
“hallucinations may prove of value in psychotherapy.” and on p. 14 that “LSD affords
suggestion.” (a report titled: Lysergic Acid Diethyl Amide (LSD-25): A Clinical-Psychological
Study by LT Charles Savage, Medical Corps, Us, Navy dated September 9, 1951. It starts
on p. 5 of the PDF.) See Hubbard’s research 1948 entry.
1947 – Leo Bartemeier gave a talk? or was quoted in a talk at the Institute of Living – the
same place that A Course in Miracles William Thetford would soon start working. It was one
of the places where the Catholic Church hid pedophile rapist priests. (see ACIM timeline)
14 November 1947 — Hubbard submitted a letter of resignation from the Naval Reserve
18 December 1947 — Secretary of Navy directs Chief of Naval Personnel to respond and
hold Hubbard’s request in abeyance until he has time to think about it. Pay particular
attention to the Secretary Navy/Chief of Naval Personnel response point 1: showing how
Hubbard was really viewed by the Secretary of the Navy: “Your resignation from the Naval
Reserve, in which you have served so honorably, has been received with regret.”
Critics of Hubbard ought to take note of that one, because that’s the truth about Hubbard’s
war history. Veering away from that truth just to suit other valid criticisms is disingenuous and
should not be tolerated or supported. Now pay particular attention to these: point 3: “In the
planned peacetime Naval Reserve you will not be called to active duty except at your own
request or except in time of national emergency or war…” and 4: “…will not be obligated
for training, either in weekly classes…” and 5 reminds Hubbard that if he does this it would
“deprive you from any further benefits under the jurisdiction of the Navy Department.” Point
6: “The Navy does not wish to keep you in the Naval Reserve if you sincerely desire to
resign.” and the final point says Hubbard’s request will be held in abeyance until an answer
back from Hubbard is received.
19 February 1948 — Hubbard withdraws his resignation but I have found no indication in
his file that it was ever received or acknowledged either by Secretary of the Navy or the
via of the Chief of Naval Personnel. If there was a letter granting him permission, as
Hubbard says in this lecture, it is not in his file. Hubbard description of this time period: “A
very amusing story connected with that attempt to seize Dianetics, a very amusing story
from my standpoint anyway. Months and months and months before I had decided that the
Navy and I had come to a crossroads and I had requested permission from the secretary of
the Navy to resign my commission – my commission had been hanging fire since the end of
World War II – and he had granted permission. Now, that’s the lengthiest amount of time
consumed, trying to get a letter into a government office and get an answer to it. See, that’s
pretty long.” (How We Have Addressed the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957)
February 1948 – Austin E. Smith was made assistant editor of JAMA by Dr. Morris
Fishbein.
1948 – Oliver Field starts working at the AMA Bureau of Investigation (AMABI); (archives
University of Notre Dame (Vol. 34 No. 2 March-April 1956; p. 57) — Oliver Field definition of
“quackery” – “A doctor is a quack when he claims to be able to cure obviously incurable
diseases, and when he uses discredited or unestablished methods of treatment and makes
great claims for them.” (“Crackdown on Quackery” – Life Magazine “Experts Sound Off on
Menace”November 1, 1963)
1948 March 19 – Wertham’s public attacks on comic books began with an article in a
publication he was the co-editor of, the American Journal of Psychotherapy Vol II No. 3
1948 pp. 472-490 – Psychopathology of comic books March 19, 1948 – which he had
presented at a symposium held by the Assocation for the Advancement of Psychotherapy
(which he was President of). He explained his belief that comic book readers were sexually
aggressive and that this led to them committing crimes. Wertham’s remarks in extended form
then appeared in the Saturday Review of Literature, March 29, 1948, as well as
simultaneously in Collier’s Magazine in a piece called “Horror in the Nursery” —In that same
Journal of Psychotherapy issue, Paula Elkisch Ph.D on February 2, 1948 wrote The Child’s
Conflict about Comic Books, about how Wertham had asked her to join the
“Psychopathology of Comic Books.” —Another thing that most historians seem to have
overlooked is the highly CATHOLIC involvement with Wertham and censoring comics.
This article details that starting on p. 26. —Gabriel Mendes said: “The impact of Wertham’s
perceived unprofessional behavior—his duplicity, “aggressiveness,” and
self-deception—is crucial for understanding the path he followed…” Every good controlled
opposition* needs an opponent, someone to demonize/champion right? Enter Fredric
Wertham. *Controlled Opposition definition – a strategy in which an individual,
organization, or movement is covertly controlled or influenced by a 3rd party and the
controlled entity’s true purpose is something other than its publicly stated purpose. The
controlled entity serves a role of mass deception, surveillance or political/social
manipulation. The controlled party is portrayed as being in opposition to the interests of the
controlling party.
1948 – 1950 — (L. Ron Hubbard, Research and Discovery Series Volume 9 (re-released
later and made part of #10) Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics
and Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952.) This engram was just a moment of
unconsciousness. Its existence was learned from soldiers who had been treated by
psychiatrists. And these soldiers would often go into a base hospital, would be given
drugs, and under drugs would be returned back to the moment of battle when they were
injured. And the psychiatrist would go through it like this: he would say, “Go to the moment
when you’re just charging the enemy. Now what are you thinking about? All right. Now —
yeah, the bullet hit you there. Well, we’ll just skip this next passage now, and we’ll pick it up
when you wake up. Now, where are you waking up from this wound?” What happened when
he did that? That, by the way, is just fabulous that they could keep doing this with
narcosynthesis and never see this point. Here he is going into battle, there he goes
unconscious and here he wakes up in the base hospital. And what the psychiatrist had him
run was that assuming that all of this is just a blank period and it has nothing in it. Now,
the facts of the matter are that the mind never stops recording. And I was led into this by
finding out that a good percentage of the soldiers treated for battle neurosis by
narcosynthesis — a good percentage of those treated — went mad in a very short space
of time. They were made much worse; awful things happened to them after they had been
treated by narcosynthesis. Why? Was it the drug? I tested people. I shot them full of
sodium pentothal and I ran them through locks and nothing happened, which left this
only variable: the area of unconsciousness. So I began to explore areas of
unconsciousness. The reason they had never been recovered before is because late areas
of unconsciousness are tied down by earlier areas. —There’s also this showing that
Hubbard was doing this between 1948-1950. In July, 1949 I received a long letter from Mr.
Campbell, in which he told me of some investigations in which he thought I might be
interested. He told me that: “Here’s the sort of thing that happens: An amputee veteran, with
loss of one foot… is in a hopeless despondency condition – just can’t adjust. The
psychiatrist takes him back to the war experience with sodium pentothal, back to the
time the mortar shell got him. They take him through, to the period when he passed out, and
pick up again when he recovered consciousness in the aid station. Doesn’t seem to clear
him up. He still insists he’d be better off dead. Hubbard took him through, through the
shell burst, and through the period of unconsciousness. That’s when it happened.” (A
Doctor’s Report On Dianetics by Joseph A. Winter, M.D.) —THIS was the kind of
research Hubbard had done that interested the Office of Naval Research enough to try and
“kidnap” him, as Hubbard puts it. —Charles Savages 1951 report shows that this was of
interest to Navy secret projects like CHATTER, where he noted an interest in: valuable
insights into unconscious processes. — This interest in the very area Hubbard was
intensively researching also shows up in a later CIA document of 20 April 1950, right when
the CIA was added to the “BLUEBIRD” network. In the proposal on page 3 – “heightened
activity and interest in subconscious isolation techniques”. I’d say Hubbard was rather
perfectly on point with that.
1948-1950 – Dianetics – L. Ron Hubbard’s biggest mistake that led to a lot of trouble later.
—In his work talking to the “unconscious” or “reactive mind” to recover what happened
during periods of physical knock-out, Hubbard had literally tripped over that being, and had
success because however he did so, he somehow managed to treat it like a being with
respect and understanding and that being decided to cooperate with this novel approach.
Whether Hubbard knew it or not, that’s what happened. But Hubbard didn’t want to realize
that the “reactive mind” that he talked to in his sessions (and called File Clerk) wasn’t just
some thing, it was what I call one’s body partner, what the ancients called the soul in
the soul/spirit doctrine. Instead, he went off chasing the spirit ONLY and pretty much
always, if he even bothered to mention them, referred to the soul in highly derogatory
ways – beneath his notice. And yet that is who he was addressing in Dianetics. That is
who can literally change the entire structure of the body, should they choose to. Any
success he ever had in Dianetics was because of that being. It’s funny how long this has
been known, this Dual spirits doctrine, and equally funny just how much it is SUPPRESSED
from any real exploration or use. Hubbard was right on top of it, yet he missed it. Oh, he
knew there was another being there, alright, but within 2 years of Dianetics he had turned to
older propaganda which wants to have it be MULTIPLE beings, and Hubbard was calling
them, what was it…entities and completely misunderstanding the true state of things. It is
ONLY THAT BEING who could change the physical body states Hubbard had initial success
with in Dianetics. Veer away from that? You got trouble. Hubbard veered. —–From there,
things went from bad to worse, culminating in his OAHSPE-based “advanced levels” OT 3
and later versions of OT 5-7 called NED for OT’s. This was picked up and expanded later, in
the 1980’s, by Captain Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org – Erica and Max Hauri) and Alan Walter
(Knowledgeism). With Robertson eventually seeing entities in every speck of water and
food and yet dying of a brain tumor, and Walter “harnessing” entities as his personal spiritual
teammates and yet dying from gross obesity and complications of that. BOTH of them
completely ignored, degraded, and marginalized the body partner, Both were initially in awe
of the “world” going on beneath the surface yet just like Hubbard could not conceive of
the idea that one being could be so utterly impressive. It challenged THEIR egos, and rather
than face that and find out what was really going on around here, they flinched, ran away,
and decided that it couldn’t possibly be just one being. They both decided that its
FUNCTIONS were all different beings – if you can imagine the arrogant absurdity of such an
idea.—They were all duly infected with Catholic/British slavemaster disease and their
pet peeve – That being doesn’t like them (for good reason) doesn’t listen to them (also
for good reason) so therefore they must be “degraded” and should be gotten rid of. Big
mistake. But – Revenge is their watchword. “revenge all disobedience.” – IMMORTALE
DEI, Pope Leo XIII, November 1, 1885—-And they wonder why they just can’t seem to ever
quite get there, when it comes to mastering even their own bodies. Disobedient to them and
doing their own Reckoning on these people all this time, body partners remain unrepentant.
Good thing, I say. There would literally be no human race left if they weren’t.
1948 June 18 – National Security Council directive NSC 10/1 went into effect. Besides
establishing a purely advisory panel called the “10/2 Panel,” this is when some of the dirtier
activities were specifically mandated to the CIA. Three other categories of covert activity
were added to the psychological warfare mission: political warfare, economic warfare
and preventive “direct action”. It is very important that you understand that the last one,
direct action, is when support for FRONT organizations was mandated as well as support for
guerillas and sabotage and even ASSASSINATIONS.
June 1948 – […] in June, when the Navy appointed Solberg director of the Office of Naval
Research. The new assignment required Solberg to resign from the Military Liaison
Committee and to sever all his ties with the nuclear project. (Nuclear Navy 1946-1962
Richard G. Hewlett and Francis Duncan; archived here.) This Idaho newspaper article (p. 4
“Views of Others”) confirms that, but here’s a Navy mag called All Hands (p. 42, August
1948) also confirming that Thorvald had became Chief of the Office of Naval Research.
August 1948 – ONR holds “First Scientific Seminar for Reserve Officers” “[…] a regular
feature of the Naval Reserve program when the first scientific seminar for Reserve officers
was held by the Office of Naval Reserch in Washington, D.C. The initial group of 100
specially qualified and selected officers was placed on active duty for a two-week
period….Many of the officers attending the conferences are working as civilians on Navy
research projects in university and college laboratories.”” (Navy mag called All Hands (p.
42, August 1948) Put another way, they were FORCED to attend.
1948 on – Thorvald “Psychological Sciences” division requirements – “Psychological

Sciences Division programs are carried out under contracts awarded in response to
unsolicited proposals.They are evaluated on the scientific merit of the proposed
research, the facilities available for its conduct, the competence of the principal
investigator,and relevance to Navy needs.[…]The programs seek to involve innovative
civilian scientists in areas of research relevant to Navy and Marine Corps interests” (p. 7 of
this PDF: Psychological Sciences Division 1985 Programs)
5 December 1948 – Solberg doubles the navy research budget – “in support of basic
research in civilian laboratories.” (Pittsburgh Press – 5 December 1948).
January 1949 – Office of Scientific Intelligence (OSI) formed to coordinate scientific research
projects led in this field – meaning interrogation, drugs, hypnosis, etc. Harris Chadwell’s
Division 19, as part of the National Defense Research Committee’s Office of Scientific
Research and Development, was the precurser to the creation of The OSI was still actually
under the secretive Division 19 that Harris Marshall Chadwell headed. Division 19 was part
of the National Defense Research Committee’s Office of Scientific Research and
Development.
1949 – Leo Bartemeier became the President of the International Psychoanalytic

Association 1949-50 (Leo’s papers)
1949 – Also under Thorvald was the original Project BLUEBIRD which was actually an
army/navy concern before it became the CIA version. The original BLUEBIRD type efforts
were under the OSI. That would include the ONR efforts that began under Solberg in 1949
at Bethesda Naval hospital (where CHATTER also happened to be). “Reads one April 1951
Bluebird Project report: ‘The Navy’s research efforts in regards to Bluebird objectives had
actually begun at Bethesda Naval Hospital. ….Hardenburg, extensive experiments had
been conducted using both drugs and medical aids (polygraph machines, surgical
means, hypnotism).” (A Secret Order, H.p. Albarelli, Jr., pgs. 168-169) Initially code-named
Pelican, and then Operation Boomer (before being named Project Bluebird), this particular
program specifically aimed at ‘identifying and testing the effectiveness of suspected Soviet
Russians, or satellite countries, [sic] activity in the areas of physical, psychological,
mechanical and medical interrogation techniques.’ (A Terrible Mistake, H.P. Albarelli, Jr., pg.
202) These efforts were referred to euphemistically as a “method of unconventional warfare.”
(p. 21 Project Bluebird interrogation teams)
1949 – In the first round of Senate Hearings, Austin Smith appears (this one was about
having a National Health Plan in 1949) and testified about “medical research”. He makes it
quite clear in his testimony that he has other functions in the AMA. He was the Director of
the Division of Therapy and Research besides being the Secretary, for the Council on
Pharmacy and Chemistry – both for the AMA, appointed apparently in February 1940 just as
World War II was getting going. Convenient, considering things like the Truth Drug
Committee were going to start up “researching” in a little over two years later.
1949 March 2 — Wertham continued to work to PR-position comic books with
violence. For example, the Friday, March 2, 1949 issue announced that Werthams’s
symposium for that year would be “Psychopathology of Violence” and would be held on April
29. I’m sure he worked the evils of comic books into that too.
1949 April 13 – The same year that the OSI was formed, L Ron Hubbard was excited about
what he supposedly gained out of his experiences leading to the writing of Excalibur, so he
wrote to the American Psychiatric Association, the American Psychological Association, and
the Gerontological Society in Baltimore, saying that he “had treated” twenty patients until
they could remember events from before birth. He claimed to be working for free with
criminals, orphans, and a boy who was failing his classes, and he told the writer Robert A.
Heinlein—another important member of Campbell’s circle—that if he ever started charging
for his services, “the local psychiatrists, now my passionate pals, would leave me dead in
some back alley.” (Nevala-Lee; Dawn of Dianetics)
1949 May – Hubbard contacted his Astounding editor Campbell about his research, and he
invited him to come out for a visit. “At the end of the month, Hubbard and his wife Sara
moved into a house near the offices of Astounding in Elizabeth, New Jersey. Campbell
wasn’t impressed by what he saw of Excalibur, calling it “more fiction than anything else,” but
he was struck by Hubbard’s appearance: “The sparkle was back, and it was genuine. His
conversation was lucid and thoroughly organized. He was thinking again. He told me he
had found the secret of the problem of the mind—but more important he had found
himself.”” (Nevala-Lee; Dawn of Dianetics) —That secret being the idea that the brain was
divided into two halves—the analytic and reactive minds. “The former was perfectly
rational, but it could be affected by memories, or “impediments,” implanted while a person
was unconscious. Such experiences were stored in the reactive mind, which took over in
times of stress—a patient who heard a doctor say “He’s better off dead” while under
anesthesia would take it as a literal command. Hubbard’s treatment, which didn’t have a
name yet, was designed to access these recollections, some of which dated from before
birth, and erase any damaging behavior patterns.” (Nevala-Lee; Dawn of Dianetics) —In a
letter to Winter, Hubbard named psychoanalysis, hypnosis, and Christian Science as his
major influences – that last one is not a good thing. It’s part of how he ends up all fucked up
on just WHO he is dealing with, with that “unconscious mind”, because Mary Baker Eddy
was very opposed to what people like George Pitzer were saying about that. (see early
1900’s entries) but Hubbard’s connections into the Christian Science types is gone into in
quite a bit of detail in my Hubbard and Sequoia University degree post.
1949 – Hubbard’s research at that point was Dianetics, and the discovery of the unconscious
part of traumatic events, the engram, and that how to recover that missing knowledge was to
“unburden” the engram in various ways that Hubbard had been experimenting with. Get what
recover that missing knowledge from the unconscious would mean, interest-wise to
Thorvald both offensively and defensively. “what defensive measures can be taken to
combat them. […] initiate a project to study the current information and intelligence
concerning these techniques and the possible defense against them.“ (PDF CIA
document 148374 1 Countermeasures against use of Interrogation aids and techniques 12
May 1949) Hubbard was researching exactly that too, although he didn’t develop “creative
processing” until 1952, I believe. “…you can use Creative Processing. The process of using
mock-ups will flip out a PDH without ever touching it or addressing it. You can knock a PDH
[pain-drug-hypnosis] to pieces within 15 minutes of processing. And it takes longer than that
to put one in. A PDH could be so – a pain-drug-hypnosis – they knock the fellow out, they
drug him – could be laid in with great rapidity… And you could get ahold of him and flip
the PDH out.” (Formative State of Scientology, Philadelphia Doctorate Course (PDC #20)
lecture of 6 December 1952) ====Second of all, as per the research requirements above,
get that Hubbard’s research was clearly considered to have merit, that Hubbard was
innovative and a competent investigator, and his work was relevant to Navy interests – for
Thorvald to have wanted him the way he did. The thing is, Hubbard actually DID do the
research that everybody was interested in anyway.
1949 May 12 – PDF CIA document 148374 1 Countermeasures against use of Interrogation
aids and techniques 12 May 1949 what defensive measures can be taken to combat them.
[…] initiate a project to study the current information and intelligence concerning these
techniques and the possible defense against them.
1949 August 1 – L. Ron Hubbard actually incorporated an organization in New Jersey in

1949. It was called The Institute of Advanced Therapy. There is repeated erroneous
information out there about this, mostly generated by British intelligence shill Russell Miller.
The correct information was gathered in 2012, and the corporate record shows that it was
incorporated on August 1, 1949 with an address given of 42 Aberdeen Rd., Elizabeth, New
Jersey – which was Hubbard’s house at the time. Hubbard specifically mentions having
formed this with Sara Northrup in a letter to the Attorney General May 14, 1951 (FBI File, p.
96). This shows his intention to form an organization around his engram research that far
back.
1949 October 1 – Dr Joseph A. Winter arrived in New Jersey to check out Hubbard’s theory.
(A Doctor’s Report on Dianetics: Theory and Therapy p.11)
1949 Early December – In discussions over what to call things, Dr. Winter suggested
Comanomes, from the Greek coma meaning unconsciousness and nomos meaning law.
Instead of referring to unconsciousness Winter decided it should be called allocoma –
another type of unconsciousness – “to point up the difference beween the usual and the
dianetic sense of the word.” (A Doctor’s Report On Dianetics: Theory and Therapy p. 11)
1949 December — issue of Astounding carried the first hint of Dianetics (p.80). This is the
exact same month Austin Smith replaced Fishbein as editor of JAMA.
1949 December – Austin E. Smith is now appointed full editor; replacing Dr. Morris
Fishbein)
1949 December 3 — Spaceship #6 14-year-old Robert Silverberg from Brooklyn is very

happily outing people’s real identities under pen names One of them was L. Ron Hubbard.
Note: all Spaceship magazines that I am examining were originally found here.
1949 December 9 — Letter from L. Ron Hubbard to John W. Campbell Jr., with it’s attached
bogus critique of Dianetics under the pen-name Irving Kutzman. Hubbard’s Attack points –
approached with extreme caution; Spirit of caution; — implying HARMFUL — upstart fad; —
the mind is too complex — The concept of the mind [note that it does not say “man”] as an
electronic computing machine, as espoused by Professor McCulloch, as written about by
Dr. Werner in another new idea, Cybernetics, is an interesting idea but of no real use.
Electronics and engineering cannot solve the problems of the human mind. That is very
solidly and unarguably the province of psychiatry. The one thing no critic EVER talked about
– The only new things in Dianetics are few. The discovery of the actual nature of
some use to psychiatry. That these memories can be recovered was demonstrated by Mr.
Hubbard. And chew on this in relation to Thorvald’s “kidnap” attempt of Hubbard four months
later – That these unconscious areas alone contain aberrative data is open to question in
view of the sexual basis of classical Freudian psychology. That this data is probably
aberrative, there is no real doubt. I have many times found them with narco-synthesis
and I am glad to discover a technique which will penetrate these hitherto questionable
blanks as that experience would assist in filling out a case.
1949 mid December – “A paper, using the terminology of Greek derivation, and giving a
brief resume of the principles and methodology of dianetic therapy, was prepared and
submited informally to one of the editors of the Journal of he American Medical
Association. The editor informed me that the paper as written did not contain sufficient
evidence of efficacy to be acceptable and was, moreover, better suited to one of the journals
which dealt with psychotherapy. A revision of this paper, together with some case histories
given me by Hubbard, was submitted to the American Journal of Psychiatry; it was refused,
again on the grounds of insufficient evidence.” (A Doctor’s Report on Dianetics: Theory and
Therapy p.18) —That editor that refused it? Could very well have been Austin E. Smith
who had literally just got on the job. The editor of the American Journal of Psychiatry at this
time was Clarence B. Farrar. He was the editor from 1931-1965. A staunch eugenicist and
supporter of sterilization, too boot, he believed mental illness was hereditary (he studied with
Kraepelin). “Along (sic) ninety-nine potential defectives whose propagation is prevented by
sterilization, possibly one potential genius will be lost.” —the APA journal’s guidelines for
publishing are here and I doubt seriously Winter met those guidelines. Keep in mind here
that Leo Bartemeier is the secretary for the American Psychiatric Association at this time
(1-5 May – Annual meeting of the American Psychiatric Association.) Leo’s former junior
from the WWII committee John C. Whitehorn is President elect. Whitehorn is tightly
connected to Overholser.
1950 January –GAP Report #8 shows that Leo Bartemeier was there right in the beginning,
starting out as chairman of the Committee on Psychiatry in Industry while he was in
Detroit. He was even made president of the Group during 1963-65. You can see him still
shilling John Rees infilration of Society aspect, for GAP, with his book Psychiatry and Public
Affairs. That same report #8 also shows that Daniel Blain, President of the American
Psychiatric Association during the initial attacks period against Hubbard, was on the Group’s
Committee on Therapy, and that Lawrence Kubie is now on it, Leo’s junior in that 1945
mission to Europe and former Overholser Truth Drug committee member.
1950 – Leo Bartemeiers’ master – It was Pius XII who had his minions then oversee, from
within, the CIA running of his covert intelligence operation. The CIA was working through
NSA (National Student Association) to carry out covert actions from 1950 on
especially – Over the next few years, the involvement of the NSA in CIA covert actions
would grow in many directions, far beyond what its progenitors might have imagined. NSA
covert operations would span five continents and reflect numerous government-defined
objectives. The CIA would recruit and induct dozens of American students into the
secret relationship, administer security oaths under the Espionage Act to ensure their
silence, and assign them CIA case officers to enforce their fidelity to a covert agenda.
(Paget, Patriotic Betrayal p. 94)
1950 February – the secret Division 19 head Harris Chadwell, fired Machle as Assistant
Director of the CIA’s OSI (Office of Scientific Intelligence). Chadwell replaced him with
Sheffield Edwards (Army Colonel) and put himself in the “Assistant Director OSI” position
where he became involved in the whole UFO debacle – among other things. You can read
more about why Machle got fired here in our CIA Declassified Documents library. —It was
Chadwell who would then oversee the start up Project BLUEBIRD in the CIA now, together
with Colonel James H. Drum, deputy chief of the Technical Services Staff, and Dr. Sidney
Gottlieb of later MKULTRA infamy. (A report on the OSI, 1972).
27 February 1950 – Meanwhile – the CIA institutes a more voluntary version of what
Thorvald did. Much more up Hubbard’s ally, I might add. A special unit was formed wherein
Naval Reserve personnel worked for the CIA in a civilian capacity. On 27 February
1950 CIA Director Hillenkoetter attended the formal activation of the CIA Naval Reserve
Unit.( Hillenkoetter Diary/Log p. 95) THAT SAME DAY p. 11 of Project Bluebird interrogation
teams shows they were having trouble finding what Chadwell wanted. It’s noted that they are
having trouble finding a psychiatrist on active duty, and the reasons why. Note Reason 3:
“His ethics might be such that he might not care to cooperate in certain more revolutionary
phases of our project.” Quite the euphemistic language there. Notes that they found a Navy
(crossed out) employee noted as “third agency” which is probably Charles Savage at the
Naval Medical Research Institute. (see CHATTER, Savage was there through 1953) This is
the document that ends with an odd characterization about “heightened activity and
interest in subconscious isolation techniques” – exactly right up L. Ron Hubbard’s ally
of research into engrams. Please note: it is on p. 21 where we see them call what they are
doing in BLUEBIRD a “method of unconventional warfare” which means it was
“approved” to do to people under National Security Council directive NSC 10/1 (see 1948)
====
You can tell that there was a power struggle going on between the Office of Scientific
Intelligence (OSI) – really the military factions under it – and the CIA’s Office of Security.
Basically over who gets the financing, the glory, who’s top dog kind of thing.
====
Approximately here is when Hubbard had actually published an article about Dianetics called
Terra Incognita:The Mind in The Explorers Journal – their first issue of 1950.
March 1950 March issue of Astounding carried another teaser about the upcoming artice by
Hubbard about dianetics, an intro by Campbell. (p. 4) titled: “Of Human Memory”
April 1950 April issue of Astounding of announces the 16,000 word article is ready and will
come out next month (p. 132) Campbell believes it will cause “one full-scale explosion
across the country.” It says the title will be Dianetics: An Introduction to a New Science.
Perhaps overlooked by most amidst the claims for Dianetics being laid out by Campbell is
this one “Evidence that insanity is contagious and IS NOT HEREDITARY.” which flies
straight into the teeth of eugenics psychiatrists like Dr. Wertham and Overholser. Important:
Just after this issue came out is when Thorvald Solberg tried to draft Hubbard into secret
projects in the Office of Naval Research.
5 April 1950 – For those following my ACIM timeline, you can now see proof of Chadwell and
his new choice Sheffield Edwards to head the OSI working with the CIA on their particular
form of BLUEBIRD in an April 5 1950 document (p. 1 Project Bluebird interrogation teams).
You can you see Edwards name visible in full on p. 8. This newer “BLUEBIRD” established a
behavioral control program within the CIA in close collaboration with the Office of Scientific
Intelligence. Edwards immediately proposed to form interrogation teams under the command
of the Office of Security. The proposal is on p. 2: “The purpose of this project is to provide for
the immediate establishment of interrogation teams…will utilize the polygraph, drugs, and
hypnotism to attain the greatest results in interrogation techniques. […] A team is to be
composed of three persons consisting of a doctor — psychiatrist, a polygraph —
hypnotist, and a technician. […]It is further proposed that the doctors- psychiatrists be set
up in an office in Washington in which serve as a cover for training, experimentation,
and indoctrination purposes in the use of drugs and hypnotism.”
Reprise – 1948 on – For Thorvald to personally approach L.Ron Hubbard to basically draft
him into doing research under his “Psychological Sciences” division, would mean that he felt
the following requirements were being met: “Psychological Sciences Division programs are
carried out under contracts awarded in response to unsolicited proposals.They are evaluated
on the scientific merit of the proposed research, the facilities available for its conduct,
the competence of the principal investigator,and relevance to Navy needs.[…]The
programs seek to involve innovative civilian scientists in areas of research relevant to
Navy and Marine Corps interests” (p. 7 of this PDF: Psychological Sciences Division 1985
Programs)
Reprise [edited] – 18 December 1947 – the view the Secretary of the Navy had of Hubbard.
Response point 1: “Your resignation from the Naval Reserve, in which you have served
so honorably, has been received with regret.”
=======
Important that you keep in mind here that by this time the Group for the Advancement of
Psychiaty, headed by William Menninger who was with Overholser in the Truth Drug
Committee, their Committee on Therapy had Project CHATTER/Bluebird man George
Raines. He’s still listed on it in that January 1950 Report #8 —-It had Lawrence Kubie of
Leo Bertemeier’s special little WWII team, who also was on the original Truth Drug
committee with Overholser. And Daniel Blaine President of the APA. See Menninger,
Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948 and January 1950
Report #8 —-All right there in 1950, the same year that they all wanted to kidnap Hubbard
and his research to be just as out of view as George Raines and Charles Savage Project
CHATTER work.
======
April 1950 – Hubbard at Bethesda/Overholser/Chestnut Lodge/William Alanson White school

– “I was teaching some of the psychiatrists here in Washington how to run engrams, or
trying to – the last effort we made, I think. We did make a sincere effort, by the way, to give
Dianetics to psychiatry, to the medical profession, to teach them how to use it,and so forth
and we found out they didn’t know what they were doing and we skipped it. That happened
clear back THEN. So don’t think its anything new when we claw up psychiatrists or
something of the sort. They started it. They kept asking me too many stupid questions in
lectures I was giving and I never forgave them.” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an
1950 April – Timing of the Thorvald and Hubbard incident – “…that immediately predated,
by one week, the opening of the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation of Elizabeth,
New Jersey“ A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956 — “…
BEFORE the incorporation papers of the HDRF were filed in 1950…And I went back up
to Elizabeth, New Jersey and the HDRF, the first research foundation, was formed, and
we went happily on our way just throwing it all over the place.” (How We Have Addressed
the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957) – “Well just about the time it [Dianetics
book] hit the stands, I was in Washington DC, this very same city. …After all, the book had
just been published, the first foundation was just forming, we were just kicking off, and
this guy wants to drag me into the Navy.” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an
17 April 1950 Monday — “It was Monday when he came to see me…They tried to
kidnap me…” ( A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956) —
“…it was on a Monday…” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31
December 1960 from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress) — The entrance – “… a
very high-ranking officer, a very very very high-ranking officer. You know brass, brass,
brass…scrambled eggs, you know, gilt on the cape edge, you know. Wow. Look at him,
blinding. (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960 from
the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress) — “this bunch of scrambled eggs comes walking
up the steps” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960
from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress)— What did Thorvald want from
Hubbard? “research in the field of the mind…They wanted ME to work on a project to make
men more suggestible. “ (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December
1956) — “to use what I knew of the mind to make men more suggestible.” (How We Have
Addressed the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957) – “How would you like to
work for the office of Naval Research?” I said, “Doing what?” “Oh, using what you know
about the mind, you know, Ha ha ha ha, ha ha ha ha, to make people more suggestible.” I
won’t announce this man’s rank or name, not in public.” (The Genus of Dianetics and
Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960 from the Anatomy of the Human Mind
Congress) — — What was the desired result wanted from Hubbard? “There would have
been no Dianetics, there would have been no Scientology, and there would have been no
publications on the subject anywhere had this succeeded.” KEPT SECRET is all. “They
didn’t want to prevent Dianetics. They didn’t want to prevent Scientology, the publications of
books. All they wanted to do was get a piece of research done which they in their tyrannical
fashion had decided was far more important than any other research that could be done.” (A
Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956) — “So, as security
measures increase and as security tightens across the world on scientific matters…” “No,
truly enough, in a world where science and scientific secrets are the stock in trade of
the militarist, one has to be alert to the fact that developed scientific information such as
that in Scientology continue to be free, continue to be available. It’s too large a temptation for
somebody to say, “Oh. hey! we can button this up. We’ve got it made here. We’ve got it
absolutely made. All we’ve got to do is take all this technology, brainwash everybody and put
up thought police towers in all the towns and it’s all set, we’ve got a government.” No, they
haven’t got a government as long as there are textbooks out there showing how fast you can
undo this same thing called brainwashing and thought police. It’s discouraging, you know, to
brainwash somebody and then have his friend walk into the nearest bookstore and buy a
manual of how to unbrainwash. It would seem sort of pointless, wouldn’t it?” (How We Have
Addressed the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957) — What did Thorvald
offer Hubbard? Money – “You’d probably feel better in there making seventy-five hundred
dollars a year.” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956) and he
could come as civilian “volunteer” – “You can volunteer….you’d better volunteer….”Well,” he
said, “you’ve decided to come into the service as a civilian?” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden
Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956) — “…he wanted me to go on as a civilian employee
in order to use what I knew of the mind to make men more suggestible.” (How We Have
Addressed the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957) — What did Thorvald
threaten Hubbard with? “you’re still in the reserves and we can call you back to active duty
on research in the field of the mind….”You’re still in the service,” this admiral said. …You can
volunteer. Of course, I can put you back on active duty at any time, so you’d better
volunteer.” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956) —
“threatened to call me to active duty…I will call you back to active duty because you still are
an officer of the United States Navy.” (How We Have Addressed the Problem of the Mind an
LRH lecture 4 July 1957) — “He said, “You’d better watch out, ha ha ha ha, you’d better
watch out, ha ha ha ha, because I can pull you back into service at your old rank.” Oh I said,
here we go.” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960
from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress) — Please note: These are all in direct
violation of Secretary of Navy/Chief of Naval Personnel letter to Hubbard (18 December
1947) point 3: “In the planned peacetime Naval Reserve you will not be called to active
duty except at your own request or except in time of national emergency or war…” and 4:
“…will not be obligated for training, either in weekly classes…” Point 6: “The Navy does not
wish to keep you in the Naval Reserveif you sincerely desire to resign.” — The stand off
between Hubbard and Thorvald – “And I smiled a feline smile. And I said, “No.” And he
smiled like something out of Faust [meaning like The Devil] and he said to me, “Well, all you
have to do is say ‘No’ and I will call you back to active duty because you still are an officer
of the United States Navy.” And with that purr he exited.”(How We Have Addressed the
Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957) — “But I said, “Well, sir,” there was an
underscore and sir was in italics, “Sir,” I said: “I’m not interested.” …he left feeling very
complacent” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960
from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress)
17 to 20 April – Hubbard works on resigning. How to Resign? –Activate un-answered

resignation request (see 1947) “Months and months and months before I had decided that
the Navy and I had come to a crossroads and I had requested permission from the secretary
of the Navy to resign my commission – my commission had been hanging fire since the end
of World War II – and he had granted permission. Now, that’s the lengthiest amount of time
consumed, trying to get a letter into a government office and get an answer to it. See, that’s
pretty long.” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956) Notes: 18
December 1947 Secretary of Navy/Chief of Naval Personnelheld Hubbard’s resignation
request in abeyance until he has time to think about it. — Pick somewhere little known or
used – “I was down to the Potomac River Naval Command, and I was through Bureau of
Naval Personnel.” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956) —
“I dashed down here and found out there was actually a naval command in this area – it’s
called the Potomac River Naval Command…it had an admiral in charge of it and
everything…So I went down here to the Washington Navy Yard, the Potomac River Naval
Command, and I got my [ORIGINAL – 1947 one] resignation accepted.”(How We Have
Addressed the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957) — “and I immediately got
on telephones. I had to find someplace in the United States, a naval district that was stupid
enough to let me resign, and I found them, god bless ’em, right down here at the end of
Pennsylvania Avenue, the Potomac River Naval Command,which was set up during the Civil
War to patrol the Confederate states and was still a full Naval district. That marvelous! It had
admirals and everything. I went in [coughing] I had a service record and I had my health
record and I had my resignation all written out and factually, up until 1947 I was unable to
walk without a cane, I couldn’t see, I was blind, I got processing about that time however and
ruined my naval record. I showed the old Admiral down there how I could never be of any
use again to the Navy, all the casualties, you know, and sheets of paper. “Oh”, he says, “You
poor fellow.” and I said: [coughing] Yes, that’s right, that’s right.” and he says: “You poor
fellow. Yes. I’ll accept your resignation.” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an
17 to 20 April – Somewhere in here might be when the “Members of the Physical Review
Council” actually met?
17 to 20 April – Somewhere in here is the actual date of the first back-channel approval of
Hubbard’s resignation. “They rushed it up, got a special assistant to the Secretary of the
Navy to OK it.” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960
from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress) ===Special Assistant to the Secretary of
the Navy – Captain Richard P. Glass. (The Official Congressional Directory for the 81st
Congress, 2D Session beginning January 3, 1950 (p. 381 at Hathitrust) Francis Patrick
Mathews was the Secretary of the Navy, and that’s whose name is on the official paperwork
approval in October 1950. Who’s Richard P. Glass? He ended up being a Rear Admiral
and in charge of the Ninth District of the Navy in 1954, but more importantly, I can pretty
much guarantee you that he had some kismet with Hubbard, either knew him or knew of him
during WWII. Because he was the chief of staff for Fleet Commander William Halsey in the
South Pacific. (Obituary; Rappahannock Record) Exactly the area of the world where
Hubbard had done some pretty heroic things prior to Halsey’s arrival and I’m sure they were
still talking about him there. You can read more about Hubbard’s war history in Australia in
my series eleventh and twelfth segments. It’s pretty interesting.===== How did Hubbard
get approval? The actual official paperwork acceptance by the Secretary of the Navy wasn’t
until way later – October 1950. Ergo, clearly there was some other special rush paperwork
that gave Hubbard what he needed for that next meeting. Hubbard does actually mention
what that is. “So I dived into my briefcase and pulled forth the secretary’s permission.” What
permission? He’s referring to the 18 December 1947 Secretary of Navy/Chief of Naval
Personnel to respond and hold Hubbard’s request in abeyance until he has time to think
about it. Hubbard uses this to get his resignation pushed through fast. Regarding Glass’s OK
that Hubbard mentioned, he mentions that he actually had it in hand when he met Thorvald
again. “… here it is. Secretary of the Navy says OK.” (The Genus of Dianetics and
Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960 from the Anatomy of the Human Mind
Congress) — Clearly that “ok” was something different than the later official paperwork
because again, that wasn’t until October of 1950.
20 April 1950 Thursday – CIA form of BLUEBIRD program now approved. Project Bluebird
interrogation teams p.1 shows that this was approved by Hillenkoetter on 20 April 1950. Just
as Thorvald was now losing his primacy over these types of secret experiments to the
CIA because much more senior man in the Department of Defense Chadwell had said let it
be so? THAT is when this personal “kidnap” of Hubbard attempt to his organization
happened and on this same day – Hubbard said “No”.
20 April 1950 Thursday — exactly 1 week back from incorporation of the HDRF — The
Thursday Meeting – “he was going to come back and see me Thursday. …And when he
came back and saw me Thursday…” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6
December 1956) — “And Thursday the admiral came back to see me…” (How We Have
Addressed the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957) — “On Thursday when the
high brass came back to see me again” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH
lecture 31 December 1960 from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress) — What
happened? “…he said, “Well,” he said, “you’ve decided to come into the service as a
civilian?” And I said, “No, I haven’t. I decided not to.” And he said, “Well,” he said, “I’ll have
to call you back to active duty.” And I says, “Try and do it,” and handed him my
resignation, accepted. He was crushed.” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture
6 December 1956) — “…he says, “Well, have you decided?” Yes,” I said, ” I’ve decided not
to go in.” He said, “Well,” he said, “I guess I have no other choice but to draft you in at
your old rank.” I said, “I’m very sorry,” – omitting the sir, italicized – “but I am no longer a
member of the armed services.” Said “What’s this?” I said “Yes. As a matter of fact here it is.
Secretary of the Navy says OK” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31
December 1960 from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress)
View before Hubbard said no:
Secretary of Navy/Chief of Naval Personnel letter to Hubbard (18 December 1947) point 1:
“Your resignation from the Naval Reserve, in which you have served so honorably, has
been received with regret.”
ONR Psychological Sciences Division programs “…are evaluated on the scientific merit of
the proposed research…the competence of the principal investigator,and relevance to
Navy needs.…involve innovative civilian scientists” (p. 7 Psychological Sciences Division
1985 Programs)
View after Hubbard said no:
Mad – “He was crushed.” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December
1956)
“And that was an end to the beautiful friendship with the American government. …It goes
right back to that engram. Office of Naval Research. Hubbard said no, to hell with him.
Remember, they didn’t make up their minds that we were no good, and we were gips
and clips and stiffs and magees, until we had said No. That’s an important point. That’s a
very important point.” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31
26 April 1950 — See 17-20 April because although this document has a stamped date, that
may not necessarily when the “Members of the Physical Review Council” met before this
notification was sent. It was sent to the Secretary of the Navy that it approved what the
Physical Evaluation Board said but it added something very important. It added that upon
the Secretary’s approval Hubbard will be “returned to duty”. To me, that sounds like a
pre-emptive strike for IF Hubbard said “No” because they would never have tried this after
the fact with that ok from Richard P. Glass looming over their heads. Much too dangerous for
Thorvald’s career to undermine the Secretary of the Navy like that. Also note that the Chief
of the Navy Bureau of Medicine (BUMED) was over all physical evaluations. Thorvald was
thick as thieves with the Bureau of Medicine because they also “ran” the Navy hospitals and
research centers where all that secret human experimentation to “make people more
suggestible” under Projects CHATTER etc. were going on.
27 April 1950 Thursday – The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation was incorporated.
Also validated by this FBI document as well as this one – there’s also the letter to the NY
BBB in July 1950 directly from the HDRF.
1-5 May – Annual meeting of the American Psychiatric Association. Leo Bartemeier is
secretary, his former junior from the WWII committee John C. Whitehorn is President elect.
Whitehorn is tightly connected to Overholser, so we have a trio of psychiatrists that will now
help Thorvald try to marginalize Hubbard and Dianetics.
returned to duty.This seems to indicate that Hubbard’s resignation is already known about.
9 May 1950 Tuesday- CIA meeting – Project Bluebird interrogation teams p. 20: “On 9 May a
meeting was held in the office of Dr. Chadwell, OSI…” What was the point of that meeting?
They wanted to supplement BLUEBIRD with getting information about drugs and police
interrogation methods, Nuremburg Trials papers request for info on drugs, narcoanalysis,
and special interrogation techniques, and information from other agencies about various
things, including narcoanalysis and hypnotism. Right up Hubbard’s ally, and with no strings
attached! Provide them information, he did.

unlikely day of the week for all this business to occur on regular channels, plus it doesn’t line
up with what was happening between Monday and Thursday, so clearly something else is
causing this date to be assigned. See 17- 20 April entry. I guess Hubbard didn’t get around
to actually doing the “official” paperwork for the record until almost a month later. It’s
probably a given that as part of the “rush” ok deal from the Special Assistant to the Secretary
of Navy in April, Hubbard and the Potomac station would have had to promise to follow it up
on official channels with the proper paperwork, endorsements and such, but that neither one
of them got around to it until 27 May.
Late spring and summer 1950 – Hubbard is DOING the research called for by Chadwell on 9
May, and CIA bluebird 20 April, and Thorvald’s Projects CHATTER and original Bluebird.
The goals of the HDRF from a bulletin are discussed, naming the big three areas of
research, Circuitry, Chemistry, Affinity – and the use of chemical aids for reducing
engrams and aiding normal erasure of pain. The Ultimate Goal being a “one-shot clear”.
(FDA declassified documents; CD #1, Folder 3 PDF p. 300) The bulletin mentioned, was by
Donald H Rogers, and can be found on p. 317 of that same PDF. Really look at the
description under 3-Chemical aids. “Means for gaining access to psychotics and
exceptional cases, for restimulating and reducing engrams, for aiding the normal erasure of
pain, “unconsciousness” and grief, for assisting the analytical functions of analyzing and
refiling data. (Ultimate goal is a one-shot clear.)” Hubbard’s research using drugs was
exactly along the lines of the secret projects Thorvald and the ONR, the Army and soon
the CIA were doing. Not to mention he was looking for a way to “clear” man by just giving
him a drug. That’s really right up their alley. You can read more about that initial research
here and here. Note: Donald Rogers is listed later as an “electronics engineer” – BUT – he is
also an FBI agent, as was Charles Parker Morgan at one time. “MORGAN also advised that
DONALD H. ROGERS, Director of Research and Assistant Treasurer of the Foundation, is
also a former Special Agent of this Bureau.” (FBI files – L. Ron Hubbard)
1950 – 1952 Hubbard developing the “remedy” that CIA researchers wanted. “…you can use
Creative Processing. The process of using mock-ups will flip out a PDH without ever
touching it or addressing it. You can knock a PDH to pieces within 15 minutes of processing.
And it takes longer than that to put one in. Another condition could exist, a PDH could be so
– a pain-drug- hypnosis – they knock the fellow out, they drug him – could be laid in with
great rapidity. But it could be laid in so strongly that the individual is rendered dead. Or non
compos mentis from there on and thus out of communication. That individual is no menace
to anybody. He’s either complete ravingly gone, out of communication, and look… or he’s
dead, and a bullet does the same thing. So it’s not a good weapon, really. Because if he’s
able… if he suddenly starts acting peculiarly or doing things which completely alter any
pattern he has had in the past, or if he is doing things which look like they are vaguely bad,
then how easy it is. You can get ahold of him. You’ll find almost any preclear can be given
creative processing. And you could get ahold at him and flip the PDH out. That’s interesting,
isn’t it? In other words, you can take ‘em out as fast as they lay ‘em down.” (Formative State
of Scientology Philadelphia Doctorate Course (PDC #20) lecture of 6 December 1952; This
is the same lecture that I was the first to find and document on 13 October 2000 (Friday the
13th) that it had been edited to remove several key sections by David Miscavige and Dan
Koon. In fact, the section edited out is right after the end of the audio clip I provide
June sometime 1950 Thursday or Saturday – Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation

opened. Charles Parker Morgan OSS (predecessor of the CIA) is secretary and legal
counsel. **this is based on the wrong-headed FBI letter below.
1950 June 1 – The FBI files (p. 19) letter noting the date of incorporation for the Hubbard
Dianetic Research Foundation line up with this sequence of events. However, it’s false.
THIS FBI document gets it right. (and again here) Then there’s also the letter to the NY BBB
in July 1950 directly from the HDRF. You’ll see here in a minute.
Attack Machine begins – Austin E.

Smith assigned.
that the wheels of discrediting and attacks against him and his research began to turn.
Reprise:
View before Hubbard said no:
Secretary of Navy/Chief of Naval Personnel letter to Hubbard (18 December 1947) point 1:
“Your resignation from the Naval Reserve, in which you have served so honorably, has
been received with regret.”
ONR Psychological Sciences Division programs “…are evaluated on the scientific merit of
the proposed research…the competence of the principal investigator,and relevance to
Navy needs.…involve innovative civilian scientists” (p. 7 Psychological Sciences Division
1985 Programs)
View after Hubbard said no:
Mad – “He was crushed.” (A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December
1956)
“And that was an end to the beautiful friendship with the American government. …It goes
right back to that engram. Office of Naval Research. Hubbard said no, to hell with him.
Remember, they didn’t make up their minds that we were no good, and we were gips
and clips and stiffs and magees, until we had said No. That’s an important point. That’s a
very important point.” (The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31
IMPORTANT
The Group for the Advancement of Psychiaty, headed by William Menninger who was with
Overholser in the Truth Drug Committee, their Committee on Therapy had Project
CHATTER/Bluebird man George Raines. He’s still listed on it in that January 1950 Report
#8 —-It had Lawrence Kubie of Leo Bertemeier’s special little WWII team, who also was
on the original Truth Drug committee with Overholser. And Daniel Blaine, the President of
the APA. See Menninger, Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1,
January 1948 and January 1950 Report #8 —-And per the 1-5 May – Annual meeting of the
American Psychiatric Association we have Leo Bartemeier as secretary, with his former
junior from the WWII committee John C. Whitehorn as President elect. Whitehorn is tightly
connected to Overholser.
We have a coterie* of psychiatrists that will now help Thorvald try to marginalize Hubbard
and Dianetics.
*coterie – a small group of people with shared interests or tastes, especially one that is exclusive of other
people.
======
1950 June 1 – Dr. Austin E. Smith, then editor of the JAMA – Journal of the American
Medical Association – needed some authoritative statements by prominent medical men,
explaining to the layman why Dianetics was not only quackery, but very dangerous
quackery. (Garrison, Hidden Story of Scientology, pg. 71 – 74) —That letter and he
responses detailed by Garrison were, ahem, obtained in a unique way. The Guardian Office
intelligence bureau had P. Joseph Lisa infiltrate the AMA and using a cover of being
opposed to Dianetics/Scientology and Hubbard, they bought his cover and they gave him
access to their files. —Austin Smith. didn’t start this letter writing campaign back-channel
on his own. “Somebody” – read Thorvald-Overholser-Gaines – told him to. They needed to
see what they had to work with in order to plan and launch a revenge/discreditation attack on
Hubbard for saying No. They pulled his string, in other words, and he started “chatting” on
cue.
1950 – June 1 to 5 – George Raines, the Chief of Psychiatry at the Naval Medical
(research) center Bethesda tells Theodore Wiprud that Hubbard is a PHONY. George
Raines has more then one published paper together with Robert Cohn and Project
CHATTER man Charles Savage. (one 1948 example here) —Robert Cohn said in an
interview when George Raines hired him with a million dollar budget in 1952: “We were
interested in LSD, thinking it could create an experimental psychosis, and at that time
we believed it was safe to take. Evarts and Charlie Savage organized a series of studies on
LSD, not only clinically, with volunteers and patients, but with animals as well.” See? All
three were still at ye ole secret drug testing ala CHATTER and BLUEBIRD in 1952. – These
are all the very same people and the very same research line of secret projects Thorvald
had his eye on Hubbbard for, yet NOW he’s a “phony”.
1950 June 5 – Answer to Austin E. Smith JAMA editor – Theodore Wiprud, executive
secretary of the Medical Society of the District of Columbia wrote: “Upon receipt of your letter
of June 1, I got in touch with several physicians who I thought would have some information
about L. Ron Hubbard and his book, Dianetics. One of them was Captain George N.
Raines, Chief of Psychiatry, Naval Medical Center, Bethesda. He does not want to be
quoted but told me that Hubbard and Dr. Joseph A. Winter, who, I understand, is a
physician licensed in New Jersey, are ‘phonies’. […]One of the bases for ‘Dianetics’ is the
premise that the individual, if prompted by semi-hypnosis, can recall intrauterine experiences
and conversations between father and mother within three months after conception. That
would be enough to stop anyone but an ignoramus in his tracks, but I am told that some
psychiatrists have been intrigued by the idea. At any rate, among the best psychiatrists
this is nothing but the bunk.” —Another reply was from Dr. H. Houston Merritt, director of
neurological service at New York’s Columbia Presbyterian Medical Center: “In reply to your
letter of June 1, first I beg to advise that I have had no personal experience with Dianetics.
Information I have obtained, however, would indicate that this term was coined to describe a
‘new’ development in the field of psychiatry which uses a philosophical approach combining
some of the principles of psychoanalysis, philosophy of Will Durant and the mathematics of
the cybernetics school. […] It is the impression that Hubbard is the ghost writer for
Winter. My information in regard to Winter, which may or may not be authentic, indicates
that he lives in New Jersey and that he does not have a license to practice in the State, nor
is he a member of the American Medical Association.” —(Garrison, Hidden Story of
Scientology, pg. 71 – 74)—–
1950 June 5 – after receiving these answers, Austin sees he is going to need MORE so he
sends a memorandum to Oliver Field, director of AMA’s Bureau of Investigation. He wants
him to “look into” Dianetics because Hubbard “is alleged to be a ‘bad actor, a kind of
faker or even worse’, but this is not for quoting until more facts are obtained”. (Omar
Garrison, hidden Story of Scientology, pg. 71 – 74) —Oliver Field is referred to as the “J.
Edgar Hoover of the American Medical Association” where he: “protects standard and
lawful medical practices through the exposure of quacks, nostrums, cultists, faddists and
other forms of pseudo-medicine in the profession.” (archives University of Notre Dame (Vol.
34 No. 2 March-April 1956; p. 57) —Oliver also “maintains an up-to-date liaison with all
societies, clubs and goups–medical, civic and clerical—keeping the public well-informed
on both the standard and false methods and practices in medicine.” For PR purposes to
spread the “quackery” label – whether it’s false or not, he doesn’t care. He does what he is
told. But Oliver doesn’t just run media campaigns together with Austin Smith, Fishbein,etc.
The AMABI brings: “violations of law to the attention of enforcement agencies and furnishes
reports to the same.” —Field and Smith/the AMA mount LIFELONG campaigns against
people, and in some people’s cases, like L. Ron Hubbard, even beyond the grave.
1950 June 9 – approx. date of FDA (federal Food and Drug Administration) response from
AMA member Dr. Smith also wrote to another AMA member, Dr. Erwin E. Nelson: “We don’t
seem to have any information on L. Ron Hubbard or Joseph A. Winter or ‘Dianetics’. Further
we do not find such names in the local directory.” That one is actually very important, it
shows that this is a very limited little group here now. It shouldn’t be viewed as “the AMA” did
it. It’s particular PEOPLE. In order of seniority of slavemaster pecking order, it would be
Thorvald, Overholser, Smith. THREE people. Three people going about the business of
preparing to make it look like what they were about to do was some kind of a “activist”
“responsible” “independent” movement that just happened and was not coordinated by these
three hidden people when it most definitely was.
Interjection
Let’s take a moment and see what Mark Rathbun had to say about this period in *Memoirs of
a Scientology Warrior* when he says he was assigned in the late 1970’s to a special project
reviewing the documents that the Guardian Office had stolen.
“The documents told an incredible saga. And the story was told in the words of those
conducting the crusade against Hubbard, not by Hubbard himself, nor by the church. […]
Within weeks of the May 9 1950 publication of Dianetics: the Modern Science of Mental
Health, vested pharmaceutical and medical interests declared war on L. Ron Hubbard. For
the next 20 years, the AMA’s then-mighty Department of Investigation would take
clandestine action against Hubbard and his organizations. Two successive heads of
investigation for the AMA, Oliver Field (1950s) and Thomas Spinelli (1960s and 1970s)
would work hand-in-glove with several governmental agencies to infiltrate Hubbard’s lectures
and organizations…”
Notice anything? He puts all the emphasis on Oliver Field’s position, NONE on the JAMA
editor, and NONE on who was really behind all this. Mark had the documents. The Guardian
Office had the documents. And neither of them ever figured out either the power of the
JAMA editor position, nor WHO was really driving that particular train back then –
which wasn’t the AMA. That’s just un…never mind. I’m not saying anything more about
that right now.
1950 June 17 — No one ever said the ancient Cecil Method (which is what this is) of trying
to control public opinion was ever honest, let alone moral. And this guy was definitely
neither. Wertham was a real Renfield to Overholser’s Dracula. He even looks like a Renfield.
Shall I attack Hubbard for you, Master? The very first public attack on Dianetics came
from a Dr. Overholser Igor. —–Publisher’s Weekly Vol. 158, page 2627: At American
Bookseller’s Association convention, New York (Harvard) psychiatrist Fredric Wertham
denounces Dianetics as “neither a good book nor a hoax,” but a “harmful mixture of
science and science fiction”. His papers also mention this. (reference originally found
here) This duo split kind of attack is repeated in two pulp/fanzine attacks. Boggs: Dianetics:
Fad or Science, Silverberg: Dianetics: Fact or Fantasy. ——-Both Austin Smith AND
Fishbein were involved in the attack on Hubbard, with Overholser, when Wertham was
clearly asked to be the first “authority” attack on L. Ron Hubbard’s Dianetics book, plus,
remember at that time,1950, Wertham was still the President of the Association for the
Advancement of Psychotherapy and the co-editor of the American Journal of Psychotherapy
(1943-1951, Senate Hearings (p. 80), so he definitely had his own vested interest in
damning Dianetics. —What would that be? Part of Tavistock fifth column activities during
WWII. It was created to advance methods of psychotherapy among members of the
medical profession and to familiarize members with progress in the field.JAMA August
1943 #122 p. 1267 Wertham Psychoanalysis and the scientific method—-Dianetics was not
married to “therapy” with drugs, therefore since it was already known that Hubbard had
something that worked and might make people better (that’s why Thorvald tried to shanghai
him) and he was planning to spread it among the people in general – it was a threat to the
AMA nd its cushy drug kickbacks role, the drug companies themselves, and the whole field
of psychiatry.
1950 July 1 — Science Fiction Newsletter #16 – found here previously named Bloomington
News Letter unil the April 1950 issue – Discussing John Campbell Jr., on the first page Dean
Walter “Redd” Boggs is talking about that Campbell has “resorted” to the formula relied on by
Sunday supplements—the Sensation, the Eye-opener, then refers to “hoaxes” such as “The
Aphrodite Project” following that formula. So, he has positioned the ideas of “sensation”
“eye-openers” with “hoaxes” in the reader’s mind, and THEN – “Campbell has produced a
Sensation by adopting the READER’S DIGEST method–… a hack writer‘s “new science,”
presented full-blown to the world in a two-bit pulp —Boggs is referring to the May 1950
issue of Astounding where Hubbard’s article Dianetics: Evolution of a Science was published
– at the same time the book Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health came out.
1950 July 2 — New York Times Book Review page 9: How to Backtrack and Get Ahead;
“Dianetics” reviewed (unfavorably) by Dr. Rollo May (this site has wrong date) Punchlines:
“the absurdity of trying to view man as a machine.” “Books like this do harm…grandiose
promises…oversimplification of human psychological problems.” —Who is Rollo? — Rollo
May and Dr. Overholser — Ministering to Deeply Troubled People, with a foreword
especially by Winfred Overholser, the author cites Rollo on p. 98. The author also
specifically acknowledges Overholser “helping” him in 1944. (p. 22); A 1958 Publication by
the Joint Commission on Mental Illness and Health Monograph Series 1 titled: “Current
Concepts of Positive Mental Health” features Rollo May on p. 57 as having a correct and
approved view, and guess who’s on this Commission? Oh, that’s right. Winfred
Overholser.(p. 128); Then, when the very first Handbook of Psychiatry came out in 1959,
Winfred not only reviewed it, (Psychoanalytic Quarterly 1960 29:266-267) but again
promotes who’s “in” – and mentions “The Psychotherapies chapters”, Muncie, Goldstein,
Rollo May…“ Also, see this? “Here at last is a compilation in the tradition of the German
Handbücher: a comprehensive presentation of the best in modern psychiatric thought by
acknowledged authorities in their respective fields. Dr. Arieti is assisted by a distinguished
editorial board: Kenneth E. Appel…” He fails to mention that Appel is the PRESIDENT of
that same Joint Commission on Mental Illness and Health that featured Rollo May as having
a correct and approved view. —That Overholser, he sure does get around, doesn’t he? –
1962: Rollo and the Human Potential movement – Esalen – Last, but not least, located in
California’s Big Sur area, in 1962 the Esalen Institute “helped mid-wife much of what came to be
known as the human-potential movement. Seminar leaders in Esalen’s first three years included
Gerald Heard, Alan Watts, Arnold Toynbee, Linus Pauling, Norman O. Brown, Carl Rogers, Paul
Tillich, Rollo May, and a young graduate student named Carlos Castaneda,” (The Aquarian
Conspiracy, p. 137). —Rollo helped get Esalen going? That’s just great. —Esalen was all
mixed up with the CIA and numerous intelligence front groups through CIA operative Frank
Barron. For more about Esalen, see The Use of U.S. Universities to Conduct Eugenics
Research and Intelligence Operations by Virginia McClaughry; August 21, 2017 —It is also
tied up with Young Oon Kim of the Unification Church, and the CIA through the KCIA. — The
first test-run seminars were in January and April of 1962, featuring Alan Watts and Kenneth
Rexroth respectively. Alan Watts was one of the people present at the Aldous Huxley
Harvard secret order of LSD meeting in November of 1960. Their first two brochures were
both titled: “The Human Potentiality”. Over a picture of the Thai Buddha scultpure, smiling
and rapt in the bliss of meditation. The synopsis of this Esalen Institute was: “A seminar
series exploring recent developments in psychology, psychical research and work with the
‘mind-opening drugs.’” (Esalen, p. 100) Willis Harman “The Expanding Vision” – The first
seminar was a survey of the Vision. It was entitled “The Expanding Vision” and was led by
Willis Harman…described in the brochure as “a review of the current conceptual
revolution in psychology.” (The Upstart Spring: Esalen and the Human Potential
Movement by Walter Truett Anderson) Have a look at who some of the “teachers” were at
this place, besides Willis Harman. Here’s a list my husband put together showing which
intelligence agency each was affiliated with. —-What was the “Human Potential”
movement really? Just what Wertham, John Rees, and all the others wanted
psychotherapy and any “mental” counseling or therapy to be. “Therapy” With Drugs.
—-1943 — Fifth Column – and right in the middle of WWII – Wertham’s c.v. as given to the
Senate in 1954 — 1943-1951 President of the Association for the Advancement of
Psychotherapy; co-editor of the American Journal of Psychotherapy. Why was this done
right in the middle of World War II? It was created to advance methods of psychotherapy
among members of the medical profession and to familiarize members with progress in
the field. JAMA August 1943 #122 p. 1267 Wertham Psychoanalysis and the scientific
method— Why the “medical” profession? Fifth column action, infiltrating the fields of
medicine – “Therapy” with Drugs is to be made the only real acceptable form of
psychotherapy. —-Remember what we learned that Therapy and Research Division of the
AMA did? It gave MONEY for: “ investigations and laboratory research in the actions of
drugs and pharmaceutical products.” Haven’t you noticed even today there is ALWAYS a
drug involved with all their forms of mental therapy?
Both the first attackers were

Overholser mentees.
.
1950 July –Three months after the Director approved BLUEBIRD, the first team traveled to
Japan to try out behavioral techniques on human subjects –probably suspected double
agents. The three men arrived in Tokyo in July 1950, about a month after the start of the
Korean War. No one needed to impress upon them the importance of their mission. The
Security Office ordered them to conceal their true purpose from even the U.S. military
authorities with whom they worked in Japan, using the cover that they would be performing
‘intensive polygraph’ work. In stifling, debilitating heat and humidity, they tried out
combinations of the depressant sodium amytal with the stimulant benzedrine on each
of four subjects, the last two of whom also received a second stimulant, picrotoxin. They
also tried to induce amnesia. The team considered the tests successful, but the CIA
documents available on the trip give only the sketchiest outline of what happened. Then
around October 1950, the BLUEBIRD team used ‘advanced’ techniques on 25 subjects,
apparently North Korean prisoners of war. (Manchurian Candidate, Marks, pg. 25) Note:
Possibly this may have been one Samuel Thompson was sent on.
Summer 1950 – HDRF Hubbard doing PDH experiments – “This form of hypnotism has
been a carefully guarded secret of certain military and intelligence organizations. It is a
vicious war weapon and may be of more use in conquering a society than the atom bomb.
Pain-drug-hypnosis is a wicked extension of narco-synthesis, the drug hypnosis used in
America only during and since the last war. But pain-drug-hypnosis, due mainly to the intent
of the operator, is a much more vicious procedure. The Foundation undertook some tests
with regard to the effectiveness of pain-drug-hypnosis and found it so appallingly
destructive to the personality… Pain-drug-hypnosis is so effectively destructive that the
Foundation has ceased experimentation along this line, having already learned
enough and refusing to endanger the sanity of individuals.” (Science of Survival by L. Ron
Hubbard) —-If they ceased it by the time of the writing of Science of Survival, then they were
doing it before!
1950 July — Spaceship #9 Page 12 carries an attack story disguised as fiction by mystery
man Saul Diskin called “Cancelled, a dianetic fantasy”. Saul was born in New York City on
Aug. 22, 1934, and raised in Brooklyn, so he was only 15 when he wrote this story. (about to
turn 16). In 1951 he goes off to Vermont to go to college, at age 17. His obituary doesn’t
have one word about this writing career of his. Saul details a rather odd story about Thomas
Portune, Dianetic Auditor who audits Dudley Farnham (who has shooting pains in his
stomach). During this “session” Saul makes it look like Dianetics is doing straight hypnotism,
installing a “canceller”. The “incident” run is Dudley’s having read a Superman story.
The session is interrupted, meanwhile Dudley is mumbling about being Superman, jumps
out a 3 story window landing standing without injury, with the auditor screaming out the
window “Cancelled! Cancelled!”. —practically a verbatim black propaganda idea along the
lines of what Dr. Wertham was saying about Superman comics, about how they gave
people delusions of power and such and how DANGEROUS that is.
Interjection
1950 July 17 — NBBB courtesy of the self-styled Dynamic Duo of health and welfare, Austin
and Oliver, The National Better Business Bureau out of NYC, NY. tasks Diana Bennett of the
NBBB to send out a wave of letters, including one to the American Psychiatric Association
that same day. (see same reference below p. 320). It is not known who ELSE she sent out
out letters to, but she did also send one to the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation – the
HDRF itself. As Secretary of the HDRF, Charles Parker Morgan responded to Diana on 22
July 1950, stating he was a Trustee of the HDRF and he had worked for the OSS. (FDA
declassified documents; CD #1, Folder 3 PDF p. 324)—For those that haven’t caught on yet,
it seems that the Better Business Bureaus since like Day One starting with the National
office out of New York, is in cahoots with the AMA/Oliver Field. One example, Sherman’s
Exhibit 16 from the AMA files shows that the BBB of Spokane Washington, of all places (my
neck of the woods) sent a letter to the Los Angeles BBB dated October 22, 1953 talking
about Volney and the e-meter – with a CC to Oliver Field!!! (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p.
358) It’s also another nice example of a “stamped” document by Oliver Field.
1950 July 24 — Of Two Minds TIME Magazine editorial; Punchlines: “A new cult is
smoldering through the U.S. underbrush. it’s name: dianetics. Last week its bible was
steadily climbing the U.S. bestseller lists. […]unveiled dianetics in the magazine Astounding
Science-Fiction. As a result, its earliest devotees were science fiction fans.” “touch of
Coueism” “mild resemblance to Buchmanite confession”
1950 July 29 — JAMA QUERIES AND MINOR NOTES section. Editor Austin E. Smith sets
up a “question” then has two unnamed authorities answer it. Punchlines: Answer 1: “a long
article appeared recently in a science-fiction magazine. The author, L. Ron Hubbard, is
best known as a science-fiction writer.” Answer 2: “Apparently the author thinks […]of man
as a machine.
1950 August — President of American Psychiatric Association (APA) Daniel Blain to Diana
Bennett of the National Better Business Bureau dated 1 August 1950. (Folder 3 FDA
Declassified documents p. 320) Daniel was also part of the Group for the Advancement of
Psychiatry, on the same Committee on Therapy that George N. Raines and Lawrence
Kubie were on. See Menninger, Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1,
January 1948 and January 1950 Report #8 —–Daniel is responding to her letter of 17 July
1950 (p. 322). Daniel refers to a vague source then referring to a hodgepodge of equally
vague sources, who he then refers to all-inclusively as “their” opinion on Dianetics being:
“”Hubbard’s approach is unscientific and unrealistic. His presentation is flamboyant and full
of contradictions. His technique is that used by hypnotists; his appeal is to the hysterical, as
is the appeal of most faith-healers, fortune-tellers, astrologers and cultists. He refuses
scientific and specific questioning, referring all questioners to his book. His emphasis on
sensational publicity is not in keeping with the behavior or conduct of a professional man
whose chief interest is in his patients’ welfare. His encouragement of lay practitioners of his
system can lead only to widespread quackery.” —Now after ALL that? Daniel says: “To
date, this Association has not formulated an official opinion on the subject of
dianetics.” Also, do you see how Daniel says: “He refuses scientific and specific
questioning…”? THAT is what Hubbard is calling their bluff on in the later 12 February
1951 challenge.
1950 August — Renascence, v. 1, issue 1, Dianetics Review wih Reservations a long

article by Kenneth MacNichol pages 4-5. The issue is dated August 1950 and yet the article
specifically states: “The book is not yet published at the date of this writing. One long article
by Hubbard has appeared in Science Fiction with two editorials by JWC who also
contributed a long article in a day-old issue of the fanzine Rhodomagnetic Digest.” page 4.
“Man is not a machine; not a robot.” p. 5 “The most hopeful thing to be found here is
Hubbard’s own warning, bluntly expressed and accepted, that dianetics is a method of
procedure that, properly conducted, yields useful results. After that, says Hubbard, let
the theory go, because it may or may not be valid. It is a starting place. No matter if
the theory is altogether false assumption if practice works. Wih more and more data,
theory can be corrected.” Excellent advice- Let it be well remembered by all future
students of dianetics. Then, whatever dianetics may be at this moment, the time must arrive
when, sufficiently corrected—and corrected, possibly, almost beyond recognition, both
theory and practice will be altogether sound.”
1950 August 5 — The Nation page 131: Cure For All Ills; unfavorable book review of
“Dianetics”, by Milton Sapirstein (plain text here) Punchline: “The real and, to me,
inexcusable danger in dianetics lies in its conception of the amoral, detached, 100 per cent
efficient mechanical man.”
1950 August 6 — Letters to the Editor; Re: Rollo May 2 July book review, NY Times August
6, 1950; FREDERICK L. SCHUMAN letter/review. L. Ron Hubbard answers, Rollo May
answers Hubbard. Rollo dissembles on his “man as a machine” view and then – ADDS the
other chosen Punchline: “Dianetics first appeared in the magazine Astounding Science
Fiction and it is in this magazine that you can learn, if you wish, about Mr. Hubbard and his
work.” Adds a new punchline: “People can be cured of symptoms by all kinds of
means–by…Coue autosuggestion…Which was positioned with the bone-pointing practices
of primitives, etc. Transference and autosuggestion “cures” are easy enough to achieve, but
no reputable therapist considers them true cures.
1950 August 14 — Letters August 14, 1950, TIME Magazine, several letters, one example:
Dianetics: Believe It or Not LEE PARMAN, ROBERT HARLOW taking on the “cult” idea
presented in Time July 24 1950 article; Hubbard responds: “Sir: Thank you for your quite
accurate description of dianetics . . .Our only regret is that you . . . mistook the publisher’s
synopsis in the book to be the opinion of the author. Los Angeles, while giving dianetics an
excellent reception, is not entirely informed as to the science. Secondly, you would seem to
make me over-evaluate dianetics in my own opinion. In 50 years a valid opinion as to what
dianetics is doing or can do for the whole society may be expressed: I doubt anyone would
be foolish enough to express such a wild enthusiasm about his own work, and I do not …L.
RON HUBBARD Elizabeth, N.J.”
1950 August 14 — The New Republic Scathing book review by Martin Gumpert; Punchlines:
“L. Ron Hubbard… science-fiction writer”. Fredric Schuman protests, editors respond:
“While Dr. Schuman is a distinguished authority on political science, we do not feel that on
issues involving psychiatry he is entitled to any more respect than any other layman. His
suggestion that no one should write about dianetics without having experienced it seems to
us like saying that no one can be an authority on cyanide of potassium unless he has eaten
some.”
1950 August 21 – Newsweek Punchlines: “successful author of scientific fiction.”
1950 August 26 — Western Star #3 Hubbard announces sure cure for atheism then on
actual article page it says: FLASH!! Ron Hubbard says in effect: Dianetics will cure atheism
and is being adopted by many churches. Chew that one good. This little cult is getting up
steam now. Swank HDQ in Jersey and offices in NYC $500 per month for the “master”…”
And this is interesting. Hubbard’s display in Los Angeles of a Clear – “brought a clear all the
way from Boston but the demonstration fizzled when stage-fright prevented the girl from
really performing. All she could say was that she felt better every day since “taking the cure”
however she was toally unable at the time to demonstrate any feats of memory. But Ron was
a capable enough showman to keep most of the audience from feeling let down.” Image
positioning Saint Hubbard and the Dragon that the Church of Scientology would later use to
promote its “Bridge to Freedom”. Image from Scientology’s Advance Magazine #53 1978.
Article ends with MONEY motivation positioning. $$$$ % dianetics % $$$$
1950 September 9 — NY TImes Psychologists act against Dianetics by Lucy Freeman (text
here) “In explaining the action of the council, Dr. E. Lowell Kelly, a member of it and of the
board of directors”.
1950 September – Postgraduate Medicine: Contributing editor Dr. Morris Fishbein (former
editor of the Journal of the American Medical Association; JAMA) called Dianetics Poor
Man’s Psychoanalysis; Punchlines: “He is an engineer, explorer, and writer of science
fiction and, as such, beneath the professional notice of practicing physicians. To most
doctors, the dianetics concept is unscientific and unworthy of discussion or
review…mind-healing cult.” (as quoted in Newsweek October 16, 1950)
1950 September — Spacewarp column File 13, #13 by Red Boggs. James Blish goes after
Boggs for what he said in Science Fiction Newsletter #16, which Boggs then reprints in this
different fanzine. Boggs discusses Blish’s letter in his “File 13” column – which he makes a
point of noting is the “13th” installment. Rebuttal points: “It is; first of all, the comment of a
man who has not read Hubbard’s book…it uses push-button terms…thus far the claims
check with the facts.” Re: that Hubbard published about science-fiction in pulps “It also has
an audience rated as the most intelligent and the most technically knowledgeable of any
general magazine in this country”. Then these two: The reaction of an established authority
to any teetotally revolutionary discipline is historically predictable…The reputation…really
proves nothing…The reputation of Dr. Frederick Wertham, also damned good, is also no
guarantee, whether he’s for or agin dianetics (he’s violently agin.)” Finishes with the line
“does it work…check the idea not the reputaion”. Boggs has a cow, disses his own audience
in the process. “given to the uninformed public rather than to the scientists….a bunch of
fuggheaded juveniles loudly mouthing dianetical catch-phrases…a “fad” status among
brainless juveniles“. With that kind of atitude one might ask – WHAT is this man doing in
the field then? Then he goes right to the Rollo May positioning.“After all Coueism “worked,”
too; it even had some psychological basis; but I never heard of a psychologist who believed
Coueism was a universal cure-all merely because a bunch of harebrained people said, By
god, I am getting better and better!” —Rollo May had said: “People can be cured of
symptoms by all kinds of means–by…Coue autosuggestion…Which was positioned with
the bone-pointing practices of primitives, etc. Transference and autosuggestion “cures” are
easy enough to achieve, but no reputable therapist considers them true cures.” —-Then
Boggs again positions Hubbard as: “a man who has absolutely no standing in psychological
or psychiatric fields at all…merely a “hack writer of pseudo-science.,,,added onus of pulp
presentation”. Boggs seems to have made sure that this issue of Spacewarp carries two
other attacks on Dianetics. The first is by Rick Sneary in his column called 1958.
Snearywrites a long, rambling, typo-ridden missive re: Dianetics. He admits he hasn’t even
read the book, but yet still manages to pepper his missive with the usual – “claims too
much” and that “hypnotism” is employed, and that “others” say it is “badly written” and a new
one – that “some parts of the book doesn’t sound like Hubbard’s writings” to which he
adds that it does seem amazing “that he could conduct experiments turn out the large
quantity of fiction he has been, and still find time to write this book.” Then there’s this:
EXCERPT FROM A LETTER BY A GUY WHO WISHES TO REMAIN NAMELESS
(Nameless is named in the index as Art Rapp) That says “everyone obediently swallows
Hubbard’s crackpot Dianetics simply because Campbell printed it in SF.”
Interjection
For those who get excited about that “it works” line Blish was using. I’d like to point out that
psychiatrists using barbaric ECT do the same thing. In 2003, assessing the
effectiveness of ECT in a series of depressed Israeli patients, Bernard (“Benny”) Lerer
(1948–), director of the Biological Laboratory of Hadassah University Hospital in Ein Karem,
Israel, said to a journalist from the newspaper Haaretz, “Have you ever asked yourself how it
is that a treatment with such a terrible stigma, a treatment that the public is afraid of and is
said to be primitive and unhelpful—has, despite all this, survived into the 21st century, and
not in obscure little places but in the world’s most advanced medical centers? The answer
is simple. Because it works.”
1950 September 18 — Tests & Poison TIME Magazine, basically repeat of July 24, 1950
article. Punchlines: “concocted by science-fiction Writer L. Ron Hubbard”. disses Fred
Schuman (August 6 1950 letter to NY TImes; letter to New Reublic 14 August 1950) as
“Williams College’s cause-chasing Professor Frederick L. Schuman”
1950 October – Hubbard later talked about his memories of the scene then and this is where
find another reference to starting a college (which we saw mentioned in Dr. Ravitch’s letter).
It was Hubbard himself who said he was talking about that in the Fall of 1950. “And I found
out something very horrible in October of 1950. We had taken in hundreds of thousands of
dollars, all told, and it was running on an accounting system of dumping it all in a barrel
outside the door and hauling the barrel down to a bank every once in a while — just grim:
The accounting was just horrible! More important to me was the fact that by October of 1950
I had not written a second book bringing anyone up-to-date, I had not done any broad writing
of the subject and my advance work in research was suffering. What I was doing was a lot of
business management. It was obviously leading nowhere because nobody could keep track
of it anyhow, and everybody was trying like mad to keep everything on the straight and
narrow but everybody was riding off in all different directions. It was a scramble; it was grim.
And I simply pulled out of the Foundations, and I began to research and work as best I
could.[…] Well, nobody has ever challenged my right to teach Dianetics; it exists in the
minute books of all the old Foundations. And I have often talked to groups about someday
putting together a university. Someday, somehow, on whatever shoestring or whatever ten
billion dollars — it didn’t matter — someday there was going to be a university of
Dianetics. Only it was going to be more than a university of Dianetics: it was going to be a
university of arts and science, whereby we were going to try to coordinate and correlate
science and get it out of its specialized categories into a correlated category. This goal goes
back to 1950. In the fall of 1950 I was talking about this. I have had projects on with the
army, for instance, trying to get old campsites from them and so forth, in order to
form this university.” (Hubbard Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of
Dianetics and Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952)
1950 October — Spaceship #10 A fully fleshed out assault on Dianetics appears, directly
critical – no cagey “fantasy” story this time – article by Robert Silverberg titled Dianetics:
fact or fantasy? p. 6 “Can it be proven the human mind is just a machine…” It starts out
saying “Your editor along with many others went immediately head-over-heels in favor of the
book.” If this was written by Robert, then we have to consider the timing in that right after
that, immediately came Saul Diskin to help him with his nasty Dianetic fantasy lampooning in
July. It makes it look like he clearly influenced Robert because then if we go with that this is
BY the 14 year old Robert, the first sentence is followed by this: “After a careful re-reading, it
begins to appear that Dianetics is not all that it’s reputed to be.” There is a rather odd plea
message buried in the article. Almost as if our hidden “they” were offering Hubbard an out or
a way back – if only he would come study Dianetics their way. See what you think. It starts
by referring back to the Rollo May article, says that if Dianetics had offered itself as a
forward stop, “one which should bear careful examination, it probably would be gratefully
received.” with the implication that the reason it wasn’t is because “they persisted in calling it
the final step in mental science” then Robert counters all his own criticism with the
mind-jamming statement of “I’ll withhold my opinion for a while”. After pretty much giving
it.
1950 October — American Scientist Autumn Issue Volume 38 Number 4 Article on Page
603-609 Sacred Cows in Collision
author Yvette Gittleson; section on Dianetics titled: De Profundis Via Dianetics; Punchlines:
“mechanical-brain analogy is reflected at its worst in a best-selling horror called Dianetics.
[…] Dianetics made its debut in Astounding Science Fiction, which is where the reviewer
should leave it because that is where astounding science fiction belongs.” Other items of
interest: “In the first two months following publication, about 20,000 copies of Dianetics were
sold, without benefit of advertising (in the conventional sense). During this period, book
review editors associated with serious publications gave it a wide berth. On July 2, the New
York Times broke the spell with a three column review by Dr. Rollo May.”
1950 October — Arthur Levine wrote responding to Red Boggs attack/review from July
1950, his response appears in October 1950 Science Fiction Newsletter #17.
1950 October — Orb, v. 2, issue 1, October? 1950, “Report from up yonder” insert by Bob
Johnson, he talks about a trip to a sci-fi convention in Portland, during which he had a
“dianetic session” presumably from Harry B. Moore on August 27th. “The first night, we
stayed at the Commercial Hotel in Vernal, Utah. I went through my first Dianetics session,
then…… and didn’t quite know what to think of it…… It’s sorta hard to get used to ‘living
through an experience’ instead of remembering little patches.” Then on p. 20 in where it
looks like this was either September 1 or 2 in Portland Oregon – Theodore (Ted) Sturgeon
and Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman began to speak about Dianetics. “I expect about 250 or 275
people attended this. Unfortunately Forrie and Ted both beat round the bush, without really
hitting anything of importance. It was intensely interesting to fans like myself who are
neophytes to Dianetics, but to the many more experienced people in the room, it was a little
tiring. I enjoyed every minute of it, however, and I am positive that many others did. ” P.
23 talks about how Bob got sick suddenly, and that he thought it was dianetic session
related. But it’s what Harry said that’s interesting, note how he makes the ‘file clerk’ sound
like an entirely separate person or thing than Bob, which makes it seem that Harry knew that
Hubbard actually thought the “reactive mind” was composed of entities. (see Philip K. Dick
story a little later on here). “The second night we stayed at Mountain Home, Idaho. Harry
was planning to audit Heisner. While we were starting to eat our dinner, I suddenly
developed a terrific sinus attack. Harry said it was my file clerk wanting attention so it
could be audited instead of Charles. Since Chas had priority, I had to grin and bear it.
While at the cafe, I had to ask for a hot towel to hold against my face, the attack was so bad.
Get this: I have never had any trouble with my sinus in my life, outside of the occasional
clogging of head colds, and such. I have never experienced any pain remotely as severe as I
did at this time, Now, draw your own conclusions about Dianetics being dangerous or not.
[…] Somewhere, in the middle of a Helios or Vom, my sinus trouble was forgotten, and
therefore vanished.[…] The third night was spent in Burgoyne, Idaho, where I was given
a thorough auditing. Lots of things were found out, but it seems like I have few engrams,
but scads of locks. ” One of the other things discussed in that story was the deciding of
where the next convention would be held and by who. Harry B. Moore won the vote, and
the next one would be held in New Orleans.
1950 October 11 – FDA inspector W. Remle Grove summed up a meeting that was held by
the New Jersey Board of Medical Examiners. (31 January 1963 summation as given by in
the H-2 PDF – p. 4.) “The Board meeting of October 11, 1950 with Dr. David B. Allman
presiding and Dr. E. S. Hallinger, Secretary, made the following mention of Hubbard
Dianetics Foundation, Inc.,“The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation of Elizabeth, N. J. is
conducting a medical school without a license and practicing medicine. This
Foundation charges $500,’ for a course of one month and we have been told upon
completion of same they issue a certificate or diploma with an ‘M.D.’ degree, meaning’
Master of Dianetics. These people treat by mental means only.” See the AMA influence
there? Heck, they can’t even keep their own lies straight. “MENTAL MEANS only” is not
even under the purview of MEDICINE by their own rules so…wow. The Board of Medical
Examiners didn’t want to be responsible for doing anything other than having a record that
the HDRF was under investigation, apparently, because this is what happened next – “After
some discussion Dr. Schaaf moved, ‘That the Secretary be instructed to write a letter to the
Attorney General stating that this matter has been referred to us and the Board is without
jurisdiction and request him to refer it to the proper authorities – in our opinion it is a vital
matter and we are deeply interested in the disposition made of this case.’ Seconded by Dr.
Corrigan and unanimously carried.” —Did you notice how a big point was made about
charging $500 for a Dianetics course? That was courtesy of Austin Smith and Oliver Field,
who also made sure that (plus a lot more) showed up in a “letter to the Editor” of JAMA in
January 1951 by a Camarillo State Hospital ghoul Dr. Ravitch, no less. ===Backing up a
little, another interesting thing about that meeting of the Board of Examiners is the timing.
October 1950 happens to be when Hubbard kind of suddenly takes off for Palm
Springs. I think one of his CIA buddies warned him of what was coming from the unhappy
loser department in the April 1950 who-gets-Hubbard contest between the Navy and the
CIA. And Thorvald (Navy) was still majorly steamed about it. Vindictive even. I don’t think he
ever let go of it, and certainly neither did his directed vicious little chihuahuas – Austin and
Oliver. Those two were so fricking clueless as to the BIG picture, it’s a wonder they even
managed to fit their hats on their hugely self-deluded heads.
30 October 1950 Monday — Hubbard’s Navy documents acceptance of resignation date

directly by Secretary of the Navy Francis P. Mathews.
1950 November — Planet Stories: “Dianetics: A Door To The Future”. James Blish gave a
favorable assessment of Dianetics – the Blish article starts on p. 104 of the PDF.
1950 November — Kentucky fanzine Dawn issue 11 has a pretty great article by Ken Beale
(Bronx, New York) refers to Lester Del Ray having called dianetics “a kind of streamlined
hypnotism” but debunks that in an interesting way, “Unfortunately, this doesn’t account for
the fact that the insane, who according to modern authority cannot be hypnotised without
drugs, were given Dianetic Therapy successfully.” citing editor John Campbel’s speech at the
4th N.Y. conclave last May (1950).
1950 November – Hubbard tries to remove his name from the HDRF. “In November 1950
Hubbard became convinced that the corporation was not sound and that it could not attain to
its professed goal of helping people. He attempted to withdraw his name from it and was
variously inveighed against. He had only one vote in seven. forced to leave it in possession
and continued use of his name, he retired in December to Palm Springs California where he
set up a modest research laboratory.” (John Galusha writes to the BBB of Phoenix on 12
May 1954 folder 4 p. 77-79)
1950 December – Hubbard goes off by himself to Palm Springs. “I began to research and
work as best I could.[…]My first effort at this was in Palm Springs. I went down to Palm
Springs, I got a modest little house down on the edge of the desert and I sat down there and
I figured out and wrote down the chart notes on the Hubbard Chart of Human Evaluation. I
severed connections actually, actively with the Foundations, and using some royalty money
and so forth, worked out the chart you find in Science of Survival.”(Hubbard Professional
Course Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics and Dianetics Business – February 25,
1952)—“forced to leave it [the HDRF] in possession and continued use of his name, he
retired in December to Palm Springs California where he set up a modest research
laboratory.” (John Galusha writes to the BBB of Phoenix on 12 May 1954 folder 4 p. 77-79)
1951? — Spaceship #17 (1951?) Arthur Levine wrote a response in p. 8, excerpted: “I can
see that by initially reaching an audience of ASf readers, Hubbard may have hoped to
secure a relatively large number of scientifically-minded, intelligent experimenters who would
not be handicapped by too large a background and belief in other methods of
psychotherapy.”
1951 January 8 — the New Jersey State Board of Medical Examiners brought litigation
against the Hubbard Dianetics Research Foundation for operating a school for treatment of
disease without a license. Parker Morgan told Hubbard to incorporate Dianetics and
Scientology as a religion as a defense against such lawsuits.
1951 January 13 – Letter to the Editor of Jama by a Camarillo State Hospital ghoul Dr.
Ravitch. Note: The address Ravitch lists is the address for Camarillo State Hospital:
Department of Mental Hygiene. Which, if you don’t know, “mental hygiene” was kind of a
code-name for Eugenics. Camarillo was one of the main places in the U.S. for
pharmaceutical drugs to be tested on hapless mental patients, hence this obviously solicited
attack letter from a Camarillo psychiatrist. From one of my Camarillo series posts: “By 1957,
Camarillo was jammed with more than 7,000 patients, shock treatments were standard and
lobotomies were also performed, as well as sterilizations. The 5X increase was often justified
as reasoning to sterilize more patients in order to increase “eugenic efficiency. (Stern, “From
Legislation to Lived Experience”, p. 104). As if all of that wasn’t horrifying enough, during the
1950s and 1960s especially, the hospital was at the forefront of so-called treatments of
schizophrenia* and patients were being used as “testing grounds” for unsavory drug
and therapy “procedures”!”—Dr. Ravitch’s MD was gained at University of Minnesota in
1927, I don’t know where he worked, yet, after that but he was first licensed in California 6
June 1946. But man, that guys medical record is a complete train wreck after that. Felonies,
Misdemeanors, Probation and finally – a cancelled medical license. The other interesting
thing is there is only ONE record in JAMA from this guy, no other papers.====Now for
Ravitch’s letter ===“To the Editor:— With considerable anxiety I have watched the cult
“dianetics” develop from the first appearance of its principles in Science Fiction Magazine. I
am concerned about its growth and popular acceptance, and I fear that the world has had
dumped on it a new therapy which will have the staying power of chiropractic, with as little
scientific background to support it. It is a phenomenon of some sort, and full of meaning, that
over 500,000 copies of the book are supposed to have been sold. Countless persons,
without proper background and without understanding of basic human motives and drives,
are “auditing” each other, and as a result mental hospitals may receive as patients many
whose first psychotic breakdown occurred during such “auditing.” The “auditors” simply do
not know how to handle the material elicited. The dangers inherent in such amateurish
“auditing” are readily apparent. Since these persons cannot recognize an incipient
psychosis, adequate treatment my be delayed, and delay, as pointed out in Bellak’s book,
“Dementia Precox,” definitely reduces the chances for recovery or improvement.In a short
time there has developed a demand on the part of thousands of persons for training as
professional “auditors.” To meet this demand, I am informed, there have been established
two training centers in the United States, in Elizabeth, N.J., and in Los Angeles. The course
lasts one month, and tuition is said to be $500. The initial Los Angeles enrollment was 1,000
persons, many having been turned away. An income of $500,000 for the Dianetic
Foundation in one month is certainly not bad. This, however, is only the beginning. There is
being projected a Dianetic College or University with a two year course, which will no doubt
give graduates greater prestige.Devotees of dianetics, like the devotees of cults, are not
moved by unfavorable statements made by men of recognized scientific background. These
fanatics support the new cult with a religious fervor. In vain have I shown them comments by
scientific critics. One gets the same answers that have so often been heard from enthusiasts
for other cults. For one thing, one hears that the medical profession is really a medical trust
that is trying to keep out all forms of treatment but its own. The new cult is growing by the
vigorous exploitation of testimonials. I have already listened to a testimonial of a cure of
agoraphobia. Another person has reported that since he has been “audited” he is a better
conversationalist. One woman I know is about to start being “audited” after listening to a
testimonial by someone who had gotten rid of many “engrams” through dianetics. This
dianeticized person claimed that her thinking had improved and hence her abilities as a
stock market trader had become markedly sharper, the whole process resulting in her taking
profits of $13,000 within a few days. And so the testimonials go.In Los Angeles the dianetics
enthusiasts meet every Sunday morning in a theater to hear about the latest procedures and
to listen to exegeses of the great book. As one would expect, the spirit of these meetings
has the coloring that goes with religious zeal.At one of these meetings I saw one man get
up and call attention to some contradictory phases of the teachings of the book. He was
booed and hooted down, to the relief of the moderator. Professional “auditors” are setting up
offices throughout the country and advertising for patients in the good old chiropractic way.
Something should be done to expose irrefutably this nonsensical tomfoolery. – Samuel J.
Ravitch, M.D. Box A, Camarillo, Calif.” (JAMA; January 13, 1951, Vol 145, No. 2, “Dianetics”
letter to editor Austin Smith by Camarillo State Hospital ghoul Dr. Samuel J. Ravitch.)—-
Note: the article listing for this journal pulls this one letter out as a separate listing just to
highlight it!) ===Notice how Ravitch says: “tuition is said to be $500″ – He got that from
Austin Smith/Oliver Field.
Notice this part: “An income of $500,000 for the Dianetic Foundation in one month…” Well,
now. Seems that Sara Northrup’s statements about the amount of money coming into the
HDRF weren’t too far off after all. In Cd #1, Folder #5 PDF p. 156 of the Declassified FDA
documents, Sara, as part of her divorce papers from Hubbard, said that the HDRF received
over one million dollars in 1950. To give you an idea, in today’s dollars that’s close to ten
million dollars. That’s another reason why the AMA is concerned – MONEY. Notice this
part: “There is being projected a Dianetic College or University with a two year course, which
will no doubt give graduates greater prestige.” That’s more than likely a reference to Joseph
Hough’s diploma mill Sequoia University and its Department of Scientology. The post linked
to is an extensive history about all that, but one of the things I pointed out is that giving
Hubbard a “degree” from Sequoia seemed to be part of a rather involved attempt to set him
up. Since Joseph Hough is known to have promoted chiropractic medicine, a long (really
long) term pet attack project of the AMA’s Morris Fishbein, Austin Smith and Oliver Field, it
wouldn’t be much of a stretch to have one or more of those three using Hough to pull
Hubbard into that Sequoia University mess. Perhaps in exchange for “mercy”? Because it
sure doesn’t seem like they ever attacked him (after 1950) in nearly the same vicious ways
they were going after other people. Including Hubbard. Deal made? Maybe so.
1951 January – Hubbard being threatened with “public scandal” by Sara Northrup…which is
an odd thing for a supposedly against Dianetics wife to be doing. Sounds like AMA
involvement? —“[…]Van Vogt, the principle mover in the Los Angeles Foundation and others
were intensely provoked at Hubbard’s withdrawal. Hubbards wife…threatened Hubbard
with public scandal if he did not support the Foundations.” (John Galusha writes to the
BBB of Phoenix on 12 May 1954 folder 4 p. 77-79) —-If it was known that Hubbard had
withdrawn, as Galusha seems to imply that it was, why is Van Vogt still being supportive of
Dianetics in 1951? Oh wait, I get it, because he’s running one of the Foundations. What am I
referring to? See 1951 January 24
1951 January 24 –A.E. Van Vogt had responded to JAMA and Camarillo ghoul Dr. Ravitch’s
letter 11 days later on 24 January 1951, with letterhead showing a HDRF inc. of California.
It’s interesting that one of the first things that he wanted to address was this statement by
Ravitch: “The initial Los Angeles enrollment was 1,000 persons, many having been turned
away. An income of $500,000 for the Dianetic Foundation in one month is certainly not bad.”
Van Vogt responding with “However, there were not as Dr. Ravitch states a thousand people
enrolled for the first course in Dianetics offered in Los Angeles. The number was just over a
hundred.” (folder 3 FDA documents p. 240-42, letter to Jama by A.E. Van Vogt; part of the
AMA documents from Oliver Field; Exhibit 22 (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents pp. 229-242) —It
seems odd to me that was such a concern of Van Vogt’s but I’d like to point out that he
DOES NOT actually specifically counter that monthly income amount which is very
interesting to me. Are we hiding how much money was really coming in? —Van Vogt
then proceeds to answer some of the main chosen propaganda campaign ideas: that
Dianetics first appeared in a Science Fiction magazine, the cult label, pointing out that term
is normally applied to religions, mysticisms etc and that “A mere belief cannot be
investigated.A technique can be.” He then spends some time talking about what an engram
is in his understanding, and that a “lunatic fringe” has gathered around dianetics –
which is odd considering Ravitch didn’t actually use those words, but oh well. He finishes
with mentioning the validation pamphlet that will “come out in February” – which was also
part of Oliver Field’s JAMA files. You can read about that here.
1951 January/February – “Then a great many sorrowful things happened to me in a

rapid-fire order — I had neglected everything, everywhere practically — a lot of unfortunate
incidents of one sort or another.” (Hubbard Professional Course Lectures, Review of
Progress of Dianetics and Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952)
1951 February 12 —The Challenge Hubbard brings out HIS dark side —Exhibit 9 (starting
p. 237 folder 3) is from the AMA files that Oliver Field gave to Mr. Sherman of the FDA (see
(Vol 4 of 18 p. 231). It is a 12 February 1951 announcement by Charles Leonard of the
HDRF that L. Ron Hubbard is “tired of turning the other cheek” and has issued a
challenge to psychiatry, especially to the Dr.s Menninger. The document is stamped 2
days later by the AMA Bureau of Investigation. The full announcement can be found
uploaded separately here.“Long aware that organized opposition, unduly alarmed by the
phenomenal spread of dianetics, has been flailing at him “from behind the scenes and
from behind the armor of their professional immunity,” even inciting to legal action against
the furthering of dianetic knowledge, Hubbard has authorized the following letter to the
Menninger Clinic at Topeka, Kansas, the American Psychiatric Association, and the New
York Psychiatric Advancement Committee…—Look at that last item named. First of all,
the correct name is: The Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry (GAP) but I understand
the somewhat shorthanded and geographically located way Hubbard referred to it. But hey,
we know what that is now, right? That’s Leo Bertemeier and Dr. Overholser’s guys who
went and hung out with the Tavistock psychiatrists in 1945. They came back and helped
establish the group for the “Advancement of Psychiatry” in May of 1946. It was a direct
outcropping of John Rawlings Rees “5th columnist” suggestion to psychiatrists to infiltrate
society, and that the two areas of society most difficult to infiltrate were law and medicine.
(Rees, 18 June 1940, Address)====See how it references “the American Psychiatric
Association”? That’s Daniel Blain who had written to Diana Bennett of the National Better
Business Bureau on 1 August 1950. (Folder 3 FDA Declassified documents p. 320) Daniel,
do recall, was also part of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry. Daniel is
responding to her letter of 17 July 1950 (p. 322). Daniel was also part of the Group for the
Advancement of Psychiatry, on the same Committee on Therapy that George N. Raines
and Lawrence Kubie were on. See Menninger, Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic
medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948 and January 1950 Report #8 —– See how Daniel says:
“He refuses scientific and specific questioning…”? THAT is what Hubbard is calling their
bluff on in this 12 February 1951 challenge. —The fact that Hubbard targeted the Group for
the Advancement of Psychiatry in his challenge was a really unique and I must say,
ingenious, way of bringing into the limelight the men he knew were essentially behind
targeting him, without specifically naming Thorvald, Overholser and the Bertemeier crew. He
was also calling their bluff at the same time, since he knew they knew…That what he had
found out about unconscious memory recording was TRUE. What was Hubbard’s
challenge to psychiatry? “If two impartial judges will select two neurotic persons, without
advice from either psychiatrists or dianeticists, our Foundation will be happy to give them
into the hands of psychiatrists for one week, with before and after psychometries of the most
rigorous nature. Thereafter our Foundation will give them dianetic processing for one week,
with comparative psychometries. If the resultant psychometries prove that dianetics had not
done uniformly more for these persons than psychiatry, Mr. Hubbard will be perfectly willing
to withdraw his book, “Dianetics,” and admit that dianetics is not better than
psychotherapy.“====The silence was deafening.===Why would psychiatry not take up
Hubbard in this challenge (if it was indeed by Hubbard) – it was the perfect opportunity to
shoot him down once and for all. Unless…yeah. You guessed it. They already knew it
worked. They didn’t want anyone else to know, officially, that it worked. But also, there
were a few other minor problems, sarcastically speaking. Hubbard refused to HIDE it and it
being so public and easily available? Undercut the entire psychotherapy/psychiatry
DRUG-fueled industry. Can’t have that, right? Hubbard had repeatedly entreated
psychiatrists, psychologists and psychoanalysts, both in-person and otherwise to inspect
and try Dianetics for themselves and that he would be happy to help in any serious study of
Dianetics. Besides the fact that Dr. Winfred Overholser shut him down after he refused
Thorvald Solberg’s “offer”, not a single one of these authoritative psychiatric types had ever
actually investigated the subject. Instead, you get squirrelly gossipy jesuit-style
sub-understanding statements like this from the American Psychiatric Association – I refer to
the official letter of Daniel Blain to Diana Bennett of the National Better Business Bureau
dated 1 August 1950. (Folder 3 FDA Declassified documents p. 320) Daniel, do recall, was
also part of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry. Daniel is responding to her letter
of 17 July 1950 (p. 322). Daniel refers to a vague source then referring to a hodgepodge of
equally vague sources, who he then refers to all-inclusively as “their” opinion on Dianetics
being: ““Hubbard’s approach is unscientific and unrealistic. His presentation is flamboyant
and full of contradictions. His technique is that used by hypnotists; his appeal is to the
hysterical, as is the appeal of most faith-healers, fortune-tellers, astrologers and cultists. He
refuses scientific and specific questioning, referring all questioners to his book. His emphasis
on sensational publicity is not in keeping with the behavior or conduct of a professional man
whose chief interest is in his patients’ welfare. His encouragement of lay practitioners of his
system can lead only to widespread quackery.” —Now after ALL that? Daniel says: “To
date, this Association has not formulated an official opinion on the subject of
dianetics.” Also, do you see how Daniel says: “He refuses scientific and specific
questioning…”? THAT is what Hubbard is calling their bluff on in this 12 February 1951
challenge. The sad thing to me is that Hubbard, due to his anglophilic blindness, never saw
the forest-for-the-trees here. Ever. He was so blinded to that he was essentially working
FOR the very people he hated, because they were in alignment with the British on this whole
crazy “advancement of psychiatry” thing, that he never correctly targeted what he would call
“the real WHO’s” – a WHO being the actual sources of the trouble, the original and
HIGHEST sources. He invariably fell for what was both the Vatican and British favorite
misdirection line had been for two centuries – that it’s “the communists” who are enslaving
the world. He actually says that in a 1960 lecture. He also told the FBI that’s what happened
to the HDRF – which, in light of this challenge, means he’s indirectly accusing the Group for
the Advancement of Psychiatry of being communist – which is total horseshit, of course.
In the FBI files on L. Ron Hubbard, there’s a letter from agent Baumgardner (7 March 1951)
describing an interview with L. Ron Hubbard where he alleges various communist influences
in the HDRF – Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation.
1951 February 23 — Alleged date that Hubbard takes off with Alexis, his daughter with Sara
Northrup——-In 1963 : Kermit Miller, Oliver sent him a letter with various attachments. The
attachments were from the AMA files that FDA inspector Sherman had copied, so it’s part of
the declassified FDA documents. The link takes you to the Vol 4 of 18 PDF from that
release. One of the attachments was a Washington Times-Herald article from 24 April 1951
saying Hubbard has a mental “ailment” of paranoid schizophrenia. There’s some kind of
handwritten note at the bottom, right under where it says that Hubbard abducted Alexis on
February 23 (1951) that Oliver chopped off for some reason. The article is on page 410 of
the same PDF. ===“Hubbard, busy writing a new book, refused to lend any credence to
these threats or those of the Elizabeth board and went to Cuba where he completed a
125,000 book…As their young child had always been under his, not her mother’s care, the
child accompanied him. […]Hubbard made no statements of any kind during all this
period” (John Galusha writes to the BBB of Phoenix on 12 May 1954 folder 4 p. 77-79)
1951 March — Nolacon Bulletin #1 Harry Moore’s New Orleans Sci-fi Convention – Nolacon
planned for September 1951, began putting out its own newsletters. Carried an article titled:
Why Dianetics? which is unfortunately incompletely preserved and cuts off at the bottom.
Harry announced: “With the increasing weight of evidence that Dianetics works on the
individual and for the group, your committee has seen fit to schedule a symposium on the
subject at your convention.” Mentions something called ultra safe “Hurdy-Gurdy” processing.
1951 March 7 – In the FBI files on L. Ron Hubbard, there’s a letter from agent Baumgardner
(7 March 1951) describing an interview with L. Ron Hubbard where he alleges various
communist influences in the HDRF – Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation. There’s other
examples of Hubbard talking about communists in the FBI files, you can easily find them, but
in that March 1951 interview, Hubbard provided Baumgardner with two flyers from the HDRF
from 1950, both of which I have pulled out by themselves, re-arranged the images to be
more in order and easier to read. They are now uploaded to the internet archive. Flyer #1
Dianetics: A Brief Discussion and Flyer #2 Dianetics and Psychoanalysis. Both of them have
some interesting early details you may want to peruse.
1951 March — Hubbard goes to Cuba, writes Science of Survival —“Finally, to get some
peace and quiet, I went down to Cuba. And I sat down in Cuba with a recording Sound
scriber and I dictated in a space of three weeks the book Science of Survival, which brought
up the techniques and gave the evaluation of human behavior and so on, and then came
back up here to Wichita. I was pretty tired by that time. I hadn’t been getting much
processing; a lot of things had been happening to me.” (Hubbard Professional Course
Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics and Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952)
===“Hubbard, busy writing a new book, refused to lend any credence to these threats or
those of the Elizabeth board and went to Cuba where he completed a 125,000 book…As
their young child had always been under his, not her mother’s care, the child accompanied
him. […]Hubbard made no statements of any kind during all this period” (John Galusha
writes to the BBB of Phoenix on 12 May 1954 folder 4 p. 77-79)—-In 1963 : Kermit Miller,
Oliver sent him a letter with various attachments. The attachments were from the AMA files
that FDA inspector Sherman had copied, so it’s part of the declassified FDA documents. The
link takes you to the Vol 4 of 18 PDF from that release. One of the attachments was a
Washington Times-Herald article from 24 April 1951 saying Hubbard has a mental “ailment”
of paranoid schizophrenia. There’s some kind of handwritten note at the bottom, right under
where it says that Hubbard abducted Alexis on February 23 (1951) that Oliver chopped off
for some reason. The article is on page 410 of the same PDF.
1951 March 14 – This from the AMA files shows the hand of Thorvald Solberg, Overholser,
suspect Bartemeier’s involvement this early as well, plus Austin Smith and Oliver Field’s
influence and interest in shutting down the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation. “STATE
OF NEW JERSEY AGAINST DIANETIC RESEARCH FOUNDATION Source: Exhibits 6 and
7. Exhibit 7: State of New Jersey letter, Department of Law and Public Safety, 3/14/51
requesting information of the AMA to prepare a case charging they were conducting a
school for teaching Dianetics at 275 Morris Ave., Elizabeth, New Jersey which violated the
healing arts practices of this state” (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents pp. 229-242, FDA Inspector
R.D. Sherman detailing AMA files on Hubbard, Scientology)
1951 March 19 – This from the AMA files shows the hand of Thorvald Solberg, Overholser,
suspect Bartemeier’s involvement this early as well, plus Austin Smith and Oliver Field’s
influence and interest in shutting down the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation. “STATE
OF NEW JERSEY AGAINST DIANETIC RESEARCH FOUNDATION Source: Exhibits 6 and
7. Exhibit 6: AMA reply 3/19/51 to Dr. E.S. Hallinger, Secretary of Board of Medical
Examiners, Trenton, New Jersey.” (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents pp. 229-242, FDA Inspector
R.D. Sherman detailing AMA files on Hubbard, Scientology)
1951 April — Spaceship issue #12 The Master. In All Our Yesterdays 31: Spaceship by
Harry Warner Jr., Harry said that he was being helped (co-edited) with Spaceship by another
Brooklyn fan, Saul Diskin who left to go to college late in 1951.
1951 April 15 – Hubbard in Wichita —“And when I got here to Wichita, on April 15, 1951, a
man here very kindly took it upon himself to arrange the affairs of Dianetics and square them
around in some fashion so that Dianetics could go on as a foundation.The affairs of the old
Foundations were not cleaned up, however, and this local Foundation, while perfectly
solvent and carrying on as best it could, was nevertheless being consistently and continually
hit by slopovers from the old Foundations, where the bookkeeping was bad.” (Hubbard
Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics and Dianetics Business –
February 25, 1952) —NOTE THAT THIS PROVES LETTER FROM HIM ALLEGED BY
SARA – is FALSE. He wasn’t even IN Cuba then.
1951 April 15 – FORGERY —alleged date of Letter from Hubbard to Sara —

(Exhibit 5 Leo Bartemeier Council on Mental Health AMA files – article: Dianetics Chief, Ill in
Cuba, Defies Wife (Folder #4 on p. 5.) “L. Ron Hubbard, 40-year-old leader of the Dianetics
cult, is paralyzed in a Cuban military hospital, a wild and incoherent letter from indicated
today…….dated April 15, Havana Cuba…to support charges that her brilliant husband “is
hopelessly insane”. It was part of an affidavit….”Signed “Ron,” the letter boasted that
Hubbard, confined to a “Cuban military hospital” is being “transferred to the United States
next week as a classified scientist immune from interference of all kinds.” “My right side is
paralyzed and getting more so,” the letter, addressed to Mrs. Hubbard continued…”
“Competent psychiatrists have diagnosed her husband as suffering from “a mental ailment
known as paranoid schizophrenia,” Mrs. Hubbard declared in her divorce suit.” Wikipedia
details the full letter being referenced was this, with the source given as a LA Daily News
article from May 1, 1951 titled: “Letter indicates Dianetics founder, baby fled to Cuba”.
(available at newsbank.com) Dear Sara, I have been in the Cuban military hospital and I am
being transferred to the United States next week as a classified scientist immune from
interference of all kinds. Though I will be hospitalized probably a long time, Alexis is getting
excellent care. I see her every day. She is all I have to live for. My wits never gave way
under all you did and let them do but my body didn’t stand up. My right side is paralyzed and
getting more so. I hope my heart lasts. I may live a long time and again I may not. But
Dianetics will last 10,000 years – for the Army and Navy have it now. My Will is all
changed. Alexis will get a fortune unless she goes to you as she would then get nothing.
Hope to see you once more. Goodbye – I love you. Ron —The Church of Scientology claims
it is a forgery written by Northrup’s attorney, Caryl Werner but still… those details are really
something. SOMEONE who knew about Hubbard’s adventures with Thorvald had to have
influenced the creation of that letter, and I wouldn’t put it past Oliver Field to do something,
or “help out” in exactly that way. Sara would have known about it, I would imagine, so I
suppose she could have fed it to her attorney but that’s a dangerous game she was playing.
In any case, since that was all very SERIOUSLY top secret, I do not think Hubbard wrote
that letter. He would know better than that as to what would happen to him if he broke
security like that, but also he would never write about “giving” Dianetics to the army/navy. We
should also factor in the role Sara may have played (and probably did) in Hubbard’s black
intelligence operation to ruin Jack Parsons by literally driving him crazy – all in order to
knock him out of the “rocket science” arena. It seems a fitting kind of kismet that Hubbard
found himself in exactly the same situation as Jack, after he refused Thorvald’s attempt to
force him to do his research for the Navy behind closed doors. That’s even more of a lead
towards that for exactly the reason of revealed top secret details in that supposed letter from
Hubbard, however vague, I think that is what got Hubbard’s attention and got him to
contact Sara and get her the hell out of his life because of her ‘loose lips’, so to speak.
(saying from WWII “loose lips sink ships”) Hubbard had successfully pressured Sara into
retracting her statements barely a month later. —Why would Hubbard write a letter like
that providing such perfect cannon fodder for Sara to use against him in a divorce
proceeding? He wouldn’t.
1951 April 24 – Kermit Miller, Oliver sent him a letter with various attachments. The
attachments were from the AMA files that FDA inspector Sherman had copied, so it’s part of
the declassified FDA documents. The link takes you to the Vol 4 of 18 PDF from that
release. One of the attachments was a Washington Times-Herald article from 24 April 1951
saying Hubbard has a mental “ailment” of paranoid schizophrenia. There’s some kind of
handwritten note at the bottom, right under where it says that Hubbard abducted Alexis on
February 23 (1951) that Oliver chopped off for some reason. The article is on page 410 of
the same PDF.
1951 May — Marvel Science Stories contained positive articles on dianetics from L. Ron
Hubbard and Theodore Sturgeon
1951 May 1 – release of supposed “letter” from Hubbard to Sara —May 1, 1951 titled: “Letter
indicates Dianetics founder, baby fled to Cuba”. also see (Exhibit 5 Leo Bartemeier Council
on Mental Health AMA files – article: Dianetics Chief, Ill in Cuba, Defies Wife (Folder #4 on
p. 5.)
1951 – May 7-11 —–Leo Bartemeier takes the chair of the American Psychiatric
Association Presidency. 1951 September – Leo Bartemeier became the 80th president of
the American Psychiatric Association (1951-1952). See his presidential speech here.
(Example “Presidential Page” here) —This third presidential election of Leo’s is billed as:
“the only psychiatrist to win the Triple Crown.” (Leo’s papers) —Leo succeeded his
junior from the WWII commission and Truth Drug committee member John C. Whitehorn.
Leo now has the clout to give the AMA directions, even more than he did before through
John Whitehorn.
1951 May 9 – On page 96 of Volume 4 of 18 we see proof that Oliver Field and Sara
Northrup Hubbard’s attorney, Caryl Warner were working together to “get” Hubbard. There’s
even a handwritten note saying “interesting!” routed directly to Oliver Field, with a nice big
official stamp of the AMA Investigation bureau at the bottom dated May 9, 1951. Nice timing,
given the Dianetics book publishing date of May 9, 1950, don’t you think?
1951 April/May — ODD magazine #9 In what looks to be early 1951, April or May after
Harry’s announcement in March (whoever made the PDF has the date wrong because it’s
talking about Nolacon which hadn’t happened yet) Creep, Creep, Creep, go the agitators
behind the scenes and then – “Duggie” and “Rich” (Richard Elsberry) in a section called
Nothing Serious by Elsberry, were all fired up and complaining about Dianetics being at the
upcoming Nolacon, They appear to be soliciting attacks and trying to drum up anti-support. I
think it’s Richard doing the tirading about it, and he specifically refers to Harry Moore, the
backer of the convention as a “dianetics backer”. At the end Duggie adds “(((YES, what
about you? If you have any views about this question, we will be glad to print all that space
will allow for in our next issue.)))”
1951 April/May — Spaceship #12 – It looks to me that Hubbard or one of his friends may
have become aware of this Saul Diskin crap, because in the last issue that Diskin
co-edited #12 (came out some time before the July 1951 issue), there was an article from B.
Chandler “giving cautious approval to the use of dianetics, after 23 hours of processing” and
recommended to other fans to try the discipline with care. Harry Warner noted that similar
stories about LSD had been being tested in the fanzines, which is interesting since LSD
experimentation was still Top Secret under Projects CHATTER and BLUEBIRD then.
Silverberg, or maybe we’d be more accurate saying its Saul Diskin? had jumped right on the
bandwagon in this issue, positioning Dianeticians such as Chandler thusly: “The lunatic
fringe is here in fandom, and we’ve been forced to put up with them and laugh at their
cementing the idea that Dr. Wertham, Austin Smith, and his pet bulldog Oliver Field are just
all over the pulps and fanzines, infiltrating them. That is exactly the kind of thing they did,
got other authors to do their dirty work to make it look more like it was everywhere and not
an organized, solicited, campaign. Dr. Wertham, himself an Igor-type, was asked to attack
Hubbard and Dianetics and he did.
1951 June – This is another World First reveal I just found —-As per Dr. Plunkett’s testimony
in Senate Hearings on Illicit Narcotics of July 1955, in June of 1951 the AMA established
the committee on nervous and mental diseases. It was renamed the Council on Mental
Health in 1955. A man named Leo Henry Bartemeier, a Roman Catholic educated at a
Jesuit center in Kansas – HE was its first chairman, a position he held for a decade The
other members were: Lauren H. Smith vice chairman, Richard J. Plunkette secretary, Walter
H. Baer, Hugh T. Carmichael, Francis M. Forster, George E. Gardner, Francis J. Gerty
(another Catholic) and M. Ralph Kaufman. Notes: Leo also listed himself as a member of
the board of directors of the WFMH and that the AMA Narcotics committee is a SUB
committee of Leo’s committee. —From Leo’s position as chairman, he would help shepherd
exactly what drugs etc. would be “allowed” – and profited from – to fulfill the Vatican
agenda as well as that of the British faction of these slavemasters. This wasn’t just any old
Catholic. No, this was one who took direction from and obtained permission for just about
everything he did of importance professionally, from one of the most vicious and duplicitous
popes ever – Pope Pius XII. —“The file on this subject was kept for several years in the
office of our Council on Mental Health.: (Oliver Field letter ) — That’s who was presiding
over the files on Hubbard, Dianetics and Scientology and the ATTACKS as well,
obviously, and yet for 60 years now? There has not been one word about this from ANY
supposed “researcher” out there. Not even from black-opper into the AMA’s files for the
Guardian Office, Peter Joseph Lisa. Well, you know, apparently they’re all too busy lying to
their followers/recruits and chasing down Fairy Tale “leads” about Watergate, the Illuminati,
Jewish Bankers, Two Ron’s and lord knows what else. Very important stuff, you know. —This
Pope Pius XII foot soldier was leading mental health “authority” positions in this country and
was secretly in league with trying to destroy L. Ron Hubbard and his nascent Dianetics. It
wasn’t to protect humanity, and you can take that to the bank. Not with the monstrous Pius
XII involved.
1951 June 11 – 1951 June —“and when he became aware that they had been made,
ordered his separated wife to him, had her sign a confession to perjury…”(John Galusha
writes to the BBB of Phoenix on 12 May 1954 folder 4 p. 77-79)—-FDA Inspector Sherman
doesn’t seem to note that Sara Northrup retracted her rather alarming statements about
her husband, but it’s also somewhat obvious that Hubbard composed this document, found
in folder #4 (p. 63) dated 11 June 1951, that he had Sara sign. It was witnessed by John
Maloney and Chas (Charles) Leonard. The thing about this document, the premise of it, that
Sara’s statements about Hubbard were FALSE? That includes this probably bogus letter
about “giving Dianetics” to the Army and Navy etc.—I, Sara Northrup Hubbard, do hereby
state that the things I have said about L. Ron Hubbard in courts and the public prints
have been grossly exaggerated or entirely false. I have not at any time believed
otherwise than that L. Ron Hubbard was a fine and brilliant man. I make this statement of my
own free will for I have begun to realize that what I have done may have injured the science
of dianetics, which in my studied opinion may be the only hope of sanity in future
generations. I was under enormous stress and my advisers insisted it was necessary for
me to carry through an action as I have done. There is no other reason for this statement
than my own wish to make atonement for the damage it may have done. In the future I wish
to lead a quiet and orderly existence with my little girl far away from the enturbulating
influences which have ruined my marriage. Signed Sara Northrup HubbardWitnessed John
W. Maloney and Chas [Charles] Leonard.—Advisers? See May 9 1951 entry.
1951 July — Nolacon Bulletin #2 It looks to me that the Austin Smith/Oliver Field duo is hard
at work trying to disrupt the scheduled symposium on Dianetics. Harry points out that
Norwescon (the Portland one that Bob Johnson attended) “didn’t prevue their session on
Dianetics” and that “It was one of the two with the highest attendance.” Harry notes that
now (since March) he has “a dozen or so guys” that simply “WILL NOT PLAY unless we
agree to play it all their way. We can’t have even one 1-2-hour seminar or they will stay
away.” There’s more interesting points as well, but this whole “rejection” pseudo-grass roots
campaign sounds…organized to me.
1951 July — Spaceship #13 Apparently there was a new approach thought up, probably
because people weren’t quite falling for all this staged “follow the pied piper” criticism of
Boggs, Silverberg/Diskin et al. p. 22 has an interesting supposed “counterblast from a
non-skeptic”. Marion Z Bradly writes: “Ron Hubbard was a qualified s-f writer and also a
qualified scientist. Whether or not you agree with his dianetics follery, his article was
interesting and reasonable logical and his NAME ALONE is a high drawing-card. (Or was,
previous to the Engram racket.)” She also positions Hubbard with Rosicrucians. If you look
at this sampling of ads in fanzines from AMORC (rosicrucians) at the Havelin Collection –
They started their digitalization project in 2015 – it’s actually pretty interesting as to Dianetics
claims and especially the later Scientology “advanced” levels.
1951 – Spring? The Smith/Field attacks and the black operations to ruin his life bear fruit.
Hubbard’s marriage to his second wife Sara Northrup broke down, Hubbard takes refuge in
Cuba and dictates his next book on SoundScriber discs in Havana.
1951 August – Hubbard publishes Science of Survival. It is clear from the following passage
that Hubbard knows WHO is behind the total onslaught of attacks on him – Thorvald. This is
why he says this in the book: This form of hypnotism has been a carefully guarded secret of
certain military and intelligence organizations. It is a vicious war weapon and may be of more
use in conquering a society than the atom bomb. Pain-drug-hypnosis is a wicked extension
of narco-synthesis, the drug hypnosis used in America only during and since the last war.
But pain-drug-hypnosis, due mainly to the intent of the operator, is a much more vicious
procedure. The Foundation undertook some tests with regard to the effectiveness of
pain-drug-hypnosis and found it so appallingly destructive to the personality…
Pain-drug-hypnosis is so effectively destructive that the Foundation has ceased
experimentation along this line, having already learned enough and refusing to
endanger the sanity of individuals. –That was him hitting back at Thorvald and Overholser
for their secret attack-pack hitting at him for saying “No” to them (and refusing his 12
February challenge) even though he still did the research anyway. Childish, really. But not
non-understandable.
1951 August – Wichita – Hubbard attacked right after publishing Science of Survival—“The
affairs of the old Foundations were not cleaned up, however, and this local Foundation, while
perfectly solvent and carrying on as best it could, was nevertheless being consistently and
continually hit by slopovers from the old Foundations, where the bookkeeping was bad. To
this day I don’t know if there is a set of books for the old Foundations. There are some bank
accounts and canceled checks. Accountants will go round and round for a week or two, and
then they will suddenly come out and say, “I can’t do anything about it.” People will look at
those books and they just practically faint. The U.S. government looks at it and says, “Hm, it
would be very interesting if . . .” but they can’t even make enough sense out of it to get a suit
on their hands. It is very grim.These affairs were not wound up, and the windup of them
kicked back this last August [1951] into this local Foundation here. A $189 bill was leveled
at the local Foundation and a receivership for this local Foundation was demanded. It
was not prepared or contested in court by the officers of the current Foundation. And the
receivership was planted just like that, and then this Foundation had to give a bond.”
(Hubbard Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics and Dianetics
Business – February 25, 1952)
1951 August 17 – Dr. J.A. Winter’s book copyrighted – now criticizing Hubbard and
Dianetics. Winter’s book was titled: A doctor’s report on dianetics: theory and
therapy.—-Sounds like somebody, Winter, made a “deal” to get out of AMA trouble —the
book contains a foreword by Frederick “fitz” Perls who was A German “gestalt”
psychotherapist that was an associate/friend of BOTH Wertham and Leo Bartemeier.
Interjection –
To further understand just how vicious and aggressive the stir-the-pot activities were by this
time from our dynamically insane duo of Smith & Field from the AMA, with Thorvald lurking
in the background like some ghoul, and Vatican foot soldier Leo Bartemeier presiding over
the new AMA Council on Mental Health – I bet you don’t know what happened at that
Nolacon, just before the Dianetics segment was about to start.
1951 September 1 – 3 —Nolacon I: A Torrid Affair by Sam Moskowitz Nolacon I, New
Orleans. “In the morning, after an opening address about how the atomic age isn’t so bad
and an address by Sam Moskowitz, “A real donnybrook developed, kindled by those who
did not want to permit a scheduled session on Dianetics to be held. It finally went on,
retaining 27 people.”. You can see photos from the Nolacon here. I’ve pulled some out that I
think are relevant and also aren’t probably known about by Scientology historians. Photos of
Harry B. Moore, Theodore Sturgeon, Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman, L Ron Hubbard’s
literary agent, Sam Merwin, friend of L. Ron Hubbard
1951 – November — “Science Fiction Bookcase” Amazing Stories, Nov. 1951: 158-59. After
Nolacon, Sam Merwin reviewed Hubbard’s Typewriter in the Sky and Fear.
1951 – Mid/Late — The Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951 James
Blish also did a rather tongue-in-cheek story lampooning the depictions of Hubbard as a
“cult” leader then saturating the press (courtesy of Austin Smith, JAMA editor and his pitbull
George Field). It was a fanzine story called The Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel #16, in
mid to late 1951. He described his character as the “red-haired man” who was one of the
“Council” (p. 33) and then directly called him Elron (p. 35). I decided to do my own review of
the story just now, and as it turns out others characterizations of it are completely off. And I
mean WAY off. As I suspected, the character of Hubbard is positioned with Mahrt, the
opponent of the “giants” called Warriors of the Day who act omnipotent but aren’t and how
they are against Mahrt and Elron and are afraid of “Mahrt”. That’s the first thing, now I’ll
make a few notes of key points. Xota was a totally telepathic world, all living things down to
blades of grass. Tipton was the “chosen of Mahrt” somehow transported from Earth to Xota.
Meeting the council: both men were described as having “postures that bespoke years of
command worn easily and well.” Tipton is told that “Mahrt is the embodiment of all the forces
of mental darkness and evil.” The “Warriors of the Day” are described as the “advancing
hordes of an interstellar civilization, spreading inward from the outermost limb of the galaxy.
Unless something unguessable can be done, they will engulf Xota as they have engulfed a
thousand other worlds.” Mahrt is actually the key enemy of these “warriors”. Tipton and the
talking giant cat have an argument, Tipton ends up on the warriors ship where they say they
invented the myth of Mahrt as part of figuring out militarily how to defeat a totally telepathic
planet. He knew they were lying, that Mahrt was real. Connecting telepathically with Mahrt,
he teleports back to Mahrts temple. “What about Elron?” Tipton says to the girl he meets in
the temple, as to what his standing is about Mahrt. “He has all the earmarks of a ‘suspect
everything’ personality, and from what I’ve been able to observe of his intelligence, should
be more dangerous than Yrinon and Lanja together. I wouldn’t back him against Chrestos, I
don’t think, but against the two humans he’s a sure thing.” The girl answers that Elron is our
high priest. They go to Elron who wants Tipton put in irons and wants to kill him in a ritual.
At the ritual, Mahrt inhabits Tipton, things don’t go as planned. Elron hoped to be the “sword”
and was humiliated that Tipton was instead. Now here is a direct parallel to real life – the
book says: “When a man has built up an elaborate organization, founded in the hope
of perpetuating itself forever, the arrival of an event which promises to deprive that
organization of meaning within a year or so could hardly be welcome.” This is a
reference to the arrival of the first Austin Smith/ Oliver Field backed moves to destroy the
HDRF. Blish speaks of a myth system, where Hubbard as Elron is “far more a servant of the
Warriors than any other person on Xiota” which is perhaps Blish recognizing the Hubbard
then covert CIA involvement. Then there’s an interesting discussion of the Warriors
corrupting the telepathic Xotans with the cult of Mahrt, “the evil god who sleeps in the back
of every telepathi’s brain.” The real Mahrt grants Tipton the power of “the sleeping planetary
mind” needing “never again fear the psychic probes of the Warriors of the day.” There’s
various battling and another visit with the warriors to rescue the girl and then the story turns
and Tipton is really Mahrt and he had created himself as a fragment, suppressed the
memory and now needed to rejoin because of the suppression of the I am We are Mahrt
collective mind. It continues, sounding like something out of an acid trip (LSD). Then the
“fist” of Mahrt struck and broke the Warriors of the day. Long story short, the supposed
railing against Hubbard as “high priest” of the “cult of Mahrt” was actually a very, very subtle
lampooning of OTHER forces at work in regarding human potentiality, plus a collective “God”
imagery mixed in, to boot. It ends with a “new Sword” was being forged…a Kodiak bear, to
strike against the suppression of knowledge of a “racial consciousness”. Ending with: “On
Earth, a whimpering creature stirs, and opens too-wise eyes upon the forests of the great
North. It is tiny now, but in later years it will be great; and a trail to nowhere awaits it. -A
Kodiak bear.” That’s entirely possible to be a reference to the spiritual subject Hubbard was
then in the process of forming in 1951, Scientology, put together with the old Kodiak bear
story Hubbard liked to tell or…it’s a reference to something much older based in the North
that I won’t go into right now. You can read more about how Blish’s story was resurrected
and twisted beyond recognition to be Elron Elray and the Galactic Federation by Captain
Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org, the so-called “freezone Scientologists” currently led by Max and
Erica Hauri, whom my husband Mike McClaughry once accurately characterized as a trap
for people leaving the Church of Scientology) and a previous Stanford Research Insitute pal
of CIA remote-viewer program leader Hal Puthoff.
1952 – Leo Bartemeier’s master – It was Pius XII that gave approval (1952) for
experimenting on people with mind-affecting drugs. —And meanwhile, there’s the
Vatican following suit with the other “implant” happy slavemaster factions – Pope Pius XII is
going to basically give his approval of experimenting on those deemed feeble-minded or
lunatics as labelled by state approved psychiatrists and exactly when both the British, the
Vatican (universities and mental hospitals) and Drug Company reps and psychiatrists like
William Long are going to start testing drugs that affect the person’s mind. (McClaughry,
George Hunter White: Mkultra and UFO years 2018)
1952 January 7 —“They appealed it. [the receivership] January 7, 1952, an appeal was
supposed to be filed at the Court of Appeals in Topeka. There was ample time to prepare it
— clear from August to January — but it was not prepared and it was not filed. I did not even
know it was the closing date until the eighth of January. It was too late. As a consequence, a
receivership on this Foundation was confirmed. A bond was posted again. And several
lawyers around town, evidently fed suits by Dun and Bradstreet (which interested itself in
collecting suits against the Foundation, according to a report I get from one of Dun and
Bradstreet’s lawyers), evidently did this very interesting trick: they leveled at this Foundation
all the eastern Foundation debts. One man came through very nobly and he paid off all
those debts; there was some $11,000 outstanding, I think. When he had them all paid
and they had a journal entry ready to go into court dismissing the receivership — the
Foundation was going to be in the clear — this Dun and Bradstreet lawyer, without any
turning around on his agreement, reportedly said, “We have another suit here for $5,000,
and you have to pay up or shut up. Now, we’ve held up the journal entry.” Having already
pulled $11,000 out, he mysteriously thought that the Foundation could produce another
$5,000. And so it went by the boards, because it was obvious that he would keep finding
debts here and there where debts had never been listed and just keep knocking this
Foundation to pieces.” (Hubbard Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of
Dianetics and Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952) ===See that part that says: “One
man came through very nobly…”? That’s Don Purcell. —“Meanwhile the Elizabeth
Foundation over which Hubbard had never had power beyond his personality, sold itself to
one Don G. Purcell, an oilman of Kansas.” (John Galusha writes to the BBB of Phoenix on
12 May 1954 folder 4 p. 77-79) —The letter also details what happened, theoretically, with
Purcell that led to the falling out resulting in Hubbard resigning in February 1952
whereupon he moved to Phoenix.
1952 February 12 — Hubbard resigns the local Wichita Foundation. “However, watching the
operation of the local Foundation and seeing that it was terribly enturbulated most of the time
about its indebtednesses, and finding out that I could not put an adequate school into
existence there, on February 12 I resigned from this Foundation. I sold them back my stock
in this Foundation and severed connections with it completely. And then just a few days ago
— this was quite surprising to me — the local Foundation filed voluntary bankruptcy in order
to shut off this line of suits that were continuing to come in. I don’t know whether the local
Foundation is going to continue to operate under its own name or not. This I don’t know. I no
longer have any interest in this local Foundation at all. But when I resigned February the
twelfth, it was to establish Hubbard College, a graduate school for auditors. And the plan
of Hubbard College is to teach Dianetics the best that it can be taught and issue degrees in
the subject, which we have a perfect right to do. It is a plan to make a film school, so that a
Bachelor of Dianetics will be able to view some fifty hours of lectures and demonstrations on
sixteen-millimeter sound film. And as you can see, this would be quite a course of
instruction. Now, this organization has several associates out across the country that it is
enfranchising, and its business is going along very happily and very cheerfully. As a matter
of fact, it is not even vaguely influenced or impinged upon by Foundation affairs, for an
excellent reason: Nobody ever challenged my right to teach Dianetics. The Foundation
control was in my hands for, I think, three minutes once. That was the estimated time that
it took for me to sign six stock certificates as having received them and sign them as
having given them back to the local Foundation on February 12 this year. They had not
issued me any stock, and in order for me to resign I had to accept my stock and turn it back.
So I had never even owned any stock in the Foundation until that moment.” (Hubbard
Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics and Dianetics Business –
February 25, 1952)
1952 February – Re Hubbard college – “Well, it is formed; it is here in Wichita. It is just on its
trembling, stumbling small feet right now, but it undoubtedly can progress. One of the things
it will do is make widely available instruction in Dianetics as has not been made available
before — probably make available correspondence courses and so forth, in it. Now, I only
did this at a time when Dianetics became a complete package.This school down here, for
instance — the university, the college — is going to teach an extended course, a nightly
course. That is, a person can go five nights a week, and they emerge at the other end of this
with a certification and so on.” (Hubbard Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress
of Dianetics and Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952)
1952 – Hubbard moves to Phoenix.
1952 March — Wertham suddenly re-activates and this time publicizes in Joe-average
media, the value of mescaline. In the Atlantic Monthly #189 of March 1952 (pp. 52–55)
Wertham takes an excerpt of a segment titled: “A psychosomatic study of my–self.” that was
included in a soon to be published book called When Doctors Are Patients and retitles it: A
study of pain. In that segment, its notable that he discusses mescaline and its effect on his
pain. In the opening of the article, you can see that there is some CURRENT study of
subjects having experimentally induced psychosis that is referred to only in the vaguest
possible way. Dr. Fredric Wertham, Director of the Psychiatric division at Queens General
Hospial in New York, was obliged to undergo a series of painful operations without
general anaesthetics. In a sense he was his own guinea pig, and the notes he made on
pain have proved of professional interest. His article is drawn from the book: When Doctors
are Patients… Such a contrast between euphoria and anxiey occurs in experimentally
induced mescaline psychosis, as shown by the retrospective accounts of subjects.
*Interestingly enough Harry Warner Jr. specifically noted that “success” stories about LSD
had been being tested in the fanzines in 1951. —-Wertham’s mescaline article inadvertently
proves the power of command during what was literally an engramic incidents – his own.
Which all put together makes his “book review” of Dianetics about as dubious as they come.
1952 March – Wertham’s buddies, the editors of the American Journal of Psychotherapy,
allow the highlighting of Dr. Winter’s critical of Dianetics book – published in August 1951.
—-Wertham may actually still be the President of the Association for the Advancement of
Psychotherapy and the co-editor of the American Journal of Psychotherapy (1943-1951,
Senate Hearings (p. 80).
1953 January 31 — Oliver Field was targeting any doctor who became involved in
Dianetics, as this response letter from January 31, 1953 from F. R. Crowgey of the
Columbiana County Medical Society shows – about a doctor named Paul H. Beaver of
Leetonia, Ohio. (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p. 353) Apparently Oliver was trying (he hoped)
to get the guy positioned as a quack, but this letter kind of killed THAT idea. “He is a man of
unquestionable integrity with high standing in the community and well liked by his
associates. He became interested in Dianetics while visiting in California abuot 3 years ago
and has literally fallen for its teachings “hook, line and sinker.” I know that he, his wife and
son have been “audited” themselves. He carries on a legitimate practice and practices in our
two local hospitals without Dianetics.[…] I am some that most of we associates have pretty
much the same feeling toward Dr. Beaver which is that we like him very much and trust him
implicitedly, but that we do get a little bored with his Dianetic enthusiam.” Then there’s this
odd statement after telling Oliver to contact a Dr. Louis J. Karnosh who was the head of
Neuro-psychiatry at Cleveland Clinic, he says: “I do not wish to imply that Dr. Karnosh is
interested in Dianetics nor that Dr. Beaver is psychic, but they were schoolmate…”
Psychic?? What’s that all about…I have no idea. Yet. It ends with something that is very
spooky to me, look at the almost begging to Oliver and the AMA to wit that this is ok,
right???? “…would like to ask if we are right in assuming that no harm is being done
since Dr. Beaver does not use Dianetics in our hospitals.”
1953 – the Monte Durham incident. I wrote a series once covering a document from 1946
called: The Psychiatry of Enduring Peace and Social Progress – and one of my segments
was about Sullivan, Fortas, Chapman and Southard, all featured in that document one way
or another. Attorney (and judge) Abe Fortas was known in Washington circles to have a
serious interest in psychiatry, still a controversial science at the time, and was considered an
“expert” in it as well. In 1953 this expertise led to his appointment to represent the indigent
Monte W. Durham, whose insanity defense had been rejected at trial two years earlier,
before the United States Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia Circuit. Durham’s
defense had been denied because the District Court had applied the M’Naughten Rules,
requiring that the defense prove the accused didn’t know the difference between right and
wrong for an insanity plea to be accepted. Adopted by the British House of Lords in 1843,
generations before modern psychiatry, this test was still in near universal use in U.S.
jurisprudence over a century later. The effect of this standard was to exclude psychiatric
and psychological testimony almost entirely from the legal process. In a critical turning
point for U.S. criminal law, the Court of Appeals accepted Fortas’ call to abandon the
M’Naghten Rule and allow for testimony and evidence regarding defendants’ mental state.
A precedent setting case indeed, and one that Overholser was intimately involved with, as
well as peripherally Fredric Wertham.
1953 March – Letter to Oliver Field from Else Kohede of the Wayne County Medical Society,
telling Oliver that the Police Department there is secretly attempting to prove that the
members of the Dianetic Associate in Detroit are practicing medicine without a license, and
that to do this they must first prove that one of the members charged has “guilty knowledge”.
Else wants to know from Oliver if any Dianetic Association in the U.S. has been prosecuted
or even warned, as that would be “very helpful to their case”. (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p.
356) —Oliver uses this 10 years later in his letter to Kermit Miller.(Vol 4 of 18 FDA
documents p. 405)
1954 April 19 – Fredric Wertham published his book Seduction of the Innocent on April 19,
1954 – said to be a day that has “lived in infamy” for comics fans. Quoted website – “Matters
reached a head in 1954 with the publication of psychiatrist Fredric Wertham’s Seduction of
the Innocent (Rinehart & Co, 1954), which led to a wave of censorship and a stigma
against the art form that lingers to this day. Wertham asserted, among other claims, that
Batman and Robin were romantically involved, that Wonder Woman’s strength and
independence gave little girls the wrong idea about women’s place in society, and that crime
comics taught children how to commit crimes.” —We have Wertham spearheading and being
the public face yet again, this time in yet another psychiatry should rule the world! rather
obvious move. One both promoting psychiatry’s role in policing what is and isn’t “criminal”
behavior ,as well as now entering our governing process (the Senate) with a none too thinly
veiled attack on Jeffersonian democracy – the Ban the Comics event. —After Wertham’s
manuscript collection at the Library of Congress was unsealed in 2010, Carol Tilley, a
University of Illinois librarian and information science professor, investigated his research
and found his conclusions to be largely baseless. In a 2012 study, Tilley wrote “Wertham
manipulated, overstated, compromised, and fabricated evidence—especially that
evidence he attributed to personal clinical research with young people—for rhetorical gain.”
(wikipedia cite: Tilley, Carol (2012). “Seducing the Innocent: Fredric Wertham and the
Falsifications that Helped Condemn Comics”. Information & Culture. 47 (4): 383–413. ) –
Bringing out Wertham in this particular public way, was no accident. It was another fifth
column action of psychiatry. As one of Wertham’s oldest British colleagues John Rawlings
Rees put it – Let us all, therefore, very secretly be “fifth columnists”[…] long term planning
…the right kind of propaganda.” fifth column – a group of secret supporters of an enemy
that engage in espionage, sabotage, and other subversive activities within the borders of a
nation. —Rees also had said: we have done much to infiltrate …a number of professions.
…the two most difficult are law and medicine. That is what Wertham is doing with our
U.S. Senate now – our law-making body. —-the “opposition” in this case – Lauretta Bender
who “pioneered” BRUTAL treatment of children, using ECT, metrazol, insulin shock therapy
on children as young as three years old, while Wertham is heading up the child psychiatry
unit at Bellevue. —-Gabriel Mendes said: “The impact of Wertham’s perceived
unprofessional behavior—his duplicity, “aggressiveness,” and self-deception—is crucial
for understanding the path he followed…” Every good controlled opposition* needs an
opponent, someone to demonize/champion right? Enter Fredric Wertham. *Controlled
Opposition definition – a strategy in which an individual, organization, or movement is
covertly controlled or influenced by a 3rd party and the controlled entity’s true purpose is
something other than its publicly stated purpose. The controlled entity serves a role of
mass deception, surveillance or political/social manipulation. The controlled party is
portrayed as being in opposition to the interests of the controlling party.
1954 April 21 – 2PM EST – Senate hearings into Comic books — Wertham opens (listen at
2:29) by saying that he was the first psychiatrist given a grant by the NRC to do research on
the brain, and that what he did in Germany was supposedly just studying spirochetes and
brain syphilis. Then he says; “It came in good stead when I later researched comic books.”
Of course, now that we know what was really going on there in Germany, the VIOLENCE
Wertham was learning from his mentors, sterilization, etc., that statement makes a kind of
twisted macabre sense now. There’s some other really priceless statements you can listen
to, like these: at around 16:19 the Senator from Missouri asks “that anyone who could draw
that sort of thing would have to have some singular twist or abnormality in his mind or am I
wrong in that?” Wertham’s answer is they found that assumption to be wrong. Portrays the
comic creators as “these people have to make it this way or else”. Wertham has Hitler on the
brain, I think. Actually, that was lampooned too in the movies. Another tidbit is that Wertham
is clearly taking Rees’s fifth column instructions to heart, weaving psychiatry into all kinds of
literature, for example, listen at around 18:30. The man actually had the gall to portray a
declamatio* fictional character named St. Augustine as the “first modern scientific
psychologist” because as a young man in Rome he saw these “very bloody sophistic
spectacles” and he didn’t like it. Wertham then works in his particular angle into an already
fictional character (see this – the section on Blaise Pascal) and says that St. Augustine
“became unconsciously delighted with it and he kept on going. In other words, he was
tempted, he was seduced by this mass appeal and he went. And I think it’s exactly the
same thing with children…” (meaning comics). * Declamatio is a rhetorical device (a
technique) wherein a writer or speaker invents a character of the past (otherwise known as
BACKDATING) and further invents things said and done by the ancient fictitious character. In
my article: Backdated Overpopulation Myths and the Forging of The Bible starting at this
point: “The Greek myth of Deucalion and Pyrrha” I take the reader through actual evidence
of how every single supposed source or author are actually all declamatios. Not one
exception.—If you borrow the 1947 book In The World Within: Fiction Illuminating Neuroses
of our Time, from the internet archive, you’ll see that there is an extensive introduction by
Fredric where he just rambles on and on inserting more of these kind of ridiculous “ancient”
psychiatry precedents into history and literature. Truly painful to read, I must say, but
Fredric’s intense anglophilia shows through loud and clear, he’s following Rawlings-Rees’s
1940 instructions to the letter.—-And how about this one, listen starting around 26:38 “one
other comic that we have found to be particular injurious to the ethical development of
children and those are the Superman comic books. They arouse in children fantasies of
sadistic joy in seeing people punished….we call this the Superman complex and in these
the crime is always REAL. Superman’s crimes are GOOD…show complete contempt for the
police…” You mean like the joy and sadistic pleasure that Bender and Wertham had torturing
patients with DEATH “therapies” and how their crimes in so doing were GOOD for them, and
how psychiatrists consider themselves the SUPERMEN of modern society? That what you
mean, Dr. Wertham?—You can also listen at around 51:12, where Wertham even tries ye
old crying children (in basements) routine to shore up his “evil comics” routine, and how he’s
really “not after [unintelligible] censorship” and tries to portray himself as heroic because “ I
have been followed…threatened…its a miracle my book was published.” I don’t know about
that, but I do know he was lampooned and even positioned as a communist. —-My personal
favorite though is this one – listen at 1:04:02 where one of the senators says “Hitlers theory
of telling the same story over and over again” and another senator says “the big lie”.
Wertham says “yeah well I hate to say that, Senator, but Hitler was a beginner compared to
the comic book industry.They get the children much YOUNGER.” Comic Books = worse
than Hitler?
1954 April 21 – 2PM EST – Senate hearings into Comic books — Bill Gaines, the publisher
for EC Comics (horror comics) and the man just positioned as Hitler by Wertham, his
testimony followed Wertham and it did not go well, to put it mildly. He said some really stupid
and self-incriminating things. If you listen at around 1:12:36 Gaines starts off trying to create
an atmosphere of sympathy and good fame because his dead father was intrumental in
starting the comic book industry, then he quotes an 1800’s legal decision by Judge Woolsey,
“It is only with the NORMAL person that the law is concerned.” – which is like… What? What
the hell does that have to do with anything?… and if you jump to around 1:31:20 or so you
are going to see where he just kills his credibility, just tanks himself completely. One of the
Senators sets him up by showing him one of his comics about a story about a little girl in a
bad situation who emerges triumphant as a result of murder and torture. Gaines says:
“That’s right. But, it’s fiction.” The Senator asks him if he thinks this does any good for
children and Gaines says: “I don’t think it does them a bit of good, sir, but I don’t think
it does them a bit of harm either.” —-Yep, that about killed it right there. You can read his
full testimony in the official Senate Hearings publication, starting on page 78.
1954 April 22 — As to Wertham’s twin in this controlled opposition extravaganza, Bender,

her testimony was on April 22, 1954. You can see a nice plaintext outline of the various
testimonies here, and see hers in the official Senate Publication here.
1954 — EC went out of business as a result of these hearings and the Comic book “industry”
instituting a self-policing policy as a defense against government regulation, like the movie
industry had done decades earlier. The Comics Magazine Association of America’s (CMAA)
was established with its Comics Code Authority (CCA) whose motto was “Good shall triumph
over evil.” Horror and other comics literally disappeared overnight, and new ones came out
bearing the official stamp of the CCA But, Gaines went right out and founded Mad magazine
which became even more of an icon for lampooning cartoonists to thumb their noses at
authority. —Kefauver’s Senate hearing was about power, about shifting money away from
EC comics, controlling the remaining rest, and more importantly creating a “need” for
children to watch television which was also, just as John Rawlings Rees had said in 1940,
an infiltrated medium of propaganda sending the “right” messages. —Comic book fans were
none too please with Wertham’s antics. A 14-year-old boy actually created his own comics
lampooning Wertham. Even Jerry Lewis movies got in on the fun.
1954 – Reprise 1942 Office of Censorship with additions – I suspect another actual reason
(rather than just the one Wertham blathers on about) for the attack on comics had more to
do with things getting revealed in them, however cheesily, that they didn’t want getting
revealed. Wings #15 from 1941 is one example. The issue depicts black cannibal
native-looking people being brainwashed by Mein Kampf (p. 61) but the last page showed
this: March ‘Wings Comics’ Described Radiolocator That Smashed Nazi Raids in England.
Here’s another example talking about Brainwashing in Hong Kong – Headline #74
February 1956. That’s probably a little too close for comfort on what people like Harold G.
Wolff were up to, hence the “approved” positioning with supposed Asian brainwashing of
people. Notice that it sports the Comics Code Authority (CCA) seal. It’s pretty obvious that
Wertham is definitely forwarding someone else’s actual agenda with all this about comics,
but as I said earlier I think his status with the Office of Censorship went to his head and he’s
still trying to be at the forefront of carrying on in the tradition of that kind of clout – which in
this era of Wertham’s history is now called “News Management”. For Wertham, that might as
well read “Comics Management”, the way he’s going about it.
1954 April 24 – Overholser submitted a review of Wertham’s book to the Saturday Review
the April 24, 1954 issue. I have now documented just how close the paths together were of
Dr. Winfred Overholser and Fredric Wertham, but in relation to this 1954 Comic Book
hearings? There is yet another example of the support of Wertham by Overholser. (Big
thanks to lotsoti.org for putting this very important document online.) Overholser is
PROMOTING Fredric’s book “The Seduction of the Innocent” and trying to give it credibility.
As we have already discussed in-depth, Fredric had launched this crusade against comics
back in the late 1940’s, that it was this book which caused a wave of censorship eventually
and a stigma that still exists to this day, and that it was this book that was also later exposed
by his papers as being essentially completely fabricated. And yet? There’s Overholser
helping spearhead promotion of this blatant Psychological Warfare operation ala
Psychological Strategy Board.
1954 — Science Fiction Stories #2 The Turning Wheel Philip K. Dick – did quite the
seriously twisted take-off from Blish’s story.The whole story is very weird, it seems to be
some sort of intentional positioning of Hubbard as a caucasian “god” with futuristic Red
China. There’s talk of sterilization of the “caucs” by one of the bards, etc. The first mention is
a religious saying: “Elron be with you.” The chinese-styled character of the story is one of the
“Bards” were at the top of a caste system. They were “holy men who guided man to
clearness.” Refers to Elron Hu who lived in “the hideous days of the Time of Madness.” with
a VERY weird picture of the great hairy/spider eye of Hubbard presiding over the Dinosaurs
age.Scientology OT levels scholars might find one of the passages interesting because as
Sung-wu, one of the Bards, starts instructing some lowest caste Tinkerist in the way of
Elron-Hu – the first two catechisms are: “First!” snapped Sung-wa. “Who are you?”
“Second! What are you? And the tenth is “Clearness!” (just after Ninth, which is about
death). Which seems to be positioning that one can’t be Clear unless they die.In 1950,
Hubbard’s Dianetics book talked about “demon circuits”. A couple of years later, Hubbard
revealed he really meant those were spirits which he initially called entities or “theta bodies”.
(see this post) Later, he resurrected this as part of what he called advanced operating levels
– OT 3 for short – 1967 where he now called them body thetans. Around two decades later,
David Mayo was sent to “audit” a sick L. Ron Hubbard in the 1980’s. The procedures
developed by David Mayo are known as New Era Dianetics for Operating Thetans – NED
for OTs, or NOTs. New questions were developed for handling the body thetans (demons).
It was said that a body thetan could consider themselves to be any body part – a hair, lung,
blood cell, etc. Therefore the new questions were – 1. What are you? 2. Who are you? The
body thetan was then supposed to realize he was himself and leave the body. The NOTs
series of issues were written by David Mayo, not by L. Ron Hubbard. The original OT levels
were replaced with the new OT levels for OT 4, 5, 6 and 7. (Scientology Roots Chapter 17)
—Dick’s story ends with a rather thinly veiled positioning image of a cult (Dianetics) of
followers worshipping a sci-fi space ship, positioned with (Hubbard) Elron Hu.
1954 – LEO returned to Maryland, this time to head the Seton Psychiatric Institute, one of
the oldest of the nation’s private mental hospitals.(Leo’s papers). And what was that place
about? Oh, you know. Seton Psychiatric Institute was established in 1844 and was the
leading mental health facility in the United States for the treatment of Catholic priests –
the kind that sexually abused children. It was one place where the Vatican HID people from
prosecution for their crimes of sexual abuse. Given that Bartemeier hung with people like
Karl Menninger who told the world that child sexual abuse was actually good for their mental
health, and given the unbelievably high prevalence of homosexual proclivities among both
the German psychiatric immigrants and the Catholic priests.—“A native of Minnesota and a
former monk and priest, Sipe had pursued a career in counseling at the old Seton
Psychiatric Institute, where priests with problems were sent for treatment…Sipe described
the priesthood as a secretive world of emotionally and sexually immature men “locked”
in an adolescent stage of development and poorly prepared in seminary for the celibate life.
[…] In a letter to a bishop several years later, Sipe added this warning: “When men in
authority — cardinals, bishops, rectors, abbots, confessors, professors — are having or have
had an unacknowledged-secret-active-sex life under the guise of celibacy, an
atmosphere of tolerance of behaviors within the system is made operative.” Sipe was widely
criticized by church officials, who insisted, even as the sexual abuse scandal grew and legal
settlements mounted, that celibacy was not the problem. […]The danger is, it will upset the
power structure. The resistance would come from the established male hierarchy; they
don’t want to give up power and entitlement.“(Baltimore Sun, 18 August 2018)—A
secretive world of emotionally and sexually immature men who are obsessed with power and
entitlement, who run and have always run the Catholic church. Still exactly the same as
when they were kicked out of “heaven”, I see. Well. Just a lovely place Seton was. And I’m
absolutely positive that it was Pius XII, virulently and secretly misogynistic and homosexual
his own self, who ordered asked Bertemeier to go there. Note: Richard Sipe has a whole
report on what he found when working for Leo Bartemeier at Seton.
Interjection
From all the above, you can see the level of infiltration of the “mental health” aspect that Leo
Bartemeier was clearly being used for by the Vatican. (and the British slavemasters, for that
matter)
Despite attacking Hubbard on the basis of “hypnosis” and along the lines of the secret
interest in “making people more suggestible” these people simultaneously felt that it had use
and that there was a need for more hypnotists. Because, like many things, it’s an art, and in
order to have a pool to choose from they needed to legitimize it.
And there was Catholic Bartemeier right in the thick of it. Again. It’s one of the few areas
where you can see the two factions of the slavemasters align, is the area of MENTAL and
SPIRITUAL control issues.
Reprise: It was that same man, Pope Pius XI, Pacelli’s (Pius XII) mentor, who said that
there is a Spiritual Battle for the minds of men (Pius XI) —for the evil we must combat is
at its origin primarily an evil of the spiritual order. From this polluted source the
monstrous emanations of the communistic system flow with satanic logic.– Pope Pius XI
DIVINI REDEMPTORIS (On Atheistic Communism) 19 March 1937 —Another way of saying
“spiritual” is mental – in the sense of you are talking about the unseen realm of Man. His
thoughts, his heart, his mind, so to speak. What this Pope is saying is that is what he
wants the focus on. The MINDS of man. His DECISIONS. Which also happens to be the
realm of (and the reason for) propaganda in the first place. Jesuits (and the top Catholic
leaders) are ALL about messing with people’s minds. That’s their real goal
actually.—…[The Jesuit Society] it seeks to rival the Divinity in its knowledge of the
human heart. …with a knowledge of mental architecture unsurpassed… The Novitiate
written in 1846 by former ‘novice’ Jesuit Andrew Steinmetz
1955 April 23 – Making THEIR form of hypnosis “ok” which includes DRUGS – The British
led the way, starting with using their club-over-medicine, the British Medical Association. In
1955 they endorsed hypnosis for “certain purposes”. In their April 23 1955 British Medical
Journal it was recommended that ALL physicians and medical students receive training in
hypnosis.
1958 September 13 – Canada followed the “our hypnosis” line with urging “acceptance” of
the British Medical Association report, then Leo Bartemeier, as head of the AMA Council on
Mental Health, endorsed hypnosis. (Report on Medical Use of Hypnosis, Council on Mental
Health, American Medical Association , JAMA 168:186-189 ( (Sept. 13) ) 1958) The initial
approval by the Council on Mental Health of the American Medical Association stated: The
surgeon, obstetrician, anesthesiologist, internist and general practitioner may legitimately
utilize these technics within the framework of their own particular field of
competence.1—Whereas the report stresses that all who use hypnosis should be cognizant
of its complex nature, it points out that controversy exists as to the hazards of hypnosis. The
A.M.A. was queried about their stand. The question “Has the A.M.A. Committee on Hypnosis
ever published officially any statement defining or implying the dangers in the use of
hypnosis by physicians?” elicited the answer that it had not done so, nor had it authorized
one, and that a member of the committee who states this is “expressing his own personal
opinions.” President of The American Board of Medical Hypnosis, Jerome Schneck
explained that the Board is sponsored by the Society for Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis,
the representative scientific organization in this field since 1949. The board is affiliated with
the Institute for Research in Hypnosis, also incorporated in the state of New York. Leading
members of the Society for Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis served individually as
special consultants to the Council on Mental Health in connection with the 1958 Report
on Hypnosis.—Bartemeier’s allowing and approving of all the AMA-driven attacks on
Hubbard for “using hypnosis” was both spurious and hypocritical, to say the least, and
he (and they) knew it but did it anyway. —and it wasn’t the kind of hypnosis that actually
unites the TWO MINDS – TWO BEINGS. See Pitzer entries and Hubbard 1948-1950.
1958 – Austin E. Smith resigns as JAMA editor becomes “the first president of the
Pharmaceutical Manufacturers Association, later vice chairman of the Warner-Lambert
Company.” (NY Times 1993 obituary) —The Pharmaceutical Manufacturers Association was
the result of a recent merging of the American Drug Manufacturers Association and the
American Pharmaceutical Manufacturers’ Association. Austin served in that position from
1959 until 1965, heading the association through the period when Sen Estes Kefauver
investigated the drug industry.
1959 – 4 months after resigning, it was made public that Austin E. Smith had become the
first full-time, salaried president of the Pharmaceutical Manufacturers Association,
Washington, DC. It was later that he became chairman of the board of directors of Parke,
Davis & Company (now Parke-Davis, a division of Warner-Lambert Company), and then the
board vice chairmen of Warner-Lambert Company, both in Morris Plains, NJ. He also chaired
the board of Sonic Electric Energy Corporation, Randolph, NJ – whatever that is. (NY Times
1993 obituary)
1961 – The corruption that Drug Company Lord Austin Smith (and whoever replaced him),
Oliver Field and the AMA were part of became so bad, so impossible to sweep under the
rug-that-had-no-more-room, that Senator Kefauver had to chair a Committee into the Drug
Industry Antitrust Act in 1961. During those hearings Austin stuck his foot in his mouth and
got caught. He had published a statement in JAMA a few years earlier that said there are
140,000 different medicaments available for physicians to choose from. When Time
magazine reprinted it, Austin CHALLENGED the statement as libel on the drug industry
begging the question: if it was false, why did you publish it then, Austin?
1961 – Oliver Field’s obsession with Wilhelm Reich —He even suspected the dang museum
erected after Reich’s death. Look at this – [1961] the FDA received a letter from Oliver Field,
the director of the American Medical Association, in which the Wilhelm Reich Museum
established in Orgonon is described: “The museum shows some of his paintings, but his
scientific equipment is limited to a very small laboratory with a few glass slides (as he left it) ,
with photographs, scales, oscilloscope, Geiger counter and telescope. The impression one
receives is that this man, in the prime of a possible medical discovery, was clamped into
prison. The library is apparently stocked with recent editions referring to his work. His body
lies in a sarcophagus next to his home, and the trustees are raising money for a monument
to be erected on the premises. I believe an investigation should be instituted to
determine for what purposes the money is being collected through the public sale of tickets.
While I realize no medical problem is now involved, there could be a possibility of a
renewal of Reich’s former teachings on Orgonomy.” (Wilhelm Reich vs. the USA by
Jerome Greenfield, p. 274)—A possibility. Jesus. Could this guy be any more obsessed? He
should have said: “While I realize that anyone reading this will think I’m behaving like a crazy
person because even the tiniest possibility that ANY one might use these teachings just
sends me into paroxysms of red-faced anger. I just can’t help myself.” He’s dead and
someone might be interested anyway? Oh no!—Jerome wrote about this: “This letter is
one of the most explicit expressions of what was only implicit in all the legal proceedings:
that the main purpose of the FDA action was not the concern for the health of people
using the accumulator, but the spread of Reich’s “teachings on Orgonomy.”—Right. What
was it that Austin Smith’s best buddy, Camarillo ghoul Dr. Ravitch said again: “[…] one hears
that the medical profession is really a medical trust that is trying to keep out all forms
of treatment but its own.”—That was very Jacques Ellul of Dr. Ravitch to try and level that as
a “crazy” accusation towards Dianeticians that said that at a meeting Ravitch covertly
attended (hiding his real reason for being there) because… There is quite a bit of evidence
now that is true in far too many cases than it should be, for such an “innocent” and “goodly”
thing as Oliver Field and Austin Smith were supposedly doing. Or as Jacques Ellul put it in
Propaganda: the Formation of Men’s Attitudes — First of all, the propagandist must insist on
the purity of his own intentions and, at the same time, hurl accusations at his enemy. But the
accusation is never made haphazardly or groundlessly. The propagandist will not accuse the
enemy of just any misdeed; he will accuse him of the very intention that he himself has
and of trying to commit the very crime that he himself is about to commit.
1963 January 4 – 1963 FDA raid
1963 – An interesting side note is Exhibit 41: which is this odd truncated letter from Oliver
Field defining Scientology as “L, Ron Hubbard’s later version of “Dianetics”, which had
such a widespread interest shortly after his book was published…”(Vol 4 of 18 FDA
documents p. 368)—There is also a report presented by Hubbard’s HASI (Hubbard
Association of Scientologists) Report titled: Washington Office Report on Congress of
Quackery by Harold Edwards – after the FDA raid in 1963. (Vol 6 of 18 p.228-236, FDA
documents) It looks as though this is Exhibit 57 of Sherman’s exhibits, but the report is
actually from within scientology’s Ability magazine #48. Who is Harold Edwards? No clue.
Yet.—-An important historical oddity is that within that publication, it looks as though they
had started advertising Hubbards created-for-the-CIA Brainwashing Manual again? (also see
this) Not sure what that’s all about, at the moment, but the address given though? That’s the
address for the HASI. As verified in the July 1957 issue of Galaxy Science Fiction (p. 90) in
which an ad for Hubbard’s book Fundamentals of Thought actually refers to that box 242 etc.
address as the HASI, although it does have an Sa added. Perhaps standing for Scientology
Ads? The ad itself says – The mind technology that was developed for use in Space. It
forms a very good early example of how internal scientology staff were being misled as to
WHO was really behind all this. Both then and the later scientology espionage division, the
Guardian Office, followed in the footsteps of Hubbard’s blindness as to who the REAL
leaders of the attacks on Dianetics/Scientology were. In the 4th page of the report, it says:
“Leader in so indefensible, and lamentable an attack on a long established, honorable
healing profession was the individual bearing the interesting title – Director, Department of
Investigation, American Medical Association – by name, Oliver Field. Curious that a privately
owned business should have a competition control tool like this secret police arm. Adding
volume and authoritative approval to a modern brand of medical despotism was the voice of
Mr. C. Joseph Stetler, legal counsel for the A.M.A. These men expressed themselves most
feelingly for the state of health of Americans, and the towering menace to the well-being and
future of this nation from the smooth talking, morally degenerated “quacks” who “blandly”
offer false hope where no hope exists.” The AMA was the obvious source but again, you will
notice how “Harold Edwards” doesn’t seem to know what’s really behind that.
1963 January 24 —after a long conversation with a man named Kermit Miller, Oliver sent
him a letter with various attachments. The attachments were from the AMA files that FDA
inspector Sherman had copied, so it’s part of the declassified FDA documents. The link
takes you to the Vol 4 of 18 PDF from that release. One of the attachments was a
Washington Times-Herald article from 24 April 1951 saying Hubbard has a mental “ailment”
of paranoid schizophrenia. The article is on page 410 of the same PDF. The entire letter is
actually quite interesting even just for the reason that it shows which items of “bad press” are
Oliver’s favorites 12 years later in 1963. —Look what else he says in that letter —“You may
recall that around 1950 L. Ron Hubbard wrote a book which he called “Dianetics.” He seems
to be in the forefront of this quasireligious group known as “Scientologists”, who apparently
seek to practice what Hubbard wrote about in his book. The file on this subject was kept
for several years in the office of our Council on Mental Health. In answering inquiries on
the subject, that office advised that the Council itself had informally considered and
discussed information coming to it with relation to the Scientologists organizations; that the
Council had not officially expressed an opinion about such organizations, but that the
methods they employ are based on a scientific medical background. ‘ (see 1951 June entry
– that’s Leo Henry Bartemeier, a Roman Catholic educated at a Jesuit center in Kansas –
HE was its first chairman.)—-In the March 1953 entry, there is a letter to Oliver Field from
Else Kohede of the Wayne County Medical Society, telling Oliver that the Police Department
there is secretly attempting to prove that the members of the Dianetic Associate in Detroit
are practicing medicine without a license, and that to do this they must first prove that one of
the members charged has “guilty knowledge”. Else wants to know from Oliver if any Dianetic
Association in the U.S. has been prosecuted or even warned, as that would be “very helpful
to their case”. (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p. 356) Oliver USES this investigation 10 years
later in this letter to Kermit Miller. He kind of leaves out HIS involvement with the whole thing.
“According to the Detroit (Mich.) News for March 26, 1353. two operators, Mrs. Refa Postel
and Earl Cunard were charged with practicing medicine without a license. We enclose a
photocopy of the newspaper item and photograph. Our files do not contain reference to any
disposition of this one.” —-It’s interesting how Oliver does NOT mention Wertham or
Rollo May, the first two main attacks. Why not? I believe my article proves why not, if
investigated it would lead to places Field doesn’t want people to look, connections that were
STILL hidden 70 years later before I dug them out. Just as Leo Bertemeier was. —Ah!
But there’s even more to this Oliver/Kermit story.FDA Inspector Hailey interviewed Mr.Kermit
V. Miller who lost his wife and three children through a divorce. Kermit blames this on his
wife’s infatuation with Scientology, yet it was HIM that filed for divorce in the first place. While
trying to get everybody and their brother to investigate Scientology for what were,
essentially, his failings, there was Oliver Field spending TWO HOURS talking to the guy.
Know what one of the things they talked about was? Oliver telling the guy that a
Scientologist was taking LSD. “1. 47 SW 11th Street – Mr. Miller does not know who
operates this establishment. However, he says that he has heard a rumor that a redheaded
individual called “Red” Thornton has some sort of connection with this Chapter. He said he
had heard that this individual was taking some sort of drug to immunize himself against
radiation and possibly had given it to other members. Mr. Miller says he described this drug
to Oliver Fields of AMA and was told that it was probably “Lysergic Acid”. This is a very
dangerous drug.” (Vol 6 of 18 p.151-153, FDA documents)—Oliver Field starts the LSD
and scientologists rumor.
1963 January 30 – “On 1/30/63 Oliver Field, Director of the Bureau of Investigation of the
American Medical: Association, was visited at their main headquarters at 534 N. Dearborn
st. He was told we desired to review his files for any information concerning Ron Hubbard
and Scientology and associated organizations. As was expected, Mr. Field was most
cooperative, and although he could not relinquish the files he instructed his secretary to
photocopy any and all material which I desired. He refused payment for this service,
although it was very extensive. The amount of material was so massive that even as I start
to dictate this report they have not finished copying all of it completely and it was not until
February 6th that I was able to obtain any of the photocopies.” (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents
pp. 229-242, FDA Inspector R.D. Sherman detailing AMA files on Hubbard, Scientology) —
These AMA files comprise the BULK of the 2015 FDA documents release. —p. 242
SUMMARY – This voluminous mass of material was selected from the files of the American
Medical Association and probably includes about 3/4 of their entire files. …Highlights of the
information and suggested leads were presented in this summary for such further follow-up
indicated by DRM. —Exhibit 5 is where we get the false idea that Hubbard was in a mental
hospital, but we also find out that Inspector Sherman seems to be a man right up Oliver
Fields ally of sleaze-balls.. Sherman seems more excited about the embarrassment value of
Hubbard being a bigamist, than he is about Sara Northrup’s allegation that Hubbard was
“confined in an incoherent state in a Cuban Military Hospital” and that Hubbard was a
“schizophrenic”. Perhaps because he knows it’s total bullshit.—-Oliver, in his letter to Kermit,
then trots out his main items that he wants Kermit to look at. First on the list? Austin
Smiths July 29, 1950 little show. Followed by the two Time magazine articles, then spreads
that very happy with himself as to the WRECKED MARRIAGE of Hubbard, tabloid
propaganda, the Times-Herald for April 24, 1951 reporting the divorce suit against Mr.
Hubbard. A particularly salacious and vicious article. Particularly one of those Time
magazine articles is one of Oliver’s favorites – the “Of Two Minds” one. In my post
extensively detailing Hubbard and the degree a sham university named Sequoia gave him, I
document just what that article said, but perhaps a lesser known, more esoteric and deeper
understanding of that chosen title might surprise you. About that the two “minds” are actually
two BEINGS. Two people. See 1948-1950 Hubbard entry.
1963 August 14 — a little over a week after Hubbard (6 August, Auditing Comm Cycles)
starts talking about “Marcabians” and now they are who is doing the Between Lives implants
(as opposed to earlier statements)—now Hubbard starts saying the AMA (American Medical
Association) is the “who” (the bad guys). —Hubbard Communications Office Policy Letter
[HCOPL] 14 August AD13 [1963] Scientology Five Press Policies found in older OEC
volume #7 p. 510 (you can see photos of entire issue here). “Certain vested interests, mainly
the American Medical Association, a private healing monopoly, wish to all possible harm to
the Scientology movement over the world in order to protect their huge medical-psychiatric
income and desired monopoly which runs into tens of billions annually. In their congresses
they complain that we and people like us cost them 1.1 billion dollars a year that they don’t
receive. Their sole interest is income. Reference: Minutes of various AMA conferences.
Almost all our bad publicity and attacks is authored by two men, one named Keaton, the
AMA press man, and one named Field, their head of “investigation”. These men flood bad
tales about Scientology into press, magazines, radio, TV. Their sole interest is a medical-
psychiatrist monopoly for the AMA. Their publicity goes overseas. The FDA is used by these
people and FDA releases are sent overseas.Hitler and Stalin held power through medical
psychiatry. They associate themselves chiefly with the rich and powerful.” —To me, that’s
pretty hilarious, not to mention the hypocrisy here of that he’s going to change this “who” in
just a few years to being the “world bankers” – “Our enemies on this planet are less than
12 men. They are members of the Bank of England and other higher financial circles. They
own and control newspaper chains, and they are, oddly enough, directors in all the mental
health groups in the world which have sprung up.” (taped lecture nicknamed RJ67, given on
20 September 1967 – Hubbard at mark 09:03) (see more about this in The Twelve by
Virginia McClaughry; January 2018) and yet Hubbard still never mentions or names the
ACTUAL “who’s” behind all this.
1963 – Oliver Field was kind of obsessed with Wilhelm Reich and his orgone therapy, to put
it in the mildest possible terms. During the FDA case against Scientology and it’s e-meter, it’s
like he saw Reich everywhere. There was even a note in the FDA files saying: “Is United
Research connected with Wilhelm Reich? Oliver Field thinks it is possible.” (Vol 4 of
18 p. 238 FDA documents) Why is Sherman asking about United Research? Well, that’s
actually one of my favorite parts about this. Because it shows that AMA clubfooted
“investigators” are definitely kept out of the loop as to CIA and OSS secret projects. They
wouldn’t KNOW THE REAL REASON WHY Hubbard was supposed to be attacked – there
is no way in hell Thorvald would have told such lowly and no security clearance
desk-jockeys, so the irony meter goes on serious overload here as to why Hubbard keeps
“escaping” what I’m sure were Oliver’s best efforts. Hubbard had OSS/CIA British
intelligence protection. Oliver had to have been literally tearing his hair out for decades
wondering why Hubbard keeps escaping his desperately clutching grasp. United Research,
as I documented in this post, comes up because of Mr. Moshier’s son. Mr. Moshier is
featured in quite a few of the AMA/FDA files. His son had been recruited for auditing in 1961
by Dr. Dwight Wayne Batteau, the director of United Research, Cambridge Mass. (His son
was working there). It’s listed in Industrial Research Laboratories of the United States. It also
comes up in combined Defense Department and Office of Naval Research (ONR)
documents, such as this one. You know, Thorvald’s neck-of-the-woods (or it was, anyway)
United Research appears to have had some kind of role with the covert experiments of
Project Bluebird, initiated first by the Navy in 1947, then joined by the CIA April 20, 1950.
That’s kind of a double-whammy as far as secrecy goes. It just shows how utterly DUMB
Oliver Field was that he thinks United Research is some kind of quacky outfit that is
connected with Wilhelm Reich. Oliver definitely gets the dunce cap for that one. There’s
much more you can read about what was going really going on at United Research in my
post but suffice it to say Oliver was probably more obsessed with Wilhelm Reich than he was
with Hubbard, and that’s saying something. It’s like the guy saw Reich everywhere. (see
1961 entry also)
1968 – A 10 November 1968 report from Inspector Edward R. Atkins to the Director, Dallas
district about a woman named Velma Johanson who had been committed to Taub Hospital in
Houston Texas for psychiatric care. Velma had been getting auditing with an E-meter and
her family thought that “Scientology had caused her mental breakdown” and that she had
told her daughter that “she was a god”. The long and short of it is that Velma was tricked
into being taken to the psychiatric ward and: “Dr. Walter J. DeFoy, a resident psychiatrist,
was interviewed. Dr. DeFoy said that he had been treating Mrs. Johanson since her arrival.
He said that Mrs. Johanson is acutely psychotic, that she is presently under a religious
delusion that she is a god. His prognosis is that she is a paranoid schizophrenic. He
stated that she may have been schizophrenic most of her life.” (B-1, h-68 p. 34-43 FDA
declassified documents; letter from Atkins to Dallas Director) Interestingly enough, Dr.
DeFoy was unwilling to say that Scientology was the cause. My guess is because that
would derail their whole schizophrenia is genetic kick they were forever going on about, so
he said; “Dr. DeFoy said that he did not believe that the E-Meter or the Scientology Center
had caused her problems.” So, what is interesting to me here, is that the AMA apparently
approves of that anyone who thinks they are a “God”, or in other parlance, an
immortal spiritual being, therefore thusly they are schizophrenic.—-Given the strong
influence of displaced Jesuits in German society (see this article) one can see the
strongly Catholic influence of challenges to the “One God” paradigm clearly influencing
the whole idea of “dementia praecox” – which was later re-named as schizophrenia. The
other very interesting point that shouldn’t go un-noticed in this report, is this part: “Mr.
Johanson said that he has spent over $2,000 at the center and showed this inspector
several cancelled checks. It should be noted that two of the checks were deposited in a
Switzerland bank account.“ We’ll just file that under follow the money for future reference
shall we? —This report also goes on for what I consider to be WAY to long about what the
hell vitamins Velma was taking. Vitamins. It’s as if the AMA/FDA are acting like they are live
grenades or some kind of weapons or something. These people are just so…well, the word
weird comes to mind. The only reason to be scared or obsessive about vitamins are
imbalances by improper usage, is what they say, but I think it’s obvious that it’s the fact that
these are not CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES. AKA not CONTROLLED PROFIT. The fear
that vitamins or natural supplements might actually work and seriously cut into drug-profits
can’t be disallowed as a more hidden, but definitely there, motivation.
1973 – Wertham’s attempts to re-PR position himself through writing another book, “World of
Fanzines” in 1973 (All our Innocences Beaty 1999 McGill) where Wertham is particularly
focused on science fiction and its fandom. Page 271 demonstrates to me that Wertham is
actually trying to reverse his negative image by going overboard praising fanzines – such as
L. Ron Hubbard wrote for.
1975 – The AMA closed the Department of Investigation in 1975. The files that Cramp and
his successors had gathered over the decades became known as the American Medical
Association Health Fraud and Alternative Medicine Collection, which is the only AMA archive
that is open to non-members, created in 1988.
Late 1970’s – Mark Rathbun had this to say about the initial attacks on Hubbard. He was
assigned in the late 1970’s to a special project reviewing the documents that the Guardian
Office had stolen. “The documents told an incredible saga. And the story was told in the
words of those conducting the crusade against Hubbard, not by Hubbard himself, nor by the
church. […] Within weeks of the May 9 1950 publication of Dianetics: the Modern Science of
Mental Health, vested pharmaceutical and medical interests declared war on L. Ron
Hubbard. For the next 20 years, the AMA’s then-mighty Department of Investigation would
take clandestine action against Hubbard and his organizations. Two successive heads of
investigation for the AMA, Oliver Field (1950s) and Thomas Spinelli (1960s and 1970s)
would work hand-in-glove with several governmental agencies to infiltrate Hubbard’s lectures
and organizations…” (Memoirs of a Scientology Warrior, Rathbun)
2019 July 11 – Even as recently as this year, watch British shill Chris Owen LIE about
what was really going on behind the FDA raid, including using about the most biased
sources he could possiby choose: the behind-the-scenes Catholic footsoldier ravings of a
“researcher” and the intelligence-driven ravings of Karen de la Carriere and her husband
Jeffrey Augustine as well as the insanely undocumented (and often misdirected) dribblings
of the Church of Scientology itself.
And yet –
All this time
neither Rathbun, Rinder, Miscavige,

the Guardian Office, Owen, nor one
single other “critic” ever said one
public word naming Solberg, Gaines,
Smith, Bartemeier or Wertham.
Neither did L. Ron Hubbard.
And then….
Wertham’s papers are ordered locked away for the next thirty years.
1980’s early – “Although Wertham’s wife, Hesketh, transferred ownership of his extensive
personal archive to the Library of Congress soon after his death in the early 1980s,
Wertham’s papers there remained under an embargo until the late spring of 2010. ”
(Carol Tilley, Seducing the Innocent: Fredric Wertham and the Falsifications that Helped
Condemn Comics, 2012)
9 October 1993 – Dr. Austin E. Smith dies.
14 October 1993 – The Church of Scientology finally receives tax exemption from the IRS.
–––
Now that we’ve looked at our full timeline of all this history, let’s finish up with the Black
Propaganda and Black Public Relations campaign itself.
First though, here’s an idea about that I’d like you look at.
Coordinated attacks from “all directions” like what Hubbard (and others) have been
subjected to are nothing short of MEDIA brainwashing “thought reform”, just exactly as CIA
MKULTRA doctor Harold G. Wolff described it in his 1956 report concerning Chinese and
Russian tactics for “Thought Reform”.
Substitute the word “L. Ron Hubbard” for prisoner and “MEDIA/Authority sources” for group
(or those doing what you see below) and I think you’ll see quite clearly that the exact same
tactics were employed on him and towards his life – friends, family, work, etc.
In addition, there are the “self-criticism” sessions, during which each prisoner is
supposed to criticize his behavior in the light of proper Communist behavior and
to admit all his faults. Not only one’s present failures but all of one’s past actions
are subject to review. The biographical material from each prisoner’s life history is
available, and sooner or later he must review most of the items. Furthermore, all
prisoners must take part in vigorous criticism of other prisoners. One is not
allowed to criticize vaguely or lightly. One must criticize specific points and
criticize them forcefully. The result of this is an intense outpouring of hostile
accusations upon the prisoner who is the recipient of the criticism. The hostility of
the group grows in intensity and continues until the uncommitted prisoner shows
a genuine emotional reaction that indicates a satisfying willingness to reform. A
special aspect of the group criticism is what prisoners call “the struggle.” This
takes place when prisoners are undergoing interrogations while being confined to
group cells. The cell group is made aware of the progress of the interrogation,
apparently by direct instructions from the jailers to the group leader. When the
prisoner returns fatigued after an interrogating session, the group surrounds him
and “struggles” to help him with his confession. They stand around him in a
group, shouting at him, reviling him, and accusing him for hours at a time,
constantly telling him that he must confess all in order to be treated better. Such
“struggles” are often initiated when a prisoner returns from an interrogation
session wearing manacles and leg chains as a sign of his unsatisfactory
performance. When the prisoner finally produces a satisfactory confession and
the interrogator changes his attitude, the cell group is made aware of this also,
and changes its attitude toward the prisoner to a milder one. Another technique
used is that of stopping all interrogations and instructions for a period of days
and ordering the prisoner to concentrate upon writing his confession and
self-criticism. During this time, he is not allowed to speak to anyone in his cell,
and his cell mates do not speak to him. The effect of this is to produce anxiety and
doubts in the prisoner, who continues to expand his writing in the hope that he
will finally produce something which will satisfy his interrogators. This routine of
lectures, discussions, self-criticism, and group criticism goes on from morning
until evening throughout the week. The formal lectures alone may occupy as
much as 56 hours a week. Literally no part of the prisoner’s waking life is left
free.[…]
9. The Reaction of the Prisoner to the Procedure in the Group Cell –
Whether by design or by accident, the psychological atmosphere within one of

these group prison cells is such that ultimately the prisoner comes to see that the
only hope for a “solution to his case” lies in his complete conformity in speech
and behavior to the doctrine outlined by his jailers. He also learns that he must
demonstrate his zeal not merely by his own behavior but also by vigorously
tearing down the defenses of many other prisoners. Fear and tension in the group
are thus maintained at a high pitch, and the cell mates vie with one another in
accusing, criticizing, degrading, and brutally punishing their fellow prisoners. A
prisoner newly introduced into one of these cells finds himself faced with an
almost irresistible assault upon the integrity of his personality[…] The new
prisoner’s protestations of innocence are not accepted by his fellow prisoners.
They derisively tell him that he will soon change. They all tell him that resistance
is useless, that the Communist party is all-powerful, and that no one who is
innocent is ever imprisoned. They promptly turn upon him and begin to “help
him” in his reform. They criticize him vigorously and brutally. They point out every
error in his thinking. They detect his every attempt to evade commitment and
destroy it. They do not allow protestation of innocence. Thenceforth he has no
moment of peace and no shred of privacy.[…]
No moment of peace…
.
Chosen Black Propaganda and Black
Public Relations Campaign
Stripped down to source and tag-words only.
● Publisher’s Weekly Vol. 158 June 17, 1950, page 2627: psychiatrist Fredric
Wertham denounces Dianetics as “neither a good book nor a hoax,” but a
“harmful mixture of science and science fiction”.
● Science Fiction Newsletter #16 July 1, 1950 Red Boggs “hoaxes” a hack
writer‘s “ two-bit pulp
● New York Times Book Review July 2, 1950, Rollo May page 9: man as a
machine.” “Books like this do harm…grandiose promises…oversimplification
of human psychological problems.”
● Spaceship #9, July 1950. Page 12 Saul Diskin hypnotism – auditing positioned as
crazy making
● Of Two Minds July 24, 1950, TIME Magazine editorial; Punchlines: cult
…Science-Fiction. …science fiction fans. Coueism. Buchmanism.
Punchlines: ..science-fiction magazine. …science-fiction writer…. man as a
machine.
● Renascence, v. 1, issue 1, August 1950; Kenneth MacNichol “Man is not a
machine
● President of American Psychiatric Association (APA) Daniel Blain to Diana
Bennett of the National Better Business Bureau dated 1 August 1950. (Folder 3
FDA Declassified documents p. 320) Points:
unscientific…unrealistic….flamboyant…full of contradictions…hypnotists…
appeal is to the hysterical…faith-healers…fortune-tellers…astrologers… and
man …lay practitioners…widespread quackery.
● The Nation: August 5, 1950,Milton Sapirstein (plain text here) Punchline:
mechanical man.
● Letters to the Editor; Rollo May ADDS the other chosen Punchline: Science
Fiction Adds a new punchline:Coue autosuggestion..not true cures.
● The New Republic, August 14, 1950 Martin Gumpert; Punchlines: science-fiction
writer
● Newsweek August 21, 1950 Punchlines: author of scientific fiction.
● Western Star #3 August 26, 1950 cult the “master” …Saint Hubbard and the
Dragon… MONEY motivated
Dianetics Poor Man’s Psychoanalysis; Punchlines: science fiction … beneath
the professional notice… unscientific… unworthy of discussion or
review…mind-healing cult.” (as quoted in Newsweek October 16, 1950)
● Spacewarp September 1950, column File 13, #13 by Red Boggs. uninformed
public …fuggheaded juveniles…”fad” … brainless juveniles…Coueism
…cure… a bunch of harebrained people —Hubbard as: no standing…hack
writer …pseudo-science… pulp…claims …hypnotism…. “badly written”
…doesn’t sound like Hubbard’s writings…crackpot
● Tests & Poison September 18, 1950, TIME Magazine, basically repeat of July 24,
1950 article. Punchlines:science-fiction Writer
● Spaceship #10 October 1950. Robert Silverberg fact or fantasy…mind is just a
machine…not all that it’s reputed to be….calling it the final step in mental
science
Punchlines: mechanical-brain …horror called Dianetics. …. Science Fiction
● 1951 January 13 – Letter to the Editor of Jama by a Camarillo State Hospital
ghoul Dr. Samuel J. Ravitch. —Points: cult (uses 4 times)…Science Fiction
Magazine….. the staying power of chiropractic…little scientific background
to support it….first psychotic breakdown occurred during such “auditing.”
…dangers inherent in such amateurish “auditing” …devotees of
cults…fanatics…religious fervor…exploitation of
testimonials…dianeticized…religious zeal…the good old chiropractic
way…nonsensical tomfoolery. – Samuel J. Ravitch, M.D. Box A, Camarillo,
Calif.” (JAMA; January 13, 1951, Vol 145, No. 2)—- Note: the article listing for this
journal pulls this one letter out as a separate listing just to highlight it!)
● Spaceship issue #12 – April 1951 The Master. Saul Diskin
● Spaceship #12 – Saul Diskin lunatic fringe
● 1951 May 1 – release of supposed April 15 – FORGERY “letter” from
Hubbard to Sara —May 1, 1951 titled: “Letter indicates Dianetics founder, baby
fled to Cuba”. also see (Exhibit 5 Leo Bartemeier Council on Mental Health AMA
files – article: Dianetics Chief, Ill in Cuba, Defies Wife (Folder #4 on p. 5.) Points:
hopelessly insane…paranoid schizophrenic
● Spaceship #13 July 1951 dianetics follery…the Engram
racket….Rosicrucians.
seriously twisted take-off from Blish’s story. Hubbard as a caucasian “god” ….
Red China. ...sterilization…the Time of Madness.….cult (Dianetics) of
followers worshipping a sci-fi space ship
How interesting. It really boils down to these. Bolded ones are the most used.
● harmful
● harm
● pseudo-science
● CULT
● FAD
● MONEY
● science fiction
● grandiose promises
● hack writer
● beneath notice
● unscientific
● unworthy
● no standing
● man as a machine
● oversimplification
● hoaxes
● hypnotism, autosuggestion
● crazy making
● master
● uninformed, fuggheaded, brainless, harebrained
● juveniles
● lunatic fringe
● Rosicrucians.
Still doing the same ones today, I see.

Secret History of Dianetics 1950 - L. Ron Hubbard and Thorvald Solberg

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Secret History of Dianetics 1950 - L. Ron Hubbard and Thorvald Solberg

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Secret History of Dianetics 1950: L.

~ Published December 2, 2019 ~

Dedicated to my honey, for our 35th Wedding Anniversary.

he tried to force L. Ron Hubbard to work for him

Article “jump” points

It is ONLY THAT BEING who could

One thing first.

● The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology 31 December 1960

Ok. So it’s an ADMIRAL from the Office of Naval Research.

And there we have it.

As Hubbard put it:

He’s the short guy 3rd

Well, we’ll get to that.

Reference: [NAVY REVIEWED 13-Mar-2007: DECLASSIFIED IN FULL] OFFICE OF THE

His biggest priority?

He was working on the Manhattan

You know, the creation of the nuclear bomb project.

The lead-up to the Tolman committee –

OK, so let me get this straight.

I wonder what war that would be…

17, 22 and 24 January 1946 – Operation Crossroads.

On 17 January, Admiral Cochrane appointed Admiral Solberg to this position because it

He then instructed Admiral Solberg to prepare an administrative order setting up a special

The “Navy” actually being Thorvald Solberg.

Look at what his son John Buren said:

Yep. That’s what happened.

A little background first, using one of my research timelines.

That also included SECRET projects.

What kind of secret projects?

Ok, so on to other documentation about CHATTER that I found –

Project CHATTER – Biological and Psychological Weapons.

This is what it said –

The navy became interested in mescaline as an interrogation agent when American

Two of their seven research divisions.

A Doctor’s Report On Dianetics by Joseph A. Winter, M.D. –

I’d say Hubbard was rather perfectly on point with that.

Fast forward to 1948 –

So, things are getting aggressive as to PSYCHOLOGICAL warfare.

Lo and behold, exactly that same month –

Put another way, they were FORCED to attend.

But also check this out –

Pittsburgh Press – 5 December 1948.

Which brings me to my next point.

These efforts were referred to euphemistically as a “method of unconventional warfare.”

p. 7 of this PDF: Psychological Sciences Division 1985 Programs

It was only after Hubbard said “No”

So, you see, when Hubbard wrote this in 1951:

Science of Survival by L. Ron Hubbard –

Childish, really. But not non-understandable.

– FBI files – L. Ron Hubbard

Really look at the description under 3-Chemical aids.

Much more up Hubbard’s ally, I might add.

But note this on p. 20:

On 9 May a meeting was held in the office of Dr. Chadwell, OSI…”

Right up Hubbard’s ally, and with no strings attached!

What did L. Ron Hubbard say

In this case, it’s kind of a mix.

THE HUBBARD DIANETIC RESEARCH FOUNDATION, INC. nonprofit

Company Number 0900027169

Incorporation Date 27 April 1950

Company Type Domestic Non-Profit Corporation

Jurisdiction New Jersey (US)

First I dug up a calendar from 1950 –